Dbeh181547 - (Project - Toc)

CAPE CANAVERAL AIR FORCE STATION
Technical Specification
for
DBEH 18-1547
Repair Envelope, Facility 1645
DATE: December 2018
RAEIS
Range Architect-Engineer Inspection Services
Repair Envelope, Facility 1645 DBEH 18-1547
PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 11 00.00 30 SUMMARY OF WORK

01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01 35 26 GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
01 42 00 SOURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS
01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT
01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 41 00 DEMOLITION
02 81 00 TRANSPORTATION AND DISPOSAL OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
02 82 33.13 20 REMOVAL/CONTROL AND DISPOSAL OF PAINT WITH LEAD,
CHROMIUM, OR MERCURY
02 83 13 LEAD IN CONSTRUCTION
02 85 00.00 20 MOLD REMEDIATION
DIVISION 05 - METALS
05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS
05 52 13 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 01 50 PREPARATION FOR RE-ROOFING

07 22 16.22 ROOF BOARD INSULATION (POLYISOCYANURATE)
07 41 13 METAL ROOF PANELS
07 52 16.15 SBS MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING-TORCH APPLIED
07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

26 05 00.00 40 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
26 41 00 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
ATTACHMENT I
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS SAMPLING RESULTS
ATTACHMENT II
SAMPLE WARRANTY SIGN
ATTACHMENT III
AIR FORCE POLICY FOR TORCH DOWN WELDING OF MODIFIED BITUMEN ROLL ROOFING
ATTACHMENT III
IV
SUPPLEMENTARY
AIR SPECIFICATIONS
FORCE POLICY FOR TORCH DOWN WELDING OF MODIFIED BITUMEN ROLL ROOFING
-- End of Project Table of Contents --
12/26/2018 SECTION TOC Page 1

SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 01 11 00.00 30
SUMMARY OF WORK
10/14
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION
1.2.1 Architectural
1.2.2 Electrical
1.2.3 Special Construction
1.3 REFERENCES
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1.5 CONTRACT DRAWINGS
1.5.1 Layout of Work and Elevations
1.6 WORK SCHEDULING
1.6.1 Requirements
1.7 OCCUPANCY OF PREMISES/ACCESS REQUIREMENTS
1.7.1 Facility Contents
1.7.1.1 Responsibilities
1.7.1.2 Maintain Clean Work Areas
1.7.1.3 Damage To Existing Equipment
1.7.1.4 New Material and Construction Equipment
1.7.2 Construction Area Access And Control
1.7.2.1 Access and Control Requirements
1.7.3 Vehicle Parking
1.7.3.1 Requirements
1.8 STORAGE, TRANSPORTATION AND PROTECTION
1.8.1 Storage
1.8.2 Protection
1.8.3 Transportation
1.8.4 Hazardous Materials
1.8.5 Site Protection Plan
1.9 ON-SITE PERMITS
1.9.1 Utility Outage Requests And Connection Requests
1.9.2 Protection of Work
1.9.3 Burn Permits
1.10 SALVAGE AND DISPOSAL OF MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
1.10.1 Removal
1.10.2 Housekeeping
1.10.3 Salvage of Material And Equipment
1.10.3.1 Salvage Items - None
1.10.4 Waste Disposal
1.10.5 Cleanup
1.10.6 Salvage And Disposal Record Keeping
1.11 RADIO FREQUENCY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES
1.12 COMMUNICATION SECURITY
PART 2 PRODUCTS
SECTION 01 11 00.00 30 Page 1

12/26/2018
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 ACCESS REQUIREMENTS

3.1.1 Construction Site Requirement
3.2 CCAFS VEHICLE INSPECTION
3.3 CCAFS DELIVERIES
3.3.1 Non-Hazardous Deliveries
3.3.2 Hazardous Deliveries
3.4 RESPONSIBILITIES
3.5 HOISTING AND LIFTING
3.5.1 Lifting Operation Plan
3.6 QUALITY CONTROL
3.6.1 Licenses
3.6.2 Government Inspection/Approval
3.6.3 Inspection Files
3.7 SUPERINTENDENT
3.8 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULING REQUIREMENTS
3.8.1 Contractor Coordination Meetings
3.8.2 On-Site Construction Sequence
-- End of Section Table of Contents --
SECTION 01 11 00.00 30 Page 2

12/26/2018
SECTION 01 11 00.00 30
SUMMARY OF WORK
10/14
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
The work to be performed under this project is located at Cape Canaveral

Air Force Station. Cape Canaveral Air Force Station is located at the end
of State Road 401, north of Port Canaveral.
The work to be performed under this project consists of providing the

labor, equipment and materials to remove existing roofing system, including
associated roofing items at Facility 1645, all roof sections.
1.2.1 Architectural
Provide roof replacement to include the following:
At roof: demolition and replacement of existing 5-Ply Built-Up roofing

system with new SBS Modified Bitumen, Torch-Down roofing system.
Associated items for this roof construction shall include work on eave
flashing, wall flashing, vent-thru-roof flashing, curb flashings,
insulation, sump boxes, downspouts, wood nailers and attachments as well as
guardrails. Existing concrete deck are to remain. At areas where existing
deck has been compromised from water intrusion and/or where equipment
curbs, contractor shall repair deck system prior installation of new
roofing system.
At Roof Canopy I, remove and replace metal roof with new structural
standing seam, Galvalume, steel roof system per drawings.
At Roof Canopy J, remove existing single ply roof down to insulation and
provide new finish roofing. Provide new over flow scuppers per drawings.
Contractor shall coordinate removal and installation of roof with User

requirements for mission dedicated roof equipment use.
Hazardous Materials are suspected to exist in the areas of work due to the
age of building. Refer to Hazardous Materials Statement Of Work below and
Attachment 1 to these specifications.
1.2.2 Electrical
Remove existing roof mounted lightning protection system. Install new roof
mounted lightning protection system for the areas indicated. Remove and
reinstall existing conduit and lighting fixtures attached to wall per
drawings.
1.2.3 Special Construction
Prior to any building and/or equipment demolition, provide abatement of

hazardous materials in areas deemed to contain heavy metals as indicated in
the drawings. Properly dispose of lead containing materials that may be
SECTION 01 11 00.00 30 Page 3

12/26/2018
demolished and removed during roof repair construction.
Remove and replace existing roof top HVAC packaged unit to include
structural supports and condensate line. New unit shall be connected to
existing in-place duct work and shall match existing HVAC tonnage and model
number.
1.3 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the

extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the
basic designation only.
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 101 (2018; TIA 18-1; TIA 18-2; TIA 18-3) Life
Safety Code
U.S. AIR FORCE (USAF)
AFI 33-580 (2013) Spectrum Management
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)
EM 385-1-1 (2014) Safety and Health Requirements

Manual
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;

submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control
information only. The following shall be submitted in accordance with
Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES in sufficient detail to show full
compliance with the specification:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Submit the following items to the Contracting Officer:
Utility Outage Requests
Connection Requests
Air Force Form 3952 (AF 3952), Chemical/Hazardous Material Request

Authorization;G (including all paint)
SOLID WASTE DISPOSAL DIVERSION TRACKING;G
Premises/Access Plan
Storage Area Request
Superintendent Contact and Qualifications
1.5 CONTRACT DRAWINGS
See Drawing Index for list of project drawings.
Contract drawings, maps, and specifications will be furnished to the
SECTION 01 11 00.00 30 Page 4

12/26/2018
Contractor either hard copy or electronic at the Government's discretion.

Reference publications will not be furnished.
Contractor shall immediately check furnished drawings and notify the

Contracting Officer of any discrepancies.
The drawings indicate the general location and arrangement of existing

conditions. Field measurements may be necessary to determine the size and
quantity of materials. Conditions which are obvious/visible or which
should be reasonably anticipated by the Contractor on inspection will not
be considered under the Differing Site Conditions clause of this contract.
1.5.1 Layout of Work and Elevations
Dimensions and elevations indicated in the layout of work shall be verified

by the Contractor. Discrepancies between the drawings, specifications
and/or existing conditions shall be referred to the Contracting Officer in
writing, for review, before the affected work is performed. Failure to
make notification shall place the responsibility upon the Contractor to
carry out the work in a satisfactory and workmanlike manner.
1.6 WORK SCHEDULING
Work Schedules for all on-site activities must be reviewed and approved by
the Contracting Officer prior to start of the project; and all activities
coordinated with the Contracting Officer once work has begun. Due to the
critical nature of the work location, all work pertaining to this contract
shall be completed with minimal disruption to the operation of the facility.
Contractor shall allow for non-access days where construction activity is

prohibited due to hazardous operations or launch activity. When possible,
the Government will provide 24 hour notification each time the restrictions
are invoked.
1.6.1 Requirements
Working hours will normally range between the hours of 7:30 AM and 4:00 PM
(0730-1600) excluding Saturdays, Sundays and Federal Holidays. If work
must be done during periods other than above, additional Government
inspection and Range Support personnel may be required. Notification must
be given to the Contracting Officer five working days in advance of
intention to work during other periods to allow assignment of additional
inspection forces when the Contracting Officer determines that they are
reasonably available. If such support is reasonably available, the
Contracting Officer may authorize work to be performed during periods other
than normal duty hours/days. Work beyond normal hours/days may be required
for major utility outages. Its is to the government's discretion to
request copies of contractor inspection records for periods worked on
holidays and weekends (FAR 52.246-12 Inspection of Construction).
No construction work shall take place over the Christmas/New Year holiday
period. This period will start one full work day before the Federal
Christmas holiday and end the first work day after the Federal New Year
Holiday. The Contractor may request to work during this time at the
discretion of the Contracting Officer, however no base support will be
available.
SECTION 01 11 00.00 30 Page 5

12/26/2018
1.7 OCCUPANCY OF PREMISES/ACCESS REQUIREMENTS
Building will be occupied during performance of work under this Contract.

Occupancy notifications will be posted in a prominent location in the work
area. Contractor shall post warning signs in accordance with OSHA
requirements.
Before work is started, the Contractor shall submit a Premises/Access Plan

to the Contracting Officer or Representative for approval. The plan shall
include a sequence of procedures, means of access, space plan for storage
of materials and equipment, and use of approaches, corridors, and stairways.
This plan must comply with NFPA 101 requirements that all exits and exit
access must be maintained at all times. Base Fire Department is required
to approve any deviations which affect the exiting or exit access from the
building.
1.7.1 Facility Contents
1.7.1.1 Responsibilities
The schedule of work shall be closely coordinated with the Contracting

Officer. Unless otherwise stated, remove all furniture, equipment,
curtains, drapes, pictures, blackboards, etc., as required to perform the
work. Any movable or fixed furniture, equipment, carpet, etc., remaining
in the work area shall be covered and protected from damage. All relocated
items shall also be protected from damage throughout the construction
period. After completion of work and prior to final acceptance, replace
removed items in their original location.
The entire area will not be available to the Contractor at one time. The
following phases of work and procedures are required:
a. Install new equipment in single facility approved by the

Contracting Officer.
b. Test new equipment in single facility approved by the Contracting

Officer.
1.7.1.2 Maintain Clean Work Areas
All work areas shall be kept clean at all times. Contractor shall prevent
introduction of dirt or dust into areas adjacent to the work areas. All
materials, tools and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to being
brought into the work areas or adjacent areas.
1.7.1.3 Damage To Existing Equipment
Any damage must be reported to the Contracting Officer immediately. Damage

to existing materials, equipments, systems, or properties occurring from
Contractor activities or neglect, shall, at the sole discretion of the
Contracting Officer, be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at no cost
to the Federal Government.
1.7.1.4 New Material and Construction Equipment
Only material and construction equipment designated for performance of

contract work may be stored at the construction site or located in
Government-controlled warehouses or shop facilities.
SECTION 01 11 00.00 30 Page 6

12/26/2018
1.7.2 Construction Area Access And Control
1.7.2.1 Access and Control Requirements
Exclusive use or control of any area will not be allowed as the Government
must have access to all areas at all times. All work must be scheduled
around operational constraints.
1.7.3 Vehicle Parking
Job and support vehicles for workers will be parked in designated parking
areas within reasonable access to the worksite. All vehicle operators must
comply with all traffic laws including mandatory seat belt usage, speed
limits and hauling restrictions. Contractor shall be responsible for
repairing or replacing any facility/grounds damaged areas.
1.8 STORAGE, TRANSPORTATION AND PROTECTION
1.8.1 Storage
At Government discretion, Contractor may be assigned a storage area upon

submitting written Storage Area Request to the Contracting Officer.
Contractor's Storage Area Request shall indicate dimensions of trailer,
size of storage area, and utilities required. All trailers shall be in
good and safe condition. Storage space is normally co-located with
construction site, at the Contracting Officer's discretion. Storage areas
may require fence and screening as required by Government. Contractor
shall secure storage areas during inclement weather situation.
Office trailers and long term (longer than one year) storage trailers shall
be painted to match the base approved color", as noted in the base
Facilities Sustainment guide. Trailers located on site for short term
storage, less than one year, will not need to meet this requirement. In
addition, all office trailers and long term storage trailers shall be
skirted along the entire perimeter with a wood lattice material. This
skirting shall be painted to match the same trailer color as described
above. Contractor shall be responsible for the storage and protection of
all of their materials and equipment, whether incorporated into the job or
not.
1.8.2 Protection
Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Store products with seals, labels intact and legible. Store sensitive
products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment
favorable to the product. Products acceptable for exterior storage shall
be on sloped supports above ground. Contractor shall not use swales,
drainage ditches, or any other storm water permitted area to store
materials or equipment. If swales, drainage ditches or any other storm
water permitted areas must be used for storage, Contractor must get special
permission from Contracting Officer.
Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure the products comply
SECTION 01 11 00.00 30 Page 7

12/26/2018
with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged.

Protect products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering.
Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products.
Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well drained
area. Prevent mixing with foreign materials.
Submit an Air Force Form 3952 (AF 3952), Chemical/Hazardous Material

Request Authorization if hazardous materials & petroleum product will used
on site. Hazardous Materials & petroleum product containers shall be stored
on an impervious surface with containment. Incompatible materials shall be
segregated and have separate containment systems. Additional HAZMAT
requirements are provided in Section 01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL
CONTROLS.
1.8.5 Site Protection Plan
Structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities

immediately adjacent to excavations shall be protected against damage.
Contractor shall comply with "FAR 52.236-9, Protection of Existing
Vegetation, Structures, Equipment, Utilities, and Improvements" and is
required to protect areas adjacent to the construction site.
1.9 ON-SITE PERMITS
1.9.1 Utility Outage Requests And Connection Requests
Work shall be scheduled to hold outages to a minimum.
Utility outages and Connection Requests required during the execution of

work that affect existing systems shall be arranged at the convenience of
the Government, which may require scheduling outside of the regular working
hours or on weekends, at no additional cost to the Government.
Each Utility Outage and Connection Requests shall state the system
involved, area involved, approximate duration of outage, and the nature of
work involved.
A written request for a utilities outage (electricity, communication,

water, compressed air, gas, steam, air conditioning, fire detection and
suppression systems, etc.) must be submitted to the Contracting Officer at
least 30 calendar days in advance of the desired outage. Approval is
required prior to scheduling any outage. All limitations noted on the
approved outage authorization shall be carefully observed. A utilities
outage without prior approval and coordination is prohibited.
Utility outages affecting fire alarm, fire detection, fire suppression,

fire pumps and water supplies to fire protection systems greater than 4
hours will require a fire watch.
Since many systems are critical to facility operations, the number and
duration of utility outages shall be kept to an absolute minimum. All
work effort shall be coordinated and sufficient manpower, materials, and
equipment shall be provided to complete the work within the authorized
outage window.
SECTION 01 11 00.00 30 Page 8

12/26/2018
Existing utility services may be interrupted only when approved by the

Contracting Officer. The interruption shall be scheduled at a time of
minimum demand on the utility, convenient to the Government. Outages on
weekends, holidays, or evenings shall be performed at no additional cost to
the Government.
Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements to schedule and provide

connections to existing utilities and to cause minimum interruption to
system operation. All temporary utility hook-ups and disconnects shall be
made by the Contractor.
If the Contractor fails to comply with a scheduled outage, the cost to

reschedule the outage will be deducted from the final contract payment.
1.9.2 Protection of Work
All construction work requires a Work Clearance Request, AF Form 103. This
permit is processed by the Government and provided to the Contractor. It
is required prior to the start of any construction at the project site and
must be posted in a conspicuous location on site during all construction
activities.
1.9.3 Burn Permits
Burn permits are required for any spark,flame, or welding activity. Burn
Permits shall be obtained thru Cape Support (853-5211).
Permits shall be posted at a conspicuous location in the construction area.
Burning of trash or rubbish is not permitted on any USAF facility.
1.10 SALVAGE AND DISPOSAL OF MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
1.10.1 Removal
Remove and/or relocate only those materials or items of equipment

specifically indicated in the drawings and specifications. Removal
operations shall be performed in such a manner that adjacent areas,
installed equipment, or existing utilities are not damaged. Repair all
openings that occur due to removal or demolition operations to match
adjacent, existing surfaces. Any damage incurred during removal operations
shall be repaired at no additional cost to the Government.
1.10.2 Housekeeping
Sufficient personnel and equipment shall be provided to ensure compliance

with all housekeeping requirements. Work will not be allowed in those
areas that do not comply with the requirements of Section 14.C of EM 385-1-1.
Job sites are to be kept clean on an ongoing, daily basis. All areas are
to be thoroughly cleaned prior to leaving the jobsite at completion of
project work.
1.10.3 Salvage of Material And Equipment
All salvageable materials or items to be removed shall remain the property

of the Federal Government. Salvageable items are listed below in the
paragraph entitled, "Salvage Items". Salvageable items shall be
transported to and deposited at the Defense Logistic Agency Disposition
Services (DLA) at Jacksonville, Florida at the contractor's expense.
SECTION 01 11 00.00 30 Page 9

12/26/2018
Salvageable material must be segregated and separated into categories

before transport. Material shall be palletized or moveable by forklift
(maximum 10,000 lbs). For material that is not palletized, it will be the
responsibility of the Contractor to provide labor support for material
removal.
Deliveries to DLA shall be scheduled through the Contracting Officer a

minimum of 72 hours in advance. All salvageable items delivered to DLA
shall be accompanied by a properly prepared DD Form 1348. This form will
be furnished by the Contracting Officer. A signed copy by DLA reflecting
the turn in materials shall be furnished to the Contracting Officer.
Contractor shall maintain property control records for material or

equipment designated as salvage. Contractor's system of property control
may be used if approved by the Contracting Officer. Contractor shall be
responsible for storage and protection of salvaged materials and equipment
until disposition by the Contracting Officer.
Material to be salvaged and reinstalled by the Contractor shall be

protected during removal and stored to prevent damage.
For reference purposes salvageable is defined as: items, material,

equipment which can be refitted, reworked, and restored and put to use or
sold. The Contracting Officer shall have sole discretion as to determining
whether any particular item is salvageable.
1.10.3.1 Salvage Items - None
1.10.4 Waste Disposal
Non-salvageable material and debris shall be removed from work areas and
disposed of daily. Contractor shall dispose of C&D at a State approved
disposal site.
Refer to Section 01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS for further

waste disposal and record keeping requirements.
1.10.5 Cleanup
All waste materials, except indicated salvaged items, generated by the

construction shall be hauled off U.S. Government property at the end of
each work day and deposited at a disposal site selected by the Contractor.
Disposal shall be in accordance with federal, state, county and city
ordinances and at the expense of the Contractor.
Upon completion of the construction each day, the Contractor shall leave
the work premises in a clean, neat and workmanlike condition, satisfactory
to the Contracting Officer.
1.10.6 Salvage And Disposal Record Keeping
Contractor shall maintain and submit quarterly and at the completion of the
project the SOLID WASTE DISPOSAL DIVERSION TRACKING form to the Contracting
Officer of all materials removed from the job site. This inventory shall
include waste materials disposed in landfills and materials reused on the
job, sold for salvage and recycled.
SECTION 01 11 00.00 30 Page 10

12/26/2018
1.11 RADIO FREQUENCY MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES
The following procedures shall be followed in obtaining radio frequency

authorization:
The policy and procedures contained in AFI 33-580 shall be followed to

obtain frequency allocation approval of electronic devices and USAF
Radio Frequency Assignment.
1.12 COMMUNICATION SECURITY
Government telecommunications networks are continually subject to

interception by hostile/unfriendly intelligent organizations. Therefore,
the DOD has authorized the military departments to conduct COMSEC
monitoring and recording of telephone calls from, or terminating at, DOD
organizations. Contractor shall assume the responsibility for ensuring
frequent dissemination of this information to all employees dealing with
official DOD information.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 ACCESS REQUIREMENTS
3.1.1 Construction Site Requirement
All on-site project work is confined to non-restricted areas. That is, no

restricted area badge shall be necessary to accomplish the on-site work.
However, normal access requirements into CCAFS must still be accomplished.
3.2 CCAFS VEHICLE INSPECTION
The Oversized Vehicle Search Area is located on State Road 401 near the
Visitor Control Center. Manned Operating hours are scheduled from
0600-1700. For after hours access, call CCAFS Security Forces at (321)
853-2121 to coordinate entry. Mandatory inspection is required for all:
Commercial Vehicles, Tractor Trailers, Trailers, RVs and Boats. Allow ample
time for inspections, especially for the critical delivery period of mixed
concrete. The government will not be responsible for rejected batches,
caused by Contractor delays. Advance coordination is highly recommended.
3.3 CCAFS DELIVERIES
3.3.1 Non-Hazardous Deliveries
All deliveries of construction material and equipment to job sites

(including cement trucks) shall use the CCAFS South Gate for access. To
the maximum extent possible, deliveries shall be scheduled between 1000 and
1500 hours to avoid the peak traffic volume times. The driver of each
delivery vehicle and their passengers must have the following:
a. A valid photo ID; and
b. A valid bill of lading; and
c. A known delivery point on CCAFS; and
SECTION 01 11 00.00 30 Page 11

12/26/2018
d. An on-base or local phone number and POC to vouch for delivery
Only deliveries that can be verified will be allowed to proceed. Special

deliveries, deliveries after normal business hours, or deliveries that
cannot negotiate through the barricades must be coordinated in advance.
All delivery vehicles shall be inspected by Security Forces personnel prior

to being allowed to proceed onto the installation.
3.3.2 Hazardous Deliveries
Deliveries of fuel, large volume of chemicals, or other hazardous materials

shall comply with this section. All hazardous deliveries shall enter
through the same gates as non-hazardous delivers and have the information
required for non-hazardous deliveries (see subpart entitled "Non-Hazardous
Deliveries" of this section). Only deliveries that can be verified will be
allowed to proceed. In addition, hazardous deliveries must be scheduled a
minimum of 48 hours in advance for escort by Security Forces to and from
job site. Contractors shall contact the CCAFS Security at 321-853-2121 to
arrange for hazardous delivery escorts. Deliveries that have not arranged
in advance for Security Forces escorts will be turned away and must be
re-scheduled.
3.4 RESPONSIBILITIES
The Government reserves the right to revoke badging authority, escort

authority and/or base access privileges for any person, at any time and for
any reason. Contractor understands that the Government has made every
attempt to identify potential delays associated with background checks and
badging requirements and those delays have been considered in the
construction schedule. Delays resulting from the Contractor's failure to
follow the badging guidelines above shall not be considered grounds for
contract extension or compensation.
3.5 HOISTING AND LIFTING
3.5.1 Lifting Operation Plan
Contractor shall have a Lifting Operation Plan and procedure that is fully
in accordance with the requirements of OSHA regulations, and shall include
drawings/sketches of lifting slings, lifting equipment, and tag lines. The
plan shall show weights, center of gravity, and clearances of load over
entire lift. Plans shall have details showing any structural mounting of
hoisting equipment on sheaves or structural steel, and shall show loading
calculations on any such structural mounting showing forces, weights,
turning moments, etc. A procedure shall accompany the drawings describing
all lifting operations. Use spreader bars wherever necessary to prevent
hoisting cables from contacting equipment/material. Contact Terry Bron (45
OSS/OSA - Airfield Manager), prior to construction, if crane will be
utilized.
3.6 QUALITY CONTROL
It is the Contractor's responsibility to provide, inspect and document the

level of quality that has been established by all applicable standards,
codes and guidelines. The Contractor shall use skilled workers, an adequate
number of which are thoroughly trained and have a minimum of 3 years
experience in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the
SECTION 01 11 00.00 30 Page 12

12/26/2018
specified requirements and the methods needed for the proper performance of
the work in each section of these specifications. Contractor shall submit
Superintendent Contact and Qualifications to the Contracting Officer.
3.6.1 Licenses
Contractor or their subcontractors shall be licensed by the State of

Florida or have an equivalent out-of-state license in all areas applicable
to this contract or as otherwise stated elsewhere in this contract. Copies
of licenses and certificates shall be provided to the Contracting Officer.
Asbestos Abatement Contractor shall be licensed by the State of Florida.
3.6.2 Government Inspection/Approval
When the Contractor considers that the work is acceptable to the Government
and is complete, he/she shall inform the Contracting Officer, or designated
representative, and the Government Project Manager that the work is
complete and ready for inspections. In the event that the work is not
acceptable, the Contractor shall record a list of items noted by the
Government Project Manager, A subsequent inspection may take place in order
to review the corrected items. The Government is not required to inspect
all work.
3.6.3 Inspection Files
The Contractor shall be responsible for keeping inspection files for all
projects. Files shall include on site records of all inspections conducted
by the Contractor and the necessary corrective actions taken. Daily Reports
shall be kept and made available to the Government throughout the contract
performance period and for the period after completion until final
settlement of any claims made under this contract.
3.7 SUPERINTENDENT
Provide name and qualifications and past experience for review. Designate
a competent superintendent who shall have full authority to act for the
Contractor and who shall be the primary contact with the Government until
acceptance. Contractor's superintendent shall be at the job site at all
times when work is taking place and shall have full authority to act for
the Contractor.
3.8 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULING REQUIREMENTS
3.8.1 Contractor Coordination Meetings
Contractor shall attend weekly project meetings, not to exceed 3 hours,

scheduled by the Government. Subcontractor representatives shall attend as
required.
Discussion shall address the progress schedule, potential factors of delay,

deficiencies, material delivery schedules, submittals, and safety issues.
3.8.2 On-Site Construction Sequence
The required work shall be performed in a sequence to minimize the time

when potable water, air conditioning, panelboards, transformers, power
supply, etc. are inoperative or out-of-service. Remove a single item of
SECTION 01 11 00.00 30 Page 13

12/26/2018
equipment, install the new replacement item, tie in required utilities,

test, and restore the new item of equipment to fully operational status
before removing subsequent equipment.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01 11 00.00 30 Page 14

12/26/2018
SECTION 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
05/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
1.1.1 Submittal Descriptions (SD)
1.1.2 Approving Authority
1.1.3 Work
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1.3 SUBMITTAL CLASSIFICATION
1.3.1 Government Approved (G)
1.3.2 Sustainability Reporting Submittals (S)
1.4 PREPARATION
1.4.1 Transmittal Form
1.4.2 Source Drawings for Shop Drawings
1.4.2.1 Terms and Conditions
1.5 QUANTITY OF SUBMITTALS
1.5.1 Number of Copies of SD-02 Shop Drawings
1.5.2 Number of Copies of SD-03 Product Data and SD-08
Manufacturer's Instructions
1.5.3 Number of Copies SD-05 Design Data and SD-07 Certificates
1.5.4 Number of Copies SD-06 Test Reports and SD-09 Manufacturer's
Field Reports
1.5.5 Number of Copies of SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
1.5.6 Number of Copies of SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals and SD-11
Closeout Submittals
1.6 VARIATIONS
1.6.1 Considering Variations
1.6.2 Proposing Variations
1.6.3 Warranting that Variations are Compatible
1.6.4 Review Schedule is Modified
1.7 SUBMITTAL REGISTER
1.7.1 Use of Submittal Register
1.7.2 Contractor Use of Submittal Register
1.7.3 Approving Authority Use of Submittal Register
1.7.4 Copies Delivered to the Government
1.8 SCHEDULING
1.9 GOVERNMENT APPROVING AUTHORITY
1.9.1 Review Notations
1.10 DISAPPROVED SUBMITTALS
1.11 APPROVED SUBMITTALS
1.12 APPROVED SAMPLES
PART 2 PRODUCTS
PART 3 EXECUTION
SECTION 01 33 00 Page 1
12/26/2018
12/26/2018
SECTION 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
05/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
1.1.1 Submittal Descriptions (SD)
Submittals requirements are specified in the technical sections.

Submittals are identified by Submittal Description (SD) numbers and titles
as follows:
Submittals which are required prior to
Certificates of insurance
Surety bonds
List of proposed Subcontractors
List of proposed products
Construction progress schedule
Network Analysis Schedule (NAS)
Submittal register
Schedule of prices or Earned Value Report
Health and safety plan
Work plan
Quality Control(QC) plan
Environmental protection plan
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Drawings, diagrams and schedules specifically prepared to illustrate

some portion of the work.
Diagrams and instructions from a manufacturer or fabricator for use in

producing the product and as aids to the Contractor for integrating the
product or system into the project.
Drawings prepared by or for the Contractor to show how multiple systems

and interdisciplinary work will be coordinated.
SD-03 Product Data
12/26/2018
Catalog cuts, illustrations, schedules, diagrams, performance charts,

instructions and brochures illustrating size, physical appearance and
other characteristics of materials, systems or equipment for some
portion of the work.
Samples of warranty language when the contract requires extended

product warranties.
SD-04 Samples
Fabricated or unfabricated physical examples of materials, equipment or

workmanship that illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of
a material or product and establish standards by which the work can be
judged.
Color samples from the manufacturer's standard line (or custom color
samples if specified) to be used in selecting or approving colors for
the project.
Field samples and mock-ups constructed on the project site establish

standards by which the ensuring work can be judged. Includes
assemblies or portions of assemblies which are to be incorporated into
the project and those which will be removed at conclusion of the work.
SD-05 Design Data
Design calculations, mix designs, analyses or other data pertaining to

a part of work.
SD-06 Test Reports
Report signed by authorized official of testing laboratory that a

material, product or system identical to the material, product or
system to be provided has been tested in accord with specified
requirements. Unless specified in another section, testing must have
been within three years of date of contract award for the project.
Report which includes findings of a test required to be performed by

the Contractor on an actual portion of the work or prototype prepared
for the project before shipment to job site.
Report which includes finding of a test made at the job site or on

sample taken from the job site, on portion of work during or after
installation.
Investigation reports.
Daily logs and checklists.
Final acceptance test and operational test procedure.
SD-07 Certificates
Statements printed on the manufacturer's letterhead and signed by

responsible officials of manufacturer of product, system or material
attesting that product, system or material meets specification
requirements. Must be dated after award of project contract and
clearly name the project.
12/26/2018
Document required of Contractor, or of a manufacturer, supplier,

installer or Subcontractor through Contractor. The document purpose is
to further promote the orderly progression of a portion of the work by
documenting procedures, acceptability of methods or personnel
qualifications.
Confined space entry permits.
Text of posted operating instructions.
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Preprinted material describing installation of a product, system or

material, including special notices and (SDS)concerning impedances,
hazards and safety precautions.
SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Reports
Documentation of the testing and verification actions taken by

manufacturer's representative at the job site, in the vicinity of the
job site, or on a sample taken from the job site, on a portion of the
work, during or after installation, to confirm compliance with
manufacturer's standards or instructions. The documentation must be
signed by an authorized official of a testing laboratory or agency and
state the test results; and indicate whether the material, product, or
system has passed or failed the test.
Factory test reports.
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Data that is furnished by the manufacturer, or the system provider, to

the equipment operating and maintenance personnel, including
manufacturer's help and product line documentation necessary to
maintain and install equipment. This data is needed by operating and
maintenance personnel for the safe and efficient operation, maintenance
and repair of the item.
This data is intended to be incorporated in an operations and

maintenance manual or control system.
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
Documentation to record compliance with technical or administrative

requirements or to establish an administrative mechanism.
Submittals required for Guiding Principle Validation (GPV) or Third

Party Certification (TPC).
Special requirements necessary to properly close out a construction

contract. For example, Record Drawings and as-built drawings. Also,
submittal requirements necessary to properly close out a major phase of
construction on a multi-phase contract.
1.1.2 Approving Authority
Office or designated person authorized to approve submittal.
12/26/2018
1.1.3 Work
As used in this section, on- and off-site construction required by contract

documents, including labor necessary to produce submittals, construction,
materials, products, equipment, and systems incorporated or to be
incorporated in such construction.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor QC approval.
Submit the following in accordance with this section.
Submittal Register; G
1.3 SUBMITTAL CLASSIFICATION
Submittals are classified as follows:
1.3.1 Government Approved (G)
Within the terms of the Contract Clause SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS FOR
CONSTRUCTION, they are considered to be "shop drawings."
1.3.2 Sustainability Reporting Submittals (S)
Submittals for Guiding Principle Validation (GPV) or Third Party

Certification (TPC) are indicated with an "S" designation. Submit the
information required by the technical sections that demonstrates compliance
with the sustainable requirement. A full submittal for an item may be
provided under another SD; however, for the "S" submittal, only provide
that portion of the submittal that demonstrates compliance with the
sustainable requirement. If the sustainable submittal does require
Government Approval, it may be tagged under another SD with a "G."
Schedule submittals for these items throughout the course of construction

as provided; do not wait until closeout.
1.4 PREPARATION
1.4.1 Transmittal Form
1.4.2 Source Drawings for Shop Drawings
The entire set of Source Drawing files (DWG) will not be provided to the
Contractor. Only those requested by the Contractor to prepare shop
drawings may be provided. Request the specific Drawing Number only for the
preparation of Shop Drawings. These drawings may only be provided after
award.
1.4.2.1 Terms and Conditions
Data contained on these electronic files must not be used for any purpose
other than as a convenience in the preparation of construction data for the
referenced project. Any other use or reuse shall be at the sole risk of
the Contractor and without liability or legal exposure to the Government.
The Contractor must make no claim and waives to the fullest extent
12/26/2018
permitted by law, any claim or cause of action of any nature against the
Government, its agents or sub consultants that may arise out of or in
connection with the use of these electronic files. The Contractor must, to
the fullest extent permitted by law, indemnify and hold the Government
harmless against all damages, liabilities or costs, including reasonable
attorney's fees and defense costs, arising out of or resulting from the use
of these electronic files.
These electronic Source Drawing files are not construction documents.

Differences may exist between the Source Drawing files and the
corresponding construction documents. The Government makes no
representation regarding the accuracy or completeness of the electronic
Source Drawing files, nor does it make representation to the compatibility
of these files with the Contractor hardware or software. In the event that
a conflict arises between the signed and sealed construction documents
prepared by the Government and the furnished Source Drawing files, the
signed and sealed construction documents govern. The Contractor is
responsible for determining if any conflict exists. Use of these Source
Drawing files does not relieve the Contractor of duty to fully comply with
the contract documents, including and without limitation, the need to
check, confirm and coordinate the work of all contractors for the project.
If the Contractor uses, duplicates or modifies these electronic Source
Drawing files for use in producing construction data related to this
contract, remove all previous indicia of ownership (seals, logos,
signatures, initials and dates).
1.5 QUANTITY OF SUBMITTALS
1.5.1 Number of Copies of SD-02 Shop Drawings
Submit six copies of submittals of shop drawings requiring review and

approval by Contracting Officer.
1.5.2 Number of Copies of SD-03 Product Data and SD-08 Manufacturer's

Instructions
Submit in compliance with quantity requirements specified for shop drawings.
1.5.3 Number of Copies SD-05 Design Data and SD-07 Certificates
Submit in compliance with quantity requirements specified for shop drawings.
1.5.4 Number of Copies SD-06 Test Reports and SD-09 Manufacturer's Field
Reports
Submit in compliance with quantity and quality requirements specified for

shop drawings other than field test results that will be submitted with QC
reports.
1.5.5 Number of Copies of SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Submit five copies of O&M Data to the Contracting Officer for review and
approval.
1.5.6 Number of Copies of SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals and SD-11

Closeout Submittals
Unless otherwise specified, submit two sets of administrative submittals.
12/26/2018
1.6 VARIATIONS
Variations from contract requirements require both Designer of Record (DOR)

and Government approval pursuant to contract Clause FAR 52.236-21 and will
be considered where advantageous to Government.
1.6.1 Considering Variations
Discussion with Contracting Officer prior to submission, after consulting

with the DOR, will help ensure functional and quality requirements are met
and minimize rejections and re-submittals. When contemplating a variation
which results in lower cost, consider submission of the variation as a
Value Engineering Change Proposal (VECP).
Specifically point out variations from contract requirements in transmittal

letters. Failure to point out deviations may result in the Government
requiring rejection and removal of such work at no additional cost to the
Government.
1.6.2 Proposing Variations
When proposing variation, deliver written request to the Contracting

Officer, with documentation of the nature and features of the variation and
why the variation is desirable and beneficial to Government, including the
DOR's written analysis and approval. If lower cost is a benefit, also
include an estimate of the cost savings. In addition to documentation
required for variation, include the submittals required for the item.
Clearly mark the proposed variation in all documentation.
1.6.3 Warranting that Variations are Compatible
When delivering a variation for approval, Contractor, including its

Designer(s) of Record, warrants that this contract has been reviewed to
establish that the variation, if incorporated, will be compatible with
other elements of work.
1.6.4 Review Schedule is Modified
In addition to normal submittal review period, a period of 10 working days

will be allowed for consideration by the Government of submittals with
variations.
1.7 SUBMITTAL REGISTER
Prepare and maintain submittal register, as the work progresses. Do not

change data which is output in columns (c), (d), (e), and (f) as delivered
by Government; retain data which is output in columns (a), (g), (h), and
(i) as approved. A submittal register showing items of equipment and
materials for which submittals are required by the specifications is
provided as an attachment. This list may not be all inclusive and
additional submittals may be required. The Government will provide the
initial submittal register.
Column (c): Lists specification section in which submittal is

required.
Column (d): Lists each submittal description (SD No. and type,
e.g. SD-02 Shop Drawings) required in each specification section.
12/26/2018
Column (e): Lists one principal paragraph in specification

section where a material or product is specified. This listing is
only to facilitate locating submitted requirements. Do not
consider entries in column (e) as limiting project requirements.
1.7.1 Use of Submittal Register
Submit submittal register. Submit with QC plan and project schedule.

Verify that all submittals required for project are listed and add missing
submittals. Coordinate and complete the following fields on the register
submitted with the QC plan and the project schedule:
Column (a) Activity Number: Activity number from the project

schedule.
Column (g) Contractor Submit Date: Scheduled date for approving

authority to receive submittals.
Column (h) Contractor Approval Date: Date Contractor needs

approval of submittal.
Column (i) Contractor Material: Date that Contractor needs

material delivered to Contractor control.
1.7.2 Contractor Use of Submittal Register
Update the following fields with each submittal throughout contract.
Column (b) Transmittal Number: Contractor assigned list of

consecutive numbers.
Column (j) Action Code (k): Date of action used to record

Contractor's review when forwarding submittals to QC.
Column (l) List date of submittal transmission.
Column (q) List date approval received.
1.7.3 Approving Authority Use of Submittal Register
Update the following fields.
Column (b) Transmittal Number: Contractor assigned list of

consecutive numbers.
Column (l) List date of submittal receipt.
Column (m) through (p) List Date related to review actions.
Column (q) List date returned to Contractor.
1.7.4 Copies Delivered to the Government
Deliver one copy of submittal register updated by Contractor to Government

with each invoice request.
1.8 SCHEDULING
Schedule and submit concurrently submittals covering component items
12/26/2018
forming a system or items that are interrelated. Include certifications to

be submitted with the pertinent drawings at the same time. No delay
damages or time extensions will be allowed for time lost in late submittals.
a. Coordinate scheduling, sequencing, preparing and processing of

submittals with performance of work so that work will not be delayed by
submittal processing. Allow for potential resubmittal of requirements.
b. Submittals called for by the contract documents will be listed on the

register. If a submittal is called for but does not pertain to the
contract work, the Contractor is to include the submittal in the
register and annotate it "N/A" with a brief explanation. Approval by
the Contracting Officer does not relieve the Contractor of supplying
submittals required by the contract documents but which have been
omitted from the register or marked "N/A."
c. Re-submit register and annotate monthly by the Contractor with actual

submission and approval dates. When all items on the register have
been fully approved, no further re-submittal is required.
d. Carefully control procurement operations to ensure that each individual

submittal is made on or before the Contractor scheduled submittal date
shown on the approved "Submittal Register."
1.9 GOVERNMENT APPROVING AUTHORITY
When approving authority is Contracting Officer, the Government will:
a. Note date on which submittal was received.
b. Review submittals for approval within scheduling period specified and

only for conformance with project design concepts and compliance with
contract documents.
c. Identify returned submittals with one of the actions defined in

paragraph REVIEW NOTATIONS and with markings appropriate for action
indicated.
Upon completion of review of submittals requiring Government approval,

stamp and date submittals.
1.9.1 Review Notations
Submittals will be returned to the Contractor with the following notations:
a. Submittals marked "approved" or "accepted" authorize the Contractor to

proceed with the work covered.
b. Submittals marked "approved as noted" "or approved, except as noted,

resubmittal not required," authorize the Contractor to proceed with the
work covered provided he takes no exception to the corrections.
c. Submittals marked "not approved" or "disapproved," or "revise and

resubmit," indicate noncompliance with the contract requirements or
design concept, or that submittal is incomplete. Resubmit with
appropriate changes. No work shall proceed for this item until
resubmittal is approved.
d. Submittals marked "not reviewed" will indicate submittal has been
12/26/2018
previously reviewed and approved, is not required, does not have

evidence of being reviewed and approved by Contractor, or is not
complete. A submittal marked "not reviewed" will be returned with an
explanation of the reason it is not reviewed. Resubmit submittals
returned for lack of review by Contractor or for being incomplete, with
appropriate action, coordination, or change.
1.10 DISAPPROVED SUBMITTALS
Contractor shall make corrections required by the Contracting Officer. If

the Contractor considers any correction or notation on the returned
submittals to constitute a change to the contract drawings or
specifications; notice as required under the Contract clause CHANGES, is to
be given to the Contracting Officer. Contractor is responsible for the
dimensions and design of connection details and construction of work.
Failure to point out deviations may result in the Government requiring
rejection and removal of such work at the Contractor's expense.
If changes are necessary to submittals, make such revisions and submission

of the submittals in accordance with the procedures above. No item of work
requiring a submittal change is to be accomplished until the changed
submittals are approved.
1.11 APPROVED SUBMITTALS
The Contracting Officer's approval or acceptance of submittals is not to be

construed as a complete check, and indicates only that the general method
of construction, materials, detailing and other information are
satisfactory.
Approval or acceptance will not relieve the Contractor of the

responsibility for any error which may exist, as the Contractor under the
Contractor Quality Control (CQC) requirements of this contract is
responsible for.
After submittals have been approved or accepted by the Contracting Officer,

no resubmittal for the purpose of substituting materials or equipment will
be considered unless accompanied by an explanation of why a substitution is
necessary.
1.12 APPROVED SAMPLES
Approval of a sample is only for the characteristics or use named in such

approval and is not be construed to change or modify any contract
requirements. Before submitting samples, the Contractor to assure that the
materials or equipment will be available in quantities required in the
project. No change or substitution will be permitted after a sample has
been approved.
Match the approved samples for materials and equipment incorporated in the
work. If requested, approved samples, including those which may be damaged
in testing, will be returned to the Contractor, at his expense, upon
completion of the contract. Samples not approved will also be returned to
the Contractor at its expense, if so requested.
Failure of any materials to pass the specified tests will be sufficient

cause for refusal to consider, under this contract, any further samples of
the same brand or make of that material. Government reserves the right to
disapprove any material or equipment which previously has proved
12/26/2018
unsatisfactory in service.
Samples of various materials or equipment delivered on the site or in place

may be taken by the Contracting Officer for testing. Samples failing to
meet contract requirements will automatically void previous approvals.
Contractor to replace such materials or equipment to meet contract
requirements.
Approval of the Contractor's samples by the Contracting Officer does not

relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities under the contract.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Used
12/26/2018
TITLE: Repair Envelope, Facility 1645
JOB NAME: DBEH181547
LOCATION: CCAFS
CONTRACT NO:
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR:
CONTRACTOR SCHEDULE CONTRACTOR
APPROVING AUTHORITY
DATES ACTION
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) (o) (p) (q) (r)
Mailed To
Date FWD CONTR/
Classificati to APPR / Date RCD Date RCD
on: GOVT Auth Date Date FWD From From
or A/E Approval Material Action Date Of RCD From To Other Other Action Date Of APPR
Line Activity # Transmittal # Specification Section SD # Submittal Description Item Submitted Paragraph # Reviewer Submit Needed By Needed By Code Action CONTR Revwr Reviewer Code Action Authority Remarks
1 01 11 00.00 30 1 Preconstruction Submittals Utility Outage Requests 1.9.1
2 01 11 00.00 30 1 Preconstruction Submittals Connection Requests 1.9.1
3 01 11 00.00 30 1 Preconstruction Submittals AF 3952 1.8.4 G
SOLID WASTE DISPOSAL DIVERSION
4 01 11 00.00 30 1 Preconstruction Submittals 1.10.6 G
TRACKING
5 01 11 00.00 30 1 Preconstruction Submittals Premises/Access Plan 1.7
6 01 11 00.00 30 1 Preconstruction Submittals Storage Area Request 1.8.1
7 01 11 00.00 30 1 Preconstruction Submittals Superintendent Contact and Qualifications 3.6
8 01 33 00 1 Preconstruction Submittals Submittal Register 1.7 G
9 01 35 26 1 Preconstruction Submittals Accident Prevention Plan (APP) 1.6 G
10 01 35 26 1 Preconstruction Submittals Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) 1.7
11 01 35 26 1 Preconstruction Submittals Crane Operators/Riggers 1.5.1.5
12 01 35 26 1 Preconstruction Submittals Standard Lift Plan 1.6.2.1
13 01 35 26 1 Preconstruction Submittals Critical Lift Plan 1.6.2.2
14 01 35 26 1 Preconstruction Submittals Crane Operator 1.2.11
15 01 35 26 6 Test Reports Notifications and Reports 1.11
16 01 35 26 6 Test Reports Accident Reports 1.11.2 G
17 01 35 26 6 Test Reports LHE Inspection Reports 1.11.3
18 01 35 26 7 Certificates Hot Work Permit 1.8.1
19 01 35 26 7 Certificates Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) 1.7
20 01 35 26 7 Certificates Certificate of Compliance 1.11.4
21 01 57 19 1 Preconstruction Submittals Preconstruction Survey 1.5.1
22 01 57 19 1 Preconstruction Submittals Solid Waste Management Permit 1.8
23 01 57 19 1 Preconstruction Submittals Regulatory Notifications 1.5.2
24 01 57 19 1 Preconstruction Submittals Environmental Protection Plan 1.6
25 01 57 19 1 Preconstruction Submittals Dirt and Dust Control Plan 1.6.9.1
26 01 57 19 1 Preconstruction Submittals Employee Training Records 1.5.5
27 01 57 19 1 Preconstruction Submittals Environmental Manager Qualifications 1.5.4
28 01 57 19 6 Test Reports Solid Waste Management Report 3.4.2.1
29 01 57 19 7 Certificates Employee Training Records 1.5.5
30 01 57 19 11 Closeout Submittals Waste Determination Documentation 3.4.1
Disposal Documentation for Hazardous and
31 01 57 19 11 Closeout Submittals 3.4.3.3
Regulated Waste
32 01 57 19 11 Closeout Submittals Assembled Employee Training Records 1.5.5
33 01 57 19 11 Closeout Submittals Solid Waste Management Permit 1.8
34 01 57 19 11 Closeout Submittals Solid Waste Management Report 3.4.2.1
35 01 57 19 11 Closeout Submittals Hazardous Waste/Debris Management 3.4.3.1
36 01 57 19 11 Closeout Submittals Regulatory Notifications 1.5.2
37 01 57 19 11 Closeout Submittals Sales Documentation 3.4.2.1
38 01 74 19 1 Preconstruction Submittals Waste Management Plan 1.6
39 01 74 19 11 Closeout Submittals Records 1.7
40 01 78 00 3 Product Data Warranty Management Plan 1.5.1
41 01 78 00 3 Product Data Warranty Tags 1.5.4
42 01 78 00 3 Product Data Spare Parts Data 1.4
43 01 78 00 8 Manufacturer’s Instructions Preventative Maintenance 3.5
44 01 78 00 8 Manufacturer’s Instructions Condition Monitoring (Predictive Testing) 3.5
45 01 78 00 8 Manufacturer’s Instructions Inspection 3.5
46 01 78 00 8 Manufacturer’s Instructions Instructions 1.5.1
47 01 78 00 10 Operation and Maintenance Data Operation and Maintenance Manuals 3.3 G
48 01 78 00 11 Closeout Submittals As-Built Drawings 3.1 G
LOCATION: CCAFS
CONTRACT NO:
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR:
APPROVING AUTHORITY
DATES ACTION
Mailed To
Date FWD CONTR/
49 01 78 00 11 Closeout Submittals Record Drawings 3.2
50 02 41 00 1 Preconstruction Submittals Demolition Plan 1.7
51 02 41 00 1 Preconstruction Submittals Existing Conditions 1.11
52 02 81 00 3 Product Data Onsite Hazardous Waste Management 3.1 G
Notices of Non-Compliance and Notices of
53 02 81 00 3 Product Data 3.2
Violation
54 02 81 00 3 Product Data Packaging Notifications 2.1.1
55 02 81 00 6 Test Reports Recordkeeping 3.6 G
56 02 81 00 6 Test Reports Spill Response 3.7
57 02 81 00 6 Test Reports Exception Report 3.6 G
58 02 81 00 7 Certificates Certification 1.4.3
59 02 81 00 7 Certificates Security Plan 3.2.4
60 02 81 00 7 Certificates Transportation and Disposal Coordinator 1.4.1
61 02 81 00 7 Certificates Training 1.4.2
62 02 81 00 7 Certificates EPA Offsite Policy 3.2.2
63 02 81 00 7 Certificates Certificates of Disposal 3.2.5
Shipping Documents and Packagings
64 02 81 00 7 Certificates 3.2.3 G
Certification
65 02 81 00 7 Certificates Waste Minimization 3.5
66 02 82 33.13 20 1 Preconstruction Submittals Waste Transporter Permit 1.5.1.5
Lead-based Paint/Paint with Lead
67 02 82 33.13 20 1 Preconstruction Submittals 1.5.2.2
Removal/Control Plan
68 02 82 33.13 20 1 Preconstruction Submittals 1.5.3
69 02 82 33.13 20 1 Preconstruction Submittals Paint with mercury removal/control plan 1.5.2.2
70 02 82 33.13 20 3 Product Data Vacuum Filters 1.6.4
71 02 82 33.13 20 3 Product Data Respirators 1.6.1
72 02 82 33.13 20 6 Test Reports sampling results 1.5.2.3
Occupational and Environmental Assessment
73 02 82 33.13 20 6 Test Reports 1.5.2.3
Data Report
74 02 82 33.13 20 7 Certificates Qualifications of CP 1.5.1.1
75 02 82 33.13 20 7 Certificates Testing Laboratory 1.5.1.3
76 02 82 33.13 20 7 Certificates Training Certification 1.5.1.2
Notification of the Commencement of LBP
77 02 82 33.13 20 7 Certificates 3.1.1.1
Hazard Abatement
78 02 82 33.13 20 7 Certificates Third Party Consultant Qualifications 1.5.1.4
79 02 82 33.13 20 7 Certificates 1.5.2.2
80 02 82 33.13 20 7 Certificates 1.5.3
81 02 82 33.13 20 7 Certificates Paint with Mercury Removal/Control Plan 1.5.2.2
82 02 82 33.13 20 7 Certificates Rental equipment notification 1.6.3
83 02 82 33.13 20 7 Certificates Respiratory Protection Program 1.5.2.6
84 02 82 33.13 20 7 Certificates Hazard Communication Program 1.5.2.7
State approved hazardous waste treatment,
85 02 82 33.13 20 7 Certificates 3.5.2
storage, or disposal facility
86 02 82 33.13 20 7 Certificates Lead Waste Management Plan 1.5.2.8
87 02 82 33.13 20 7 Certificates Mercury Waste Management Plan 1.5.2.8
88 02 82 33.13 20 7 Certificates Vacuum filters 1.6.4
89 02 82 33.13 20 7 Certificates Clearance Certification 3.5.1.1
90 02 82 33.13 20 11 Closeout Submittals hazardous waste manifest 3.5.2.2
91 02 82 33.13 20 11 Closeout Submittals Medical Examinations 1.5.2.4
92 02 82 33.13 20 11 Closeout Submittals Training Certification 1.5.1.2
LOCATION: CCAFS
CONTRACT NO:
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR:
APPROVING AUTHORITY
DATES ACTION
Mailed To
Date FWD CONTR/
93 02 82 33.13 20 11 Closeout Submittals turn-in documents or weight tickets 3.5.2.2
94 02 83 13 1 Preconstruction Submittals Lead Compliance Plan 1.5.2.1
95 02 83 13 1 Preconstruction Submittals Competent Person 1.5.1.2
96 02 83 13 1 Preconstruction Submittals Training Certification 1.5.1.3
97 02 83 13 1 Preconstruction Submittals Lead waste management plan 1.5.2.7
98 02 83 13 6 Test Reports Sampling results 1.5.2.2
99 02 83 13 7 Certificates Testing laboratory 1.5.1.4
100 02 83 13 7 Certificates Occupant Notification 1.5.2.1
101 02 83 13 7 Certificates Third party consultant qualifications 1.5.1.5
102 02 83 13 11 Closeout Submittals hazardous waste manifest 3.5.2.1
103 02 85 00.00 20 1 Preconstruction Submittals Preliminary Visual Assessment Report 1.4.1.1
104 02 85 00.00 20 1 Preconstruction Submittals Microbial Remediation Plan 1.4.1.2
105 02 85 00.00 20 1 Preconstruction Submittals Worker Records 1.4.1.4
106 02 85 00.00 20 1 Preconstruction Submittals Respiratory Protection Program 1.4.1.3
107 02 85 00.00 20 1 Preconstruction Submittals Licensed Mold Assessor 1.3.1
Certified Industrial Hygienist (CIH)/Industrial
108 02 85 00.00 20 1 Preconstruction Submittals 1.4.1.5
Hygienist (IH) Qualifications
109 02 85 00.00 20 1 Preconstruction Submittals Microbial Remediation Supervisor Qualifications 1.4.1.6
Ventilation System Mold Remediator
110 02 85 00.00 20 1 Preconstruction Submittals 1.2.23
Qualifications
111 02 85 00.00 20 3 Product Data Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) 1.2.18
112 02 85 00.00 20 3 Product Data Air Filtration Units 3.1.5
113 02 85 00.00 20 3 Product Data Dehumidifiers 3.1.4
114 02 85 00.00 20 3 Product Data Pressure Differential Measuring Instrument 1.2.21
115 02 85 00.00 20 3 Product Data Fungicidal Agents, (EPA 1.2.11
116 02 85 00.00 20 3 Product Data Disinfectants or Biocide Sanitizing Solutions 1.2.9
117 02 85 00.00 20 6 Test Reports Daily Reports 1.4.3
118 02 85 00.00 20 11 Closeout Submittals Submittals at Completion of Remediation Work 1.4.4
119 05 50 00 3 Product Data Structural Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars 2.2
120 05 50 00 3 Product Data Miscellaneous Framing and Supports 2.3
121 05 50 00 3 Product Data Anchors and Fasteners 2.4
122 05 50 00 7 Certificates Welder Qualifications 1.4
123 05 52 13 2 Shop Drawings Aluminum Pipe and Tube Railings/Guards 2.1.2 G
124 05 52 13 2 Shop Drawings Stainless Steel Pipe and Tube Railings/Guards 2.1.3 G
125 05 52 13 2 Shop Drawings Anchors 2.1.4 G

126 05 52 13 2 Shop Drawings Tubing 2.1.3 G
127 05 52 13 2 Shop Drawings Pipe 2.1.3 G
128 05 52 13 2 Shop Drawings structural analysis data 3.2 G
129 05 52 13 2 Shop Drawings fabrication drawings 3.2 G
130 05 52 13 2 Shop Drawings templates, erection and installation drawings 3.2 G
131 05 52 13 3 Product Data Aluminum Pipe and Tube Railings/Guards 2.1.2 G
132 05 52 13 3 Product Data Stainless Steel Pipe and Tube Railings/Guards 2.1.3 G
133 05 52 13 3 Product Data Anchors 2.1.4 G

134 05 52 13 3 Product Data Tubing 2.1.3 G
135 05 52 13 3 Product Data Pipe 2.1.3 G
136 06 10 00 6 Test Reports Preservative-treated 1.4.2
137 06 10 00 7 Certificates Certificates of Grade 1.8.1
LOCATION: CCAFS
CONTRACT NO:
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR:
APPROVING AUTHORITY
DATES ACTION
Mailed To
Date FWD CONTR/
138 06 10 00 7 Certificates Preservative Treatment 1.6
139 07 01 50 1 Preconstruction Submittals Fastener pull-out test report 3.4
140 07 22 16.22 2 Shop Drawings Thermal Insulation Materials 2.2 G
141 07 22 16.22 3 Product Data Manufacturer's data
142 07 22 16.22 3 Product Data roof board insulation
143 07 22 16.22 3 Product Data Thermal Insulation Materials 2.2
144 07 22 16.22 3 Product Data Rigid Board insulation 2.2.1
145 07 22 16.22 3 Product Data Tapered Rigid Board insulation 2.2.2
146 07 22 16.22 6 Test Reports test reports
147 07 22 16.22 7 Certificates Certificates
148 07 22 16.22 7 Certificates Polyisocyanurate Roof Insulation 2.2.1
149 07 22 16.22 7 Certificates Rigid Board insulation 2.2.1
150 07 22 16.22 7 Certificates Tapered Rigid Board insulation 2.2.2
151 07 22 16.22 7 Certificates Installer Qualifications 1.5.2
152 07 22 16.22 7 Certificates Sample Warranty 1.4
153 07 22 16.22 7 Certificates Thermal Insulation Materials 2.2 G
154 07 22 16.22 8 Manufacturer’s Instructions Manufacturer's instructions
155 07 22 16.22 11 Closeout Submittals Warranties 1.4
156 07 41 13 2 Shop Drawings Roof Panels 2.2 G
157 07 41 13 2 Shop Drawings Flashing and Accessories 1.6.5 G
158 07 41 13 2 Shop Drawings Gutters 2.7.2.2
159 07 41 13 2 Shop Drawings Downspouts 2.7.2.2
160 07 41 13 2 Shop Drawings ACCESSORIES 2.6
161 07 41 13 3 Product Data Roof panels 2.2 G
162 07 41 13 3 Product Data Underlayment 2.5 G
163 07 41 13 3 Product Data Underlayment 3.6 G
164 07 41 13 3 Product Data Factory-Applied Color Finish 1.6.5
165 07 41 13 3 Product Data Accessories 2.6 G
166 07 41 13 3 Product Data Fasteners 2.4.2
167 07 41 13 3 Product Data Pressure Sensitive Tape 2.6
168 07 41 13 3 Product Data Gaskets and Sealing/Insulating Compounds 2.8
169 07 41 13 3 Product Data Aluminized Steel Repair Paint 2.9

170 07 41 13 3 Product Data Galvanizing Repair Paint 2.9
171 07 41 13 3 Product Data Coil Stock 1.6.5
172 07 41 13 3 Product Data Sheet Metal Flashing And Trim 2.7.2 G
173 07 41 13 4 Samples Roof Panels 2.2
174 07 41 13 5 Design Data Wind Uplift Resistance 1.4.1.2 G
175 07 41 13 6 Test Reports Wind Uplift Test Report 1.4.1.2 G
176 07 41 13 6 Test Reports Leakage Test Report 1.4.1.1
Factory Finish and Color Performance
177 07 41 13 6 Test Reports 2.3
Requirements
178 07 41 13 7 Certificates Roof Panels 2.2
179 07 41 13 7 Certificates Coil stock compatibility 1.6.5
180 07 41 13 7 Certificates Fasteners 2.4.2
181 07 41 13 7 Certificates Galvanizing Repair Paint 2.9
182 07 41 13 7 Certificates Enamel Repair Paint 2.9
183 07 41 13 7 Certificates Qualification of Manufacturer 1.6.1
184 07 41 13 7 Certificates Qualification of Applicator 1.6.2
185 07 41 13 8 Manufacturer’s Instructions Installation Manual 1.6.5
186 07 41 13 9 Manufacturer’s Field Reports Manufacturer's Field Inspection Reports 1.6.1.1
LOCATION: CCAFS
CONTRACT NO:
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR:
APPROVING AUTHORITY
DATES ACTION
Mailed To
Date FWD CONTR/
187 07 41 13 11 Closeout Submittals Warranties 1.11 G
188 07 41 13 11 Closeout Submittals Warranty Sign 3.1
189 07 52 16.15 2 Shop Drawings Roof plan 1.7.5
190 07 52 16.15 3 Product Data Modified Bitumen Sheets 2.2 G
191 07 52 16.15 3 Product Data Polyester Felt 2.2
192 07 52 16.15 3 Product Data Asphalt Primer 2.6
193 07 52 16.15 3 Product Data Modified Bitumen Roof Cement 2.7
194 07 52 16.15 3 Product Data Pre-Manufactured Accessories 2.9
195 07 52 16.15 3 Product Data Fasteners And Plates 2.8 G
196 07 52 16.15 3 Product Data Warranty 1.12
197 07 52 16.15 5 Design Data Wind Uplift Calculations 1.7.4 G
198 07 52 16.15 5 Design Data Wind Uplift 1.7.1 G
199 07 52 16.15 7 Certificates Qualification of Manufacturer 1.7.1 G
200 07 52 16.15 7 Certificates Qualification of Applicator 1.7.2
201 07 52 16.15 7 Certificates Fire Resistance 1.7.3
202 07 52 16.15 8 Manufacturer’s Instructions Application of Modified Bitumen Membrane 3.3
203 07 52 16.15 8 Manufacturer’s Instructions Flashing 3.3.6
204 07 52 16.15 8 Manufacturer’s Instructions Torches 3.2.3.3
205 07 52 16.15 8 Manufacturer’s Instructions Primer 2.6
206 07 52 16.15 8 Manufacturer’s Instructions Modified Bitumen Roof Cement 2.7
207 07 52 16.15 8 Manufacturer’s Instructions Fasteners 2.8.1
208 07 52 16.15 11 Closeout Submittals Warranty 1.12 G
209 07 52 16.15 11 Closeout Submittals Warranty Sign 3.3.13
Instructions To Government Contractor
210 07 52 16.15 11 Closeout Submittals 3.3.12
Personnel
211 07 52 16.15 11 Closeout Submittals Wind Uplift 1.7.1 G
212 07 62 00 7 Certificates Qualification of Fabricator 1.7.1
213 07 62 00 11 Closeout Submittals Warranty 1.7.3
214 07 62 00 11 Closeout Submittals (20) year 'No-Dollar-Limit' warranty 1.7.3
215 07 92 00 3 Product Data Elastomeric Sealants 2.3.1
216 07 92 00 3 Product Data Primers 2.4
217 07 92 00 3 Product Data Bond Breakers 2.5
218 07 92 00 3 Product Data Joint Backer 3.2.4
219 07 92 00 3 Product Data Backstops 3.4.4
220 07 92 00 3 Product Data Field Adhesion 3.1
221 07 92 00 7 Certificates Sealant 1.5.1
222 07 92 00 8 Manufacturer’s Instructions Single-Component Elastomeric Sealant 2.3.1
223 26 05 00.00 40 1 Preconstruction Submittals Material, Equipment, and Fixture Lists 2.1
224 26 05 00.00 40 3 Product Data Conduits and Raceways 2.1.1 G
225 26 05 00.00 40 3 Product Data Wire and Cable 2.1.2 G
226 26 05 00.00 40 3 Product Data Splices and Connectors 3.2.1.7 G
227 26 05 00.00 40 6 Test Reports Continuity Test 3.3 G
228 26 05 00.00 40 6 Test Reports Phase-Rotation Tests 3.3
229 26 05 00.00 40 6 Test Reports Insulation Resistance Test 3.3
230 26 05 00.00 40 8 Manufacturer’s Instructions Manufacturer's Instructions 3.1
231 26 41 00 2 Shop Drawings Overall lightning protection system 1.4.1.1 G
232 26 41 00 2 Shop Drawings Each major component 1.4.1.2
Lightning Protection and Grounding System Test
233 26 41 00 6 Test Reports 1.4.3
Plan
234 26 41 00 6 Test Reports Lightning Protection and Grounding System Test 3.4.1 G
LOCATION: CCAFS
CONTRACT NO:
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR:
APPROVING AUTHORITY
DATES ACTION
Mailed To
Date FWD CONTR/
Lightning Protection System Installers
235 26 41 00 7 Certificates 1.2.3 G
Documentation
236 26 41 00 7 Certificates Component UL Listed and Labeled 1.4.2 G
237 26 41 00 7 Certificates Lightning protection system inspection certificate 1.4.4 G
12/26/2018 12:06
SECTION 01 35 26
GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
11/15
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 Competent Person (CP)
1.2.2 Competent Person, Cranes and Rigging
1.2.3 Competent Person, Fall Protection
1.2.4 Competent Person, Scaffolding
1.2.5 Competent Person (CP) Trainer
1.2.6 High Risk Activities
1.2.7 High Visibility Accident
1.2.8 Load Handling Equipment (LHE)
1.2.9 Medical Treatment
1.2.10 Near Miss
1.2.11 Operating Envelope
1.2.12 Qualified Person (QP)
1.2.13 Qualified Person, Fall Protection (QP for FP)
1.2.14 Recordable Injuries or Illnesses
1.2.15 USACE Property and Equipment
1.2.16 Load Handling Equipment (LHE) Accident or Load Handling
Equipment Mishap
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
1.5 SITE QUALIFICATIONS, DUTIES, AND MEETINGS
1.5.1 Personnel Qualifications
1.5.1.1 Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO)
1.5.1.2 Contractor Quality Control (QC) Manager:
1.5.1.3 Competent Person Qualifications
1.5.1.3.1 Competent Person for Fall Protection
1.5.1.4 Qualified Trainer Requirements
1.5.1.5 Crane Operators/Riggers
1.5.2 Personnel Duties
1.5.2.1 Duties of the Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO)
1.5.3 Meetings
1.5.3.1 Preconstruction Conference
1.5.3.2 Safety Meetings
1.6 ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN (APP)
1.6.1 Names and Qualifications
1.6.2 Plans
1.6.2.1 Standard Lift Plan (SLP)
1.6.2.2 Critical Lift Plan - Crane or Load Handling Equipment
1.6.2.3 Fall Protection and Prevention (FP&P) Plan
1.6.2.4 Rescue and Evacuation Plan
1.6.2.5 Hazardous Energy Control Program (HECP)
1.6.2.6 Occupant Protection Plan
1.6.2.7 Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan
12/26/2018
1.7 ACTIVITY HAZARD ANALYSIS (AHA)

1.7.1 AHA Management
1.7.2 AHA Signature Log
1.8 DISPLAY OF SAFETY INFORMATION
1.8.1 Safety Bulletin Board
1.8.2 Safety and Occupational Health (SOH) Deficiency Tracking System
1.9 SITE SAFETY REFERENCE MATERIALS
1.10 EMERGENCY MEDICAL TREATMENT
1.11 NOTIFICATIONS and REPORTS
1.11.1 Mishap Notification
1.11.2 Accident Reports
1.11.3 LHE Inspection Reports
1.11.4 Certificate of Compliance and Pre-lift Plan/Checklist for LHE
and Rigging
1.12 HOT WORK
1.12.1 Permit and Personnel Requirements
1.12.2 Work Around Flammable Materials
1.13 SEVERE STORM PLAN
PART 2 PRODUCTS
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION AND OTHER WORK

3.1.1 Worksite Communication
3.1.2 Hazardous Material Exclusions
3.1.3 Unforeseen Hazardous Material
3.2 PRE-OUTAGE COORDINATION MEETING
3.3 CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS ENERGY (LOCKOUT/TAGOUT)
3.4 FALL PROTECTION PROGRAM
3.4.1 Training
3.4.2 Fall Protection Equipment and Systems
3.4.2.1 Additional Personal Fall Protection
3.4.2.2 Personal Fall Protection Harnesses
3.4.3 Horizontal Lifelines (HLL)
3.4.4 Rescue and Evacuation Plan and Procedures
3.5 WORK PLATFORMS
3.5.1 Scaffolding
3.5.2 Elevated Aerial Work Platforms (AWPs)
3.6 EQUIPMENT
3.6.1 Material Handling Equipment (MHE)
3.6.3 Machinery and Mechanized Equipment
3.6.4 USE OF EXPLOSIVES (INCLUDING POWDER ACTUATED TOOL CARTRIDGES)
3.7 ELECTRICAL
3.7.1 Conduct of Electrical Work
3.7.2 Qualifications
3.7.3 Grounding
3.7.4 Testing
12/26/2018
SECTION 01 35 26
GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

11/15
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SAFETY ENGINEERS (ASSE/SAFE)
ASSE/SAFE A10.34 (2001; R 2012) Protection of the Public on

or Adjacent to Construction Sites
ASSE/SAFE A10.44 (2014) Control of Energy Sources

(Lockout/Tagout) for Construction and
Demolition Operations
ASSE/SAFE Z244.1 (2003; R 2014) Control of Hazardous Energy

Lockout/Tagout and Alternative Methods
ASSE/SAFE Z359.0 (2012) Definitions and Nomenclature Used

for Fall Protection and Fall Arrest
ASSE/SAFE Z359.1 (2016) The Fall Protection Code
ASSE/SAFE Z359.11 (2014) Safety Requirements for Full Body

Harnesses
ASSE/SAFE Z359.12 (2009) Connecting Components for Personal

Fall Arrest Systems
ASSE/SAFE Z359.13 (2013) Personal Energy Absorbers and

Energy Absorbing Lanyards
ASSE/SAFE Z359.14 (2014) Safety Requirements for

Self-Retracting Devices for Personal Fall
Arrest and Rescue Systems
ASSE/SAFE Z359.15 (2014) Safety Requirements for Single

Anchor Lifelines and Fall Arresters for
Personal Fall Arrest Systems
ASSE/SAFE Z359.2 (2017) Minimum Requirements for a

Comprehensive Managed Fall Protection
Program
ASSE/SAFE Z359.3 (2017) Safety Requirements for Lanyards

and Positioning Lanyards
ASSE/SAFE Z359.4 (2013) Safety Requirements for

Assisted-Rescue and Self-Rescue Systems,
Subsystems and Components
12/26/2018
ASSE/SAFE Z359.6 (2016) Specifications and Design

Requirements for Active Fall Protection
Systems
ASSE/SAFE Z359.7 (2011) Qualification and Verification

Testing of Fall Protection Products
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
ASME B30.20 (2013; INT Oct 2010 - May 2012)

Below-the-Hook Lifting Devices
ASME B30.22 (2016) Articulating Boom Cranes
ASME B30.26 (2015; INT Jun 2010 - Jun 2014) Rigging

Hardware
ASME B30.3 (2016) Tower Cranes
ASME B30.5 (2014) Mobile and Locomotive Cranes
ASME B30.8 (2015) Floating Cranes and Floating

Derricks
ASME B30.9 (2014; INT Feb 2011 - Nov 2013) Slings
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM F855 (2015) Standard Specifications for

Temporary Protective Grounds to Be Used on
De-energized Electric Power Lines and
Equipment
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)
IEEE 1048 (2003) Guide for Protective Grounding of

Power Lines
IEEE C2 (2017; Errata 1-2 2017; INT 1 2017)

National Electrical Safety Code
NFPA 10 (2018; TIA 18-1) Standard for Portable

Fire Extinguishers
NFPA 241 (2013; Errata 2015) Standard for

Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and
NFPA 51B (2014) Standard for Fire Prevention During

Welding, Cutting, and Other Hot Work
NFPA 70 (2017; ERTA 1-2 2017; TIA 17-1; TIA 17-2;

TIA 17-3; TIA 17-4; TIA 17-5; TIA 17-6;
TIA 17-7; TIA 17-8; TIA 17-9; TIA 17-10;
TIA 17-11; TIA 17-12; TIA 17-13; TIA
17-14) National Electrical Code
12/26/2018
NFPA 70E (2018; TIA 18-1; TIA 81-2) Standard for

Electrical Safety in the Workplace

Manual
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
29 CFR 1910 Occupational Safety and Health Standards
29 CFR 1910.147 Control of Hazardous Energy (Lock Out/Tag

Out)
29 CFR 1910.333 Selection and Use of Work Practices
29 CFR 1926.1400 Cranes and Derricks in Construction
29 CFR 1926.16 Rules of Construction
29 CFR 1926.450 Scaffolds
29 CFR 1926.500 Fall Protection
1.2 DEFINITIONS
The CP is a person designated in writing, who, through training, knowledge

and experience, is capable of identifying, evaluating, and addressing
existing and predictable hazards in the working environment or working
conditions that are dangerous to personnel, and who has authorization to
take prompt corrective measures with regards to such hazards.
1.2.2 Competent Person, Cranes and Rigging
The CP, Cranes and Rigging, as defined in EM 385-1-1 Appendix Q, is a

person meeting the competent person, who has been designated in writing to
be responsible for the immediate supervision, implementation and monitoring
of the Crane and Rigging Program, who through training, knowledge and
experience in crane and rigging is capable of identifying, evaluating and
addressing existing and potential hazards and, who has the authority to
take prompt corrective measures with regard to such hazards.
1.2.3 Competent Person, Fall Protection
The CP, Fall Protection, is a person meeting the competent person

requirements as defined in EM 385-1-1 Appendix Q and in accordance with
ASSE/SAFE Z359.0, who has been designated in writing by the employer to be
responsible for immediate supervising, implementing and monitoring of the
fall protection program, who through training, knowledge and experience in
fall protection and rescue systems and equipment, is capable of
identifying, evaluating and addressing existing and potential fall hazards
and, who has the authority to take prompt corrective measures with regard
to such hazards.
12/26/2018
1.2.4 Competent Person, Scaffolding
The CP, Scaffolding is a person meeting the competent person requirements

in EM 385-1-1 Appendix Q, and designated in writing by the employer to be
responsible for immediate supervising, implementing and monitoring of the
scaffolding program. The CP for Scaffolding has enough training, knowledge
and experience in scaffolding to correctly identify, evaluate and address
existing and potential hazards and also has the authority to take prompt
corrective measures with regard to these hazards. CP qualifications must
be documented and include experience on the specific scaffolding
systems/types being used, assessment of the base material that the scaffold
will be erected upon, load calculations for materials and personnel, and
erection and dismantling. The CP for scaffolding must have a documented,
minimum of 8-hours of scaffold training to include training on the specific
type of scaffold being used (e.g. mast-climbing, adjustable, tubular
frame), in accordance with EM 385-1-1 Section 22.B.02.
1.2.5 Competent Person (CP) Trainer
A competent person trainer as defined in EM 385-1-1 Appendix Q, who is

qualified in the material presented, and who possesses a working knowledge
of applicable technical regulations, standards, equipment and systems
related to the subject matter on which they are training Competent
Persons. A competent person trainer must be familiar with the typical
hazards and the equipment used in the industry they are instructing. The
training provided by the competent person trainer must be appropriate to
that specific industry. The competent person trainer must evaluate the
knowledge and skills of the competent persons as part of the training
process.
1.2.6 High Risk Activities
High Risk Activities are activities that involve work at heights, crane and
rigging, excavations and trenching, scaffolding, electrical work, and
confined space entry.
1.2.7 High Visibility Accident
A High Visibility Accident is any mishap which may generate publicity or

high visibility.
LHE is a term used to describe cranes, hoists and all other hoisting
equipment (hoisting equipment means equipment, including crane, derricks,
hoists and power operated equipment used with rigging to raise, lower or
horizontally move a load).
1.2.9 Medical Treatment
Medical Treatment is treatment administered by a physician or by registered

professional personnel under the standing orders of a physician. Medical
treatment does not include first aid treatment even through provided by a
physician or registered personnel.
1.2.10 Near Miss
A Near Miss is a mishap resulting in no personal injury and zero property

damage, but given a shift in time or position, damage or injury may have
12/26/2018
occurred (e.g., a worker falls off a scaffold and is not injured; a crane
swings around to move the load and narrowly misses a parked vehicle).
1.2.11 Operating Envelope
The Operating Envelope is the area surrounding any crane or load handling
equipment. Inside this "envelope" is the crane, the Crane Operator, riggers
and crane walkers, other personnel involved in the operation, rigging gear
between the hook, the load, the crane's supporting structure (i.e. ground
or rail), the load's rigging path, the lift and rigging procedure.
1.2.12 Qualified Person (QP)
The QP is a person designated in writing, who, by possession of a

recognized degree, certificate, or professional standing, or extensive
knowledge, training, and experience, has successfully demonstrated their
ability to solve or resolve problems related to the subject matter, the
work, or the project.
1.2.13 Qualified Person, Fall Protection (QP for FP)
A QP for FP is a person meeting the requirements of EM 385-1-1 Appendix Q,

and ASSE/SAFE Z359.0, with a recognized degree or professional certificate
and with extensive knowledge, training and experience in the fall
protection and rescue field who is capable of designing, analyzing, and
evaluating and specifying fall protection and rescue systems.
1.2.14 Recordable Injuries or Illnesses
Recordable Injuries or Illnesses are any work-related injury or illness

that results in:
a. Death, regardless of the time between the injury and death, or the
length of the illness;
b. Days away from work (any time lost after day of injury/illness
onset);
c. Restricted work;
d. Transfer to another job;
e. Medical treatment beyond first aid;
f. Loss of consciousness; or
g. A significant injury or illness diagnosed by a physician or other

licensed health care professional, even if it did not result in (a)
through (f) above.
1.2.15 USACE Property and Equipment
Interpret "USACE" property and equipment specified in USACE EM 385-1-1 as

Government property and equipment.
1.2.16 Load Handling Equipment (LHE) Accident or Load Handling Equipment

Mishap
A LHE accident occurs when any one or more of the eight elements in the
12/26/2018
operating envelope fails to perform correctly during operation, including

operation during maintenance or testing resulting in personnel injury or
death; material or equipment damage; dropped load; derailment;
two-blocking; overload; or collision, including unplanned contact between
the load, crane, or other objects. A dropped load, derailment,
two-blocking, overload and collision are considered accidents, even though
no material damage or injury occurs. A component failure (e.g., motor
burnout, gear tooth failure, bearing failure) is not considered an accident
solely due to material or equipment damage unless the component failure
results in damage to other components (e.g., dropped boom, dropped load, or
roll over). Document any mishap that meets the criteria described in the
Contractor Significant Incident Report (CSIR).
1.3 SUBMITTALS

approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
Accident Prevention Plan (APP); G
Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA)
Crane Operators/Riggers
Standard Lift Plan
Critical Lift Plan
Proof of qualification for Crane Operator
SD-06 Test Reports
Notifications and Reports
Accident Reports; G
LHE Inspection Reports
SD-07 Certificates
Hot Work Permit
Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA)
Certificate of Compliance
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
In addition to the detailed requirements included in the provisions of this

contract, comply with the most recent edition of USACE EM 385-1-1, and the
following federal, state, and local laws, ordinances, criteria, rules and
regulations. Submit matters of interpretation of standards to the
appropriate administrative agency for resolution before starting work.
Where the requirements of this specification, applicable laws, criteria,
ordinances, regulations, and referenced documents vary, the most stringent
12/26/2018
requirements govern.
1.5 SITE QUALIFICATIONS, DUTIES, AND MEETINGS
1.5.1 Personnel Qualifications
1.5.1.1 Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO)
Provide an SSHO that meets the requirements of EM 385-1-1 Section 1. The

SSHO must ensure that the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.16 are met for the
project. Provide a Safety oversight team that includes a minimum of one
(1) person at each project site to function as the Site Safety and Health
Officer (SSHO). The SSHO or an equally-qualified Alternate SSHO must be at
the work site at all times to implement and administer the Contractor's
safety program and government-accepted Accident Prevention Plan. The SSHO
and Alternate SSHO must have the required training, experience, and
qualifications in accordance with EM 385-1-1 Section 01.A.17, and all
associated sub-paragraphs.
If the SSHO is off-site for a period longer than 24 hours, an

equally-qualified alternate SSHO must be provided and must fulfill the same
roles and responsibilities as the primary SSHO. When the SSHO is
temporarily (up to 24 hours) off-site, a Designated Representative (DR), as
identified in the AHA may be used in lieu of an Alternate SSHO, and must be
on the project site at all times when work is being performed. Note that
the DR is a collateral duty safety position, with safety duties in addition
to their full time occupation.
1.5.1.2 Contractor Quality Control (QC) Manager:
The Contractor Quality Control Manager can be the SSHO on this project.
1.5.1.3 Competent Person Qualifications
Provide Competent Persons in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Appendix Q and

herein. Competent Persons for high risk activities include confined space,
cranes and rigging, excavation/trenching, fall protection, and electrical
work. The CP for these activities must be designated in writing, and meet
the requirements for the specific activity (i.e. competent person, fall
protection).
The Competent Person identified in the Contractor's Safety and Health

Program and accepted Accident Prevention Plan, must be on-site at all times
when the work that presents the hazards associated with their professional
expertise is being performed. Provide the credentials of the Competent
Persons(s) to the the Contracting Officer for information in consultation
with the Safety Office.
1.5.1.3.1 Competent Person for Fall Protection
Provide a Competent Person for Fall Protection who meets the requirements
of EM 385-1-1, Section 21.C.04 and herein.
1.5.1.4 Qualified Trainer Requirements
Individuals qualified to instruct the 40 hour contract safety awareness

course, or portions thereof, must meet the definition of a Competent Person
Trainer, and, at a minimum, possess a working knowledge of the following
subject areas: EM 385-1-1, Electrical Standards,Lockout/Tagout, Fall
12/26/2018
Protection, Confined Space Entry for Construction; Excavation, Trenching

and Soil Mechanics, and Scaffolds in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.450,
Subpart L.
Instructors are required to:
a. Prepare class presentations that cover construction-related safety

requirements.
b. Ensure that all attendees attend all sessions by using a class roster
signed daily by each attendee. Maintain copies of the roster for at
least five (5) years. This is a certification class and must be
attended 100 percent. In cases of emergency where an attendee cannot
make it to a session, the attendee can make it up in another class
session for the same subject.
c. Update training course materials whenever an update of the EM 385-1-1

becomes available.
d. Provide a written exam of at least 50 questions. Students are required

to answer 80 percent correctly to pass.
e. Request, review and incorporate student feedback into a continuous

course improvement program.
1.5.1.5 Crane Operators/Riggers
Provide Operators meeting the requirements in EM 385-1-1, Section 15.B for

Riggers and Section 16.B for Crane Operators. In addition, for mobile
cranes with Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) rated capacities of
50,000 pounds or greater, designate crane operators qualified by a source
that qualifies crane operators (i.e., union, a government agency, or an
organization that tests and qualifies crane operators). Provide proof of
current qualification.
1.5.2 Personnel Duties
1.5.2.1 Duties of the Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO)
The SSHO must:
a. Conduct daily safety and health inspections and maintain a written log
which includes area/operation inspected, date of inspection, identified
hazards, recommended corrective actions, estimated and actual dates of
corrections. Attach safety inspection logs to the Contractors' daily
production report.
b. Conduct mishap investigations and complete required accident reports.

Report mishaps and near misses.
c. Use OSHA's Form 300 to log work-related injuries and illnesses

occurring on the project site for Prime Contractors and
subcontractors. Post and maintain the Form 300 on the site Safety
Bulletin Board.
d. Maintain applicable safety reference material on the job site.
e. Attend the pre-construction conference, pre-work meetings including

preparatory meetings, and periodic in-progress meetings.
12/26/2018
f. Review the APP and AHAs for compliance with EM 385-1-1, and approve,
sign, implement and enforce them.
g. Establish a Safety and Occupational Health (SOH) Deficiency Tracking

System that lists and monitors outstanding deficiencies until
resolution.
h. Ensure subcontractor compliance with safety and health requirements.
i. Maintain a list of hazardous chemicals on site and their Safety Data

Sheets (SDS).
j. Maintain a weekly list of high hazard activities involving energy,

equipment, excavation, entry into confined space, and elevation, and be
prepared to discuss details during QC Meetings.
k. Provide and keep a record of site safety orientation and indoctrination

for Contractor employees, subcontractor employees, and site visitors.
Superintendent, QC Manager, and SSHO are subject to dismissal if the above

duties are not being effectively carried out. If Superintendent, QC
Manager, or SSHO are dismissed, project work will be stopped and will not
be allowed to resume until a suitable replacement is approved and the above
duties are again being effectively carried out.
1.5.3 Meetings
1.5.3.1 Preconstruction Conference
a. Contractor representatives who have a responsibility or significant

role in accident prevention on the project must attend the
preconstruction conference. This includes the project superintendent,
Site Safety and Occupational Health officer, quality control manager,
or any other assigned safety and health professionals who participated
in the development of the APP (including the Activity Hazard Analyses
(AHAs) and special plans, program and procedures associated with it).
b. Discuss the details of the submitted APP to include incorporated plans,

programs, procedures and a listing of anticipated AHAs that will be
developed and implemented during the performance of the contract. This
list of proposed AHAs will be reviewed at the conference and an
agreement will be reached between the Contractor and the Contracting
Officer as to which phases will require an analysis. In addition,
establish a schedule for the preparation, submittal, and Government
review of AHAs to preclude project delays.
c. Deficiencies in the submitted APP, identified during the Contracting

Officer's review, must be corrected, and the APP re-submitted for
review prior to the start of construction. Work is not permitted to
begin work until an APP is established that is acceptable to the
1.5.3.2 Safety Meetings
Conduct safety meetings to review past activities, plan for new or changed
operations, review pertinent aspects of appropriate AHA (by trade),
establish safe working procedures for anticipated hazards, and provide
pertinent Safety and Occupational Health (SOH) training and motivation.
12/26/2018
Conduct meetings at least once a month for all supervisors on the project
location. The SSHO, supervisors, foremen, or CDSOs must conduct meetings
at least once a week for the trade workers. Document meeting minutes to
include the date, persons in attendance, subjects discussed, and names of
individual(s) who conducted the meeting. Maintain documentation on-site
and furnish copies to the Contracting Officer on request. Notify the
Contracting Officer of all scheduled meetings 7 calendar days in advance.
1.6 ACCIDENT PREVENTION PLAN (APP)
A qualified person must prepare the written site-specific APP. Prepare the
APP in accordance with the format and requirements of EM 385-1-1, Appendix
A, and as supplemented herein. Cover all paragraph and subparagraph
elements in EM 385-1-1, Appendix A. The APP must be job-specific and
address any unusual or unique aspects of the project or activity for which
it is written. The APP must interface with the Contractor's overall safety
and health program referenced in the APP in the applicable APP element, and
made site-specific. Describe the methods to evaluate past safety
performance of potential subcontractors in the selection process. Also,
describe innovative methods used to ensure and monitor safe work practices
of subcontractors. The Government considers the Prime Contractor to be the
"controlling authority" for all work site safety and health of the
subcontractors. Contractors are responsible for informing their
subcontractors of the safety provisions under the terms of the contract and
the penalties for noncompliance, coordinating the work to prevent one craft
from interfering with or creating hazardous working conditions for other
crafts, and inspecting subcontractor operations to ensure that accident
prevention responsibilities are being carried out. The APP must be signed
by an officer of the firm (Prime Contractor senior person), the individual
preparing the APP, the on-site superintendent, the designated SSHO, the
Contractor Quality Control Manager, and any designated Certified Safety
Professional (CSP) or Certified Health Physicist (CIH). The SSHO must
provide and maintain the APP and a log of signatures by each subcontractor
foreman, attesting that they have read and understand the APP, and make the
APP and log available on-site to the Contracting Officer. If English is
not the foreman's primary language, the Prime Contractor must provide an
interpreter.
Submit the APP to the Contracting Officer 15 calendar days prior to the
date of the preconstruction conference for acceptance. Work cannot proceed
without an accepted APP. Once reviewed and accepted by the Contracting
Officer, the APP and attachments will be enforced as part of the contract.
Disregarding the provisions of this contract or the accepted APP is cause
for stopping of work, at the discretion of the Contracting Officer, until
the matter has been rectified. Continuously review and amend the APP, as
necessary, throughout the life of the contract. Changes to the accepted
APP must be made with the knowledge and concurrence of the Contracting
Officer, project superintendent, SSHO and Quality Control Manager.
Incorporate unusual or high-hazard activities not identified in the
original APP as they are discovered. Should any severe hazard exposure (
i.e. imminent danger) become evident, stop work in the area, secure the
area, and develop a plan to remove the exposure and control the hazard.
Notify the Contracting Officer within 24 hours of discovery. Eliminate and
remove the hazard. In the interim, take all necessary action to restore
and maintain safe working conditions in order to safeguard onsite
personnel, visitors, the public (as defined by ASSE/SAFE A10.34), and the
environment.
12/26/2018
1.6.1 Names and Qualifications
Provide plans in accordance with the requirements outlined in Appendix A of

EM 385-1-1, including the following:
a. Names and qualifications (resumes including education, training,

experience and certifications) of site safety and health personnel
designated to perform work on this project to include the designated
Site Safety and Health Officer and other competent and qualified
personnel to be used. Specify the duties of each position.
b. Qualifications of competent and of qualified persons. As a minimum,

designate and submit qualifications of competent persons for each of
the following major areas: excavation; scaffolding; fall protection;
hazardous energy; confined space; health hazard recognition, evaluation
and control of chemical, physical and biological agents; and personal
protective equipment and clothing to include selection, use and
maintenance.
1.6.2 Plans
Provide plans in the APP in accordance with the requirements outlined in

Appendix A of EM 385-1-1, including the following:
1.6.2.1 Standard Lift Plan (SLP)
Plan lifts to avoid situations where the operator cannot maintain safe
control of the lift. Prepare a written SLP in accordance with EM 385-1-1,
Section 16.A.03, using Form 16-2 for every lift or series of lifts (if duty
cycle or routine lifts are being performed). The SLP must be developed,
reviewed and accepted by all personnel involved in the lift in conjunction
with the associated AHA. Signature on the AHA constitutes acceptance of
the plan. Maintain the SLP on the LHE for the current lift(s) being made.
Maintain historical SLPs for a minimum of 3 months.
1.6.2.2 Critical Lift Plan - Crane or Load Handling Equipment
Provide a Critical Lift Plan as required by EM 385-1-1, Section 16.H.01,

using Form 16-3. Critical lifts require detailed planning and additional
or unusual safety precautions. Develop and submit a critical lift plan to
the Contracting Officer 30 calendar days prior to critical lift. Comply
with load testing requirements in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section
16.F.03.
In addition to the requirements of EM 385-1-1, Section 16.H.02, the

critical lift plan must include the following:
a. For lifts of personnel, demonstrate compliance with the requirements of

29 CFR 1926.1400 and EM 385-1-1, Section 16.T.
b. Multi-purpose machines, material handling equipment, and construction

equipment used to lift loads that are suspended by rigging gear,
require proof of authorization from the machine OEM that the machine is
capable of making lifts of loads suspended by rigging equipment.
Demonstrate that the operator is properly trained and that the
equipment is properly configured to make such lifts and is equipped
with a load chart.
12/26/2018
1.6.2.3 Fall Protection and Prevention (FP&P) Plan
The plan must comply with the requirements of EM 385-1-1, Section 21.D and
ASSE/SAFE Z359.2, be site specific, and address all fall hazards in the
work place and during different phases of construction. Address how to
protect and prevent workers from falling to lower levels when they are
exposed to fall hazards above 6 feet. A competent person or qualified
person for fall protection must prepare and sign the plan documentation.
Include fall protection and prevention systems, equipment and methods
employed for every phase of work, roles and responsibilities, assisted
rescue, self-rescue and evacuation procedures, training requirements, and
monitoring methods. Review and revise, as necessary, the Fall Protection
and Prevention Plan documentation as conditions change, but at a minimum
every six months, for lengthy projects, reflecting any changes during the
course of construction due to changes in personnel, equipment, systems or
work habits. Keep and maintain the accepted Fall Protection and Prevention
Plan documentation at the job site for the duration of the project.
Include the Fall Protection and Prevention Plan documentation in the
Accident Prevention Plan (APP).
1.6.2.4 Rescue and Evacuation Plan
Provide a Rescue and Evacuation Plan in accordance with EM 385-1-1 Section

21.N and ASSE/SAFE Z359.2, and include in the FP&P Plan and as part of the
APP. Include a detailed discussion of the following: methods of rescue;
methods of self-rescue; equipment used; training requirement; specialized
training for the rescuers; procedures for requesting rescue and medical
assistance; and transportation routes to a medical facility.
1.6.2.5 Hazardous Energy Control Program (HECP)
Develop a HECP in accordance with EM 385-1-1 Section 12, 29 CFR 1910.147,

29 CFR 1910.333, ASSE/SAFE Z244.1, and ASSE/SAFE A10.44. Submit this HECP
as part of the Accident Prevention Plan (APP). Conduct a preparatory
meeting and inspection with all effected personnel to coordinate all HECP
activities. Document this meeting and inspection in accordance with
EM 385-1-1, Section 12.A.02. Ensure that each employee is familiar with
and complies with these procedures.
1.6.2.6 Occupant Protection Plan
Identify the safety and health aspects of lead-based paint removal,

prepared in accordance with Section.
1.6.2.7 Asbestos Hazard Abatement Plan
Identify the safety and health aspects of asbestos work, and prepare in
accordance with Section.
1.7 ACTIVITY HAZARD ANALYSIS (AHA)
Before beginning each activity, task or Definable Feature of Work (DFOW)

involving a type of work presenting hazards not experienced in previous
project operations, or where a new work crew or subcontractor is to perform
the work, the Contractor(s) performing that work activity must prepare an
AHA. AHAs must be developed by the Prime Contractor, subcontractor, or
supplier performing the work, and provided for Prime Contractor review and
approval before submitting to the Contracting Officer. AHAs must be signed
by the SSHO, Superintendent, QC Manager and the subcontractor Foreman
12/26/2018
performing the work. Format the AHA in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section
1 or as directed by the Contracting Officer. Submit the AHA for review at
least 15 working days prior to the start of each activity task, or DFOW.
The Government reserves the right to require the Contractor to revise and
resubmit the AHA if it fails to effectively identify the work sequences,
specific anticipated hazards, site conditions, equipment, materials,
personnel and the control measures to be implemented.
AHAs must identify competent persons required for phases involving high
risk activities, including confined entry, crane and rigging, excavations,
trenching, electrical work, fall protection, and scaffolding.
1.7.1 AHA Management
Review the AHA list periodically (at least monthly) at the Contractor
supervisory safety meeting, and update as necessary when procedures,
scheduling, or hazards change. Use the AHA during daily inspections by the
SSHO to ensure the implementation and effectiveness of the required safety
and health controls for that work activity.
1.7.2 AHA Signature Log
Each employee performing work as part of an activity, task or DFOW must

review the AHA for that work and sign a signature log specifically
maintained for that AHA prior to starting work on that activity. The SSHO
must maintain a signature log on site for every AHA. Provide employees
whose primary language is other than English, with an interpreter to ensure
a clear understanding of the AHA and its contents.
1.8 DISPLAY OF SAFETY INFORMATION
1.8.1 Safety Bulletin Board
Within one calendar day(s) after commencement of work, erect a safety

bulletin board at the job site. Where size, duration, or logistics of
project do not facilitate a bulletin board, an alternative method,
acceptable to the Contracting Officer, that is accessible and includes all
mandatory information for employee and visitor review, may be deemed as
meeting the requirement for a bulletin board. Include and maintain
information on safety bulletin board as required by EM 385-1-1, Section
01.A.06. Additional items required to be posted include:
a. Hot work permit.
1.8.2 Safety and Occupational Health (SOH) Deficiency Tracking System
Establish a SOH deficiency tracking system that lists and monitors the
status of SOH deficiencies in chronological order. Use the tracking system
to evaluate the effectiveness of the APP. A monthly evaluation of the data
must be discussed in the QC or SOH meeting with everyone on the project.
The list must be posted on the project bulletin board and updated daily,
and provide the following information:
a. Date deficiency identified;
b. Description of deficiency;
c. Name of person responsible for correcting deficiency;
12/26/2018
d. Projected resolution date;
e. Date actually resolved.
1.9 SITE SAFETY REFERENCE MATERIALS
Maintain safety-related references applicable to the project, including

those listed in paragraph REFERENCES. Maintain applicable equipment
manufacturer's manuals.
1.10 EMERGENCY MEDICAL TREATMENT
Contractors must arrange for their own emergency medical treatment.

Government has no responsibility to provide emergency medical treatment.
1.11 NOTIFICATIONS and REPORTS
1.11.1 Mishap Notification
Notify the Contracting Officer as soon as practical, but no more than

twenty-four hours, after any mishaps, including recordable accidents,
incidents, and near misses, as defined in EM 385-1-1 Appendix Q, any
report of injury, illness, load handling equipment (LHE) or rigging
mishaps, or any property damage. The Contractor is responsible for
obtaining appropriate medical and emergency assistance and for notifying
fire, law enforcement, and regulatory agencies. Immediate reporting is
required for electrical mishaps, to include Arc Flash; shock; uncontrolled
release of hazardous energy (includes electrical and non-electrical); load
handling equipment or rigging; fall from height (any level other than same
surface); and underwater diving. These mishaps must be investigated in
depth to identify all causes and to recommend hazard control measures.
Within notification include Contractor name; contract title; type of

contract; name of activity, installation or location where accident
occurred; date and time of accident; names of personnel injured; extent of
property damage, if any; extent of injury, if known, and brief description
of accident (for example, type of construction equipment used and PPE
used). Preserve the conditions and evidence on the accident site until the
Government investigation team arrives on-site and Government investigation
is conducted. Assist and cooperate fully with the Government's
investigation(s) of any mishap.
1.11.2 Accident Reports
a. Conduct an accident investigation for recordable injuries and

illnesses, property damage, and near misses as defined in EM 385-1-1,
to establish the root cause(s) of the accident. Complete the
applicable The Contracting Officer will provide copies of any required
or special forms.
b. Near Misses: Near miss reports are considered positive and proactive
Contractor safety management actions.
c. Conduct an accident investigation for any load handling equipment

accident (including rigging gear accidents) to establish the root
cause(s) of the accident. Complete the LHE Accident Report (Crane and
Rigging Gear) form and provide the report to the Contracting Officer
within 30 calendar days of the accident. Do not proceed with crane
operations until cause is determined and corrective actions have been
12/26/2018
implemented to the satisfaction of the Contracting Officer. The

Contracting Officer will provide a blank copy of the accident report
form.
1.11.3 LHE Inspection Reports
Submit LHE inspection reports required in accordance with EM 385-1-1 and as

specified herein with Daily Reports of Inspections.
1.11.4 Certificate of Compliance and Pre-lift Plan/Checklist for LHE and

Rigging
Provide a FORM 16-1 Certificate of Compliance for LHE entering an activity

under this contract and in accordance with EM 385-1-1. Post certifications
on the crane.
Develop a Standard Lift Plan (SLP) in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section

16.H.03 using Form 16-2 Standard Pre-Lift Crane Plan/Checklist for each
lift planned. Submit SLP to the Contracting Officer for approval within 15
calendar days in advance of planned lift.
1.12 HOT WORK
1.12.1 Permit and Personnel Requirements
Submit and obtain a written permit prior to performing "Hot Work" (i.e.
welding or cutting) or operating other flame-producing/spark producing
devices, from the Base Fire Dept. A permit is required from the Explosives
Safety Office for work in and around where explosives are processed,
stored, or handled. CONTRACTORS ARE REQUIRED TO MEET ALL CRITERIA BEFORE A
PERMIT IS ISSUED. Provide at least two 20 pound 4A:20 BC rated
extinguishers for normal "Hot Work". The extinguishers must be current
inspection tagged, and contain an approved safety pin and tamper resistant
seal. It is also mandatory to have a designated FIRE WATCH for any "Hot
Work" done at this activity. The Fire Watch must be trained in accordance
with NFPA 51B and remain on-site for a minimum of one hour after completion
of the task or as specified on the hot work permit.
When starting work in the facility, require personnel to familiarize

themselves with the location of the nearest fire alarm boxes and place in
memory the emergency Base Fire Dept. phone number. REPORT ANY FIRE, NO
MATTER HOW SMALL, TO THE RESPONSIBLE BASE FIRE DEPARTMENT IMMEDIATELY.
1.12.2 Work Around Flammable Materials
Obtain services from a NFPA Certified Marine Chemist for "HOT WORK" within
or around flammable materials (such as fuel systems or welding/cutting on
fuel pipes) or confined spaces (such as sewer wet wells, manholes, or
vaults) that have the potential for flammable or explosive atmospheres.
Whenever these materials, except beryllium and chromium (VI), are

encountered in indoor operations, local mechanical exhaust ventilation
systems that are sufficient to reduce and maintain personal exposures to
within acceptable limits must be used and maintained in accordance with
manufacturer's instruction and supplemented by exceptions noted in
EM 385-1-1, Section 06.H
12/26/2018
1.13 SEVERE STORM PLAN
In the event of a severe storm warning, the Contractor must:
a. Secure outside equipment and materials and place materials that could
be damaged in protected areas.
b. Check surrounding area, including roof, for loose material, equipment,

debris, and other objects that could be blown away or against existing
facilities.
c. Ensure that temporary erosion controls are adequate.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION AND OTHER WORK
Comply with EM 385-1-1, NFPA 70, NFPA 70E, NFPA 241, the APP, the AHA,
Federal and State OSHA regulations, and other related submittals and
activity fire and safety regulations. The most stringent standard prevails.
PPE is governed in all areas by the nature of the work the employee is
performing. Use personal hearing protection at all times in designated
noise hazardous areas or when performing noise hazardous tasks. Safety
glasses must be worn or carried/available on each person. Mandatory PPE
includes:
a. Hard Hat
b. Long Pants
c. Appropriate Safety Shoes
d. Appropriate Class Reflective Vests
3.1.1 Worksite Communication
Employees working alone in a remote location or away from other workers

must be provided an effective means of emergency communications (i.e.,
cellular phone, two-way radios, land-line telephones or other acceptable
means). The selected communication must be readily available (easily
within the immediate reach) of the employee and must be tested prior to the
start of work to verify that it effectively operates in the
area/environment. An employee check-in/check-out communication procedure
must be developed to ensure employee safety.
3.1.2 Hazardous Material Exclusions
Notwithstanding any other hazardous material used in this contract,

radioactive materials or instruments capable of producing
ionizing/non-ionizing radiation (with the exception of radioactive material
and devices used in accordance with EM 385-1-1 such as nuclear density
meters for compaction testing and laboratory equipment with radioactive
sources) as well as materials which contain asbestos, mercury or
polychlorinated biphenyls, di-isocyanates, lead-based paint, and hexavalent
chromium, are prohibited. The Contracting Officer, upon written request by
the Contractor, may consider exceptions to the use of any of the above
12/26/2018
excluded materials. Low mercury lamps used within fluorescent lighting

fixtures are allowed as an exception without further Contracting Officer
approval. Notify the Radiation Safety Officer (RSO) prior to excepted
items of radioactive material and devices being brought on base.
3.1.3 Unforeseen Hazardous Material
Contract documents identify materials such as PCB, lead paint, and friable
and non-friable asbestos and other OSHA regulated chemicals (i.e. 29 CFR
Part 1910.1000). If material(s) that may be hazardous to human health upon
disturbance are encountered during construction operations, stop that
portion of work and notify the Contracting Officer immediately. Within 14
calendar days the Government will determine if the material is hazardous.
If material is not hazardous or poses no danger, the Government will direct
the Contractor to proceed without change. If material is hazardous and
handling of the material is necessary to accomplish the work, the
Government will issue a modification pursuant to FAR 52.243-4, "Changes"
and FAR 52.236-2, "Differing Site Conditions."
3.2 PRE-OUTAGE COORDINATION MEETING
Apply for utility outages at least 14 days in advance. As a minimum, the

request must include the location of the outage, utilities being affected,
duration of outage and any necessary sketches. Special requirements for
electrical outage requests are contained elsewhere in this specification
section. Once approved, and prior to beginning work on the utility system
requiring shut down, attend a pre-outage coordination meeting with the
Contracting Officer to review the scope of work and the lock-out/tag-out
procedures for worker protection. No work will be performed on energized
electrical circuits unless proof is provided that no other means exist.
3.3 CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS ENERGY (LOCKOUT/TAGOUT)
Provide and operate a Hazardous Energy Control Program (HECP) in accordance

with EM 385-1-1 Section 12, 29 CFR 1910.333, 29 CFR 1910.147, and paragraph
HAZARDOUS ENERGY CONTROL PROGRAM (HECP).
3.4 FALL PROTECTION PROGRAM
Establish a fall protection program, for the protection of all employees

exposed to fall hazards. Within the program include company policy,
identify roles and responsibilities, education and training requirements,
fall hazard identification, prevention and control measures, inspection,
storage, care and maintenance of fall protection equipment and rescue and
evacuation procedures in accordance with ASSE/SAFE Z359.2 and EM 385-1-1,
Sections 21.A and 21.D.
3.4.1 Training
Institute a fall protection training program. As part of the Fall

Protection Program, provide training for each employee who might be exposed
to fall hazards. Provide training by a competent person for fall
protection in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 21.C. Document training
and practical application of the competent person in accordance with
EM 385-1-1, Section 21.C.04 and ASSE/SAFE Z359.2 in the AHA.
3.4.2 Fall Protection Equipment and Systems
Enforce use of personal fall protection equipment and systems designated
12/26/2018
(to include fall arrest, restraint, and positioning) for each specific work
activity in the Site Specific Fall Protection and Prevention Plan and AHA
at all times when an employee is exposed to a fall hazard. Protect
employees from fall hazards as specified in EM 385-1-1, Section 21.
Provide personal fall protection equipment, systems, subsystems, and

components that comply with EM 385-1-1 Section 21.I, 29 CFR 1926.500
Subpart M,ASSE/SAFE Z359.0, ASSE/SAFE Z359.1, ASSE/SAFE Z359.2,
ASSE/SAFE Z359.3, ASSE/SAFE Z359.4, ASSE/SAFE Z359.6, ASSE/SAFE Z359.7,
ASSE/SAFE Z359.11, ASSE/SAFE Z359.12, ASSE/SAFE Z359.13, ASSE/SAFE Z359.14,
and ASSE/SAFE Z359.15.
3.4.2.1 Additional Personal Fall Protection
In addition to the required fall protection systems, other protection such

as safety skiffs, personal floatation devices, and life rings, are required
when working above or next to water in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Sections
21.O through 21.O.06. Personal fall protection systems and equipment are
required when working from an articulating or extendible boom, swing
stages, or suspended platform. In addition, personal fall protection
systems are required when operating other equipment such as scissor lifts.
The need for tying-off in such equipment is to prevent ejection of the
employee from the equipment during raising, lowering, travel, or while
performing work.
3.4.2.2 Personal Fall Protection Harnesses
Only a full-body harness with a shock-absorbing lanyard or self-retracting

lanyard is an acceptable personal fall arrest body support device. The use
of body belts is not acceptable. Harnesses must have a fall arrest
attachment affixed to the body support (usually a Dorsal D-ring) and
specifically designated for attachment to the rest of the system. Snap
hooks and carabiners must be self-closing and self-locking, capable of
being opened only by at least two consecutive deliberate actions and have a
minimum gate strength of 3,600 lbs in all directions. Use webbing, straps,
and ropes made of synthetic fiber. The maximum free fall distance when
using fall arrest equipment must not exceed 6 feet, unless the proper
energy absorbing lanyard is used. Always take into consideration the total
fall distance and any swinging of the worker (pendulum-like motion), that
can occur during a fall, when attaching a person to a fall arrest system.
All full body harnesses must be equipped with Suspension Trauma Preventers
such as stirrups, relief steps, or similar in order to provide short-term
relief from the effects of orthostatic intolerance in accordance with
EM 385-1-1, Section 21.I.06.
3.4.3 Horizontal Lifelines (HLL)
Provide HLL in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 21.I.08.d.2.

Commercially manufactured horizontal lifelines (HLL) must be designed,
installed, certified and used, under the supervision of a qualified person,
for fall protection as part of a complete fall arrest system which
maintains a safety factor of 2 (29 CFR 1926.500). The competent person for
fall protection may (if deemed appropriate by the qualified person)
supervise the assembly, disassembly, use and inspection of the HLL system
under the direction of the qualified person. Locally manufactured HLLs are
not acceptable unless they are custom designed for limited or site specific
applications by a Registered Professional Engineer who is qualified in
designing HLL systems.
12/26/2018
3.4.4 Rescue and Evacuation Plan and Procedures
When personal fall arrest systems are used, ensure that the mishap victim
can self-rescue or can be rescued promptly should a fall occur. Prepare a
Rescue and Evacuation Plan and include a detailed discussion of the
following: methods of rescue; methods of self-rescue or assisted-rescue;
equipment used; training requirement; specialized training for the
rescuers; procedures for requesting rescue and medical assistance; and
transportation routes to a medical facility. Include the Rescue and
Evacuation Plan within the Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) for the phase of
work, in the Fall Protection and Prevention (FP&P) Plan, and the Accident
Prevention Plan (APP). The plan must comply with the requirements of
EM 385-1-1, ASSE/SAFE Z359.2, and ASSE/SAFE Z359.4.
3.5 WORK PLATFORMS
3.5.1 Scaffolding
Provide employees with a safe means of access to the work area on the
scaffold. Climbing of any scaffold braces or supports not specifically
designed for access is prohibited. Comply with the following requirements:
a. Scaffold platforms greater than 20 feet in height must be accessed by

use of a scaffold stair system.
b. Ladders commonly provided by scaffold system manufacturers are

prohibited for accessing scaffold platforms greater than 20 feet
maximum in height.
c. An adequate gate is required.
d. Employees performing scaffold erection and dismantling must be

qualified.
e. Scaffold must be capable of supporting at least four times the maximum

intended load or without appropriate fall protection as delineated in
the accepted fall protection and prevention plan.
f. Stationary scaffolds must be attached to structural building components

to safeguard against tipping forward or backward.
g. Special care must be given to ensure scaffold systems are not

overloaded.
h. Side brackets used to extend scaffold platforms on self-supported

scaffold systems for the storage of material are prohibited. The first
tie-in must be at the height equal to 4 times the width of the smallest
dimension of the scaffold base.
i. Scaffolding other than suspended types must bear on base plates upon
wood mudsills (2 in x 10 in x 8 in minimum) or other adequate firm
foundation.
j. Scaffold or work platform erectors must have fall protection during the
erection and dismantling of scaffolding or work platforms that are more
than six feet.
k. Delineate fall protection requirements when working above six feet or

above dangerous operations in the Fall Protection and Prevention (FP&P)
12/26/2018
Plan and Activity Hazard Analysis (AHA) for the phase of work.
3.5.2 Elevated Aerial Work Platforms (AWPs)
Workers must be anchored to the basket or bucket in accordance with

manufacturer's specifications and instructions (anchoring to the boom may
only be used when allowed by the manufacturer and permitted by the CP).
Lanyards used must be sufficiently short to prohibit worker from climbing out
of basket. The climbing of rails is prohibited. Lanyards with built-in
shock absorbers are acceptable. Self-retracting devices are not acceptable.
Tying off to an adjacent pole or structure is not permitted unless a safe
device for 100 percent tie-off is used for the transfer.
Use of AWPs must be operated, inspected, and maintained as specified in the

operating manual for the equipment and delineated in the AHA. Operators of
AWPs must be designated as qualified operators by the Prime Contractor.
Maintain proof of qualifications on site for review and include in the AHA.
3.6 EQUIPMENT
3.6.1 Material Handling Equipment (MHE)
a. Material handling equipment such as forklifts must not be modified with

work platform attachments for supporting employees unless specifically
delineated in the manufacturer's printed operating instructions.
Material handling equipment fitted with personnel work platform
attachments are prohibited from traveling or positioning while
personnel are working on the platform.
b. The use of hooks on equipment for lifting of material must be in

accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Material Handling
Equipment Operators must be trained in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1910,
Subpart N.
c. Operators of forklifts or power industrial trucks must be licensed in

accordance with OSHA.
a. Equip cranes and derricks as specified in EM 385-1-1, Section 16.
b. Notify the Contracting Officer 15 working days in advance of any LHE

entering the activity, in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 16.A.02,
so that necessary quality assurance spot checks can be coordinated.
Contractor's operator must remain with the crane during the spot
check. Rigging gear must comply with OSHA, ASME B30.9 Standards and
safety standards.
c. Comply with the LHE manufacturer's specifications and limitations for

erection and operation of cranes and hoists used in support of the
work. Perform erection under the supervision of a designated person
(as defined in ASME B30.5). Perform all testing in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommended procedures.
d. Comply with ASME B30.5 for mobile and locomotive cranes, ASME B30.22
for articulating boom cranes, ASME B30.3 for construction tower cranes,
ASME B30.8 for floating cranes and floating derricks, ASME B30.9 for
slings, ASME B30.20 for below the hook lifting devices and ASME B30.26
for rigging hardware.
12/26/2018
e. Under no circumstance must a Contractor make a lift at or above 90

percent of the cranes rated capacity in any configuration.
f. When operating in the vicinity of overhead transmission lines,

operators and riggers must be alert to this special hazard and follow
the requirements of EM 385-1-1 Section 11, and ASME B30.5 or ASME B30.22
as applicable.
g. Do not use crane suspended personnel work platforms (baskets) unless

the Contractor proves that using any other access to the work location
would provide a greater hazard to the workers or is impossible. Do not
lift personnel with a line hoist or friction crane. Additionally,
submit a specific AHA for this work to the Contracting Officer. Ensure
the activity and AHA are thoroughly reviewed by all involved personnel.
h. Inspect, maintain, and recharge portable fire extinguishers as

specified in NFPA 10, Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers.
i. All employees must keep clear of loads about to be lifted and of

suspended loads.
j. Use cribbing when performing lifts on outriggers.
k. The crane hook/block must be positioned directly over the load. Side
loading of the crane is prohibited.
l. A physical barricade must be positioned to prevent personnel access

where accessible areas of the LHE's rotating superstructure poses a
risk of striking, pinching or crushing personnel.
m. Maintain inspection records in accordance by EM 385-1-1, Section 16.D,

including shift, monthly, and annual inspections, the signature of the
person performing the inspection, and the serial number or other
identifier of the LHE that was inspected. Records must be available
for review by the Contracting Officer.
n. Maintain written reports of operational and load testing in accordance

with EM 385-1-1, Section 16.F, listing the load test procedures used
along with any repairs or alterations performed on the LHE. Reports
must be available for review by the Contracting Officer.
o. Certify that all LHE operators have been trained in proper use of all
safety devices (e.g. anti-two block devices).
p. Take steps to ensure that wind speed does not contribute to loss of
control of the load during lifting operations. At wind speeds greater
than 20 mph, the operator, rigger and lift supervisor must cease all
crane operations, evaluate conditions and determine if the lift may
proceed. Base the determination to proceed or not on wind calculations
per the manufacturer and a reduction in LHE rated capacity if
applicable. Include this maximum wind speed determination as part of
the activity hazard analysis plan for that operation.
3.6.3 Machinery and Mechanized Equipment
a. Proof of qualifications for operator must be kept on the project site

for review.
12/26/2018
b. Manufacture specifications or owner's manual for the equipment must be

on-site and reviewed for additional safety precautions or requirements
that are sometimes not identified by OSHA or USACE EM 385-1-1.
Incorporate such additional safety precautions or requirements into the
AHAs.
3.6.4 USE OF EXPLOSIVES (INCLUDING POWDER ACTUATED TOOL CARTRIDGES)
Explosives must not be used or brought to the project site without prior
written approval from the Contracting Officer. Such approval does not
relieve the Contractor of responsibility for injury to persons or for
damage to property due to blasting operations.
Storage of explosives, when permitted on Government property, must be only

where directed and in approved storage facilities. These facilities must
be kept locked at all times except for inspection, delivery, and withdrawal
of explosives.
3.7 ELECTRICAL
Perform electrical work in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Appendix A, Sections

11 and 12.
3.7.1 Conduct of Electrical Work
As delineated in EM 385-1-1, electrical work is to be conducted in a

de-energized state unless there is no alternative method for accomplishing
the work. In those cases obtain an energized work permit from the
Contracting Officer. The energized work permit application must be
accompanied by the AHA and a summary of why the equipment/circuit needs to
be worked energized. Underground electrical spaces must be certified safe
for entry before entering to conduct work. Cables that will be cut must be
positively identified and de-energized prior to performing each cut.
Attach temporary grounds in accordance with ASTM F855 and IEEE 1048.
Perform all high voltage cable cutting remotely using hydraulic cutting
tool. When racking in or live switching of circuit breakers, no additional
person other than the switch operator is allowed in the space during the
actual operation. Plan so that work near energized parts is minimized to
the fullest extent possible. Use of electrical outages clear of any
energized electrical sources is the preferred method.
When working in energized substations, only qualified electrical workers

are permitted to enter. When work requires work near energized circuits as
defined by NFPA 70, high voltage personnel must use personal protective
equipment that includes, as a minimum, electrical hard hat, safety shoes,
insulating gloves and electrical arc flash protection for personnel as
required by NFPA 70E. Insulating blankets, hearing protection, and
switching suits may also be required, depending on the specific job and as
delineated in the Contractor's AHA. Ensure that each employee is familiar
with and complies with these procedures and 29 CFR 1910.147.
Electrical work must be performed by QP personnel with verifiable

credentials who are familiar with applicable code requirements. Verifiable
credentials consist of State, National and Local Certifications or Licenses
that a Master or Journeyman Electrician may hold, depending on work being
performed, and must be identified in the appropriate AHA.
Journeyman/Apprentice ratio must be in accordance with State, Local and
12/26/2018
Host Nation requirements applicable to where work is being performed.
3.7.3 Grounding
Ground electrical circuits, equipment and enclosures in accordance with

NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 to provide a permanent, continuous and effective path
to ground unless otherwise noted by EM 385-1-1.
Check grounding circuits to ensure that the circuit between the ground and
a grounded power conductor has a resistance low enough to permit sufficient
current flow to allow the fuse or circuit breaker to interrupt the current.
3.7.4 Testing
Temporary electrical distribution systems and devices must be inspected,

tested and found acceptable for Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI)
protection, polarity, ground continuity, and ground resistance before
initial use, before use after modification and at least monthly. Monthly
inspections and tests must be maintained for each temporary electrical
distribution system, and signed by the electrical CP or QP.
12/26/2018
SECTION 01 42 00
SOURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS
11/14
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
1.2 ORDERING INFORMATION
PART 2 PRODUCTS
PART 3 EXECUTION
12/26/2018
SECTION 01 42 00
SOURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS

11/14
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
Various publications are referenced in other sections of the specifications

to establish requirements for the work. These references are identified in
each section by document number, date and title. The document number used
in the citation is the number assigned by the standards producing
organization (e.g. ASTM B564 Standard Specification for Nickel Alloy
Forgings). However, when the standards producing organization has not
assigned a number to a document, an identifying number has been assigned
for reference purposes.
1.2 ORDERING INFORMATION
The addresses of the standards publishing organizations whose documents are

referenced in other sections of these specifications are listed below, and
if the source of the publications is different from the address of the
sponsoring organization, that information is also provided. Documents
listed in the specifications with numbers which were not assigned by the
standards producing organization should be ordered from the source by title
rather than by number.
FLORIDA BUILDING CODES (FBC)

2601 Blair Stone Road, Tallahassee FL 32399 Phone: 850-487-1824
Internet:
CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC HEALTH (CDPH)

PO Box 997377, MS 0500
Sacramento, CA 95899-7377
FLORIDA STATUTES (FL-STAT) Law Book Distribution Office Room LL14,

The Capitol Tallahasee, FL 32399-1400 Ph: 904-488-2323
AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (AAMA)

1827 Walden Office Square, Suite 550
Schaumburg, IL 60173-4268
Ph: 847-303-5664
Fax: 847-303-5774
E-mail: customerservice@aamanet.org
Internet: http://www.aamanet.org
AMERICAN INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE ASSOCIATION (AIHA)

3141 Fairview Park Dr, Suite 777
Falls Church, VA 22042
Tel: 703-849-8888
Fax: 703-207-3561
E-mail: infonet@aiha.org
Internet http://www.aiha.org
12/26/2018
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION (AISC)

One East Wacker Drive, Suite 700
Chicago, IL 60601-1802
Ph: 312-670-2400
Fax: 312-670-5403
Bookstore: 800-644-2400
E-mail: aisc@ware-pak.com
Internet: http://www.aisc.org
AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL INSTITUTE (AISI)

25 Massachusetts Avenue, NW Suite 800
Washington, DC 20001
Ph: 202-452-7100
Internet: http://www.steel.org
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)

1899 L Street, NW,11th Floor
Ph: 202-293-8020
Fax: 202-293-9287
E-mail: storemanager@ansi.org
Internet: http://www.ansi.org/
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS (ASCE)

1801 Alexander Bell Drive
Reston, VA 20191
Ph: 703-295-6300; 800-548-2723
E-mail: member@asce.org
Internet: http://www.asce.org

1800 East Oakton Street
Des Plaines, IL 60018
Ph: 847-699-2929
Internet: http://www.asse.org
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SANITARY ENGINEERING (ASSE)

18927 Hickory Creek Drive, Suite 220
Mokena, IL 60448
Ph: 708-995-3019
Fax: 708-479-6139
E-mail: staffengineer@asse-plumbing.org
Internet: http://www.asse-plumbing.org
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)

13301 NW 47 Ave
Miami, FL 33054
Ph: 888-WELDING, 305-824-1177, 305-826-6192

Fax: 305-826-6195
E-mail: customer.service@awspubs.com
Internet: http://www.aws.org
AMERICAN WOOD COUNCIL (AWC)

222 Catoctin Circle SE, Suite 201
Leesburg, VA 20175
Ph: 800-890-7732
Fax: 412-741-0609
12/26/2018
E-mail: publications@awc.org
Internet: http://www.awc.org
AMERICAN WOOD PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (AWPA)

P.O. Box 361784
Birmingham, AL 35236-1784
Ph: 205-733-4077
Fax: 205-733-4075
Internet: http://www.awpa.com

Two Park Avenue, M/S 10E
New York, NY 10016-5990
Ph: 800-843-2763
Fax: 973-882-1717
E-mail: customercare@asme.org
Internet: http://www.asme.org
ASPHALT ROOFING MANUFACTURER'S ASSOCIATION (ARMA)

750 National Press Building
529 14th Street, NW
Washington D.C. 20045
Ph: 202-591-2450
Fax: 202-591-2445
Internet: http://www.asphaltroofing.org

100 Barr Harbor Drive, P.O. Box C700
West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959
Ph: 877-909-2786
Internet: http://www.astm.org
COPPER DEVELOPMENT ASSOCIATION (CDA)

Internet: http://www.copper.org
FLORIDA ADMINISTRATIVE CODE (FAC)

Darby Printing Co.
6215 Purdue Drive
Atlanta, GA 30336
Ph: 1-800-241-5292
Fax: 404-346-3332
FM GLOBAL (FM)
270 Central Avenue
P.O. Box 7500
Johnston, RI 02919-4923
Ph: 877-364-6726
Fax: 401-275-3029
E-mail: servicedesk.myrisk@fmglobal.com
Internet: http://www.fmglobal.com

445 and 501 Hoes Lane
Piscataway, NJ 08854-4141
Ph: 732-981-0060 or 800-701-4333
Fax: 732-562-9667
E-mail: onlinesupport@ieee.org
Internet: http://www.ieee.org
12/26/2018
INSTITUTE OF INSPECTION, CLEANING, AND RESTORATION CERTIFICATION

(IICRC)
IICRC Headquarters
4317 NE Thurston Way, Suite 200
Vancouver, WA 98662
Ph: 360-693-5675
Fax: 360-693-4858
E-mail: info@iicrc.org
Internet: http://www.iicrc.org/home
INTERNATIONAL AIR TRANSPORT ASSOCIATION (IATA)

800 Place Victoria
PO Box 113
Montréal, Quebec, H4Z 1M1
Ph: 514-390-6726 or 800-716-6326
Fax: 514-874-9659
E-mail: custserv@iata.org
Internet: http://www.iata.org
INTERNATIONAL SAFETY EQUIPMENT ASSOCIATION (ISEA)

1901 North Moore Street
Arlington, VA 22209-1762
Ph: 703-525-1695
Fax: 703-528-2148
Internet: http://www.safetyequipment.org/
MASTER PAINTERS INSTITUTE (MPI)

2800 Ingleton Avenue
Burnaby, BC CANADA V5C 6G7
Ph: 1-888-674-8937
Fax: 1-888-211-8708
E-mail: info@paintinfo.com or techservices@mpi.net
Internet: http://www.mpi.net/
METAL BUILDING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (MBMA)

1300 Sumner Avenue
Cleveland, OH 44115-2851
Ph: 216-241-7333
Fax: 216-241-0105
E-mail: mbma@mbma.com
Internet: http://www.mbma.com
MIDWEST ROOFING CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (MRCA)

8735 W Higgins Road
Suite 300
Chicago, IL 60631
Ph: 800-497-6722
Fax: 847-375-6473
E-mail: info@mrca.org
Internet: General Information: http://www.mrca.org
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)

1300 North 17th Street, Suite 900
Arlington, VA 22209
Ph: 703-841-3200
Internet: http://www.nema.org/

1 Batterymarch Park
12/26/2018
Quincy, MA 02169-7471
Ph: 617-770-3000
Fax: 617-770-0700
Internet: http://www.nfpa.org
NATIONAL ROOFING CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (NRCA)

10255 West Higgins Road, Suite 600
Rosemont, IL 60018-5607
Ph: 866-275-6722 (866-ASK-NRCA)
Fax: 847-299-1183
E-mail: info@nrca.net
Internet: http://www.nrca.net
SCIENTIFIC CERTIFICATION SYSTEMS (SCS)

2000 Powell Street, Suite 600
Emeryville, CA 94608
Ph: 800-326-3228
E-mail: info@SCSglobal services.com
Internet: http://www.scsglobalservices.com/
SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS' NATIONAL ASSOCIATION

(SMACNA)
4201 Lafayette Center Drive
Chantilly, VA 20151-1219
Ph: 703-803-2980
Fax: 703-803-3732
Internet: http://www.smacna.org
SINGLE PLY ROOFING INDUSTRY (SPRI)

411 Waverley Oaks Road, Suite 331B
Waltham, MA 02452
Ph: 781-647-7026
Fax: 781-647-7222
E-mail: info@spri.org
Internet: http://www.spri.org
SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)

40 24th Street, 6th Floor
Pittsburgh, PA 15222
Ph: 412-281-2331
Fax: 412-281-9992
E-mail: info@sspc.org
Internet: http://www.sspc.org
SOUTH COAST AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT DISTRICT (SCAQMD)

21865 Copley Drive
Diamond Bar, CA 91765
Ph: 909-396-2000
E-mail: webinquiry@aqmd.gov
Internet: http://www.aqmd.gov

Air Force Publishing Distribution Center
Ph: 202-404-2438Internet: http://www.e-publishing.af.mil/

CRD-C DOCUMENTS available on Internet:
http://www.wbdg.org/ccb/browse_cat.php?c=68
Order Other Documents from:
12/26/2018
USACE Publications Depot

Attn: CEHEC-IM-PD
2803 52nd Avenue
Hyattsville, MD 20781-1102
Ph: 301-394-0081
Fax: 301-394-0084
E-mail: pubs-army@usace.army.mil
Internet: http://www.publications.usace.army.mil/
or
http://www.hnc.usace.army.mil/Missions/Engineering/TECHINFO.aspx
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF HOUSING AND URBAN DEVELOPMENT (HUD)

HUD User
P.O. Box 23268
Washington, DC 20026-3268
Ph: 800-245-2691 or 202-708-3178
TDD: 800-927-7589
Fax: 202-708-9981
Internet: http://www.huduser.org
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION (DOT)

1200 New Jersey Ave. SE
Ph: 202-366-4000
Internet: http://www.dot.gov

8601 Adelphi Road
College Park, MD 20740-6001
Ph: 866-272-6272
Fax: 301-837-0483
Internet: http://www.archives.gov
Order documents from:
Superintendent of Documents
U.S.Government Printing Office (GPO)
710 North Capitol Street, NW
Ph: 202-512-1800
Fax: 202-512-2104
E-mail: contactcenter@gpo.gov
Internet: http://www.gpoaccess.gov
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)

2600 N.W. Lake Road
Camas, WA 98607-8542
Ph: 877-854-3577
E-mail: CEC.us@us.ul.com
Internet: http://www.ul.com/
UL Directories available through IHS at http://www.ihs.com
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not used
12/26/2018
12/26/2018
SECTION 01 57 19
TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
11/15
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 Class I and II Ozone Depleting Substance (ODS)
1.2.2 Contractor Generated Hazardous Waste
1.2.3 Electronics Waste
1.2.4 Environmental Pollution and Damage
1.2.5 Environmental Protection
1.2.6 Hazardous Debris
1.2.8 Hazardous Waste
1.2.9 Land Application
1.2.10 Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System (MS4) Permit
1.2.11 National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES)
1.2.12 Oily Waste
1.2.13 Regulated Waste
1.2.14 Sediment
1.2.15 Solid Waste
1.2.15.1 Debris
1.2.15.2 Green Waste
1.2.15.3 Material not regulated as solid waste
1.2.15.4 Non-Hazardous Waste
1.2.15.5 Recyclables
1.2.15.6 Surplus Soil
1.2.15.7 Scrap Metal
1.2.15.8 Wood
1.2.16 Surface Discharge
1.2.17 Wastewater
1.2.17.1 Stormwater
1.2.18 Waters of the United States
1.2.19 Wetlands
1.2.20 Universal Waste
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS
1.4.1 Conformance with the Environmental Management System
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5.1 Preconstruction Survey and Protection of Features
1.5.2 Regulatory Notifications
1.5.3 Environmental Brief
1.5.4 Environmental Manager
1.5.5 Employee Training Records
1.5.6 Non-Compliance Notifications
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PLAN
1.6.1 General Overview and Purpose
1.6.1.1 Duties
12/26/2018
1.6.1.2 Procedures
1.6.1.3 Communications
1.6.1.4 Contact Information
1.6.2 General Site Information
1.6.2.1 Drawings
1.6.2.2 Work Area
1.6.2.3 Documentation
1.6.3 Management of Natural Resources
1.6.4 Protection of Historical and Archaeological Resources
1.6.5 Stormwater Management and Control
1.6.6 Protection of the Environment from Waste Derived from
Contractor Operations
1.6.7 Prevention of Releases to the Environment
1.6.8 Regulatory Notification and Permits
1.6.9 Clean Air Act Compliance
1.6.9.1 Haul Route
1.6.9.2 Pollution Generating Equipment
1.6.9.3 Stationary Internal Combustion Engines
1.6.9.4 Compliant Materials
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL RECORDS BINDER
1.8 SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT PERMIT
1.8.1 Solid Waste Management Report
PART 2 PRODUCTS
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION OF NATURAL RESOURCES

3.1.1 Flow Ways
3.1.2 Vegetation
3.1.3 Streams
3.2 STORMWATER
3.2.1 Erosion and Sediment Control Measures
3.2.2 Work Area Limits
3.2.3 Contractor Facilities and Work Areas
3.2.4 Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System (MS4) Management
3.3 WASTE MINIMIZATION
3.3.1 Salvage, Reuse and Recycle
3.3.2 Nonhazardous Solid Waste Diversion Report
3.4 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
3.4.1 Waste Determination Documentation
3.4.2 Solid Waste Management
3.4.2.1 Solid Waste Management Report
3.4.2.2 Control and Management of Solid Wastes
3.4.3 Control and Management of Hazardous Waste
3.4.3.1 Hazardous Waste/Debris Management
3.4.3.2 Universal Waste Management
3.4.3.3 Disposal Documentation for Hazardous and Regulated Waste
3.4.4 Releases/Spills of Oil and Hazardous Substances
3.4.4.1 Response and Notifications
3.4.4.2 Clean Up
3.4.5 Mercury Materials
3.4.6 Wastewater
3.4.6.1 Disposal of wastewater must be as specified below.
3.4.6.1.1 Treatment
3.4.6.1.2 Surface Discharge
3.4.6.1.3 Land Application
3.5 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL MANAGEMENT
12/26/2018
3.6 CONTROL AND MANAGEMENT OF ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIAL (ACM)

3.7 CONTROL AND MANAGEMENT OF LEAD-BASED PAINT (LBP)
3.8 PETROLEUM, OIL, LUBRICANT (POL) STORAGE AND FUELING
3.8.1 Used Oil Management
3.8.2 Oil Storage Including Fuel Tanks
3.9 INADVERTENT DISCOVERY OF PETROLEUM-CONTAMINATED SOIL OR HAZARDOUS
WASTES
3.10 CHLORDANE
3.11 SOUND INTRUSION
3.12 POST CONSTRUCTION CLEANUP
12/26/2018
SECTION 01 57 19
TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS

11/15
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

29 CFR 1910.120 Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency

Response
40 CFR 112 Oil Pollution Prevention
40 CFR 241 Guidelines for Disposal of Solid Waste
40 CFR 243 Guidelines for the Storage and Collection

of Residential, Commercial, and
Institutional Solid Waste
40 CFR 258 Subtitle D Landfill Requirements
40 CFR 261 Identification and Listing of Hazardous

Waste
40 CFR 261.7 Residues of Hazardous Waste in Empty

Containers
40 CFR 262 Standards Applicable to Generators of

Hazardous Waste
40 CFR 263 Standards Applicable to Transporters of

Hazardous Waste
40 CFR 264 Standards for Owners and Operators of

Hazardous Waste Treatment, Storage, and
Disposal Facilities
40 CFR 265 Interim Status Standards for Owners and

Operators of Hazardous Waste Treatment,
Storage, and Disposal Facilities
40 CFR 266 Standards for the Management of Specific

Hazardous Wastes and Specific Types of
Hazardous Waste Management Facilities
40 CFR 268 Land Disposal Restrictions
40 CFR 273 Standards For Universal Waste Management
12/26/2018
40 CFR 273.2 Standards for Universal Waste Management -

Batteries

Mercury Containing Equipment

Lamps
40 CFR 279 Standards for the Management of Used Oil
40 CFR 300 National Oil and Hazardous Substances

Pollution Contingency Plan
40 CFR 300.125 National Oil and Hazardous Substances

Pollution Contingency Plan - Notification
and Communications
40 CFR 355 Emergency Planning and Notification
40 CFR 60 Standards of Performance for New

Stationary Sources
40 CFR 61 National Emission Standards for Hazardous

Air Pollutants

Air Pollutants for Source Categories
40 CFR 745 Lead-Based Paint Poisoning Prevention in

Certain Residential Structures
49 CFR 171 General Information, Regulations, and

Definitions
49 CFR 172 Hazardous Materials Table, Special

Provisions, Hazardous Materials
Communications, Emergency Response
Information, and Training Requirements
49 CFR 173 Shippers - General Requirements for

Shipments and Packagings
49 CFR 178 Specifications for Packagings
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 Class I and II Ozone Depleting Substance (ODS)
Class I ODS is defined in Section 602(a) of The Clean Air Act. A list of
Class I ODS can be found on the EPA website at the following weblink.
http://www.epa.gov/ozone/science/ods/classone.html.
Class II ODS is defined in Section 602(s) of The Clean Air Act. A list of
Class II ODS can be found on the EPA website at the following weblink.
http://www.epa.gov/ozone/science/ods/classtwo.html.
12/26/2018
1.2.2 Contractor Generated Hazardous Waste
Contractor generated hazardous waste is materials that, if abandoned or

disposed of, may meet the definition of a hazardous waste. These waste
streams would typically consist of material brought on site by the
Contractor to execute work, but are not fully consumed during the course of
construction. Examples include, but are not limited to, excess paint
thinners (i.e. methyl ethyl ketone, toluene), waste thinners, excess
paints, excess solvents, waste solvents, excess pesticides, and
contaminated pesticide equipment rinse water.
1.2.3 Electronics Waste
Electronics waste is discarded electronic devices intended for salvage,

recycling, or disposal.
1.2.4 Environmental Pollution and Damage
Environmental pollution and damage is the presence of chemical, physical,

or biological elements or agents which adversely affect human health or
welfare; unfavorably alter ecological balances of importance to human life;
affect other species of importance to humankind; or degrade the environment
aesthetically, culturally or historically.
1.2.5 Environmental Protection
Environmental protection is the prevention/control of pollution and habitat

disruption that may occur to the environment during construction. The
control of environmental pollution and damage requires consideration of
land, water, and air; biological and cultural resources; and includes
management of visual aesthetics; noise; solid, chemical, gaseous, and
liquid waste; radiant energy and radioactive material as well as other
pollutants.
1.2.6 Hazardous Debris
As defined in paragraph SOLID WASTE, debris that contains listed hazardous

waste (either on the debris surface, or in its interstices, such as pore
structure) in accordance with 40 CFR 261. Hazardous debris also includes
debris that exhibits a characteristic of hazardous waste in accordance with
40 CFR 261.
Hazardous materials as defined in 49 CFR 171 and listed in 49 CFR 172.
Hazardous material is any material that: Is regulated as a hazardous

material in accordance with 49 CFR 173; or requires a Safety Data Sheet
(SDS) in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.120; or during end use, treatment,
handling, packaging, storage, transportation, or disposal meets or has
components that meet or have potential to meet the definition of a
hazardous waste as defined by 40 CFR 261 Subparts A, B, C, or D.
Designation of a material by this definition, when separately regulated or
controlled by other sections or directives, does not eliminate the need for
adherence to that hazard-specific guidance which takes precedence over this
section for "control" purposes. Such material includes ammunition,
weapons, explosive actuated devices, propellants, pyrotechnics, chemical
and biological warfare materials, medical and pharmaceutical supplies,
medical waste and infectious materials, bulk fuels, radioactive materials,
12/26/2018
and other materials such as asbestos, mercury, and polychlorinated

biphenyls (PCBs).
Hazardous Waste is any material that meets the definition of a solid waste
and exhibit a hazardous characteristic (ignitability, corrosivity,
reactivity, or toxicity) as specified in 40 CFR 261, Subpart C, or contains
a listed hazardous waste as identified in 40 CFR 261, Subpart D.
1.2.9 Land Application
Land Application means spreading or spraying discharge water at a rate that

allows the water to percolate into the soil. No sheeting action, soil
erosion, discharge into storm sewers, discharge into defined drainage
areas, or discharge into the "waters of the United States" must occur.
Comply with federal, state, and local laws and regulations.
1.2.10 Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System (MS4) Permit
MS4 permits are those held by installations to obtain NPDES permit coverage
for their stormwater discharges.
1.2.11 National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES)
The NPDES permit program controls water pollution by regulating point

sources that discharge pollutants into waters of the United States.
1.2.12 Oily Waste
Oily waste are those materials that are, or were, mixed with Petroleum,
Oils, and Lubricants (POLs) and have become separated from that POLs. Oily
wastes also means materials, including wastewaters, centrifuge solids,
filter residues or sludges, bottom sediments, tank bottoms, and sorbents
which have come into contact with and have been contaminated by, POLs and
may be appropriately tested and discarded in a manner which is in
compliance with other state and local requirements.
This definition includes materials such as oily rags, "kitty litter"

sorbent clay and organic sorbent material. These materials may be land
filled provided that: It is not prohibited in other state regulations or
local ordinances; the amount generated is "de minimus" (a small amount); it
is the result of minor leaks or spills resulting from normal process
operations; and free-flowing oil has been removed to the practicable extent
possible. Large quantities of this material, generated as a result of a
major spill or in lieu of proper maintenance of the processing equipment,
are a solid waste. As a solid waste, perform a hazardous waste
determination prior to disposal. As this can be an expensive process, it
is recommended that this type of waste be minimized through good
housekeeping practices and employee education.
1.2.13 Regulated Waste
Regulated waste are solid wastes that have specific additional federal,
state, or local controls for handling, storage, or disposal.
1.2.14 Sediment
Sediment is soil and other debris that have eroded and have been
12/26/2018
transported by runoff water or wind.
1.2.15 Solid Waste
Solid waste is a solid, liquid, semi-solid or contained gaseous waste. A

solid waste can be a hazardous waste, non-hazardous waste, or non-Resource
Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) regulated waste. Types of solid waste
typically generated at construction sites may include:
1.2.15.1 Debris
Debris is non-hazardous solid material generated during the construction,

demolition, or renovation of a structure that exceeds 2.5-inch particle
size that is: a manufactured object; plant or animal matter; or natural
geologic material (for example, cobbles and boulders), broken or removed
concrete, masonry, and rock asphalt paving; ceramics; roofing paper and
shingles. Inert materials may be reinforced with or contain ferrous wire,
rods, accessories and weldments. A mixture of debris and other material
such as soil or sludge is also subject to regulation as debris if the
mixture is comprised primarily of debris by volume, based on visual
inspection.
1.2.15.2 Green Waste
Green waste is the vegetative matter from landscaping, land clearing and
grubbing, including, but not limited to, grass, bushes, scrubs, small trees
and saplings, tree stumps and plant roots. Marketable trees, grasses and
plants that are indicated to remain, be re-located, or be re-used are not
included.
1.2.15.3 Material not regulated as solid waste
Material not regulated as solid waste is nuclear source or byproduct

materials regulated under the Federal Atomic Energy Act of 1954 as amended;
suspended or dissolved materials in domestic sewage effluent or irrigation
return flows, or other regulated point source discharges; regulated air
emissions; and fluids or wastes associated with natural gas or crude oil
exploration or production.
1.2.15.4 Non-Hazardous Waste
Non-hazardous waste is waste that is excluded from, or does not meet,

hazardous waste criteria in accordance with 40 CFR 263.
1.2.15.5 Recyclables
Recyclables are materials, equipment and assemblies such as doors, windows,

door and window frames, plumbing fixtures, glazing and mirrors that are
recovered and sold as recyclable, wiring, insulated/non-insulated copper
wire cable, wire rope, and structural components. It also includes
commercial-grade refrigeration equipment with Freon removed, household
appliances where the basic material content is metal, clean polyethylene
terephthalate bottles, cooking oil, used fuel oil, textiles, high-grade
paper products and corrugated cardboard, stackable pallets in good
condition, clean crating material, and clean rubber/vehicle tires. Metal
meeting the definition of lead contaminated or lead based paint
contaminated may not be included as recyclable if sold to a scrap metal
company. Paint cans that meet the definition of empty containers in
accordance with 40 CFR 261.7 may be included as recyclable if sold to a
12/26/2018
scrap metal company.
1.2.15.6 Surplus Soil
Surplus soil is existing soil that is in excess of what is required for

this work, including aggregates intended, but not used, for on-site mixing
of concrete, mortars, and paving. Contaminated soil meeting the definition
of hazardous material or hazardous waste is not included and must be
managed in accordance with paragraph HAZARDOUS MATERIAL MANAGEMENT.
1.2.15.7 Scrap Metal
This includes scrap and excess ferrous and non-ferrous metals such as
reinforcing steel, structural shapes, pipe, and wire that are recovered or
collected and disposed of as scrap. Scrap metal meeting the definition of
hazardous material or hazardous waste is not included.
1.2.15.8 Wood
Wood is dimension and non-dimension lumber, plywood, chipboard, hardboard.

Treated or painted wood that meets the definition of lead contaminated or
lead based contaminated paint is not included. Treated wood includes, but
is not limited to, lumber, utility poles, crossties, and other wood
products with chemical treatment.
1.2.16 Surface Discharge
Surface discharge means discharge of water into drainage ditches, storm

sewers, creeks or "waters of the United States". Surface discharges are
discrete, identifiable sources and require a permit from the governing
agency. Comply with federal, state, and local laws and regulations.
1.2.17 Wastewater
Wastewater is the used water and solids from a community that flow to a
treatment plant.
1.2.17.1 Stormwater
Stormwater is any precipitation in an urban or suburban area that does not

evaporate or soak into the ground, but instead collects and flows into
storm drains, rivers, and streams.
1.2.18 Waters of the United States
Waters of the United States means Federally jurisdictional waters,

including wetlands, that are subject to regulation under Section 404 of the
Clean Water Act or navigable waters, as defined under the Rivers and
Harbors Act.
1.2.19 Wetlands
Wetlands are those areas that are inundated or saturated by surface or

groundwater at a frequency and duration sufficient to support, and that
under normal circumstances do support, a prevalence of vegetation typically
adapted for life in saturated soil conditions.
12/26/2018
1.2.20 Universal Waste
The universal waste regulations streamline collection requirements for

certain hazardous wastes in the following categories: batteries,
pesticides, mercury-containing equipment (for example, thermostats), and
lamps (for example, fluorescent bulbs). The rule is designed to reduce
hazardous waste in the municipal solid waste (MSW) stream by making it
easier for universal waste handlers to collect these items and send them
for recycling or proper disposal. These regulations can be found at
40 CFR 273.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. Submit
the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
Preconstruction Survey
Solid Waste Management Permit
Regulatory Notifications
Environmental Protection Plan
Dirt and Dust Control Plan
Employee Training Records
Environmental Manager Qualifications
SD-06 Test Reports
Solid Waste Management Report
SD-07 Certificates
Employee Training Records
Waste Determination Documentation
Disposal Documentation for Hazardous and Regulated Waste
Assembled Employee Training Records
Solid Waste Management Permit
Solid Waste Management Report
Hazardous Waste/Debris Management
Regulatory Notifications
Sales Documentation
12/26/2018
1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS
Provide and maintain, during the life of the contract, environmental

protection as defined. Plan for and provide environmental protective
measures to control pollution that develops during construction practice.
Plan for and provide environmental protective measures required to correct
conditions that develop during the construction of permanent or temporary
environmental features associated with the project. Protect the
environmental resources within the project boundaries and those affected
outside the limits of permanent work during the entire duration of this
Contract. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations pertaining to
the environment, including water, air, solid waste, hazardous waste and
substances, oily substances, and noise pollution.
Tests and procedures assessing whether construction operations comply with

Applicable Environmental Laws may be required. Analytical work must be
performed by qualified laboratories; and where required by law, the
laboratories must be certified.
1.4.1 Conformance with the Environmental Management System
Perform work under this contract consistent with the policy and objectives
identified in the installation's Environmental Management System (EMS).
Perform work in a manner that conforms to objectives and targets of the
environmental programs and operational controls identified by the EMS.
Support Government personnel when environmental compliance and EMS audits
are conducted by escorting auditors at the Project site, answering
questions, and providing proof of records being maintained. Provide
monitoring and measurement information as necessary to address
environmental performance relative to environmental, energy, and
transportation management goals. In the event an EMS nonconformance or
environmental noncompliance associated with the contracted services, tasks,
or actions occurs, take corrective and preventative actions. In addition,
employees must be aware of their roles and responsibilities under the
installation EMS and of how these EMS roles and responsibilities affect
work performed under the contract.
Coordinate with the installation's EMS coordinator to identify training

needs associated with environmental aspects and the EMS, and arrange
training or take other action to meet these needs. Provide training
documentation to the Contracting Officer. The Installation Environmental
Office will retain associated environmental compliance records. Make EMS
Awareness training completion certificates available to Government auditors
during EMS audits and include the certificates in the Employee Training
Records. See paragraph EMPLOYEE TRAINING RECORDS.
1.5.1 Preconstruction Survey and Protection of Features
This paragraph supplements the Contract Clause PROTECTION OF EXISTING

VEGETATION, STRUCTURES, EQUIPMENT, UTILITIES, AND IMPROVEMENTS. Prior to
start of any onsite construction activities, perform a Preconstruction
Survey of the project site with the Contracting Officer, and take
photographs showing existing environmental conditions in and adjacent to
the site. Submit a report for the record. Include in the report a plan
describing the features requiring protection under the provisions of the
Contract Clauses, which are not specifically identified on the drawings as
environmental features requiring protection along with the condition of
12/26/2018
trees, shrubs and grassed areas immediately adjacent to the site of work
and adjacent to the Contractor's assigned storage area and access route(s),
as applicable. The Contractor and the Contracting Officer will sign this
survey report upon mutual agreement regarding its accuracy and
completeness. Protect those environmental features included in the survey
report and any indicated on the drawings, regardless of interference that
their preservation may cause to the work under the Contract.
1.5.2 Regulatory Notifications
Coordinate all regulatory notification requirements with the Installation

Environmental Office. In all instances, the Installation Environmental
Office shall provide regulatory notifications. Typically, regulatory
notifications must be provided for the following (this listing is not
all-inclusive): demolition, renovation, NPDES defined site work,
construction, removal or use of a permitted air emissions source, and
remediation of controlled substances (asbestos, hazardous waste, lead
paint).
1.5.3 Environmental Brief
Attend an environmental brief to be included in the preconstruction

meeting. Provide the following information: types, quantities, and use of
hazardous materials that will be brought onto the installation; and types
and quantities of wastes/wastewater that may be generated during the
Contract. Discuss the results of the Preconstruction Survey at this time.
Prior to initiating any work on site, meet with the Contracting Officer and
installation Environmental Office to discuss the proposed Environmental
Protection Plan (EPP). Develop a mutual understanding relative to the
details of environmental protection, including measures for protecting
natural and cultural resources, required reports, required permits, permit
requirements (such as mitigation measures), and other measures to be taken.
1.5.4 Environmental Manager
Appoint in writing an Environmental Manager for the project site. The

Environmental Manager is directly responsible for coordinating contractor
compliance with federal, state, local, and installation requirements. The
Environmental Manager must ensure compliance with Hazardous Waste Program
requirements (including hazardous waste handling, storage, manifesting, and
disposal); implement the EPP; ensure environmental permits are obtained,
maintained, and closed out; ensure compliance with Stormwater Program
requirements; ensure compliance with Hazardous Materials (storage,
handling, and reporting) requirements; and coordinate any remediation of
regulated substances (lead, asbestos, PCB transformers). This can be a
collateral position; however, the person in this position must be trained
to adequately accomplish the following duties: ensure waste segregation and
storage compatibility requirements are met; inspect and manage Satellite
Accumulation areas; ensure only authorized personnel add wastes to
containers; ensure Contractor personnel are trained in 40 CFR requirements
in accordance with their position requirements; coordinate removal of waste
containers; and maintain the Environmental Records binder and required
documentation, including environmental permits compliance and close-out.
Submit Environmental Manager Qualifications to the Contracting Officer.
1.5.5 Employee Training Records
Prepare and maintain Employee Training Records throughout the term of the
12/26/2018
contract meeting applicable 40 CFR requirements. Provide Employee Training

Records in the Environmental Records. Submit these Assembled Employee
Training Records to the Contracting Officer at the conclusion of the
project, unless otherwise directed.
Train personnel to meet EPA requirements. Conduct environmental

protection/pollution control meetings for personnel prior to commencing
construction activities. Contact additional meetings for new personnel and
when site conditions change. Include in the training and meeting agenda:
methods of detecting and avoiding pollution; familiarization with statutory
and contractual pollution standards; installation and care of devices,
vegetative covers, and instruments required for monitoring purposes to
ensure adequate and continuous environmental protection/pollution control;
anticipated hazardous or toxic chemicals or wastes, and other regulated
contaminants; recognition and protection of archaeological sites,
artifacts, waters of the United States, and endangered species and their
habitat that are known to be in the area.
1.5.6 Non-Compliance Notifications
The Contracting Officer will notify the Contractor in writing of any

observed noncompliance with federal, state or local environmental laws or
regulations, permits, and other elements of the Contractor's EPP. After
receipt of such notice, inform the Contracting Officer of the proposed
corrective action and take such action when approved by the Contracting
Officer. The Contracting Officer may issue an order stopping all or part
of the work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. No time
extensions will be granted or equitable adjustments allowed for any such
suspensions. This is in addition to any other actions the Contracting
Officer may take under the contract, or in accordance with the Federal
Acquisition Regulation or Federal Law.
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PLAN
The purpose of the EPP is to present an overview of known or potential

environmental issues that must be considered and addressed during
construction. Incorporate construction related objectives and targets from
the installation's EMS into the EPP. Include in the EPP measures for
protecting natural and cultural resources, required reports, and other
measures to be taken. Meet with the Contracting Officer or Contracting
Officer Representative to discuss the EPP and develop a mutual
understanding relative to the details for environmental protection
including measures for protecting natural resources, required reports, and
other measures to be taken. Submit the EPP within 15 days after notice to
proceed and not less than 10 days before the preconstruction meeting.
Revise the EPP throughout the project to include any reporting
requirements, changes in site conditions, or contract modifications that
change the project scope of work in a way that could have an environmental
impact. No requirement in this section will relieve the Contractor of any
applicable federal, state, and local environmental protection laws and
regulations. During Construction, identify, implement, and submit for
approval any additional requirements to be included in the EPP. Maintain
the current version onsite.
The EPP includes, but is not limited to, the following elements:
12/26/2018
1.6.1 General Overview and Purpose
1.6.1.1 Duties
The duties and level of authority assigned to the person(s) on the job site
who oversee environmental compliance, such as who is responsible for
adherence to the EPP, who is responsible for spill cleanup and training
personnel on spill response procedures, who is responsible for manifesting
hazardous waste to be removed from the site (if applicable), and who is
responsible for training the Contractor's environmental protection
personnel.
1.6.1.2 Procedures
A copy of any standard or project-specific operating procedures that will

be used to effectively manage and protect the environment on the project
site.
1.6.1.3 Communications
Communication and training procedures that will be used to convey

environmental management requirements to Contractor employees and
subcontractors.
1.6.1.4 Contact Information
Emergency contact information contact information (office phone number,

cell phone number, and e-mail address).
1.6.2 General Site Information
1.6.2.1 Drawings
Drawings showing locations of proposed temporary excavations or embankments

for haul roads, stream crossings, jurisdictional wetlands, material storage
areas, structures, sanitary facilities, storm drains and conveyances, and
stockpiles of excess soil.
1.6.2.2 Work Area
Work area plan showing the proposed activity in each portion of the area
and identify the areas of limited use or nonuse. Include measures for
marking the limits of use areas, including methods for protection of
features to be preserved within authorized work areas and methods to
control runoff and to contain materials on site, and a traffic control plan.
1.6.2.3 Documentation
A letter signed by an officer of the firm appointing the Environmental

Manager and stating that person is responsible for managing and
implementing the Environmental Program as described in this contract.
Include in this letter the Environmental Manager's authority to direct the
removal and replacement of non-conforming work.
1.6.3 Management of Natural Resources
a. Land resources
b. Tree protection
12/26/2018
c. Replacement of damaged landscape features
d. Temporary construction
e. Stream crossings
f. Fish and wildlife resources
g. Wetland areas
1.6.4 Protection of Historical and Archaeological Resources
a. Objectives
b. Methods
1.6.5 Stormwater Management and Control
a. Ground cover
b. Erodible soils
c. Temporary measures
(1) Structural Practices
(2) Temporary and permanent stabilization
d. Effective selection, implementation and maintenance of Best Management

Practices (BMPs).
1.6.6 Protection of the Environment from Waste Derived from Contractor

Operations
Control and disposal of solid and sanitary waste. Control and disposal of
hazardous waste.
This item consist of the management procedures for hazardous waste to be

generated. The elements of those procedures will coincide with the
Installation Hazardous Waste Management Plan. The Contracting Officer will
provide a copy of the Installation Hazardous Waste Management Plan. As a
minimum, include the following:
a. List of the types of hazardous wastes expected to be generated
b. Procedures to ensure a written waste determination is made for

appropriate wastes that are to be generated
c. Sampling/analysis plan, including laboratory method(s) that will be

used for waste determinations and copies of relevant laboratory
certifications
d. Methods and proposed locations for hazardous waste accumulation/storage

(that is, in tanks or containers)
e. Management procedures for storage, labeling, transportation, and

disposal of waste (treatment of waste is not allowed unless
specifically noted)
12/26/2018
f. Management procedures and regulatory documentation ensuring disposal of

hazardous waste complies with Land Disposal Restrictions (40 CFR 268)
g. Management procedures for recyclable hazardous materials such as

lead-acid batteries, used oil, and similar
h. Used oil management procedures in accordance with 40 CFR 279; Hazardous

waste minimization procedures
i. Plans for the disposal of hazardous waste by permitted facilities; and

Procedures to be employed to ensure required employee training records
are maintained.
1.6.7 Prevention of Releases to the Environment
Procedures to prevent releases to the environment
Notifications in the event of a release to the environment
1.6.8 Regulatory Notification and Permits
List what notifications and permit applications must be made. Some permits
require up to 180 days to obtain. Demonstrate that those permits have been
obtained or applied for by including copies of applicable environmental
permits. The EPP will not be approved until the permits have been obtained.
1.6.9 Clean Air Act Compliance
1.6.9.1 Haul Route
Submit truck and material haul routes along with a Dirt and Dust Control
Plan for controlling dirt, debris, and dust on Installation roadways. As a
minimum, identify in the plan the subcontractor and equipment for cleaning
along the haul route and measures to reduce dirt, dust, and debris from
roadways.
1.6.9.2 Pollution Generating Equipment
Identify air pollution generating equipment or processes that may require

federal, state, or local permits under the Clean Air Act. Determine
requirements based on any current installation permits and the impacts of
the project. Provide a list of all fixed or mobile equipment, machinery or
operations that could generate air emissions during the project to the
Installation Environmental Office (Air Program Manager).
1.6.9.3 Stationary Internal Combustion Engines
Identify portable and stationary internal combustion engines that will be

supplied, used or serviced. Comply with 40 CFR 60 Subpart IIII, 40 CFR 60
Subpart JJJJ, 40 CFR 63 Subpart ZZZZ, and local regulations as applicable.
At minimum, include the make, model, serial number, manufacture date, size
(engine brake horsepower), and EPA emission certification status of each
engine. Maintain applicable records and log hours of operation and fuel
use. Logs must include reasons for operation and delineate between
emergency and non-emergency operation.
12/26/2018
1.6.9.4 Compliant Materials
Provide the Government a list of and SDSs for all hazardous materials
proposed for use on site. Materials must be compliant with all Clean Air
Act regulations for emissions including solvent and volatile organic
compound contents, and applicable National Emission Standards for Hazardous
Air Pollutants requirements. The Government may alter or limit use of
specific materials as needed to meet installation permit requirements for
emissions.
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL RECORDS BINDER
Maintain on-site a separate three-ring Environmental Records Binder and

submit at the completion of the project. Make separate parts within the
binder that correspond to each submittal listed under paragraph CLOSEOUT
SUBMITTALS in this section.
1.8 SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT PERMIT
Provide the Contracting Officer with written notification of the quantity

of anticipated solid waste or debris that is anticipated or estimated to be
generated by construction. Include in the report the locations where
various types of waste will be disposed or recycled. Include letters of
acceptance from the receiving location or as applicable; submit one copy of
the receiving location state and local Solid Waste Management Permit or
license showing such agency's approval of the disposal plan before
transporting wastes off Government property.
1.8.1 Solid Waste Management Report
Monthly, submit a solid waste disposal report to the Contracting Officer.

For each waste, the report will state the classification (using the
definitions provided in this section), amount, location, and name of the
business receiving the solid waste.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION OF NATURAL RESOURCES
Minimize interference with, disturbance to, and damage to fish, wildlife,

and plants, including their habitats. Prior to the commencement of
activities, consult with the Installation Environmental Office, regarding
rare species or sensitive habitats that need to be protected. The
protection of rare, threatened, and endangered animal and plant species
identified, including their habitats, is the Contractor's responsibility.
Preserve the natural resources within the project boundaries and outside
the limits of permanent work. Restore to an equivalent or improved
condition upon completion of work that is consistent with the requirements
of the Installation Environmental Office or as otherwise specified.
Confine construction activities to within the limits of the work indicated
or specified.
12/26/2018
3.1.1 Flow Ways
Do not alter water flows or otherwise significantly disturb the native

habitat adjacent to the project and critical to the survival of fish and
wildlife, except as specified and permitted.
3.1.2 Vegetation
Except in areas to be cleared, do not remove, cut, deface, injure, or

destroy trees or shrubs without the Contracting Officer's permission. Do
not fasten or attach ropes, cables, or guys to existing nearby trees for
anchorages unless authorized by the Contracting Officer. Where such use of
attached ropes, cables, or guys is authorized, the Contractor is
responsible for any resultant damage.
Protect existing trees that are to remain to ensure they are not injured,
bruised, defaced, or otherwise damaged by construction operations. Remove
displaced rocks from uncleared areas. Coordinate with the Contracting
Officer and Installation Environmental Office to determine appropriate
action for trees and other landscape features scarred or damaged by
equipment operations.
3.1.3 Streams
Stream crossings must allow movement of materials or equipment without

violating water pollution control standards of the federal, state, and
local governments. Construction of stream crossing structures must be in
compliance with any required permits including, but not limited to, Clean
Water Act Section 404, and Section 401 Water Quality.
The Contracting Officer's approval and appropriate permits are required

before any equipment will be permitted to ford live streams. In areas
where frequent crossings are required, install temporary culverts or
bridges. Obtain Contracting Officer's approval prior to installation.
Remove temporary culverts or bridges upon completion of work, and repair
the area to its original condition unless otherwise required by the
3.2 STORMWATER
Do not discharge stormwater from construction sites to the sanitary sewer.

If the water is noted or suspected of being contaminated, it may only be
released to the storm drain system if the discharge is specifically
permitted. Obtain authorization in advance from the Installation
Environmental Office for any release of contaminated water.
3.2.1 Erosion and Sediment Control Measures
Provide erosion and sediment control measures in accordance with state and
local laws and regulations. Preserve vegetation to the maximum extent
practicable.
Erosion control inspection reports may be compiled as part of a stormwater

pollution prevention plan inspection reports.
3.2.2 Work Area Limits
Mark the areas that need not be disturbed under this Contract prior to
commencing construction activities. Mark or fence isolated areas within
12/26/2018
the general work area that are not to be disturbed. Protect monuments and
markers before construction operations commence. Where construction
operations are to be conducted during darkness, any markers must be visible
in the dark. Personnel must be knowledgeable of the purpose for marking
and protecting particular objects.
3.2.3 Contractor Facilities and Work Areas
Place field offices, staging areas, stockpile storage, and temporary

buildings in areas designated on the drawings or as directed by the
Contracting Officer. Move or relocate the Contractor facilities only when
approved by the Government. Provide erosion and sediment controls for
onsite borrow and spoil areas to prevent sediment from entering nearby
waters. Control temporary excavation and embankments for plant or work
areas to protect adjacent areas.
3.2.4 Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System (MS4) Management
Comply with the Installation's MS4 permit requirements.
Minimize the use of hazardous materials and the generation of waste.

Include procedures for pollution prevention/ hazardous waste minimization
in the Hazardous Waste Management Section of the EPP. Obtain a copy of the
installation's Pollution Prevention/Hazardous Waste Minimization Plan for
reference material when preparing this part of the EPP. If no written plan
exists, obtain information by contacting the Contracting Officer. Describe
the anticipated types of the hazardous materials to be used in the
construction when requesting information.
3.3.1 Salvage, Reuse and Recycle
Identify anticipated materials and waste for salvage, reuse, and

recycling. Describe actions to promote material reuse, resale or
recycling. To the extent practicable, all scrap metal must be sent for
reuse or recycling and will not be disposed of in a landfill.
Include the name, physical address, and telephone number of the hauler, if
transported by a franchised solid waste hauler. Include the destination
and, unless exempted, provide a copy of the state or local permit (cover)
or license for recycling.
3.3.2 Nonhazardous Solid Waste Diversion Report
Maintain an inventory of nonhazardous solid waste diversion and disposal of

construction and demolition debris. Submit a report to 45 CES/CENV through
the Contracting Officer on the first working day after each fiscal year
quarter, starting the first quarter that nonhazardous solid waste has been
generated. Include the following in the report:
Construction and Demolition (C&D) cubic yards as appropriate

Debris Disposed
C&D Debris Recycled cubic yards as appropriate
12/26/2018
Construction and Demolition (C&D) cubic yards as appropriate

Debris Disposed
Total C&D Debris Generated cubic yards as appropriate
Waste Sent to Waste-To-Energy cubic yards as appropriate

Incineration Plant (This amount
should not be included in the
recycled amount)
3.4 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
3.4.1 Waste Determination Documentation
Complete a Waste Determination form (provided at the pre-construction

conference) for Contractor-derived wastes to be generated. All potentially
hazardous solid waste streams that are not subject to a specific exclusion
or exemption from the hazardous waste regulations (e.g. scrap metal,
domestic sewage) or subject to special rules, (lead-acid batteries and
precious metals) must be characterized in accordance with the requirements
of 40 CFR 261 or corresponding applicable state or local regulations. Base
waste determination on user knowledge of the processes and materials used,
and analytical data when necessary. Consult with the Installation
environmental staff for guidance on specific requirements. Attach support
documentation to the Waste Determination form. As a minimum, provide a
Waste Determination form for the following waste (this listing is not
inclusive): oil- and latex -based painting and caulking products, solvents,
adhesives, aerosols, petroleum products, and containers of the original
materials.
3.4.2 Solid Waste Management
3.4.2.1 Solid Waste Management Report
Provide copies of the waste handling facilities' weight tickets, receipts,

bills of sale, and other sales documentation. In lieu of sales
documentation, a statement indicating the disposal location for the solid
waste that is signed by an employee authorized to legally obligate or bind
the firm may be submitted. The sales documentation must include the
receiver's tax identification number and business, EPA or state
registration number, along with the receiver's delivery and business
addresses and telephone numbers. For each solid waste retained for the
Contractor's own use, submit the information previously described in this
paragraph on the solid waste disposal report. Prices paid or received do
not have to be reported to the Contracting Officer unless required by other
provisions or specifications of this Contract or public law.
3.4.2.2 Control and Management of Solid Wastes
Pick up solid wastes, and place in covered containers that are regularly
emptied. Do not prepare or cook food on the project site. Prevent
contamination of the site or other areas when handling and disposing of
wastes. At project completion, leave the areas clean. Employ segregation
measures so that no hazardous or toxic waste will become co-mingled with
non-hazardous solid waste. Solid waste disposal offsite must comply with
most stringent local, state, and federal requirements, including 40 CFR 241,
12/26/2018
40 CFR 243, and 40 CFR 258.
Manage hazardous material used in construction, including but not limited

to, aerosol cans, waste paint, cleaning solvents, contaminated brushes, and
used rags, in accordance with 49 CFR 173.
3.4.3 Control and Management of Hazardous Waste
Do not dispose of hazardous waste on Government property. Do not discharge

any waste to a sanitary sewer, storm drain, or to surface waters or conduct
waste treatment or disposal on Government property without written approval
of the Contracting Officer.
3.4.3.1 Hazardous Waste/Debris Management
Identify construction activities that will generate hazardous waste or

debris. Provide a documented waste determination for resultant waste
streams. Identify, label, handle, store, and dispose of hazardous waste or
debris in accordance with federal, state, and local regulations, including
40 CFR 261, 40 CFR 262, 40 CFR 263, 40 CFR 264, 40 CFR 265, 40 CFR 266, and
40 CFR 268.
Manage hazardous waste in accordance with the approved Hazardous Waste

Management Section of the EPP. Store hazardous wastes in approved
containers in accordance with 49 CFR 173 and 49 CFR 178. Hazardous waste
generated within the confines of Government facilities is identified as
being generated by the Government. Prior to removal of any hazardous waste
from Government property, hazardous waste manifests must be signed by
personnel from the Installation Environmental Office. Do not bring
hazardous waste onto Government property. Provide the Contracting Officer
with a copy of waste determination documentation for any solid waste
streams that have any potential to be hazardous waste or contain any
chemical constituents listed in 40 CFR 372-SUBPART D.
3.4.3.2 Universal Waste Management
Manage the following categories of universal waste in accordance with

federal, state, and local requirements and installation instructions:
a. Batteries as described in 40 CFR 273.2
b. Lamps as described in 40 CFR 273.5
c. Mercury-containing equipment as described in 40 CFR 273.4
Mercury is prohibited in the construction of this facility, unless

specified otherwise, and with the exception of mercury vapor lamps and
fluorescent lamps. Dumping of mercury-containing materials and devices
such as mercury vapor lamps, fluorescent lamps, and mercury switches, in
rubbish containers is prohibited. Remove without breaking, pack to prevent
breakage, and transport out of the activity in an unbroken condition for
disposal as directed.
3.4.3.3 Disposal Documentation for Hazardous and Regulated Waste
Contact the Contracting Officer for the facility RCRA identification number
that is to be used on each manifest.
12/26/2018
3.4.4 Releases/Spills of Oil and Hazardous Substances
3.4.4.1 Response and Notifications
Exercise due diligence to prevent, contain, and respond to spills of

hazardous material, hazardous substances, hazardous waste, sewage,
regulated gas, petroleum, lubrication oil, and other substances regulated
in accordance with 40 CFR 300. Maintain spill cleanup equipment and
materials at the work site. In the event of a spill, take prompt,
effective action to stop, contain, curtail, or otherwise limit the amount,
duration, and severity of the spill/release. In the event of any releases
of oil and hazardous substances, chemicals, or gases; immediately (within
15 minutes) notify the Installation Fire Department, the Installation
Command Duty Officer, the Installation Environmental Office, the
Submit verbal and written notifications as required by the federal (

40 CFR 300.125 and 40 CFR 355), state, local regulations and instructions.
Provide copies of the written notification and documentation that a verbal
notification was made within 20 days. Spill response must be in accordance
with 40 CFR 300 and applicable state and local regulations. Contain and
clean up these spills without cost to the Government.
3.4.4.2 Clean Up
Clean up hazardous and non-hazardous waste spills. Reimburse the

Government for costs incurred including sample analysis materials,
clothing, equipment, and labor if the Government will initiate its own
spill cleanup procedures, for Contractor- responsible spills, when: Spill
cleanup procedures have not begun within one hour of spill
discovery/occurrence; or, in the Government's judgment, spill cleanup is
inadequate and the spill remains a threat to human health or the
environment.
3.4.5 Mercury Materials
Immediately report to the Environmental Office and the Contracting Officer

instances of breakage or mercury spillage. Clean mercury spill area to the
satisfaction of the Contracting Officer.
Do not recycle a mercury spill cleanup; manage it as a hazardous waste for

disposal.
3.4.6 Wastewater
3.4.6.1 Disposal of wastewater must be as specified below.
3.4.6.1.1 Treatment
Do not allow wastewater from construction activities, such as onsite

material processing, concrete curing, foundation and concrete clean-up,
water used in concrete trucks, and forms to enter water ways or to be
discharged prior to being treated to remove pollutants. Dispose of the
construction- related waste water by collecting and placing it in a
retention pond where suspended material can be settled out or the water can
evaporate to separate pollutants from the water. The site for the
retention pond must be coordinated and approved with the Contracting
Officer. The residue left in the pond prior to completion of the project
must be removed, tested, and disposed of off- Government property in
12/26/2018
accordance with federal, state, and local laws and regulations. Backfill
the area to the original grade, top-soiled, and seeded or sodded. Test the
water in the retention pond for 7 and have the results reviewed and
approved by the Contracting Officer prior to being discharged or disposed
of off- Government property.
3.4.6.1.2 Surface Discharge
Surface discharge in accordance with federal, state, and local laws and
regulations.
3.4.6.1.3 Land Application
Water generated from the flushing of lines after disinfection or

disinfection in conjunction with hydrostatic testing must be land- applied
in accordance with federal, state, and local laws and regulations for land
application.
3.5 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL MANAGEMENT
Include hazardous material control procedures in the Safety Plan, in

accordance with Section 01 35 26 GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS. Address
procedures and proper handling of hazardous materials, including the
appropriate transportation requirements. Do not bring hazardous material
onto Government property that does not directly relate to requirements for
the performance of this contract. Submit an SDS and estimated quantities
to be used for each hazardous material to the Contracting Officer prior to
bringing the material on the installation. Typical materials requiring SDS
and quantity reporting include, but are not limited to, oil and latex based
painting and caulking products, solvents, adhesives, aerosol, and petroleum
products. Use hazardous materials in a manner that minimizes the amount of
hazardous waste generated. Containers of hazardous materials must have
National Fire Protection Association labels or their equivalent. Certify
that hazardous materials removed from the site are hazardous materials and
do not meet the definition of hazardous waste, in accordance with 40 CFR 261.
3.6 CONTROL AND MANAGEMENT OF ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIAL (ACM)
Manage and dispose of asbestos- containing waste in accordance with

40 CFR 61. Manifest asbestos-containing waste and provide the manifest to
the Contracting Officer. Notifications to the state and Installation Air
Program Manager are required before starting any asbestos work.
3.7 CONTROL AND MANAGEMENT OF LEAD-BASED PAINT (LBP)
Manage and dispose of lead-contaminated waste in accordance with 40 CFR 745.

Manifest any lead-contaminated waste and provide the manifest to the
3.8 PETROLEUM, OIL, LUBRICANT (POL) STORAGE AND FUELING
POL products include flammable or combustible liquids, such as gasoline,

diesel, lubricating oil, used engine oil, hydraulic oil, mineral oil, and
cooking oil. Store POL products and fuel equipment and motor vehicles in a
manner that affords the maximum protection against spills into the
environment. Manage and store POL products in accordance with EPA
40 CFR 112, and other federal, state, regional, and local laws and
regulations. Use secondary containments, dikes, curbs, and other barriers,
to prevent POL products from spilling and entering the ground, storm or
12/26/2018
sewer drains, stormwater ditches or canals, or navigable waters of the

United States. Describe in the EPP (see paragraph ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
PLAN) how POL tanks and containers must be stored, managed, and inspected
and what protections must be provided. Storage of fuel on the project site
must be in accordance with EPA, state, and local laws and regulations and
paragraph OIL STORAGE INCLUDING FUEL TANKS.
3.8.1 Used Oil Management
Manage used oil generated on site in accordance with 40 CFR 279. Determine
if any used oil generated while onsite exhibits a characteristic of
hazardous waste. Used oil containing 1,000 parts per million of solvents
is considered a hazardous waste and disposed of at the Contractor's
expense. Used oil mixed with a hazardous waste is also considered a
hazardous waste. Dispose in accordance with paragraph HAZARDOUS WASTE
DISPOSAL.
3.8.2 Oil Storage Including Fuel Tanks
Provide secondary containment and overfill protection for oil storage

tanks. A berm used to provide secondary containment must be of sufficient
size and strength to contain the contents of the tanks plus 5 inches
freeboard for precipitation. Construct the berm to be impervious to oil
for 72 hours that no discharge will permeate, drain, infiltrate, or
otherwise escape before cleanup occurs. Use drip pans during oil transfer
operations; adequate absorbent material must be onsite to clean up any
spills and prevent releases to the environment. Cover tanks and drip pans
during inclement weather. Provide procedures and equipment to prevent
overfilling of tanks. If tanks and containers with an aggregate
aboveground capacity greater than 1320 gallons will be used onsite (only
containers with a capacity of 55 gallons or greater are counted), provide
and implement a SPCC plan meeting the requirements of 40 CFR 112. Do not
bring underground storage tanks to the installation for Contractor use
during a project. Submit the SPCC plan to the Contracting Officer for
approval.
Monitor and remove any rainwater that accumulates in open containment dikes
or berms. Inspect the accumulated rainwater prior to draining from a
containment dike to the environment, to determine there is no oil sheen
present.
3.9 INADVERTENT DISCOVERY OF PETROLEUM-CONTAMINATED SOIL OR HAZARDOUS WASTES
If petroleum-contaminated soil, or suspected hazardous waste is found

during construction that was not identified in the Contract documents,
immediately notify the Contracting Officer. Do not disturb this material
until authorized by the Contracting Officer.
3.10 CHLORDANE
Evaluate excess soils and concrete foundation debris generated during the
demolition of housing units or other wooden structures for the presence of
chlordane or other pesticides prior to reuse or final disposal.
3.11 SOUND INTRUSION
Make the maximum use of low-noise emission products, as certified by the

EPA. Blasting or use of explosives are not permitted without written
permission from the Contracting Officer, and then only during the
12/26/2018
designated times.
Keep construction activities under surveillance and control to minimize

environment damage by noise.
3.12 POST CONSTRUCTION CLEANUP
Clean up areas used for construction in accordance with Contract Clause:

"Cleaning Up". Unless otherwise instructed in writing by the Contracting
Officer, remove traces of temporary construction facilities such as haul
roads, work area, structures, foundations of temporary structures,
stockpiles of excess or waste materials, and other vestiges of construction
prior to final acceptance of the work. Grade parking area and similar
temporarily used areas to conform with surrounding contours.
12/26/2018
SECTION 01 74 19
CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT
01/07
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GOVERNMENT POLICY

1.2 MANAGEMENT
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.4 MEETINGS
1.5 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
1.6 RECORDS
1.7 COLLECTION
1.7.1 Source Separated Method
1.7.2 Co-Mingled Method.
1.7.3 Other Methods.
1.8 DISPOSAL
1.8.1 Reuse.
1.8.2 Recycle.
1.8.3 Waste.
1.8.4 Return
PART 2 PRODUCTS
PART 3 EXECUTION
12/26/2018
SECTION 01 74 19
CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT

01/07
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GOVERNMENT POLICY
Government policy is to apply sound environmental principles in the design,

construction and use of facilities. As part of the implementation of that
policy: (1) practice efficient waste management when sizing, cutting, and
installing products and materials and (2) use all reasonable means to
divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators
and to facilitate their recycling or reuse. Divert a minimum of 60 percent
by weight of total project solid waste from the landfill.
1.2 MANAGEMENT
Develop and implement a waste management program. Take a pro-active,

responsible role in the management of construction and demolition waste and
require all subcontractors, vendors, and suppliers to participate in the
effort. Construction and demolition waste includes products of demolition
or removal, excess or unusable construction materials, packaging materials
for construction products, and other materials generated during the
construction process but not incorporated into the work. In the management
of waste, consider the availability of viable markets, the condition of the
material, the ability to provide the material in suitable condition and in
a quantity acceptable to available markets, and time constraints imposed
by internal project completion mandates. Implement any special programs
involving rebates or similar incentives related to recycling of waste.
Revenues or other savings obtained for salvage, or recycling accrue to the
Contractor. Appropriately permit firms and facilities used for recycling,
reuse, and disposal for the intended use to the extent required by federal,
state, and local regulations. Also, provide on-site instruction of
appropriate separation, handling, recycling, salvage, reuse, and return
methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the project.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

Waste Management Plan
Records
1.4 MEETINGS
Conduct Construction Waste Management meetings. After award of the
12/26/2018
Contract and prior to commencement of work, schedule and conduct a meeting

with the Contracting Officer to discuss the proposed Waste Management Plan
and to develop a mutual understanding relative to the details of waste
management. The requirements for this meeting may be fulfilled during the
coordination and mutual understanding meeting outlined in Section QUALITY
CONTROL. At a minimum, discuss environmental and waste management goals
and issues at the following additional meetings:
a. Pre-bid meeting.
b. Preconstruction meeting.
c. Regular site meetings.
d. Work safety meetings.
1.5 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
Submit a waste management plan within 15 days after notice to proceed. The
plan demonstrates how to meet the the project waste diversion goal. Also,
include the following in the plan:
a. Name of individuals on the Contractor's staff responsible for waste

prevention and management.
b. Actions that will be taken to reduce solid waste generation, including

coordination with subcontractors to ensure awareness and participation.
c. Description of the regular meetings to be held to address waste

management.
d. Description of the specific approaches to be used in recycling/reuse of

the various materials generated, including the areas on site and
equipment to be used for processing, sorting, and temporary storage of
wastes.
e. Characterization, including estimated types and quantities, of the

waste to be generated.
f. Name of landfill and/or incinerator to be used and the estimated costs

for use, assuming that there would be no salvage or recycling on the
project.
g. Identification of local and regional reuse programs, including

non-profit organizations such as schools, local housing agencies, and
organizations that accept used materials such as materials exchange
networks and Habitat for Humanity. Include the name, location, and
phone number for each reuse facility to be used, and provide a copy of
the permit or license for each facility.
h. List of specific waste materials that will be salvaged for resale,

salvaged and reused on the current project, salvaged and stored for
reuse on a future project, or recycled. Identify the recycling
facilities by name, location, and phone number, including a copy of the
permit or license for each facility.
i. Identification of materials that cannot be recycled/reused with an

explanation or justification, to be approved by the Contracting Officer.
12/26/2018
j. Description of the means by which any waste materials identified in

item (h) above will be protected from contamination.
k. Description of the means of transportation of the recyclable materials

(whether materials will be site-separated and self-hauled to designated
centers, or whether mixed materials will be collected by a waste hauler
and removed from the site).
l. Anticipated net cost savings determined by subtracting Contractor

program management costs and the cost of disposal from the revenue
generated by sale of the materials and the incineration and/or landfill
cost avoidance.
Revise and resubmit Plan as required by the Contracting Officer. Approval

of Contractor's Plan will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for
compliance with applicable environmental regulations or meeting project
cumulative waste diversion requirement. Distribute copies of the Waste
Management Plan to each subcontractor, the Quality Control Manager, and the
1.6 RECORDS
Maintain records to document the quantity of waste generated; the quantity

of waste diverted through sale, reuse, or recycling; and the quantity of
waste disposed by landfill or incineration. Make the records available to
the Contracting Officer during construction, and deliver to the Contracting
Officer upon completion of the construction a copy of the records.
1.7 COLLECTION
Separate, store, protect, and handle at the site identified recyclable and
salvageable waste products in a manner that maximizes recyclability and
salvagability of identified materials. Provide the necessary containers,
bins and storage areas to facilitate effective waste management and clearly
and appropriately identify them. Provide materials for barriers and
enclosures around recyclable material storage areas which are nonhazardous
and recyclable or reusable. Locate out of the way of construction traffic.
Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery and convenience to
subcontractors. Recycling and waste bin areas are to be kept neat and
clean, and handle recyclable materials to prevent contamination of
materials from incompatible products and materials. Clean contaminated
materials prior to placing in collection containers. Use cleaning
materials that are nonhazardous and biodegradable. Handle hazardous waste
and hazardous materials in accordance with applicable regulations and
coordinate with Section 01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS.
Separate materials by one of the following methods:
1.7.1 Source Separated Method
Separate waste products and materials that are recyclable from trash and
sorted as described below into appropriately marked separate containers and
then transported to the respective recycling facility for further
processing. Deliver materials in accordance with recycling or reuse
facility requirements (e.g., free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum
contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process).
Separate materials into the following category types as appropriate to the
project waste and to the available recycling and reuse programs in the
project area:
12/26/2018
a. Land clearing debris.
b. Asphalt.
c. Concrete and masonry.
d. Metal (e.g. banding, stud trim, ductwork, piping, rebar, roofing, other
trim, steel, iron, galvanized, stainless steel, aluminum, copper, zinc,
lead brass, bronze).
(1) Ferrous.
(2) Non-ferrous.
e. Wood (nails and staples allowed).
f. Debris.
g. Glass (colored glass allowed).
h. Paper.
(1) Bond.
(2) Newsprint.
(3) Cardboard and paper packaging materials.
i. Plastic.
Type
1. Polyethylene Terephthalate (PET, PETE)
2. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE)
3. Vinyl (Polyvinyl Chloride or PVC)
4. Low Density Polyethylene (LDPE)
5. Polypropylene (PP)
6. Polystyrene (PS)
7. Other. Use of this code indicates that the package in question is

made with a resin other than the six listed above, or is made of
more than one resin listed above, and used in a multi-layer
combination.
j. Gypsum.
k. Non-hazardous paint and paint cans.
l. Carpet.
m. Ceiling tiles.
12/26/2018
n. Insulation.
o. Beverage containers.
1.7.2 Co-Mingled Method.
Place waste products and recyclable materials into a single container and
then transport to a recycling facility where the recyclable materials are
sorted and processed.
1.7.3 Other Methods.
Other proposed methods may be used when approved by the Contracting Officer.
1.8 DISPOSAL
Control accumulation of waste materials and trash. Recycle or dispose of

collected materials off-site at intervals approved by the Contracting
Officer and in compliance with waste management procedures. All hazardous
waste must be managed and disposed of per
USAF Hazardous Waste Management Plan, 45SW. Except as otherwise specified
in other sections of the specifications, dispose of in accordance with the
following:
1.8.1 Reuse.
Give first consideration to salvage for reuse since little or no

re-processing is necessary for this method, and less pollution is created
when items are reused in their original form. Consider sale or donation of
waste suitable for reuse.
1.8.2 Recycle.
Recycle waste materials not suitable for reuse, but having value as being
recyclable. Arrange for timely pickups from the site or deliveries to
recycling facilities in order to prevent contamination of recyclable
materials.
1.8.3 Waste.
Dispose of materials with no practical use or economic benefit to

waste-to-energy plants where available. As the last choice, dispose of
materials at a landfill or incinerator.
1.8.4 Return
Set aside and protect misdelivered and substandard products and materials
and return to supplier for credit.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not used.
12/26/2018
12/26/2018
SECTION 01 78 00
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
08/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
1.1.1 As-Built Drawings
1.1.2 Record Drawings
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1.3 SPARE PARTS DATA
1.4 WARRANTY MANAGEMENT
1.4.1 Warranty Management Plan
1.4.2 Performance Bond
1.4.3 Pre-Warranty Conference
1.4.4 Warranty Tags
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CERTIFICATION OF EPA DESIGNATED ITEMS
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

3.1.1 Markup Guidelines
3.1.2 As-Built Drawings Content
3.2 RECORD DRAWINGS
3.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
3.3.1 Configuration
3.3.2 Training and Instruction
3.4 CLEANUP
3.5 PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE
12/26/2018
SECTION 01 78 00
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
08/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
1.1.1 As-Built Drawings
As-built drawings are developed and maintained by the Contractor and depict
actual conditions, including deviations from the Contract Documents. These
deviations and additions may result from coordination required by, but not
limited to: contract modifications; official responses to Contractor
submitted Requests for Information; direction from the Contracting Officer;
designs which are the responsibility of the Contractor, and differing site
conditions. Maintain the as-builts throughout construction as red-lined
hard copies on site. These files serve as the basis for the creation of
the record drawings.
1.1.2 Record Drawings
The record drawings are the final compilation of actual conditions

reflected in the as-built drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
Warranty Management Plan

Warranty Tags
Spare Parts Data
Preventative Maintenance
Condition Monitoring (Predictive Testing)
Inspection
Posted Instructions
Operation and Maintenance Manuals; G
As-Built Drawings; G
Record Drawings
12/26/2018
1.3 SPARE PARTS DATA
Submit two copies of the Spare Parts Data list.
a. Indicate manufacturer's name, part number, nomenclature, and stock

level required for maintenance and repair. List those items that may
be standard to the normal maintenance of the system.
1.4 WARRANTY MANAGEMENT
1.4.1 Warranty Management Plan
At least 30 days before the planned pre-warranty conference, submit four

sets of the warranty management plan. Include within the warranty
management plan all required actions and documents to assure that the
Government receives all warranties to which it is entitled. The plan must
be in narrative form and contain sufficient detail to render it suitable
for use by future maintenance and repair personnel, whether tradesmen, or
of engineering background, not necessarily familiar with this contract.
The term "status" as indicated below must include due date and whether item
has been submitted or was accomplished. Warranty information made
available during the construction phase must be submitted to the
Contracting Officer for approval prior to each monthly pay estimate.
Assemble approved information in a binder and turn over to the Government
upon acceptance of the work. The construction warranty period will begin
on the date of project acceptance and continue for the full product
warranty period. A joint 4 month and 9 month warranty inspection will be
conducted, measured from time of acceptance, by the Contractor, Contracting
Officer and the Customer Representative. Include within the warranty
management plan , but not limited to, the following:
a. Roles and responsibilities of all personnel associated with the

warranty process, including points of contact and telephone numbers
within the organizations of the Contractors, subcontractors,
manufacturers or suppliers involved.
b. Furnish with each warranty the name, address, and telephone number of
each of the guarantor's representatives nearest to the project location.
c. Listing and status of delivery of all Certificates of Warranty for

extended warranty items, to include roofs, HVAC balancing, pumps,
motors, transformers, and for all commissioned systems such as fire
protection and alarm systems, sprinkler systems, lightning protection
systems, etc.
d. A list for each warranted equipment, item, feature of construction or

system indicating:
(1) Name of item.

(2) Model and serial numbers.
(3) Location where installed.
(4) Name and phone numbers of manufacturers or suppliers.
(5) Names, addresses and telephone numbers of sources of spare parts.
(6) Warranties and terms of warranty. Include one-year overall
warranty of construction, including the starting date of warranty
of construction. Items which have extended warranties must be
indicated with separate warranty expiration dates.
(7) Cross-reference to warranty certificates as applicable.
(8) Starting point and duration of warranty period.
(9) Summary of maintenance procedures required to continue the
12/26/2018
warranty in force.
(10) Cross-reference to specific pertinent Operation and Maintenance
manuals.
(11) Organization, names and phone numbers of persons to call for
warranty service.
(12) Typical response time and repair time expected for various
warranted equipment.
e. The plans for attendance at the 4 and 9 month post-construction

warranty inspections conducted by the Government.
f. Procedure and status of tagging of all equipment covered by extended

warranties.
g. Copies of instructions to be posted near selected pieces of equipment

where operation is critical for warranty and/or safety reasons.
1.4.2 Performance Bond
The Performance Bond must remain effective throughout the construction

period.
a. In the event the Contractor fails to commence and diligently pursue any
construction warranty work required, the Contracting Officer will have
the work performed by others, and after completion of the work, will
charge the remaining construction warranty funds of expenses incurred
by the Government while performing the work, including, but not limited
to administrative expenses.
b. In the event sufficient funds are not available to cover the

construction warranty work performed by the Government at the
Contractor's expense, the Contracting Officer will have the right to
recoup expenses from the bonding company.
c. Following oral or written notification of required construction

warranty repair work, respond in a timely manner. Written verification
will follow oral instructions. Failure to respond will be cause for
the Contracting Officer to proceed against the Contractor.
1.4.3 Pre-Warranty Conference
Prior to contract completion, and at a time designated by the Contracting

Officer, meet with the Contracting Officer to develop a mutual
understanding with respect to the requirements of this section.
Communication procedures for Contractor notification of construction
warranty defects, priorities with respect to the type of defect, reasonable
time required for Contractor response, and other details deemed necessary
by the Contracting Officer for the execution of the construction warranty
will be established/reviewed at this meeting. In connection with these
requirements and at the time of the Contractor's quality control completion
inspection, furnish the name, telephone number and address of a licensed
and bonded company which is authorized to initiate and pursue construction
warranty work action on behalf of the Contractor. This point of contact
will be located within the local service area of the warranted
construction, be continuously available, and be responsive to Government
inquiry on warranty work action and status. This requirement does not
relieve the Contractor of any of its responsibilities in connection with
other portions of this provision.
12/26/2018
1.4.4 Warranty Tags
At the time of installation, tag each warranted item with a durable, oil
and water resistant tag approved by the Contracting Officer. Attach each
tag with a copper wire and spray with a silicone waterproof coating. Also,
submit two record copies of the warranty tags showing the layout and
design. The date of acceptance and the QC signature must remain blank
until the project is accepted for beneficial occupancy. Show the following
information on the tag.
Type of
product/material
Model number
Serial number
Contract number
Warranty period from/to
Inspector's signature
Construction Contractor
Address
Telephone number
Warranty contact
Address
Telephone number
Warranty response time

priority code
WARNING - PROJECT PERSONNEL TO PERFORM ONLY OPERATIONAL MAINTENANCE
DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CERTIFICATION OF EPA DESIGNATED ITEMS
Submit the Certification of EPA Designated Items as required by FAR

52.223-9, "Certification and Estimate of Percentage of Recovered Material
Content for EPA Designated Items". Include on the certification form the
following information: project name, project number, Contractor name,
license number, Contractor address, and certification. The certification
will read as follows and be signed and dated by the Contractor. "I hereby
certify the information provided herein is accurate and that the
12/26/2018
requisition/procurement of all materials listed on this form comply with

current EPA standards for recycled/recovered materials content. The
following exemptions may apply to the non-procurement of recycled/recovered
content materials:
1) The product does not meet appropriate performance standards;

2) The product is not available within a reasonable time frame;
3) The product is not available competitively (from two or more sources);
4) The product is only available at an unreasonable price (compared with a
comparable non-recycled content product)."
Record each product used in the project that has a requirement or option of
containing recycled content noting total price, total value of
post-industrial recycled content, total value of post-consumer recycled
content, exemptions (1, 2, 3, or 4, as indicated), and comments. Recycled
content values may be determined by weight or volume percent, but must be
consistent throughout.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
3.1.1 Markup Guidelines
Make comments and markup the drawings complete without reference to

letters, memos, or materials that are not part of the As-Built drawing.
Show what was changed, how it was changed, where items(s) were relocated
and change related details. These working as-built markup prints must be
neat, legible and accurate as follows:
a. Use base colors of red, green, and blue. Color code for changes as
follows:
(1) Special (Blue) - Items requiring special information,

coordination, or special detailing or detailing notes.
(2) Deletions (Red) - Over-strike deleted graphic items (lines),

lettering in notes and leaders.
(3) Additions (Green) - Added items, lettering in notes and leaders.
b. Provide a legend if colors other than the "base" colors of red, green,
and blue are used.
c. Add and denote any additional equipment or material facilities, service

lines, incorporated under As-Built Revisions if not already shown in
legend.
d. Use frequent written explanations on markup drawings to describe

changes. Do not totally rely on graphic means to convey the revision.
e. Use legible lettering and precise and clear digital values when marking
prints. Clarify ambiguities concerning the nature and application of
change involved.
f. Wherever a revision is made, also make changes to related section

views, details, legend, profiles, plans and elevation views, schedules,
notes and call out designations, and mark accordingly to avoid
conflicting data on all other sheets.
12/26/2018
g. For deletions, cross out all features, data and captions that relate to
that revision.
h. For changes on small-scale drawings and in restricted areas, provide

large-scale inserts, with leaders to the applicable location.
i. Indicate one of the following when attaching a print or sketch to a

markup print:
1) Add an entire drawing to contract drawings
2) Change the contract drawing to show
3) Provided for reference only to further detail the initial design.
j. Incorporate all shop and fabrication drawings into the markup drawings.
3.1.2 As-Built Drawings Content
Show on the as-built drawings, but not limited to, the following
information:
a. The actual location, kinds and sizes of all sub-surface utility lines.
In order that the location of these lines and appurtenances may be
determined in the event the surface openings or indicators become
covered over or obscured, show by offset dimensions to two permanently
fixed surface features the end of each run including each change in
direction on the record drawings. Locate valves, splice boxes and
similar appurtenances by dimensioning along the utility run from a
reference point. Also record the average depth below the surface of
each run.
b. The location and dimensions of any changes within the building

structure.
c. Layout and schematic drawings of electrical circuits and piping.
d. Correct grade, elevations, cross section, or alignment of roads,

earthwork, structures or utilities if any changes were made from
contract plans.
e. Changes in details of design or additional information obtained from

working drawings specified to be prepared and/or furnished by the
Contractor; including but not limited to shop drawings, fabrication,
erection, installation plans and placing details, pipe sizes,
insulation material, dimensions of equipment foundations, etc.
f. The topography, invert elevations and grades of drainage installed or

affected as part of the project construction.
g. Changes or Revisions which result from the final inspection.
h. Where contract drawings or specifications present options, show only

the option selected for construction on the working as-built markup
drawings.
i. If borrow material for this project is from sources on Government

property, or if Government property is used as a spoil area, furnish a
12/26/2018
contour map of the final borrow pit/spoil area elevations.
j. Systems designed or enhanced by the Contractor, such as HVAC controls,

fire alarm, fire sprinkler, and irrigation systems.
k. Changes in location of equipment and architectural features.
j. Modifications (include within change order price the cost to change

working as-built markup drawings to reflect modifications).
l. Actual location of anchors, construction and control joints, etc., in

concrete.
m. Unusual or uncharted obstructions that are encountered in the contract

work area during construction.
n. Location, extent, thickness, and size of stone protection particularly

where it will be normally submerged by water.
3.2 RECORD DRAWINGS
3.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
Submit one PDF file and 6 hard copies of the project operation and
maintenance manuals 30 calendar days prior to testing the system involved.
Update and resubmit data for final approval no later than 30 calendar days
prior to .
3.3.1 Configuration
Operation and Maintenance Manuals must be consistent with the

manufacturer's standard brochures, schematics, printed instructions,
general operating procedures, and safety precautions. Provide
manufacturer's PDF files of above and bind information in manual format and
grouped by technical sections. Organize data by separate index and tabbed
sheets for vendor data and manuals. Test data must be legible and of good
quality. Caution and warning indications must be clearly labeled.
3.3.2 Training and Instruction
Submit classroom and field instructions in the operation and maintenance of

systems equipment where required by the technical provisions. These
services must be directed by the Contractor, using the manufacturer's
factory-trained personnel or qualified representatives. Contracting
Officer will be given 7 calendar days written notice of scheduled
instructional services. Instructional materials belonging to the
manufacturer or vendor, such as lists, static exhibits, and visual aids,
must be made available to the Contracting Officer.
3.4 CLEANUP
Leave premises "broom clean." Clean interior and exterior glass surfaces
exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances;
polish transparent and glossy surfaces; vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.
Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition. Replace filters of
operating equipment. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts and
drainage systems. Sweep paved areas and rake clean landscaped areas.
Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish and construction facilities
from the site..
12/26/2018
3.5 PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE
Submit Preventative Maintenance, Condition Monitoring (Predictive Testing)

and Inspection schedules with instructions that state when systems should
be retested.
a. Define the anticipated length of each test, test apparatus, number of

personnel identified by responsibility, and a testing validation
procedure permitting the record operation capability requirements
within the schedule. Provide a signoff blank for the Contractor and
Contracting Officer for each test feature; e.g., gpm, rpm, psi.
Include a remarks column for the testing validation procedure
referencing operating limits of time, pressure, temperature, volume,
voltage, current, acceleration, velocity, alignment, calibration,
adjustments, cleaning, or special system notes. Delineate procedures
for preventative maintenance, inspection, adjustment, lubrication and
cleaning necessary to minimize corrective maintenance and repair.
b. Repair requirements must inform operators how to check out,

troubleshoot, repair, and replace components of the system. Include
electrical and mechanical schematics and diagrams and diagnostic
techniques necessary to enable operation and troubleshooting of the
system after acceptance.
12/26/2018
SECTION 02 41 00
DEMOLITION
05/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
1.2.1 General Requirements
1.3 ITEMS TO REMAIN IN PLACE
1.3.1 Existing Construction Limits and Protection
1.3.2 Weather Protection
1.3.3 Utility Service
1.3.4 Facilities
1.4 BURNING
1.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PLAN
1.6 SUBMITTALS
1.7 DEMOLITION PLAN
1.8.1 Dust and Debris Control
1.9 PROTECTION
1.9.1 Protection of Personnel
1.10 RELOCATIONS
1.11 EXISTING CONDITIONS
PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 UTILITIES AND RELATED EQUIPMENT

3.1.2 Disconnecting Existing Utilities
3.1.3 Roofing
3.1.3.1 Temporary Roofing
3.1.3.2 Reroofing
3.1.4 Carpentry
3.1.5 Patching
3.1.6 Mechanical Equipment and Fixtures
3.1.7 Fixtures
3.1.8 Electrical Devices
3.1.9 Conduit and Miscellaneous Items
3.1.10 Items With Unique/Regulated Disposal Requirements
3.2 DISPOSITION OF MATERIAL
3.2.1 Title to Materials
3.2.2 Reuse of Materials and Equipment
3.2.3 Salvaged Materials and Equipment
3.2.4 Unsalvageable and Non-Recyclable Material
3.3 CLEANUP
3.4 DISPOSAL OF REMOVED MATERIALS
12/26/2018
3.4.1 Regulation of Removed Materials

3.4.2 Burning on Government Property
3.4.3 Removal from Government Property
12/26/2018
SECTION 02 41 00
DEMOLITION
05/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASSE/SAFE A10.6 (2006) Safety Requirements for Demolition

Operations

Manual

Manual

Air Pollutants
Do not begin demolition or deconstruction until authorization is received

from the Contracting Officer. Remove rubbish and debris from the station
daily; do not allow accumulations inside or outside the building. The work
includes demolition, salvage of identified items and materials, and removal
of resulting rubbish and debris. Remove rubbish and debris from Government
property daily, unless otherwise directed. Store materials that cannot be
removed daily in areas specified by the Contracting Officer. In the
interest of occupational safety and health, perform the work in accordance
with EM 385-1-1, Section 23, Demolition, and other applicable Sections.
1.3 ITEMS TO REMAIN IN PLACE
Take necessary precautions to avoid damage to existing items to remain in

place, to be reused, or to remain the property of the Government. Repair
or replace damaged items as approved by the Contracting Officer.
Coordinate the work of this section with all other work indicated.
Construct and maintain shoring, bracing, and supports as required. Ensure
that structural elements are not overloaded. Increase structural supports
or add new supports as may be required as a result of any cutting, removal,
12/26/2018
or demolition work performed under this contract. Do not overload

structural elements. Provide new supports and reinforcement for existing
construction weakened by demolition, or removal work. Repairs,
reinforcement, or structural replacement require approval by the
Contracting Officer prior to performing such work.
1.3.1 Existing Construction Limits and Protection
Do not disturb existing construction beyond the extent indicated or

necessary for installation of new construction. Provide protective
measures to control accumulation and migration of dust and dirt in all work
areas. Remove dust, dirt, and debris from work areas daily.
1.3.2 Weather Protection
For portions of the building to remain, protect building interior and

materials and equipment from the weather at all times. Where removal of
existing roofing is necessary to accomplish work, have materials and
workmen ready to provide adequate and temporary covering of exposed areas.
1.3.3 Utility Service
Maintain existing utilities indicated to stay in service and protect

against damage during demolition operations. Prior to start of work, the
Government will disconnect and seal utilities serving each area of
alteration or removal upon written request from the Contractor.
1.3.4 Facilities
Protect electrical and mechanical services and utilities. Where removal of

existing utilities and pavement is specified or indicated, provide approved
barricades, temporary covering of exposed areas, and temporary services or
connections for electrical and mechanical utilities. Floors, roofs, walls,
columns, pilasters, and other structural components that are designed and
constructed to stand without lateral support or shoring, and are determined
to be in stable condition, must remain standing without additional bracing,
shoring, or lateral support until demolished or deconstructed, unless
directed otherwise by the Contracting Officer. Ensure that no elements
determined to be unstable are left unsupported and place and secure
bracing, shoring, or lateral supports as may be required as a result of any
cutting, removal, deconstruction, or demolition work performed under this
contract.
1.4 BURNING
The use of burning at the project site for the disposal of refuse and
debris will not be permitted.
1.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PLAN
Submit a Demolition Plan with procedures for careful removal and

disposition of materials specified to be salvaged, coordination with other
work in progress, a disconnection schedule of utility services, and a
detailed description of methods, equipment and equipment location to be
used for each operation along with the sequence of operations. Include
statements affirming Contractor inspection of the existing roof deck and
its suitability to perform as a safe working platform or if inspection
reveals a safety hazard to workers, state provisions for securing the
safety of the workers throughout the performance of the work. Provide
12/26/2018
procedures for safe conduct of the work in accordance with COE EM 385-1-1.
1.6 SUBMITTALS

Provide and perform the following prior to commencement of demolition:
Demolition Plan
Existing Conditions
1.7 DEMOLITION PLAN
Indicated the following:
1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with

starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Government Facility
Manager's and other tenants' on-site operations are uninterrupted.
2. After selective demolition is complete, submit an inventory list of

items that have been removed and salvaged.
3. Use of elevator and stairs.
4. Locations of proposed dust and noise control temporary partitions and

means of egress, including for other tenants affected by selective
demolition operations.
5. Coordination of the Government's continuing occupancy of existing

building.
6. Means of protection for items to remain and items in path of waste

removal from building.
Submit timely notification of demolition and renovation projects to

Federal, State, regional, and local authorities in accordance with 40 CFR 61,
Subpart M. Notify the State's environmental protection agency and the
Contracting Officer in writing 10 working days prior to the commencement of
work in accordance with 40 CFR 61, Subpart M. Comply with federal, state,
and local hauling and disposal regulations. In addition to the
requirements of the "Contract Clauses," conform to the safety requirements
contained in ASSE/SAFE A10.6. Comply with the Environmental Protection
Agency requirements specified. Use of explosives will not be permitted.
1.8.1 Dust and Debris Control
Prevent the spread of dust and debris to occupied portions of the building
and avoid the creation of a nuisance or hazard in the surrounding area. Do
not use water if it results in hazardous or objectionable conditions such
as, but not limited to, ice, flooding, or pollution.
12/26/2018
1.9 PROTECTION
1.9.1 Protection of Personnel
Before, during and after the demolition work continuously evaluate the
condition of the area being demolished and take immediate action to protect
all personnel working in and around the project site.
1.10 RELOCATIONS
Perform the removal and reinstallation of relocated items as indicated with

workmen skilled in the trades involved. Repair or replace items to be
relocated which are damaged by the Contractor with new undamaged items as
approved by the Contracting Officer.
1.11 EXISTING CONDITIONS
Before beginning any demolition survey the site and examine the drawings
and specifications to determine the extent of the work. Record existing
conditions in the presence of the Contracting Officer showing the condition
of structures and other facilities adjacent to areas of alteration or
removal. Photographs sized 4 inch will be acceptable as a record of
existing conditions. Include in the record the elevation of the top of
foundation walls, finish floor elevations, possible conflicting electrical
conduits, plumbing lines, alarms systems, the location and extent of
existing cracks and other damage and description of surface conditions that
exist before starting work. It is the Contractor's responsibility to
verify and document all required outages which will be required during the
course of work, and to note these outages on the record document. Submit
survey results.
Record existing conditions prior to starting work in accordance with the

paragraph entitled, "Existing Conditions," of this section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 UTILITIES AND RELATED EQUIPMENT
Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities,

except when authorized in writing by the Contracting Officer. Do not
interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by the
Government except when approved in writing and then only after temporary
utility services have been approved and provided. Do not begin demolition
work until all utility disconnections have been made. Shut off and cap
utilities for future use, as indicated.
3.1.2 Disconnecting Existing Utilities
Remove existing utilities, as indicated and uncovered by work and terminate

in a manner conforming to the nationally recognized code covering the
specific utility and approved by the Contracting Officer. When utility
lines are encountered but are not indicated on the drawings, notify the
Contracting Officer prior to further work in that area.
12/26/2018
3.1.3 Roofing
Remove existing roof system and associated components in their entirety

down to existing roof deck as specified on construction drawings. Sequence
work to minimize building exposure between demolition or deconstruction and
new roof materials installation.
3.1.3.1 Temporary Roofing
Install temporary roofing and flashing as necessary to maintain a

watertight condition throughout the course of the work. Remove temporary
work prior to installation of permanent roof system materials unless
approved otherwise by the Contracting Officer. Make provisions for worker
safety during demolition, and installation of new materials.
3.1.3.2 Reroofing
When removing the existing roofing system from the roof deck, remove only
as much roofing as can be recovered by the end of the work day, unless
approved otherwise by the Contracting Officer. Do not attempt to open the
roof covering system in threatening weather. Reseal all openings prior to
suspension of work the same day.
3.1.4 Carpentry
Salvage for recycle lumber, millwork items, and finished boards, and sort
by type and size.
3.1.5 Patching
Where removals leave holes and damaged surfaces exposed in the finished
work, patch and repair these holes and damaged surfaces to match adjacent
finished surfaces, using on-site materials when available. Where new work
is to be applied to existing surfaces, perform removals and patching in a
manner to produce surfaces suitable for receiving new work. Finished
surfaces of patched area shall be flush with the adjacent existing surface
and shall match the existing adjacent surface as closely as possible as to
texture and finish. Patching shall be as specified and indicated, and
shall include:
a. Concrete and Masonry: Completely fill holes and depressions, caused by

previous physical damage or left as a result of removals in existing
masonry walls to remain, with an approved masonry patching material,
applied in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
3.1.6 Mechanical Equipment and Fixtures
Disconnect mechanical hardware at the nearest connection to existing

services to remain, unless otherwise noted. Disconnect mechanical
equipment and fixtures at fittings. Remove service valves attached to the
unit. Salvage each item of equipment and fixtures as a whole unit; listed,
indexed, tagged, and stored. Salvage each unit with its normal operating
auxiliary equipment. Transport salvaged equipment and fixtures, including
motors and machines, to a designated on station storage area as directed by
the Contracting Officer. Do not remove equipment until approved.
3.1.7 Fixtures
Remove and salvage roof mounted electrical fixtures. Salvage unprotected
12/26/2018
glassware from the fixture and salvage separately. Salvage incandescent,

mercury-vapor, and fluorescent lamps and fluorescent ballasts manufactured
prior to 1978, boxed and tagged for identification, and protected from
breakage.
3.1.8 Electrical Devices
Roof mounted electrical devices required to be temporarily removed during

the demolition and construction phase shall be performed by the User.
3.1.9 Conduit and Miscellaneous Items
Roof mounted electrical conduits required to be temporarily removed during

the demolition and construction phase shall be performed by the User.
3.1.10 Items With Unique/Regulated Disposal Requirements
Remove and dispose of items with unique or regulated disposal requirements

in the manner dictated by law or in the most environmentally responsible
manner.
3.2 DISPOSITION OF MATERIAL
3.2.1 Title to Materials
Except for salvaged items specified in related Sections, and for materials
or equipment scheduled for salvage, all materials and equipment removed and
not reused or salvaged, shall become the property of the Contractor and
shall be removed from Government property. Title to materials resulting
from demolition and deconstruction, and materials and equipment to be
removed, is vested in the Contractor upon approval by the Contracting
Officer of the Contractor's demolition, deconstruction, and removal
procedures, and authorization by the Contracting Officer to begin
demolition and deconstruction. The Government will not be responsible for
the condition or loss of, or damage to, such property after contract
award. Showing for sale or selling materials and equipment on site is
prohibited.
3.2.2 Reuse of Materials and Equipment
Remove and store materials and equipment indicated to be reused or

relocated to prevent damage, and reinstall as the work progresses.
3.2.3 Salvaged Materials and Equipment
Remove materials and equipment that are to remain the property of the
Government.
a. Salvage items and material to the maximum extent possible.
b. Store all materials salvaged for the Contractor as approved by the

Contracting Officer and remove from Government property before
completion of the contract. On site sales of salvaged material is
prohibited.
3.2.4 Unsalvageable and Non-Recyclable Material
Dispose of unsalvageable and non-recyclable noncombustible material in the

disposal area designated by the Contracting Officer.
12/26/2018
3.3 CLEANUP
Remove debris and rubbish. Remove and transport the debris in a manner
that prevents spillage on streets or adjacent areas. Apply local
regulations regarding hauling and disposal.
3.4 DISPOSAL OF REMOVED MATERIALS
3.4.1 Regulation of Removed Materials
Dispose of debris, rubbish, scrap, and other nonsalvageable materials

resulting from removal operations with all applicable federal, state and
local regulations as contractually specified in the Waste Management Plan.
3.4.2 Burning on Government Property
Burning of materials removed from demolished and deconstructed structures

will not be permitted on Government property.
Transport waste materials except waste soil, from Government property for
legal disposal. Dispose of waste soil as directed.
12/26/2018
SECTION 02 81 00
TRANSPORTATION AND DISPOSAL OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
02/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 Hazardous Material
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.4.1 Transportation and Disposal Coordinator
1.4.2 Training
1.4.3 Certification
1.4.4 Laws and Regulations Requirements
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Packagings
2.1.2 Markings
2.1.3 Labeling
2.1.4 Placards
2.1.5 Spill Response Materials
2.2 EQUIPMENT AND TOOLS
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 ONSITE HAZARDOUS WASTE MANAGEMENT

3.1.1 Hazardous Waste Classification
3.1.2 Management Plan
3.2 OFFSITE HAZARDOUS WASTE MANAGEMENT
3.2.1 Treatment, Storage, and/or Disposal Facility and Transporter
3.2.2 Status of the Facility
3.2.3 Shipping Documents and Packagings Certification
3.2.5 Treatment and Disposal of Hazardous Wastes
3.3 RADIOACTIVE MATERIALS MANAGEMENT
3.3.1 Identification of Proper Shipping Names
3.3.2 Packaging, Labeling, and Marking
3.3.3 Shipping Documents
3.3.3.1 PCB Waste Shipment Documents
3.3.3.2 Asbestos Waste Shipment Documents
3.3.3.3 Other Hazardous Material Shipment Documents
3.4 OBTAINING EPA ID NUMBERS
3.6 RECORDKEEPING
3.7 SPILL RESPONSE
3.8 EMERGENCY CONTACTS
12/26/2018
12/26/2018
SECTION 02 81 00
TRANSPORTATION AND DISPOSAL OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

02/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

INTERNATIONAL AIR TRANSPORT ASSOCIATION (IATA)
IATA DGR (2013) Dangerous Goods Regulations
AFI 32-7086 (2015) Hazardous Material Management
EP 415-1-266 (2000) Resident Engineer Management Guide

(REMG) for Hazardous, Toxic, and
Radioactive Waste (HTRW) Projects
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION (DOT)
DOT 4500.9R Defense Transportation Regulation, Part 2,

Cargo Movement, Chapter 204, Hazardous
Material

Waste

Hazardous Waste

Hazardous Waste

Disposal Facilities

40 CFR 266 Standards for the Management of Specific

Hazardous Wastes and Specific Types of
Hazardous Waste Management Facilities
12/26/2018
40 CFR 270 EPA Administered Permit Programs: The

Hazardous Waste Permit Program
40 CFR 279 Standards for the Management of Used Oil
40 CFR 300 National Oil and Hazardous Substances

Pollution Contingency Plan
40 CFR 302 Designation, Reportable Quantities, and

Notification

Air Pollutants
40 CFR 761 Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs)

Manufacturing, Processing, Distribution in
Commerce, and Use Prohibitions
49 CFR 107 Hazardous Materials Program Procedures

49 CFR 173 Shippers - General Requirements for

Shipments and Packagings
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A substance or material which has been determined by the Secretary of

Transportation to be capable of posing an unreasonable risk to health,
safety, and property when transported in commerce, and which has been so
designated pursuant to the Hazardous Materials Transportation Act, 49
U.S.C. Appendix Section 1801 et seq. The term includes materials
designated as hazardous materials under the provisions of 49 CFR 172,
Sections .101 and .102 and materials which meet the defining criteria for
hazard classes and divisions in 49 CFR 173 and Section 1.4 of AFI 32-7086.
EPA designated hazardous wastes are also hazardous materials.
A waste which meets criteria established in RCRA or specified by the EPA in

40 CFR 261 or which has been designated as hazardous by a RCRA authorized
state program.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. When
used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office
that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in
accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
12/26/2018
SD-03 Product Data
Onsite Hazardous Waste Management; G

Notices of Non-Compliance and Notices of Violation
Packaging Notifications
SD-06 Test Reports
Recordkeeping; G
Spill Response
Exception Report; G
SD-07 Certificates
Certification
Security Plan
Transportation and Disposal Coordinator; G
Training; G
EPA Offsite Policy
Certificates of Disposal
Shipping Documents and Packagings Certification; G
Waste Minimization
1.4.1 Transportation and Disposal Coordinator
Designate, by position and title, one person to act as the Transportation

and Disposal Coordinator (TDC) for this contract. The TDC shall serve as
the single point of contact for all environmental regulatory matters and
shall have overall responsibility for total environmental compliance at the
site including, but not limited to, accurate identification and
classification of hazardous waste and hazardous materials; determination of
proper shipping names; identification of marking, labeling, packaging and
placarding requirements; completion of waste profiles, hazardous waste
manifests, asbestos waste shipment records, PCB manifests, bill of ladings,
exception and discrepancy reports; and all other environmental
documentation. The TDC shall have, at a minimum, one year of specialized
experience in the management and transportation of hazardous waste and have
been Department of Transportation certified under 49 CFR 172, Subpart H.
1.4.2 Training
The Contractor's hazardous materials employees shall be trained, tested,

and certified to safely and effectively carry out their assigned duties.
The Contractor's employees transporting hazardous materials or preparing
hazardous materials for transportation, including samples, shall be
trained, tested, and certified in accordance with 49 CFR 172, Subpart H,
including security awareness and any applicable security plans. Where
shipment of hazardous materials by air may be occurring, such as for sample
shipments, the Contractor's hazardous material employees shall also be
trained on IATA DGR. Contractor employees making determinations that
shipments do not constitute DOT regulated hazardous materials shall also be
trained, tested, and certified in accordance with 49 CFR 172, Subpart H.
1.4.3 Certification
The Contractor and/or subcontractors transporting hazardous materials shall
12/26/2018
possess a current certificate of registration issued by the Research and

Special Programs Administration (RSPA), U.S. Department of Transportation,
when required by 49 CFR 107, Subpart G. Submit copies of the certificates
or written statements certifying exemption from these requirements.
1.4.4 Laws and Regulations Requirements
Work shall meet or exceed the minimum requirements established by Federal,

state, and local laws and regulations which are applicable. These
requirements are amended frequently and compliance with amendments is
required as they become effective. In the event that compliance exceeds
the scope of work or conflicts with specific requirements of the contract,
notify the Contracting Officer immediately.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Provide all the materials required for the packaging, labeling, marking,
placarding and transportation of hazardous wastes and hazardous materials
in conformance with Department of Transportation standards and IATA DGR and
EP 415-1-266. Details in this specification shall not be construed as
establishing the limits of the Contractor's responsibility.
2.1.1 Packagings
Provide bulk and non-bulk containers for packaging hazardous

materials/wastes consistent with the authorizations referenced in the
Hazardous Materials Table in 49 CFR 172, Section.101, Column 8. Bulk and
non-bulk packaging shall meet the corresponding specifications in 49 CFR 173
referenced in the Hazardous Materials Table, 49 CFR 172, Section .101.
Each packaging shall conform to the general packaging requirements of
Subpart B of 49 CFR 173, to the requirements of 49 CFR 178 at the specified
packing group performance level, to the requirements of special provisions
of column 7 of the Hazardous Materials Table in 49 CFR 172, Section .101,
and shall be compatible with the material to be packaged as required by
40 CFR 262. Also provide other packaging related materials such as
materials used to cushion or fill voids in overpacked containers, etc.
Sorbent materials shall not be capable of reacting dangerously with, being
decomposed by, or being ignited by the hazardous materials being packaged.
Additionally, sorbents used to treat free liquids to be disposed of in
landfills shall be non-biodegradable as specified in 40 CFR 264, Section .314.
In addition, packaging notifications will be provided to the Government in
accordance with 49 CFR 172, Section .178.2(c) regarding type and dimensions
of closures, including gaskets, needed to satisfy performance test
requirements.
2.1.2 Markings
Provide markings for each hazardous material/waste package, freight

container, and transport vehicle consistent with the requirements of
49 CFR 172, Subpart D and 40 CFR 262, Section .32 (for hazardous waste),
40 CFR 761, Section .45 (for PCBs), and 40 CFR 61, Section .149(d) (for
asbestos). Markings shall be capable of withstanding, without
deterioration or substantial color change, a 180 day exposure to conditions
reasonably expected to be encountered during container storage and
transportation.
12/26/2018
2.1.3 Labeling
Provide primary and subsidiary labels for hazardous materials/wastes

consistent with the requirements in the Hazardous Materials Table in
49 CFR 172, Section .101, Column 6. Labels shall meet design
specifications required by 49 CFR 172, Subpart E including size, shape,
color, printing, and symbol requirements. Labels shall be durable and
weather resistant and capable of withstanding, without deterioration or
substantial color change, a 180 day exposure to conditions reasonably
expected to be encountered during container storage and transportation.
2.1.4 Placards
For each offsite shipment of hazardous material/waste, provide primary and

subsidiary placards consistent with the requirements of 49 CFR 172, Subpart
F. Placards shall be provided for each side and each end of bulk
packaging, freight containers, transport vehicles, and rail cars requiring
such placarding. Placards may be plastic, metal, or other material capable
of withstanding, without deterioration, a 30 day exposure to open weather
conditions and shall meet design requirements specified in 49 CFR 172,
Subpart F.
2.1.5 Spill Response Materials
Provide spill response materials including, but not limited to, containers,
adsorbent, shovels, and personal protective equipment. Spill response
materials shall be available at all times in which hazardous
materials/wastes are being handled or transported. Spill response
materials shall be compatible with the type of material being handled.
2.2 EQUIPMENT AND TOOLS
Provide miscellaneous equipment and tools necessary to handle hazardous

materials and hazardous wastes in a safe and environmentally sound manner.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 ONSITE HAZARDOUS WASTE MANAGEMENT
These paragraphs apply to Government owned waste only. Contractors are

prohibited by 10 U.S.C. 2692 from storing Contractor owned waste onsite for
any length of time. The Contractor is responsible for ensuring compliance
with all Federal, state, and local hazardous waste laws and regulations and
shall verify those requirements when preparing reports, waste shipment
records, hazardous waste manifests, or other documents. Identify hazardous
wastes using criteria set forth in 40 CFR 261 or all applicable state and
local laws, regulations, and ordinances. When accumulating hazardous waste
onsite, comply with generator requirements in 40 CFR 262 and any applicable
state or local law or regulations. Onsite accumulation times shall be
restricted to applicable time frames referenced in 40 CFR 262, Section.34
and any applicable state or local law or regulation. Accumulation start
dates shall commence when waste is first generated (i.e. containerized or
otherwise collected for discard). Only use containers in good condition
and compatible with the waste to be stored. Ensure containers are closed
except when adding or removing waste, and immediately mark all hazardous
waste containers with the words "hazardous waste" and other information
required by 40 CFR 262, Section.32 and any applicable state or local law or
regulation as soon as the waste is containerized. An additional marking
shall be placed on containers of "unknowns" designating the date sampled,
12/26/2018
and the suspected hazard. Inspect containers for signs of deterioration

and for responding to any spills or leaks. Inspect all hazardous waste
areas weekly and provide written documentation of the inspection. Include
date and time of inspection, name of individual conducting the inspection,
problems noted, and corrective actions taken on the inspection logs.
3.1.1 Hazardous Waste Classification
Identify, in consultation with the Contracting Officer and

USAF Hazardous Waste Management Plan, 45SW, all waste codes applicable to
each hazardous waste stream based on requirements in 40 CFR 261 or any
applicable state or local law or regulation. Also identify all applicable
treatment standards in 40 CFR 268 and state land disposal restrictions and
make a determination as to whether or not the waste meets or exceeds the
standards. Waste profiles, analyses, classification and treatment
standards information shall be submitted to Contracting Officer for review
and approval.
3.1.2 Management Plan
Prepare a plan detailing the manner in which hazardous wastes will be

managed and describing the types and volumes of hazardous wastes
anticipated to be managed as well as the management practices to be
utilized. The plan shall identify the method to be used to ensure accurate
piece counts and/or weights of shipments; shall identify waste minimization
methods; shall propose facilities to be utilized for treatment, storage,
and/or disposal; shall identify areas onsite where hazardous wastes are to
be handled; and shall identify whether transfer facilities are to be
utilized; and if so, how the wastes will be tracked to ultimate disposal.
Submit the plan prior to start of work. Written documentation of weekly
hazardous waste inspections shall be submitted on a monthly basis.
3.2 OFFSITE HAZARDOUS WASTE MANAGEMENT
Use RCRA Subtitle C permitted facilities which meet the requirements of

40 CFR 264 or facilities operating under interim status which meet the
requirements of 40 CFR 265. Offsite treatment, storage, and/or disposal
facilities with significant RCRA violations or compliance problems (such as
facilities known to be releasing hazardous constituents into ground water,
surface water, soil, or air) shall not be used. Submit Notices of
Non-Compliance and Notices of Violation by a Federal, state, or local
regulatory agency issued to the Contractor in relation to any work
performed under this contract. Immediately provide copies of such notices
to the Contracting Officer. Also furnish all relevant documents regarding
the incident and any information requested by the Contracting Officer, and
coordinate its response to the notice with the Contracting Officer or the
designated representative prior to submission to the notifying authority.
Also furnish a copy to the Contracting Officer of all documents submitted
to the regulatory authority, including the final reply to the notice, and
all other materials, until the matter is resolved.
3.2.1 Treatment, Storage, and/or Disposal Facility and Transporter
Provide the Contracting Officer with EPA ID numbers, names, locations, and
telephone numbers of TSD facilities and transporters. This information
shall be contained in the Hazardous Waste Management Plan and shall be
approved by the Contracting Officer prior to waste disposal.
12/26/2018
3.2.2 Status of the Facility
Facilities receiving hazardous waste shall be permitted in accordance with

40 CFR 270 or operating under interim status in accordance with 40 CFR 265
requirements, or permitted by a state authorized by the Environmental
Protection Agency to administer the RCRA permit program. Additionally,
prior to using a TSD Facility, contact the EPA Regional Offsite Coordinator
specified in 40 CFR 300, Section .440, to determine the facility's status,
and document all information necessary to satisfy the requirements of the
EPA Offsite policy and submit this information to the Contracting Officer.
3.2.3 Shipping Documents and Packagings Certification
Prior to shipment of any hazardous material offsite and a minimum of 14

days prior to anticipated pickup, provide for review written certification
to the Contracting Officer that hazardous materials have been properly
packaged, labeled, and marked in accordance with Department of
Transportation and EPA requirements. Furnish designated disposal facility
packaging assurances by the not later than 35 days after acceptance of the
shipment. The Contractor's TDC shall also provide written certification
regarding waste minimization efforts documenting that efforts have been
taken to reduce the volume and toxicity of waste to the degree economically
practicable and that the method of treatment, storage, or disposal selected
minimizes threats to human health and the environment.
Prior to conducting hazardous materials activities, the Contractor

responsible for pre-transportation activities shall either certify to the
Government that a Security Plan is in place which meets the requirements of
49 CFR 172, Subpart I or in the event that the types or amounts of
hazardous materials are excluded from the security planning requirements, a
written statement to that effect detailing the basis for the exception.
Use manifests for transporting hazardous wastes as required by 40 CFR 263
or any applicable state or local law or regulation. Transportation shall
comply with all requirements in the Department of Transportation referenced
regulations in the 49 CFR series. Prepare hazardous waste manifests for
each shipment of hazardous waste shipped offsite. Manifests shall be
completed using instructions in 40 CFR 262, Subpart B and any applicable
state or local law or regulation. Submit manifests and waste profiles to
Contracting Officer for review and approval. Prepare land disposal
restriction notifications as required by 40 CFR 268 or any applicable state
or local law or regulation for each shipment of hazardous waste. Submit
notifications with the manifest to the Contracting Officer for review and
approval. In accordance with DOT 4500.9R, inspect motor vehicles used to
transport hazardous materials in accordance the 49 CFR and DOT safety
regulations and complete DDForm 626, Motor Vehicle Inspection .
3.2.5 Treatment and Disposal of Hazardous Wastes
The hazardous waste shall be transported to an approved hazardous waste

treatment, storage, or disposal facility within 90 days of the accumulation
start date on each container . Ship hazardous wastes only to facilities
which are properly permitted to accept the hazardous waste or operating
under interim status. Ensure wastes are treated to meet land disposal
treatment standards in 40 CFR 268 prior to land disposal. Propose TSD
facilities via submission of the Hazardous Waste Management Plan, subject
to the approval of the Contracting Officer. Submit Certificates of Disposal
documenting the ultimate disposal, destruction or placement of hazardous
12/26/2018
wastes, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), and/or asbestos within 180 days

of initial shipment. Receipt of these certificates will be required for
final payment.
3.3 RADIOACTIVE MATERIALS MANAGEMENT
In consultation with the Contracting Officer and

USAF Hazardous Waste Management Plan, 45SW, evaluate, prior to shipment of
any material offsite, whether the material is regulated as a hazardous
waste in addition to being regulated as a radioactive material; this shall
be done for the purpose of determining proper shipping descriptions,
marking requirements, etc., as described below.
3.3.1 Identification of Proper Shipping Names
Use 49 CFR 172, Section .101 to identify proper shipping names for each
hazardous material (including hazardous wastes) to be shipped offsite.
Submit proper shipping names to the Contracting Officer in the form of
draft shipping documents for review and approval.
3.3.2 Packaging, Labeling, and Marking
Package, label, and mark hazardous materials/wastes using the specified

materials and in accordance with the referenced authorizations. Mark each
container of hazardous waste of 110 gallons or less with the following:
"HAZARDOUS WASTE - Federal Law Prohibits Improper Disposal.

If found, contact the nearest police or public safety authority or the U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency.
Generator's name _____________________________________
Manifest Document Number ___________________________".
3.3.3 Shipping Documents
Ensure that each shipment of hazardous material sent offsite is accompanied

by properly completed shipping documents. This includes shipments of
samples that may potentially meet the definition of a Department of
Transportation regulated hazardous material.
3.3.3.1 PCB Waste Shipment Documents
Prepare hazardous waste manifests for each shipment of PCB waste shipped
offsite. Complete manifests using instructions in 40 CFR 761, Sections .207
and .208 and all other applicable requirements. Submit documents to
Contracting Officer for review and approval.
3.3.3.2 Asbestos Waste Shipment Documents
Prepare waste shipment records, as required by 40 CFR 61, for shipments of

asbestos. Submit waste shipment records to the Contracting Officer for
review and approval. Waste shipment records shall be signed by the
Contractor.
3.3.3.3 Other Hazardous Material Shipment Documents
Prepare a bill of lading for each shipment of hazardous material which is

not accompanied by a hazardous waste manifest or asbestos waste shipment
record which fulfills the shipping paper requirements. The bill of lading
shall satisfy the requirements of 49 CFR 172, Subpart C, and 40 CFR 279 if
12/26/2018
shipping used oil and any applicable state or local law or regulation, and
shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer for review and approval. For
laboratory samples and treatability study samples, prepare bills of lading
and other documentation as necessary to satisfy conditions of the sample
exclusions in 40 CFR 261, Section .4(d) and (e) and any applicable state or
local law or regulation. Bill of ladings requiring shipper's
certifications will be signed by the Government .
3.4 OBTAINING EPA ID NUMBERS
If required, complete EPA Form 8700-12, Notification of Hazardous Waste

Activity, and submit to the Contracting Officer for review and approval.
Allow a minimum of 30 days for processing the application and assigning the
EPA ID number. Shipment shall be made not earlier than one week after
receipt of the EPA ID number.
Minimize the generation of hazardous waste to the maximum extent

practicable and take all necessary precautions to avoid mixing clean and
contaminated wastes. Identify and evaluate recycling and reclamation
options as alternatives to land disposal. Requirements of 40 CFR 266 shall
apply to: hazardous wastes recycled in a manner constituting disposal;
hazardous waste burned for energy recovery; lead-acid battery recycling;
and hazardous wastes with economically recoverable precious metals. Submit
written certification that waste minimization efforts have been undertaken
to reduce the volume and toxicity of waste to the degree economically
practicable and that the method of treatment, storage, or disposal selected
minimizes threats to human health and the environment.
3.6 RECORDKEEPING
Maintain adequate records to support information provided to the

Contracting Officer regarding exception reports, annual reports, and
biennial reports; maintain asbestos waste shipment records for a minimum of
3 years from the date of shipment or any longer period required by any
applicable law or regulation or any other provision of this contract; and
maintain bill of ladings for a minimum of 375 days from the date of
shipment or any longer period required by any applicable law or regulation
or any other provision of this contract. Submit information necessary to
file state annual or EPA biennial reports for all hazardous waste
transported, treated, stored, or disposed of under this contract. Do not
forward these data directly to the regulatory agency but to the Contracting
Officer at the specified time. The submittal shall contain all the
information necessary for filing of the formal reports in the form and
format required by the governing Federal or state regulatory agency. A
cover letter shall accompany the data to include the contract number,
Contractor name, and project location. In the events that a manifest copy
documenting receipt of hazardous waste at the treatment storage and
disposal facility is not received within 35 days of shipment initiation, or
that a manifest copy documenting receipt of PCB waste at the designated
facility is not received within 35 days of shipment initiation, prepare and
submit an exception report to the Contracting Officer within 37 days of
shipment initiation.
3.7 SPILL RESPONSE
In the event of a spill or release of a hazardous substance (as designated

in 40 CFR 302), or pollutant or contaminant, or oil (as governed by the Oil
12/26/2018
Pollution Act (OPA), 33 U.S.C. 2701 et seq.), notify the Contracting

Officer immediately. Any direction from the Contracting Officer concerning
a spill or release shall not be considered a change under the contract. If
the spill exceeds a reporting threshold, follow the pre-established
procedures for immediate reporting to the Contracting Officer. Comply with
all applicable requirements of Federal, state, or local laws or regulations
regarding any spill incident.
3.8 EMERGENCY CONTACTS
The Contractor is responsible for complying with the emergency contact

provisions in 49 CFR 172, Section .604. Whenever the Contractor ships
hazardous materials, provide a 24 hr emergency response contact and phone
number of a person knowledgeable about the hazardous materials being
shipped and who has comprehensive emergency response and incident
mitigation information for that material, or has immediate access to a
person who possesses such knowledge and information. The phone shall be
monitored on a 24 hour basis at all times when the hazardous materials are
in transportation, including during storage incidental to transportation.
Ensure that information regarding this emergency contact and phone number
are placed on all hazardous material shipping documents. Designate an
emergency coordinator and post the following information at areas in which
hazardous wastes are managed:
a. The name of the emergency coordinator.
b. Phone number through which the emergency coordinator can be contacted

on a 24 hour basis.
c. The telephone number of the local fire department.
d. The location of fire extinguishers and spill control materials.
12/26/2018
Attachment A
SAMPLE OFF-SITE POLICY CERTIFICATION MEMO
Project/Contract #:
Waste Stream:
Primary TSD
Facility, EPA ID #
and Location:
Alter. TSD Facility,
EPA ID # and
L ti
EPA Region Contact
I (617) 918-1752
II (212) 637-4130
III (214) 814-5267
IV (404) 562-8591
V (312) 353-8207
VI (214) 665-2282
VII (913) 551-7154
VIII (303) 312-6419
IX (415) 972-3304
X (206) 553-2859
EPA representative
contacted:
EPA representative
phone number:
Date contacted:
Comment:
The above EPA representative was contacted on __________. As of that

date
the above sites were considered acceptable in accordance with the
Off-Site
Date: Signature:
Phone number:
12/26/2018
SECTION 02 82 33.13 20
REMOVAL/CONTROL AND DISPOSAL OF PAINT WITH LEAD, CHROMIUM, OR MERCURY
08/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 Abatement
1.2.2 Action Level
1.2.3 Area Sampling
1.2.5 Contaminated Room
1.2.6 Decontamination Shower Facility
1.2.7 Deleading
1.2.8 Eight-Hour Time Weighted Average (TWA)
1.2.9 High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) Filter Equipment
1.2.10 Lead
1.2.11 Lead-Based Paint (LBP)
1.2.12 Lead-Based Paint Activities
1.2.13 Lead-Based Paint Hazard (LBP Hazard)
1.2.14 Paint with Lead (PWL)and Paint with Mercury
1.2.15 Lead or Mercury Control Area
1.2.16 Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL)
1.2.17 Personal Sampling
1.2.18 Physical Boundary
1.2.19 Decontamination Unit
1.3 DESCRIPTION
1.3.1 Description of Work
1.3.2 Coordination with Other Work
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1.5.1.1 Qualifications of CP
1.5.1.2 Training Certification
1.5.1.3 Testing Laboratory
1.5.1.4 Third Party Consultant Qualifications
1.5.1.5 Waste Transporter Permit
1.5.2 Requirements
1.5.2.1 Competent Person (CP) Responsibilities
1.5.2.2 Lead-Based Paint/Paint with Lead Removal/Control Plan
(LBP/PWL R/CP) and Paint with mercury Removal/Control Plan
1.5.2.3 Occupational and Environmental Assessment Data Report
1.5.2.4 Medical Examinations
1.5.2.5 Training
1.5.2.6 Respiratory Protection Program
1.5.2.7 Hazard Communication Program
1.5.2.8 Lead Waste Management
1.5.2.9 Environmental, Safety and Health Compliance
1.5.3 Pre-Construction Conference
SECTION 02 82 33.13 20 Page 1

12/26/2018
1.6 EQUIPMENT
1.6.1 Respirators
1.6.2 Special Protective Clothing
1.6.3 Rental Equipment Notification
1.6.4 Vacuum Filters
1.6.5 Disposal Bags
1.6.6 Air Filtration Unit
1.6.7 Equipment for Government Personnel
1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
1.7.1 Protection of Existing Work to Remain
PART 2 PRODUCTS
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
3.1.1 Protection
3.1.1.1 Notification
3.1.1.2 Boundary Requirements
3.1.1.3 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Systems
3.1.1.4 Decontamination Shower Facility
3.1.1.5 Eye Wash Station
3.1.1.6 Mechanical Ventilation System
3.1.1.7 Personnel Protection
3.2 ERECTION
3.2.1 Lead Control Area Requirements
3.3 APPLICATION
3.3.1 Work Procedures
3.3.2 Lead-Based Paint Removal/Control/Deleading
3.3.2.1 Indoor Paint Removal
3.3.3 Personnel Exiting Procedures
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.4.1 Tests
3.4.1.1 Air and Wipe Sampling
3.4.1.2 Air Sampling During Paint Removal Work
3.4.1.3 Sampling After Paint Removal/Control
3.4.1.4 Testing of Removed Paint and Used Abrasive
3.5 CLEANING AND DISPOSAL
3.5.1 Cleanup
3.5.1.1 Clearance Certification
3.5.2 Disposal
3.5.2.1 Chromium Paint
3.5.2.2 Disposal Documentation
3.5.3 Payment for Hazardous Waste
SECTION 02 82 33.13 20 Page 2

12/26/2018
SECTION 02 82 33.13 20
REMOVAL/CONTROL AND DISPOSAL OF PAINT WITH LEAD, CHROMIUM, OR MERCURY

08/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AIHA Z88.6 (2006) Respiratory Protection - Respirator

Use-Physical Qualifications for Personnel
ANSI Z9.2 (2012) Fundamentals Governing the Design &

Operation of Local Exhaust Ventilation
Systems
ANSI/ASSE Z88.2 (2015) Practices for Respiratory Protection
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF HOUSING AND URBAN DEVELOPMENT (HUD)
HUD 6780 (1995; Errata Aug 1996;Rev Ch. 7 - 1997)

Guidelines for the Evaluation and Control
of Lead-Based Paint Hazards in Housing
29 CFR 1910.1200 Hazard Communication
29 CFR 1910.134 Respiratory Protection
29 CFR 1926.21 Safety Training and Education
29 CFR 1926.33 Access to Employee Exposure and Medical

Records
29 CFR 1926.55 Gases, Vapors, Fumes, Dusts, and Mists
29 CFR 1926.62 Lead

Response
29 CFR 1926.1126 CHROMIUM (VI)
40 CFR 260 Hazardous Waste Management System: General
SECTION 02 82 33.13 20 Page 3

12/26/2018
Waste

Hazardous Waste

Hazardous Waste

Disposal Facilities



UL 586 (2009; Reprint Dec 2017) Standard for

High-Efficiency Particulate, Air Filter
Units
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 Abatement
As applied to target facilities, "abatement" means any set of measures

designed to permanently eliminate lead-based paint or paint with mercury
hazards in accordance with standards established by appropriate Federal
agencies. Such term includes:
a. The removal of lead-based paint and lead-contaminated dust, the

permanent containment or encapsulation of lead-based paint, the
replacement of lead-painted surfaces or fixtures, and the removal or
covering of lead contaminated soil; and
b. All preparation, cleanup, disposal, and post-abatement clearance testing

activities associated with such measures.
c. Actions associated with item a in regards to paint with mercury.
1.2.2 Action Level
Employee exposure, without regard to use of respirators, to an airborne

concentration of lead of 30 micrograms per cubic meter of air averaged over
an 8 hour period in a work environment or, in the case of mercury
concentration, at the exposure noted in 29 CFR 1926.55.
SECTION 02 82 33.13 20 Page 4

12/26/2018
1.2.3 Area Sampling
Sampling of lead or mercury concentrations within the lead or mercury

control area and inside the physical boundaries, which is representative of
the airborne lead or mercury concentrations but is not collected in the
breathing zone of personnel.
As used in this section, refers to a person employed by the Contractor who

is trained in the recognition and control of lead or mercury hazards in
accordance with current federal, State, and local regulations. A Certified
Industrial Hygienist (CIH) certified for comprehensive practice by the
American Board of Industrial Hygiene or a Certified Safety Professional
(CSP) certified by the Board of Certified Safety Professionals is the best
choice.
Refers to a room for removal of contaminated personal protective equipment

(PPE).
That facility that encompasses a clean clothing storage room, and a

contaminated clothing storage and disposal rooms, with a shower facility in
between.
1.2.7 Deleading
Activities conducted by a person who offers to eliminate lead-based paint

or lead-based paint hazards or to plan such activities in commercial
buildings, bridges or other structures.
1.2.8 Eight-Hour Time Weighted Average (TWA)
Airborne concentration of lead to which an employee is exposed, averaged

over an 8 hour workday as indicated in 29 CFR 1926.62.
1.2.9 High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) Filter Equipment
HEPA filtered vacuuming equipment with a UL 586 filter system capable of

collecting and retaining lead-contaminated paint dust. A high efficiency
particulate filter means 99.97 percent efficient against 0.3 micron or
larger size particles.
1.2.10 Lead
Metallic lead, inorganic lead compounds, and organic lead soaps.
Paint or other surface coating that contains lead in excess of 1.0

milligrams per centimeter squared or 0.5 percent by weight.
In the case of target facilities, lead-based paint activities include; a
SECTION 02 82 33.13 20 Page 5

12/26/2018
lead-based paint inspection, a risk assessment, or abatement of lead-based

paint hazards.
Any condition that causes exposure to lead from lead-contaminated dust,

lead-contaminated soil, lead-based paint that is deteriorated or present in
accessible surfaces, friction surfaces, or impact surfaces that would
result in adverse human health effects.
1.2.14 Paint with Lead (PWL)and Paint with Mercury
Any paint that contains lead or mercury as determined by the testing

laboratory using a valid test method. The requirements of this section
does not apply if no detectable levels of lead or mercury are found using a
quantitative method for analyzing paint using laboratory instruments with
specified limits of detection (usually 0.01 percent). An X-Ray
Fluorescence (XRF) instrument is not considered a valid test method.
1.2.15 Lead or Mercury Control Area
A system of control methods to prevent the spread of lead or mercury dust,

paint chips or debris to adjacent areas that may include temporary
containment, floor or ground cover protection, physical boundaries, and
warning signs to prevent unauthorized entry of personnel. HEPA filtered
local exhaust equipment may be used as engineering controls to further
reduce personnel exposures or building/outdoor environmental contamination.
1.2.16 Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL)
For lead, fifty micrograms per cubic meter of air as an 8 hour time
weighted average as determined by 29 CFR 1926.62. If an employee is exposed
for more than eight hours in a workday, the PEL shall be determined by the
following formula:
PEL (micrograms/cubic meter of air) = 400/No. hrs worked per day
For mercury, OSHA-regulated limit that a worker can be exposed to a gas,

vapor, fume, dust and mist per 29 CFR 1926.55 Appendix A.
Sampling of airborne lead or mercury concentrations within the breathing

zone of an employee to determine the 8 hour time weighted average
concentration in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.62. Samples shall be
representative of the employees' work tasks. Breathing zone shall be
considered an area within a
hemisphere, forward of the shoulders, with a radius of 6 to 9 inches and
centered at the nose or mouth of an employee.
Area physically roped or partitioned off around an enclosed lead or mercury

control area to limit unauthorized entry of personnel. As used in this
section, "inside boundary" shall mean the same as "outside lead control
area but inside the physical boundary."
SECTION 02 82 33.13 20 Page 6

12/26/2018
1.2.19 Decontamination Unit
A serial arrangement of rooms or spaces for the purpose of separating the

work area from the building environment. This unit provides for entering
the work site, returning to the clean environment, cleaning of persons,
equipment, and movement of properly contained waste material.
1.3 DESCRIPTION
Remove/control paint with lead and/or mercury as indicated in the drawings.

Unless otherwise speficied, procedures for removing/controlling paint with
lead may be utilized with removing/controlling paint with mercury.
The contractor shall coordinate with work being performed in adjacent

areas. Coordination procedures shall be explained in the Removal/Control
Plan and shall describe how the Contractor will prevent lead exposure to
other contractors and/or Government personnel performing work unrelated to
lead activities.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

approval. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section
01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
Waste Transporter Permit
Lead-based Paint/Paint with Lead Removal/Control Plan and Paint

with mercury removal/control plan including CP approval
(signature, date, and certification number)
SD-03 Product Data
Vacuum Filters
Respirators
SD-06 Test Reports
sampling results
Occupational and Environmental Assessment Data Report
SD-07 Certificates
Qualifications of CP
Testing Laboratory qualifications
Training Certification of workers and supervisors
Notification of the Commencement of LBP Hazard Abatement
SECTION 02 82 33.13 20 Page 7

12/26/2018
Third Party Consultant Qualifications
Lead-based Paint/Paint with Lead Removal/Control Plan and Paint

with Mercury Removal/Control Plan including CP approval
(signature, date, and certification number)
Rental equipment notification
Respiratory Protection Program
Hazard Communication Program
State approved hazardous waste treatment, storage, or disposal

facility for lead disposal
Lead Waste Management Plan
Mercury Waste Management Plan
Vacuum filters
Clearance Certification
Completed and signed hazardous waste manifest from treatment or

disposal facility
Certification of Medical Examinations
Employee Training Certification
Waste turn-in documents or weight tickets for non-hazardous wastes

that are disposed of at sanitary or construction and demolition
landfills
1.5.1.1 Qualifications of CP
Submit name, address, and telephone number of the CP selected to perform

responsibilities specified in paragraph entitled "Competent Person (CP)
Responsibilities." Provide previous experience of the CP. Submit proper
documentation that the CP is trained and licensed in accordance with
Federal, State, and local laws.
Submit a certificate for each employee and supervisor, signed and dated by
the authorized training provider meeting 40 CFR 745 (Subpart L)
requirements, stating that the employee or supervisor has received the
required lead training and is certified to perform or supervise deleading
or lead removal.
SECTION 02 82 33.13 20 Page 8

12/26/2018
Submit the name, address, and telephone number of the testing laboratory
selected to perform the air and wipe and soil sampling, testing, and
reporting of airborne concentrations of lead. Use a laboratory accredited
under the EPA National Lead Laboratory Accreditation Program (NLLAP) by
either the American Association for Laboratory Accreditation (A2LA) or the
American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA) and that is successfully
participating in the Environmental Lead Proficiency Analytical Testing
(ELPAT) program to perform sample analysis. Laboratories selected to
perform blood lead analysis shall be OSHA approved.
Submit the name, address, and telephone number of the third party
consultant selected to perform the wipe sampling for determining
concentrations of lead in dust or soil sampling. Submit proper
documentation that the consultant is trained and certified as an inspector
technician or inspector/risk assessor by the USEPA authorized State (or
local) certification and accreditation program.
1.5.1.5 Waste Transporter Permit
Submit a copy of transporter's current waste transporter permit.
1.5.2 Requirements
a. Verify training meets all federal, State, and local requirements.
b. Review and approve lead-based paint/paint with lead removal/control plan

for conformance to the applicable standards. Ensure work is performed
in strict accordance with specifications at all times.
c. Continuously inspect lead-based paint removal/control work for

conformance with the approved plan.
d. Perform air and wipe sampling.
e. Control work to prevent hazardous exposure to human beings and to the

environment at all times.
f. Certify the conditions of the work as called for elsewhere in this

specification.
g. Emergency procedures for fire and medical emergencies.
1.5.2.2 Lead-Based Paint/Paint with Lead Removal/Control Plan (LBP/PWL

R/CP) and Paint with mercury Removal/Control Plan
Submit a detailed job-specific plan of the work procedures to be used in

the removal/control of LBP/PWL and the removal of paint with mercury. The
plan shall include a sketch showing the location, size, and details of lead
and mercury control areas, location and details of decontamination
facilities, viewing ports, barriers, and mechanical ventilation system.
Include a description of equipment and materials, controls and job
responsibilities for each activity from which lead is emitted. Include in
the plan, eating, drinking, smoking and sanitary procedures, interface of
SECTION 02 82 33.13 20 Page 9

12/26/2018
trades, sequencing of lead related work, collected waste water and paint
debris disposal plan, air sampling plan, respirators, personal protective
equipment, and a detailed description of the method of containment of the
operation to ensure that lead is not released outside the lead control
area. Include site preparation, cleanup and clearance procedures. Include
occupational and environmental sampling, training, sampling methodology,
frequency, duration of sampling, and qualifications of sampling personnel
in the air sampling portion of the plan. Include a description of
arrangements made among contractors on multi-contractor worksite's to
inform affected employees and to clarify responsibilities to control
exposures.
The Removal/Control Plan shall be developed by a certified planner/project

designer.
If initial monitoring or Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP)

sampling is necessary, submit occupational and environmental sampling
results to the Contracting Officer within three working days of collection,
signed by the testing laboratory employee performing the analysis, the
employee that performed the sampling, and the CP.
In order to reduce the full implementation of 29 CFR 1926.62, the

Contractor shall provide documentation. Submit a report that supports the
determination to reduce full implementation of the requirements of
29 CFR 1926.62 and supporting the Lead and Mercury Removal/Control Plan.
a. The initial monitoring shall represent each job classification, or if

working conditions are similar to previous jobs by the same employer,
provide previously collected exposure data that can be used to estimate
worker exposures per 29 CFR 1926.62. The data shall represent the
worker's regular daily exposure to lead for stated work.
b. Submit worker exposure data gathered during the task based trigger
operations of 29 CFR 1926.62 with a complete process description. This
includes manual demolition, manual scraping, manual sanding, heat gun,
power tool cleaning, rivet busting, cleanup of dry expendable
abrasives, abrasive blast enclosure removal, abrasive blasting,
welding, cutting and torch burning where lead containing coatings are
present.
c. The initial assessment shall determine the requirement for further

monitoring and the need to fully implement the control and protective
requirements including the lead compliance plan per 29 CFR 1926.62.
Initial medical surveillance as required by 29 CFR 1926.62 shall be made

available to all employees exposed to lead at any time (1 day) above the
action level. Full medical surveillance shall be made available to all
employees on an annual basis who are or may be exposed to either lead in
excess of the action level for more than 30 days a year or as required by
29 CFR 1926.62, or to mercury in excess of the action level as required by
29 CFR 1926.55 Appendix A. Adequate records shall show that employees meet
the medical surveillance requirements of 29 CFR 1926.33, 29 CFR 1926.62,
and 29 CFR 1926.103. Maintain complete and accurate medical records of
employees for a period of at least 30 years or for the duration of
employment plus 30 years, whichever is longer.
SECTION 02 82 33.13 20 Page 10

12/26/2018
1.5.2.5 Training
Train each employee performing paint removal, disposal, and air sampling
operations prior to the time of initial job assignment and annually
thereafter, in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.21, 29 CFR 1926.62, and State
and local regulations where appropriate.
a. Provide each employee required to wear a respirator a respirator fit

test at the time of initial fitting and at least annually thereafter as
required by 29 CFR 1926.62.
b. Establish and implement a respiratory protection program as required by

AIHA Z88.6, 29 CFR 1926.103, 29 CFR 1926.62, and 29 CFR 1926.55.
Establish and implement a Hazard Communication Program as required by 29

CFR 1926.59.
The Lead Waste Management Plan and Mercury Waste Management Plan shall
comply with applicable requirements of federal, State, and local hazardous
waste regulations including U.S. Air Force Hazardous Waste Management Plan,
45th SW and address:
a. Identification and classification of hazardous wastes per 40 CFR 261

associated with the work.
b. Estimated quantities of wastes to be generated and disposed of.
c. Names and qualifications of each contractor that will be transporting,

storing, treating, and disposing of the wastes. Include the facility
location and operator and a 24-hour point of contact. Furnish two
copies of proof of State and local hazardous waste permits manifests.
d. Names and qualifications (experience and training) of personnel who will

be working on-site with hazardous wastes.
e. List of waste handling equipment to be used in performing the work, to

include cleaning, volume reduction, and transport equipment.
f. Spill prevention, containment, and cleanup contingency measures

including a health and safety plan to be implemented in accordance with
29 CFR 1926.65. Respiratory protection shall be in accordance with
29 CFR 1910.134 and, in the case of mercury spills, ANSI/ASSE Z88.2.
g. Work plan and schedule for waste containment, removal and disposal.
Wastes shall be cleaned up and containerized daily. Proper containment
of the waste includes using acceptable waste containers (e.g.,
55-gallon drums) as well as proper marking/labeling of the containers.
h. Unit cost for waste disposal according to this plan.
SECTION 02 82 33.13 20 Page 11

12/26/2018
In addition to the detailed requirements of this specification, comply with

laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations of Federal, State, and local
authorities regarding removing, handling, storing, transporting, and
disposing of lead waste materials. Comply with the applicable requirements
of the current issue of 29 CFR 1926.62. Submit matters regarding
interpretation of standards to the Contracting Officer for resolution
before starting work. Where specification requirements and the referenced
documents vary, the most stringent requirement shall apply.
Licensing in the State of Florida is required.
Along with the CP, meet with the Contracting Officer to discuss in detail
the lead waste management plan and the lead-based paint/paint with lead
removal/control plan, including work procedures and precautions for the
removal plan.
1.6 EQUIPMENT
All electrical equipment shall be in compliance with the National Electric

Code. Attention is specifically called to Article 305 Temporary Wiring.
1.6.1 Respirators
Furnish appropriate respirators approved by the National Institute for

Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), Department of Health and Human
Services, for use in atmospheres containing lead dust. Respirators shall
comply with the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.62 and 29 CFR 1910.134.
When removing/controlling paint with mercury, respirators shall be approved

by the Mine Safety and Health Administration (MSHA), Department of Labor,
or the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH),
Department of Health and Human Services. If filtered respirators are used,
provide the appropriate filter for mercury vapor.
Furnish personnel who will be exposed to lead-contaminated dust with proper

disposable or uncontaminated, reusable protective whole body clothing, head
covering, gloves, and foot coverings as required by 29 CFR 1926.62. Furnish
proper disposable plastic or rubber gloves to protect hands. Reduce the
level of protection only after obtaining approval from the CP.
If rental equipment is to be used during lead-based paint handling and

disposal, notify the rental agency in writing concerning the intended use
of the equipment. Furnish a copy of the written notification to the
UL 586 labeled HEPA filters.
SECTION 02 82 33.13 20 Page 12

12/26/2018
1.6.5 Disposal Bags
For removal of paint with mercury, disposal bag type shall be minimum 6 mil
in thickness, clear in color and preprinted with a Caution Label.
1.6.6 Air Filtration Unit
For removal of paint with mercury, air filtration unit type shall comply
with ANSI Z9.2 (1979), Local Exhaust Ventilation. The final filter in each
unit shall be of the HEPA type.
a. Certified by the manufacturer to have an efficiency of not less than

99.97 percent when challenged with 0.3 micron particles.
b. Provide proof that filters are new and unused from previous projects.
Equip the system with the following:
a. An automatic shutdown that will stop the fan in the event of a

rupture in the HEPA filter or blocked air discharge.
b. Warning lights and/or alarms to indicate an excessive pressure

drop across the filters or an insufficient pressure drop across
the filters.
c. A non-resettable elapsed time meter to indicate the total

accumulated hours of operation.
d. A gauge or manometer to measure the pressure drop across the

filter.
For removal of paint with mercury, air filtration unit type shall comply
with ANSI Z9.2 (1979), Local Exhaust Ventilation. The final filter in each
unit shall be of the HEPA type.
a. Certified by the manufacturer to have an efficiency of not less than

99.97 percent when challenged with 0.3 micron particles.
b. Provide proof that filters are new and unused from previous projects.
Equip the system with the following:
a. An automatic shutdown that will stop the fan in the event of a

rupture in the HEPA filter or blocked air discharge.
b. Warning lights and/or alarms to indicate an excessive pressure

drop across the filters or an insufficient pressure drop across
the filters.
c. A non-resettable elapsed time meter to indicate the total
accumulated hours of operation.
d. A gauge or manometer to measure the pressure drop across the

filter.
Furnish the Contracting Officer with two complete sets of personal

protective equipment (PPE) daily, as required herein, for entry into and
inspection of the paint removal work within the lead controlled area.
Personal protective equipment shall include disposable whole body covering,
including appropriate foot, head, and hand protection. PPE shall remain the
SECTION 02 82 33.13 20 Page 13

12/26/2018
property of the Contractor. The Government will provide respiratory

protection for the Contracting Officer.
Perform paint removal work without damage or contamination of adjacent

areas. Where existing work is damaged or contaminated, restore work to its
original condition or better.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Section 01 35 26 GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
3.1.1 Protection
a. Notify the Contracting Officer 20 days prior to the start of any paint
removal work.
b. Notification of the Commencement of LBP Hazard Abatement
Submit a copy of the notification of the commencement of LBP hazard

abatement to the Contracting Officer according to the procedures
established by Base Environmental.
3.1.1.2 Boundary Requirements
a. Provide physical boundaries around the lead control area by roping off
the area designated in the work plan or providing curtains, portable
partitions or other enclosures to ensure that lead will not escape
outside the lead control area. In the case of removal of paint with
mercury, provide barriers consisting of fire retardant plastic sheets
of polyethylene, which have a minimum thickness of 6 mil true grade.
b. Warning Signs - Provide warning signs at approaches to lead and mercury

control areas. Locate signs at such a distance that personnel may read
the sign and take the necessary precautions before entering the area.
Signs shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.62. and
29 CFR 1910.1200
Shut down, lock out, and isolate HVAC systems that supply, exhaust, or pass
through the lead control areas. Seal intake and exhaust vents in the lead
control area with 6 mil plastic sheet and tape. Seal seams in HVAC
components that pass through the lead control area.
Provide clean and contaminated change rooms and shower facilities in

accordance with this specification and 29 CFR 1926.62.
SECTION 02 82 33.13 20 Page 14

12/26/2018
Where eyes may be exposed to injurious corrosive materials, suitable

facilities for quick drenching or flushing of the eyes shall be provided
within the work area.
a. Use adequate ventilation to control personnel exposure to lead in

accordance with 29 CFR 1926.62.
b. To the extent feasible, use local exhaust ventilation connected to HEPA

filters or other collection systems, approved by the CP. Local exhaust
ventilation systems shall be evaluated and maintained in accordance
with 29 CFR 1926.62.
c. Vent local exhaust outside the building only and away from building
ventilation intakes and building entrances.
d. Use locally exhausted, power actuated, paint removal tools.
Personnel shall wear and use protective clothing and equipment as specified
herein. Eating, smoking, or drinking or application of cosmetics is not
permitted in the lead control area. No one will be permitted in the lead
control area unless they have been appropriately trained and provided with
protective equipment.
3.2 ERECTION
Establish a lead control area by situating critical barriers and physical

boundaries around the area or structure where LBP/PWL removal/control
operations will be performed.
Full containment - Contain removal operations by the use of a negative

pressure enclosure system with decontamination facilities and with HEPA
filtered exhaust if required by the CP. For containment areas larger than
1,000 square feet install a minimum of two 18 inch square viewing ports.
Locate ports to provide a view of the required work from the exterior of
the enclosed contaminated area. Glaze ports with laminated safety glass.
3.3 APPLICATION
3.3.1 Work Procedures
Perform removal of lead-based paint in accordance with approved lead-based

paint/paint with lead removal/control plan. Use procedures and equipment
required to limit occupational and environmental exposure to lead when
lead-based paint is removed in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.62. Dispose of
removed paint chips and associated waste in compliance with Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA), State, and local requirements.
3.3.2 Lead-Based Paint Removal/Control/Deleading
Manual or power sanding of interior and exterior surfaces is not permitted

unless tools are equipped with HEPA attachments or wet methods. The dry
SECTION 02 82 33.13 20 Page 15

12/26/2018
sanding or grinding of surfaces that contain lead is prohibited Provide

methodology for LBP removal/control in work plan. Remove paint within the
areas designated on the drawings in order to completely expose the
substrate. Take whatever precautions necessary to minimize damage to the
underlying substrate.
Avoid deterioration of the substrate. Provide surface preparations for

painting.
Provide methodology for LBP/PWL removal and processes to minimize

contamination of work areas outside the control area with lead-contaminated
dust or other lead-contaminated debris/waste and to ensure that unprotected
personnel are not exposed to hazardous concentrations of lead. Describe
this LBP/PWL removal/control process in the LBP/PWL R/CP.
3.3.2.1 Indoor Paint Removal
Perform manual paint removal in lead control areas using enclosures,

barriers, or containments and powered locally exhausted paint removal
tools. Collect debris for disposal in accordance with federal, State, and
local requirements.
Whenever personnel exit the lead-controlled area, they shall perform the
following procedures and shall not leave the work place wearing any
clothing or equipment worn during the work day:
a. Vacuum themselves off.
b. Remove protective clothing in the contaminated change room, and place

them in an approved impermeable disposal bag.
c. Wash hands and face at the site, don appropriate disposable or

uncontaminated reusable clothing; move to an appropriate facility;
shower.
d. Change to clean clothes prior to leaving the physical boundary

designated around the lead control area.
3.4.1 Tests
3.4.1.1 Air and Wipe Sampling
Air sample for lead in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.62 and as specified
herein. Air and wipe sampling shall be directed or performed by the CP.
a. The CP shall be on the job site directing the air and non-clearance wipe
sampling and inspecting the lead-based paint removal/control work to
ensure that the requirements of the contract have been satisfied during
the entire lead-based paint removal operation.
b. Collect personal air samples on employees who are expected to have the
greatest risk of exposure as determined by the CP. In addition, collect
air samples on at least 25 percent of the work crew or a minimum of two
employees, whichever is greater, during each work shift.
SECTION 02 82 33.13 20 Page 16

12/26/2018
c. Submit results of air samples, within 72 hours after the air samples are
taken.
d. Before any work begins, a third party consultant shall collect and
analyze baseline wipe and soil samples in accordance with methods
defined in federal, State, and local standards inside and outside of
the physical boundary to assess the degree of dust contamination in the
facility prior to lead-based paint removal/control.
e. Collect surface wipe samples at a location no greater than 10 feet

outside the lead control area at a frequency of once per day while lead
removal work is conducted. Surface wipe results shall meet criteria in
paragraph "Clearance Certification."
3.4.1.2 Air Sampling During Paint Removal Work
Conduct area air sampling daily, on each shift in which lead-based paint
removal operations are performed, in areas immediately adjacent to the lead
control area. Sufficient area monitoring shall be conducted to ensure
unprotected personnel are not exposed at or above 30 micrograms per cubic
meter of air. If 30 micrograms per cubic meter of air is reached or
exceeded, stop work, correct the conditions(s) causing the increased
levels. Notify the Contracting Officer immediately. Determine if
condition(s) require any further change in work methods. Removal work shall
resume only after the CP and the Contracting Officer give approval. For
outdoor operations, at least one sample on each shift shall be taken on the
downwind side of the lead control area.
3.4.1.3 Sampling After Paint Removal/Control
After the visual inspection, conduct soil sampling if bare soil is present
during external removal/control operations and collect wipe samples
according to the HUD protocol contained in HUD 6780 to determine the lead
content of settled dust and dirt in micrograms per square meter foot of
surface area and parts per million (ppm) for soil.
3.4.1.4 Testing of Removed Paint and Used Abrasive
Test removed paint and used abrasive in accordance with 40 CFR 261 for
hazardous waste.
3.5.1 Cleanup
Maintain surfaces of the lead control area free of accumulations of paint

chips and dust. Restrict the spread of dust and debris; keep waste from
being distributed over the work area. Do not dry sweep or use compressed
air to clean up the area. At the end of each shift and when the paint
removal operation has been completed, clean the area of visible lead paint
contamination by vacuuming with a HEPA filtered vacuum cleaner, wet mopping
the area and wet wiping the area as indicated by the CP. Reclean areas
showing dust or residual paint chips or debris. After visible dust, chips
and debris is removed, wet wipe and HEPA vacuum all surfaces in the work
area. If adjacent areas become contaminated at any time during the work,
clean, visually inspect, and then wipe sample all contaminated areas. The
CP shall then certify in writing that the area has been cleaned of lead
contamination before restarting work.
SECTION 02 82 33.13 20 Page 17

12/26/2018
The CP shall certify in writing that air samples collected outside the lead
control area during paint removal operations are less than 30 micrograms
per cubic meter of air; the respiratory protection used for the employees
was adequate; the work procedures were performed in accordance with
29 CFR 1926.62 and 40 CFR 745; and that there were no visible accumulations
of material and dust containing lead left in the work site. Do not remove
the lead control area or roped off boundary and warning signs prior to the
Contracting Officer's acknowledgement of receipt of the CP certification.
For removal of the mercury control area, ensure that air samples taken
result in mercury concentrations that are under the OSHA-regulated limit
that a worker can be exposed to a gas, vapor, fume, dust and mist per
29 CFR 1926.55 Appendix A.
Certify surface wipe samples are not significantly greater than the initial
surface loading determined prior to work.
Clear the lead control area in industrial facilities of all visible dust
and debris.
For lead-based paint hazard abatement work, surface wipe and soil sampling
shall be conducted and clearance determinations made according to the work
practice standards presented in 40 CFR 745.227.
3.5.2 Disposal
a. Collect lead-contaminated waste, scrap, debris, bags, containers,

equipment, and lead-contaminated clothing that may produce airborne
concentrations of lead particles. Label the containers in accordance
with 29 CFR 1926.62 and 40 CFR 262. Dispose of lead-contaminated waste
material at an State approved hazardous waste treatment, storage, or
disposal facility off Government property.
b. Place waste materials in U.S. Department of Transportation (49 CFR 178)

approved 55 gallon drums. Properly label each drum to identify the type
of waste (49 CFR 172) and the date the drum was filled. For hazardous
waste, the collection drum requires marking/labeling in accordance with
40 CFR 262 during the accumulation/collection timeframe. The
Contracting Officer or an authorized representative will assign an area
for interim storage of waste-containing drums. Do not store hazardous
waste drums in interim storage longer than 90 calendar days from the
date affixed to each drum.
c. Handle, transport, and dispose lead or lead-contaminated material

classified as hazardous waste in accordance with 40 CFR 260, 40 CFR 261,
40 CFR 262, 40 CFR 263, 40 CFR 264, and 40 CFR 265. Comply with land
disposal restriction notification requirements as required by 40 CFR 268.
d. All material, whether hazardous or non-hazardous shall be disposed in

accordance with laws and provisions and Federal, State, or local
regulations. Ensure waste is properly characterized. The result of each
waste characterization (TCLP for RCRA materials) will dictate disposal
requirements.
3.5.2.1 Chromium Paint
Paint with concentrations of chromium exceeding the EPA toxicity

characteristic leaching procedure (TCLP) hazardous criteria removed from
SECTION 02 82 33.13 20 Page 18

12/26/2018
the high bay external staircase during refurbishment shall be managed as

hazardous waste in accordance with federal and state regulations, including
the 29 CFR 1926.1126, OSHA standard for chromium, 40 CFR Chapter I,
Subchapter I, and the U.S. Air Force Hazardous Waste Management Plan, 45th
Space Wing.
Submit written evidence to demonstrate the hazardous waste treatment,

storage, or disposal facility (TSD) is approved for lead disposal by the
EPA, State or local regulatory agencies. Submit one copy of the completed
hazardous waste manifest, signed and dated by the initial transporter in
accordance with 40 CFR 262. Contractor shall provide a certificate that
the waste was accepted by the disposal facility. Provide turn-in documents
or weight tickets for non-hazardous waste disposal.
3.5.3 Payment for Hazardous Waste
Payment for disposal of hazardous and non-hazardous waste will not be made
until a signed copy of the manifest from the treatment or disposal facility
certifying the amount of lead-containing materials or non-hazardous waste
delivered is returned and a copy is furnished to the Government.
SECTION 02 82 33.13 20 Page 19

12/26/2018
SECTION 02 83 13
LEAD IN CONSTRUCTION
08/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 Abatement
1.2.2 Action Level
1.2.3 Area Sampling
1.2.7 High Efficiency Particulate Arrestor (HEPA) Filter Equipment
1.2.8 Lead
1.2.12 Paint with Lead (PWL)
1.2.13 Lead Control Area
1.2.14 Lead Permissible Exposure Limit
1.2.15 Material Containing Lead
1.3 DESCRIPTION
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1.5.1.1 Competent Person (CP)
1.5.2 Requirements
1.5.2.1 Lead Compliance Plan
1.5.2.4 Training
1.6 EQUIPMENT
1.6.1 Respirators
12/26/2018

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PAINT REMOVAL PRODUCTS
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
3.1.1 Protection
3.1.1.2 Lead Control Area
3.1.1.3 Furnishings
3.2 ERECTION
3.3 APPLICATION
3.3.1 Lead Work
3.3.2 Paint with Lead or Material Containing Lead Removal
3.4.1 Tests
3.4.1.1 Sampling
3.4.1.2 Sampling after Removal
3.4.1.3 Testing of Material Containing Lead Residue
3.5.1 Cleanup
3.5.2 Disposal
3.5.2.2 Payment for Hazardous Waste
12/26/2018
SECTION 02 83 13
LEAD IN CONSTRUCTION
08/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of the Project Specifications and
are a component to the requirements for the work contained in this Section.
ANSI Z88.2 (1998) Environmental Health and Safety

Department
29 CFR 1926.21 Safety Training and Education
29 CFR 1926.33 Access to Employee Exposure and Medical

Records
29 CFR 1926.354 (2011) Welding, Cutting, and Heating in

way of preservative coatings
29 CFR 1926.62 Lead

Response
40 CFR 260 Hazardous Waste Management System: General

Waste

Hazardous Waste

Hazardous Waste

Disposal Facilities

12/26/2018


40 CFR 745.226 (1999) Certification of individuals and

firms engaged in lead-based paint
activities: target housing and
child-occupied facilities.
40 CFR Part 265.16 Personnel Training
29 CFR 1926.55 Gases, Vapors, Fumes, Dusts, and Mists
49 CFR 171 General Information, Regulations, and

Definitions

Units
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 Abatement
Any set of procedures designed to permanently eliminate lead-based paint

hazards in accordance with standards established by appropriate Federal
agencies. Such term includes:
a. The removal of lead-based paint and lead-contaminated dust, the

permanent containment or encapsulation of lead-based paint, the
replacement of lead-painted surfaces or fixtures, and the removal or
covering of lead contaminated soil; and
b. All preparation, cleanup, disposal, and post-abatement clearance

testing activities associated with such measures.
1.2.2 Action Level
Employee exposure, without regard to use of respirators, to an airborne

concentration of lead of 30 micrograms per cubic meter of air averaged over
an 8 hour period.
1.2.3 Area Sampling
Sampling of lead concentrations within the lead control area and inside the
physical boundaries which is representative of the airborne lead
concentrations but is not collected in the breathing zone of personnel
12/26/2018
(approximately 5 to 6 feet above the floor).
As used in this section, refers to a person employed by the Contractor who

is trained in the recognition and control of lead hazards in accordance
with current federal, State, and local regulations and has the authority to
take prompt corrective actions to control the lead hazard. A Certified
Industrial Hygienist (CIH) certified by the American Board of Industrial
Hygiene or a Certified Safety Professional (CSP) certified by the Board of
Certified Safety Professionals is the best choice.
Refers to a room for removal of contaminated personal protective equipment

(PPE).
That facility that encompasses a clean clothing storage room, and a

contaminated clothing storage and disposal rooms, with a shower facility in
between.
1.2.7 High Efficiency Particulate Arrestor (HEPA) Filter Equipment
HEPA filtered vacuuming equipment with a UL 586 filter system capable of

collecting and retaining lead-contaminated particulate. A high efficiency
particulate filter demonstrates at least 99.97 percent efficiency against
0.3 micron or larger size particles.
1.2.8 Lead
Metallic lead, inorganic lead compounds, and organic lead soaps. Excludes
other forms of organic lead compounds.
Paint or other surface coating that contains lead in excess of 1.0

milligrams per centimeter squared or 0.5 percent by weight.
In the case of target housing or child occupied facilities, lead-based

paint activities include; a lead-based paint inspection, a risk assessment,
or abatement of lead-based paint hazards.
Any condition that causes exposure to lead from lead-contaminated dust,

lead-contaminated soil, lead-based paint that is deteriorated or present in
accessible surfaces, friction surfaces, or impact surfaces that would
result in adverse human health effects.
1.2.12 Paint with Lead (PWL)
Any paint that contains lead as determined by the testing laboratory using
a valid test method. The requirements of this section do not apply if no
detectable levels of lead are found using a quantitative method for
analyzing paint using laboratory instruments with specified limits of
12/26/2018
detection (usually 0.01%). An X-Ray Fluorescence (XRF) instrument is not

considered a valid test method.
1.2.13 Lead Control Area
A system of control methods to prevent the spread of lead dust, paint chips
or debris to adjacent areas that may include temporary containment, floor
or ground cover protection, physical boundaries, and warning signs to
prevent unauthorized entry of personnel. HEPA filtered local exhaust
equipment may be used as engineering controls to further reduce personnel
exposures or building/outdoor environmental contamination.
1.2.14 Lead Permissible Exposure Limit
Fifty micrograms per cubic meter of air as an 8 hour time weighted average
as determined by 29 CFR 1926.62. If an employee is exposed for more than
eight hours in a work day, the PEL shall be determined by the following
formula:
PEL (micrograms/cubic meter of air) = 400/No. hours worked per day
1.2.15 Material Containing Lead
Any material, including paint, which contains lead as determined by the

testing laboratory using a valid test method. The requirements of this
section does not apply if no detectable levels of lead are found using a
quantitative method for analyzing paint or MCL using laboratory instruments
with specified limits of detection (usually 0.01%). An X-Ray Fluorescence
(XRF) instrument is not considered a valid test method.
Sampling of airborne lead concentrations within the breathing zone of an

employee to determine the 8 hour time weighted average concentration in
accordance with 29 CFR 1926.62. Samples shall be representative of the
employees' work tasks. Breathing zone shall be considered an area within a
hemisphere, forward of the shoulders, with a radius of 6 to 9 inches and
centered at the nose or mouth of an employee.
Area physically roped or partitioned off around lead control area to limit
unauthorized entry of personnel.
1.3 DESCRIPTION
In the event that construction activities could be affected by PWL or MCL

this specification provides for the demolition and removal of PWL or MCL.
The contractor shall coordinate with work being performed in adjacent areas
in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1200, Hazard Communication. Explain and
describe the coordination procedures in the Lead Compliance Plan of how the
Contractor will prevent lead exposure to other contractors and/or
Government personnel performing work unrelated to lead activities.
12/26/2018
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL

PROCEDURES:
Occupational and Environmental Assessment Data Report (if

objective data is used to justify excluding the initial
occupational exposure assessment)
Lead Compliance Plan including CP approval (signature, date, and

certification number)
Competent Person qualifications
Training Certification of workers and supervisors

Certification of Medical Examinations
Lead waste management plan
Written evidence that Transportation, Storage and Disposal (TSD)

Facility is approved for lead disposal
SD-06 Test Reports
Sampling results
Occupational and Environmental Assessment Data Report;
Waste Stream Determination Results
SD-07 Certificates
Testing laboratory qualifications
Occupant Notification
Third party consultant qualifications
Clearance Certification
Recycling verification documents
Completed and signed hazardous waste manifest from treatment or

disposal facility.
Waste turn-in documents or weight tickets for non-hazardous wastes

that are disposed of at sanitary or construction and demolition
landfills.
12/26/2018
1.5.1.1 Competent Person (CP)
Submit name, address, and telephone number of the CP selected to perform

responsibilities specified in paragraph entitled "Competent Person (CP)
Responsibilities." Provide documented construction project-related
experience with implementation of OSHA's Lead in Construction standard (
29 CFR 1926.62) which shows ability to assess occupational and
environmental exposure to lead, experience with the use of respirators,
personal protective equipment and other exposure reduction methods to
protect employee health. Submit proper documentation that the CP is
trained and licensed and certified in accordance with federal, State, and
local laws.
a. Verify training meets all Federal, State, and local requirements.
b. Review and approve Lead Compliance Plan for conformance to the

applicable referenced standards.
c. Continuously inspect PWL or MCL work for conformance with the approved
plan.
d. Ensure work is performed in strict accordance with specifications at

all times.
e. Control work to prevent hazardous exposure to human beings and to the

environment at all times.
f. Supervise final cleaning of the lead control area, take clearance wipe
samples if necessary; review clearance sample results and make
recommendations for further cleaning.
g. Certify the conditions of the work as called for elsewhere in this

specification.
Regulated material awareness training and hazardous notification for

contractor's personnel shall comply with 29 CFR 1910.1200, General Industry
Standard for Hazard Communication.
Submit a certificate for each worker and supervisor, signed and dated by
the accredited training provider, stating that the employee has received
the required lead training specified in 29 CFR 1926.62 (l)and is certified
to perform or supervise lead removal or demolition activities in the state
of Florida.
Submit certification for each lead-based paint inspector, risk assessor, or

supervisor verifying compliance with 40 CFR 745.226.
When applicable, submit the name, address, and telephone number of the
testing laboratory selected to perform the air analysis, testing, and
reporting of airborne concentrations of lead. Use a laboratory
12/26/2018
participating in the EPA National Lead Laboratory Accreditation Program

(NLLAP) by being accredited by either the American Association for
Laboratory Accreditation (A2LA) or the American Industrial Hygiene
Association (AIHA) and that is successfully participating in the
Environmental Lead Proficiency Analytical Testing (ELPAT) program to
perform sample analysis.
Submit the name, address and telephone number of the third party consultant
selected to perform the sampling for determining concentrations of lead in
various media. Submit proper documentation that the consultant is trained
and certified as an inspector technician or inspector/risk assessor by the
USEPA authorized State (or local) certification and accreditation program.
1.5.2 Requirements
1.5.2.1 Lead Compliance Plan
Submit a detailed job-specific plan of the work procedures to be used in

the disturbance of PWL or MCL. Include a sketch showing the location,
size, and details of lead control areas, critical barriers, physical
boundaries, location and details of decontamination facilities, viewing
ports, and mechanical ventilation system. Include a description of
equipment and materials, work practices, controls and job responsibilities
for each activity from which lead is emitted. Include in the plan, eating,
drinking, smoking, hygiene facilities and sanitary procedures, interface of
trades, sequencing of lead related work, collected waste water and dust
containing lead and debris, air sampling, respirators, personal protective
equipment, and a detailed description of the method of containment of the
operation to ensure that lead is not released outside of the lead control
area. Include site preparation, cleanup and clearance procedures. Include
occupational and environmental sampling, training and strategy, sampling
and analysis strategy and methodology, frequency of sampling, duration of
sampling, and qualifications of sampling personnel in the air sampling
portion of the plan. Include a description of arrangements made among
contractors on multi-contractor worksite's to inform affected employees and
to clarify responsibilities to control exposures.
In occupied buildings, the plan shall also include an occupant protection

program, which shall include Occupant Notification that describes the
measures that will be taken during the work to notify and protect the
building occupants.
If initial monitoring is necessary, submit occupational and environmental

sampling results to the Contracting Officer within three working days of
collection, signed by the testing laboratory employee performing the
analysis, the employee that performed the sampling, and the CP.
In order to reduce the full implementation of 29 CFR 1926.62, the
Contractor shall provide documentation. Submit a report that supports the
determination to reduce full implementation of the requirements of
29 CFR 1926.62 and supporting the Lead Compliance Plan.
a. The initial monitoring shall represent each job classification, or if

working conditions are similar to previous jobs by the same employer,
provide previously collected exposure data that can be used to estimate
worker exposures per 29 CFR 1926.62. The data shall represent the
12/26/2018
worker's regular daily exposure to lead for stated work.
b. Submit worker exposure data gathered during the task based trigger
operations of 29 CFR 1926.62 with a complete process description. This
includes manual demolition, manual scraping, manual sanding, heat gun,
power tool cleaning, rivet busting, cleanup of dry expendable
abrasives, abrasive blast enclosure removal, abrasive blasting,
welding, cutting and torch burning where lead containing coatings are
present.
c. The initial assessment shall determine the requirement for further

monitoring and the need to fully implement the control and protective
requirements including the lead compliance plan per 29 CFR 1926.62.
Initial medical surveillance as required by 29 CFR 1926.62 shall be made

available to all employees exposed to lead at any time (1 day) above the
action level. Full medical surveillance shall be made available to all
employees on an annual basis who are or may be exposed to lead in excess of
the action level for more than 30 days a year or as required by
29 CFR 1926.62. Adequate records shall show that employees meet the
medical surveillance requirements of 29 CFR 1926.33, 29 CFR 1926.62 and
29 CFR 1926.103. Provide medical surveillance to all personnel exposed to
lead as indicated in 29 CFR 1926.62. Maintain complete and accurate
medical records of employees for the duration of employment plus 30 years.
1.5.2.4 Training
Train each employee performing work that disturbs lead, who performs
MCL/PWL disposal, and air sampling operations prior to the time of initial
job assignment and annually thereafter, in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.21,
29 CFR 1926.62, and 40 CFR Part 265.16, and State and local regulations
where appropriate.
a. Provide each employee required to wear a respirator a respirator fit

test at the time of initial fitting and at least annually thereafter as
required by 29 CFR 1926.62 and 29 CFR 1926.104.
b. Establish and implement a respiratory protection program as required by

ANSI Z88.2, 29 CFR 1926.103, 29 CFR 1926.62, and 29 CFR 1926.55.
Establish and implement a Hazard Communication Program as required by 29

CFR 1926.59.
The Lead Waste Management Plan must comply with applicable requirements of
federal, State, and local hazardous waste regulations and also address the
following:
a. Identification and classification of wastes associated with the work.
b. Estimated quantities of wastes to be generated and disposed of.
12/26/2018
c. Names and qualifications of each contractor that will be transporting,

storing, treating, and disposing of the wastes. Include the facility
location and a point of contact. Furnish two copies of hazardous waste
permits to the Contracting Officer.
d. Names and qualifications (experience and training) of personnel who

will be working on-site with hazardous wastes.
e. List of waste handling equipment to be used in performing the work, to

include cleaning, volume reduction, and transport equipment.
f. Spill prevention, containment, and cleanup contingency measures

including a health and safety plan to be implemented in accordance with
29 CFR 1926.65.
g. Work plan and schedule for waste containment, removal and disposal.
Proper containment of the waste includes using acceptable waste
containers (e.g., 55-gallon drums) as well as proper marking/labeling
of the containers. Wastes shall be cleaned up and containerized daily.
h. Include any process that may alter or treat waste rendering a hazardous
waste non hazardous.
i. Unit cost for hazardous waste disposal according to this plan.
In addition to the detailed requirements of this specification, comply with

laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations of federal, State, and local
authorities regarding lead. Comply with the applicable requirements of the
current issue of 29 CFR 1926.62 and 29 CFR 1926.354. Submit matters
regarding interpretation of standards to the Contracting Officer for
resolution before starting work.
Where specification requirements and the referenced documents vary, the

most stringent requirement shall apply.
Licensing and certification in the State of Florida is required.
Along with the CP, meet with the Contracting Officer to discuss in detail
the Lead Waste Management Plan and the Lead Compliance Plan, including
procedures and precautions for the work.
1.6 EQUIPMENT
1.6.1 Respirators
Furnish appropriate respirators approved by the National Institute for

Services, for use in atmospheres containing lead dust, fume and mist.
Respirators shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.62 and
29 CFR 1926.104.
Furnish personnel who will be exposed to lead-contaminated dust with proper
12/26/2018
disposable protective whole body clothing, head covering, gloves, eye, and
foot coverings as required by 29 CFR 1926.62. Furnish proper disposable
plastic or rubber gloves to protect hands. Reduce the level of protection
only after obtaining approval from the CP.
If rental equipment is to be used during PWL or MCL handling and disposal,

notify the rental agency in writing concerning the intended use of the
equipment.
UL 586 labeled HEPA filters.
Furnish the Contracting Officer with two complete sets of personal

protective equipment (PPE) daily, as required herein, for entry into and
inspection of the lead removal work within the lead controlled area.
Personal protective equipment shall include disposable whole body covering,
including appropriate foot, head, eye, and hand protection. PPE shall
remain the property of the Contractor. The Government will provide
respiratory protection for the Contracting Officer.
Perform work without damage or contamination of adjacent areas. Where

existing work is damaged or contaminated, restore work to its original
condition or better as determined by the Contracting Officer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PAINT REMOVAL PRODUCTS
Submit in the Lead Compliance Plan applicable Material Safety Data Sheets
for paint removal products used in paint removal work. Use the least toxic
product, suitable for the job and acceptable to the CP.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
3.1.1 Protection
a. Notify the Contracting Officer 20 days prior to the start of any lead
work.
3.1.1.2 Lead Control Area
a. Physical Boundary - Provide physical boundaries around the lead control

area by roping off the area designated in the work plan or providing
curtains, portable partitions or other enclosures to ensure that lead
will not escape outside of the lead control area.
12/26/2018
b. Warning Signs - Provide warning signs at approaches to lead control

areas. Locate signs at such a distance that personnel may read the
sign and take the necessary precautions before entering the area. Signs
shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.62.
3.1.1.3 Furnishings
Furniture and equipment shall be decontaminated by the contractor before

being removed from the work area.
Shut down, lock out, and isolate HVAC systems that supply, exhaust, or pass
through the lead control areas. Seal intake and exhaust vents in the lead
control area with 6 mil plastic sheet and tape. Seal seams in HVAC
components that pass through the lead control area.
Provide clean and contaminated change rooms and shower facilities in

accordance with this specification and 29 CFR 1926.62.
Where eyes may be exposed to injurious corrosive materials, suitable

facilities for quick drenching or flushing of the eyes shall be provided
within the work area.
a. To the extent feasible, use local exhaust ventilation or other

collection systems, approved by the CP. Local exhaust ventilation
systems shall be evaluated and maintained in accordance with
29 CFR 1926.62.
b. Vent local exhaust outside the building and away from building
ventilation intakes or ensure system is connected to HEPA filters.
c. Use locally exhausted, power actuated tools or manual hand tools.
Personnel shall wear and use protective clothing and equipment as specified
herein. Eating, smoking, or drinking or application of cosmetics is not
permitted in the lead control area. No one will be permitted in the lead
control area unless they have been appropriately trained and provided with
protective equipment.
3.2 ERECTION
Establish a lead control area by completely establishing barriers and

physical boundaries around the area or structure where PWL/MCL removal
operations will be performed.
Full containment - Contain removal operations by the use of critical

barriers and HEPA filtered exhaust, a negative pressure enclosure system
with decontamination facilities and with HEPA filtered exhaust if required
12/26/2018
by the CP. For containment areas larger than 1,000 square feet install a
minimum of two 18 inch square viewing ports. Locate ports to provide a
view of the required work from the exterior of the enclosed contaminated
area. Glaze ports with laminated safety glass.
3.3 APPLICATION
3.3.1 Lead Work
Perform lead work in accordance with approved Lead Compliance Plan. Use
procedures and equipment required to limit occupational exposure and
environmental contamination with lead when the work is performed in
accordance with 29 CFR 1926.62, and as specified herein. Dispose of all
PWL or MCL and associated waste in compliance with federal, State, and
local requirements.
3.3.2 Paint with Lead or Material Containing Lead Removal
Provide methodology for removing lead in the Lead Compliance Plan. Select
lead removal processes to minimize contamination of work areas outside the
control area with lead-contaminated dust or other lead-contaminated debris
or waste and to ensure that unprotected personnel are not exposed to
hazardous concentrations of lead.
Use procedures and equipment required to limit occupational exposure and

environmental contamination with lead when the work is performed in
accordance with 29 CFR 1926.62 or 40 CFR 745, and as specified herein.
Dispose of all PWL or MCL and associated waste in compliance with federal,
State, and local requirements.
Whenever personnel exit the lead-controlled area, they shall perform the
following procedures and shall not leave the work place wearing any
clothing or equipment worn in the control area:
a. Vacuum all clothing before entering the contaminated change room.
b. Remove protective clothing in the contaminated change room, and place

them in an approved impermeable disposal bag.
c. Wash hands and face at the site, don appropriate disposable or

uncontaminated reusable clothing, move to an appropriate shower
facility, shower.
d. Change to clean clothes prior to leaving the clean clothes storage area.
3.4.1 Tests
3.4.1.1 Sampling
Conduct sampling for lead in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.62 and as

specified herein. Sampling shall be directed or performed by the CP.
a. The CP shall be on the job site directing the sampling and inspecting
the PWL or MCL removal work to ensure that the requirements of the
contract have been satisfied during the entire PWL or MCL operation.
12/26/2018
b. Before any work begins, a third party consultant shall collect and
analyze baseline samples in accordance with methods defined by federal,
State, and local standards inside and outside of the physical boundary
to assess the degree of dust contamination in the facility prior to
lead disturbance or removal.
c. Collect personal air samples on employees who are anticipated to have

the greatest risk of exposure as determined by the CP. In addition,
collect air samples on at least twenty-five percent of the work crew or
a minimum of two employees, whichever is greater, during each work
shift.
d. Submit results of air samples, signed by the CP, within 72 hours after
the air samples are taken.
e. When applicable, sufficient area monitoring shall be conducted to

ensure unprotected personnel are not exposed at or above 30 micrograms
per cubic meter of air. If 30 micrograms per cubic meter of air is
reached or exceeded, stop work and correct the condition(s) causing the
increased levels. Notify the Contracting Officer immediately.
Determine if condition(s) require any further change in work methods.
Removal work shall resume only after the CP and the Contracting Officer
give approval.
f. For outdoor operations, at least one sample on each shift shall be

taken on the downwind side of the lead control area. If adjacent areas
are contaminated, clean and visually inspect contaminated areas. The
CP shall certify that the area has been cleaned of lead contamination.
3.4.1.2 Sampling after Removal
After the visual inspection, conduct soil sampling if bare soil is present
during external removal operations and collect wipe and soil samples
according to the HUD protocol contained in HUD Guidelines to determine the
lead content of settled dust in micrograms per square meter foot of surface
area and parts per million (ppm) or micrograms per gram (ug/g) for soil.
3.4.1.3 Testing of Material Containing Lead Residue
Test residue in accordance with 40 CFR 261 for hazardous waste.
3.5.1 Cleanup
Maintain surfaces of the lead control area free of accumulations of dust

and debris. Restrict the spread of dust and debris; keep waste from being
distributed over the work area. Do not dry sweep or use pressurized air to
clean up the area. At the end of each shift and when the lead operation
has been completed, clean the controlled area of visible contamination by
vacuuming with a HEPA filtered vacuum cleaner, wet mopping the area and wet
wiping the area as indicated by the Lead Compliance Plan. Re-clean areas
showing dust or debris. After visible dust and debris is removed, wet wipe
and HEPA vacuum all surfaces in the controlled area. If adjacent areas
become contaminated at any time during the work, clean, visually inspect,
and then wipe sample all contaminated areas. The CP shall then certify in
writing that the area has been cleaned of lead contamination before
clearance testing.
12/26/2018
The CP shall certify in writing that air samples collected outside the lead
control area during paint removal operations are less than 30 micrograms
per cubic meter of air; the respiratory protection used for the employees
was adequate; the work procedures were performed in accordance with
29 CFR 1926.62; and that there were no visible accumulations of material
and dust containing lead left in the work site. Do not remove the lead
control area or roped off boundary and warning signs prior to the
Contracting Officer's acknowledgement of receipt of the CP certification.
The third party consultant shall certify surface wipe sample results
collected inside and outside the work area are less than 40 micrograms per
square foot on floors, less than 250 micrograms per square foot on interior
window sills and less than 400 micrograms per square foot on window troughs.
Where applicable for exterior work, soil samples taken at the exterior of
the work site shall be used to determine if soil lead levels had increased
at a statistically significant level (significant at the 95 percent
confidence limit) from the soil lead levels prior to the operation. If
soil lead levels either show a statistically significant increase above
soil lead levels prior to work or soil lead levels above any applicable
federal or state standard for lead in soil, the soil shall be remediated.
3.5.2 Disposal
a. Notify State of planned location for disposal of hazardous waste.
b. All material, whether hazardous or non-hazardous shall be disposed in

accordance with all laws and provisions and all federal, State or local
regulations. Ensure all waste is properly characterized. The result
of each waste characterization (TCLP for RCRA materials) will dictate
disposal requirements.
c. Contractor is responsible for segregation of waste. Collect

lead-contaminated waste, scrap, debris, bags, containers, equipment,
and lead-contaminated clothing that may produce airborne concentrations
of lead particles. Label the containers in accordance with
29 CFR 1926.62 and 40 CFR 261.
d. Dispose of lead-contaminated material classified as hazardous waste at

an EPA or State approved hazardous waste treatment, storage, or
disposal facility off Government property.
e. Store waste materials in U.S. Department of Transportation (49 CFR 178)

approved 55 gallon drums. Properly label each drum to identify the type
of waste (49 CFR 172) and the date the drum was filled. For hazardous
waste, the collection drum requires marking/labeling in accordance with
40 CFR 262 during the accumulation/collection timeframe. The
Contracting Officer or an authorized representative will assign an area
for interim storage of waste-containing drums. Do not store hazardous
waste drums in interim storage longer than 90 calendar days from the
date affixed to each drum.
f. Handle, store, transport, and dispose lead or lead-contaminated waste

in accordance with 40 CFR 260, 40 CFR 261, 40 CFR 262, 40 CFR 263,
40 CFR 264, 40 CFR 265 and Specification Section 01525. Comply with
land disposal restriction notification requirements as required by
12/26/2018
40 CFR 268.
g. All regulated material accumulation, control, storage, transportation,

and disposal shall comply with all federal, state, and local
regulations, and the specific requirements of Section 01 57 19
TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS.
h. Do not transport hazardous waste off government property, until the

contracting officer's representative signs the waste shipment records
as the generator.
i. Transportation of hazardous wastes and regulated materials shall comply

with 49 CFR 171 and 49 CFR 172.
Submit written evidence to demonstrate the hazardous waste treatment,

storage, or disposal facility (TSD) is approved for lead disposal by the
EPA, State or local regulatory agencies. Submit one copy of the completed
hazardous waste manifest, signed and dated by the initial transporter in
accordance with 40 CFR 262. Contractor shall provide a certificate that
the waste was accepted by the disposal facility. Provide turn-in documents
or weight tickets for non-hazardous waste disposal.
Prepare all waste shipment records for the disposal of all hazardous waste
and regulated material. Immediately forward the signed disposer copy of the
waste shipment records to the Contracting Officer's representative.
3.5.2.2 Payment for Hazardous Waste
Payment for disposal of hazardous and non-hazardous waste will not be made
until a signed copy of the manifest from the treatment or disposal facility
certifying the amount of lead-containing materials or non-hazardous waste
delivered is returned and a copy is furnished to the Government.
12/26/2018
SECTION 02 85 00.00 20
MOLD REMEDIATION
05/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 AFU
1.2.2 Categories of Water
1.2.3 Certified Industrial Hygienist (CIH)
1.2.4 Complete Interior Building Demolition (Complete Gut)
1.2.5 Containment
1.2.5.1 Source Containment
1.2.5.2 Limited Containment
1.2.5.3 Full Containment
1.2.5.4 Cleaning Containment
1.2.6 Decontamination Unit (Airlock)
1.2.7 Dehumidifier
1.2.8 Detergent
1.2.9 Disinfectants or Biocide Sanitizing Solutions
1.2.10 EPA
1.2.11 Fungicidal Agents, (EPA)
1.2.12 HEPA Filter
1.2.13 HVAC
1.2.14 Industrial Hygienist (IH)
1.2.15 Microbial Remediation Supervisor
1.2.16 Non-Porous Material
1.2.17 Occupied Spaces (Areas)
1.2.18 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
1.2.19 Poly
1.2.20 Porous Material
1.2.21 Pressure Differential Measuring Instrument
1.2.22 Semi-porous Material
1.2.23 Ventilation System Mold Remediator Qualifications (VSMR)
1.2.24 Work Area
1.3 REQUIREMENTS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1.4.1 Preconstruction Submittals
1.4.1.1 Preliminary Visual Assessment Report
1.4.1.2 Microbial Remediation Plan
1.4.1.4 Worker Records
1.4.1.5 Certified Industrial Hygienist (CIH)/Industrial Hygienist
(IH) Qualifications
1.4.1.6 Microbial Remediation Supervisor Qualifications
1.4.2 Product Data
1.4.3 Daily Reports
1.4.4 Submittals at Completion of Remediation Work
SECTION 02 85 00.00 20 Page 1

12/26/2018
1.5 RECORD KEEPING

1.5.1 Daily Log
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 DISINFECTANTS, BIOCIDES, SANITIZING SOLUTIONS AND FUNGICIDAL

AGENTS, (EPA)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EQUIPMENT
3.1.1 Respirators
3.1.2 Protective Clothing
3.1.3 Warning Signs and Labels
3.1.4 Dehumidifiers
3.1.5 Air Filtration Units (AFU)
3.1.6 Vacuum Cleaners Equipped with HEPA Filters
3.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3.2.1 Pre-Microbial Remediation Work Conference
3.2.2 Containment Entry / Exit Procedure
3.3 REMOVAL PROCEDURES
3.3.1 Protection of Existing Work Areas
3.3.2 Remediation of Fungally Contaminated Building Materials
3.3.3 Remediation Procedures
3.3.3.1 Remediation of Non-Porous Materials
3.3.3.2 Semi-Porous Materials
3.4 DETAILED SEQUENCE OF WORK FOR MOLD REMOVAL UNDER CONTAINMENT
3.4.1 Preparation for Remediation Work
3.4.2 Demolition
3.4.3 Post-Demolition Inspection
3.4.4 Cleaning after Demolition, and Cleaning of Settled Spores from
Porous / Non-Porous Materials
3.5 FIRE PROTECTION
3.6 CONSTRUCTION BARRIERS
3.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE / QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS
3.7.1 Contractor Qualifications
3.7.2 Waste Management and Removal
3.7.3 Post-Remediation Inspection
3.7.3.1 Clearance
3.8 CLEAN-UP AND DISPOSAL
3.8.1 Disposal of Material
3.8.2 Material Packaging
3.8.3 Building Exit (Waste Disposal)
3.9 Appendices
ATTACHMENTS:
Microbial Assessment Visual Field Report Form
SECTION 02 85 00.00 20 Page 2

12/26/2018
SECTION 02 85 00.00 20
MOLD REMEDIATION
05/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AIHA IMOM08-679 (2008) Recognition, Evaluation, and

Control of Indoor Mold
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SANITARY ENGINEERING (ASSE)
ASSE Z9.2 (2012) Fundamentals Governing the Design

and Operation of Local Exhaust Ventilation
Systems
FLORIDA ADMINISTRATIVE CODE (FAC)
FAC 61-31 (2014) Mold-Related Services
FLORIDA STATUTES (FL-STAT)
Florida Statutes 468.84 (2015) Mold-Related Services
INSTITUTE OF INSPECTION, CLEANING, AND RESTORATION CERTIFICATION

(IICRC)
IICRC S500 (2015) Standard and Reference Guide for

Professional Water Damage Restoration
29 CFR 1926.1101 Asbestos

Units
1.2 DEFINITIONS
AIHA
American Industrial Hygiene Association.
SECTION 02 85 00.00 20 Page 3

12/26/2018
1.2.1 AFU
Air filtration unit with High Efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filtered
vacuum and / or exhaust ventilation equipment with a filter system capable
of collecting and retaining microbial contamination ASSE Z9.2. Filters
shall retain 99.97 percent of particles 1.2 by 10-6 inch or larger as
indicated in UL 586.
1.2.2 Categories of Water
(IICRC S500) Category 1 Water: Water originating from a source that does
not pose substantial harm to humans. Also referred to as "clean water."
Category 2 Water: Water containing a significant degree of chemical,

biological and/or physical contamination and having the potential to cause
discomfort or sickness if consumed by or exposed to humans. Also referred
to as "gray water."
Category 3 Water: Grossly unsanitary water, containing pathogenic agents,

arising from sewage or other contaminated water sources and having the
likelihood of causing discomfort or sickness if consumed by or exposed to
humans. This category includes all forms of seawater, ground surface water
and rising water from rivers or streams. Also referred to as "black water."
1.2.3 Certified Industrial Hygienist (CIH)
A Certified Industrial Hygienist refers to an individual that has been

certified by the American Board of Industrial Hygiene (ABIH), with
professional qualifications and experience as required for an industrial
hygienist, as presented in the definition of "Industrial Hygienist."
1.2.4 Complete Interior Building Demolition (Complete Gut)
Interior finishes of the building have been removed to expose basic

structural elements.
1.2.5 Containment
Physical separation and engineering controls required to prevent

contamination of undamaged materials and occupied areas. The level of
containment varies depending on the extent of the contamination.
1.2.5.1 Source Containment
Use when the contaminated surface area is less than 10 square feet, in
non-residential buildings only. At a minimum, source containment shall
include the following:
a. Isolation of Work Areas. Install polyethylene barriers to isolate the

areas or material to be demolished / remediated from non-remediation
areas.
b. Floor protection. Maintain protection for finished floors through all

construction activities.
c. HEPA vacuum to control dust created during the demolition. Hold HEPA
vac intake at source of dust.
SECTION 02 85 00.00 20 Page 4

12/26/2018
1.2.5.2 Limited Containment
Use when contaminated surface area is between 10 square feet and 100 square
feet per room in non-residential buildings and contaminated surface area
less than 100 square feet per room in residential buildings. At a minimum,
limited containment shall include the following:
a. Containment. For non-residential buildings, the containment shall

include the area to be remediated, plus enough additional area to allow
for all equipment and work activities.
b. Isolation of Work Areas. Install polyethylene barriers to isolate the

areas to be demolished / remediated. If the work area is contained in
one room, only install barriers to isolate from the exterior of the
building.
c. Floor protection. Maintain protection for finished floors through all

d. Air Filtration / Pressurization Control. Install AFUs with HEPA

filters in the containment. Configure the AFUs with splitters /
diverters to allow some of the air to recirculate within the
containment. Discharge the remainder of the air directly to the
outside to maintain an overall negative pressure in the containment of
0.02 inch water column minimum to 0.04 inch water column maximum
relative to the outside and other adjacent spaces not undergoing
remediation. AFUs shall filter a minimum of four air changes per hour
and a maximum of six air changes per hour.
e. Protection for all items remaining in the containment. Protective

devices shall prevent physical damage (e.g., scratches and dents) and
shall provide a positive seal to prevent dust from settling in or on
the items.
f. Containment Entrance. Install a triple-flap poly "door" to be used

during demolition to minimize egress and provide a good separation
between containment and occupied areas of the house / building.
1.2.5.3 Full Containment
Use when contaminated surface area is greater than 100 square feet in
nonresidential buildings. At a minimum, full containment shall include the
following:
a. Containment. For non-residential buildings, the containment shall

include the area to be remediated, plus enough additional area to allow
for all equipment and work activities.
b. Isolation of Work Areas. Construct polyethylene barriers to isolate

the areas to be demolished / remediated.
c. Floor protection. Maintain protection for finished floors through all

d. Air Filtration / Pressurization Control. Install AFUs with HEPA

filters in the containment. Configure the AFUs with splitters /
diverters to allow some of the air to recirculate within the
containment. Discharge the remainder of the air directly to the
SECTION 02 85 00.00 20 Page 5

12/26/2018
0.02 inch water column minimum to 0.04 inch water column maximum
relative to the outside and other adjacent spaces not undergoing
remediation. AFUs shall filter a minimum of four air changes per hour
and a maximum of six air changes per hour.
e. Protection for all items remaining in the containment. Protective

devices shall prevent physical damage (e.g., scratches and dents) and
shall provide a positive seal to prevent dust from settling in or on
the items.
f. Decontamination. Construct a decontamination airlock for entry into

and exit from the work area. The airlock shall be used to HEPA vacuum
the sealed bags of contaminated debris. When possible, the
decontamination airlock shall be located so that the sealed bags can be
passed directly from the airlock to the outside, through a door or
window.
g. Containment Entrance. Install a triple-flap poly "door" at the

entrance to the airlock, and between the airlock and the work area
during demolition to minimize egress and provide a good separation
between containment and occupied areas of the house / building.
1.2.5.4 Cleaning Containment
A temporary containment structure set up to clean items removed from the

containment. At a minimum, the cleaning area shall contain:
a. Two chambers. Construct walls with polyethylene. Items will be

cleaned in the first chamber. The clean items shall be stored in the
second chamber.
b. Air Filtration / Pressurization Control Cleaning Chamber. Install AFUs

with HEPA filters in the cleaning chamber. Configure the AFUs with
splitters / diverters to allow some of the air to recirculate within
the containment. Discharge the remainder of the air directly to the
0.02 inch water column minimum to 0.04 inch water column (maximum)
relative to the storage chamber.
c. Air Filtration, Storage Chamber. Install AFUs with HEPA filters in the
storage chamber. The AFUs shall be configured to allow air to
recirculate within the chamber. AFUs shall filter a minimum of four
air changes per hour and a maximum of six air changes per hour.
d. Containment Entrance. Install a triple-flap poly "door" at the

entrance to the cleaning chamber, between the cleaning and storage
chambers, and at the exit of the storage chamber to minimize egress and
provide a good separation between the chambers.
1.2.6 Decontamination Unit (Airlock)
An enclosed area adjacent to, and connected to, a regulated work area. It
consists of various rooms that are used for the decontamination of workers,
equipment, and materials.
1.2.7 Dehumidifier
Mechanism or machine to remove moisture from the air.
SECTION 02 85 00.00 20 Page 6

12/26/2018
1.2.8 Detergent
A cleaning agent. The term refers to a prepared compound that may include
surfactants, builders, dry solvents, softeners, etc, but does not include
true soap.
1.2.9 Disinfectants or Biocide Sanitizing Solutions
One of three groups of antimicrobials registered by the EPA for public

health uses. The EPA considers an antimicrobial to be a disinfectant when
it destroys or irreversibly inactivates infectious or other undesirable
organisms, but not necessarily their spores.
1.2.10 EPA
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.
1.2.11 Fungicidal Agents, (EPA)
A coating material that contains an EPA registered fungicide that inhibits

the spread and growth of mold with the ability to withstand moist and humid
conditions.
1.2.12 HEPA Filter
A High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) filter capable of trapping and

retaining 99.97 percent of all particulate larger than 1.2 by 10-6 inch.
1.2.13 HVAC
Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (System).
1.2.14 Industrial Hygienist (IH)
Industrial Hygienist (IH) refers to an individual designated and provided

by the Contractor that is a professional qualified by education, training,
and experience to anticipate, recognize, evaluate, and develop controls for
occupational and indoor air quality hazards. Education must include a
minimum 12 semester hours or quarter hour equivalent of chemistry and 18
additional semester hours or quarter hour equivalent of courses in any
combination of chemistry, physics, engineering, health physics,
environmental health, biostatistics, biology, physiology, toxicology,
epidemiology, or industrial hygiene. The Industrial Hygienist shall be
under the supervision of a Certified Industrial Hygienist.
1.2.15 Microbial Remediation Supervisor
Individual responsible for the execution of the microbial remediation work

as defined by the scope of work. This individual shall be a Licensed Mold
Remediator in the State of Florida per Florida Statutes 468.84-468.8424
and FAC 61-31, have documented training in microbial remediation and have
at least three years experience in microbial remediation work.
1.2.16 Non-Porous Material
A material that does not absorb nor is easily penetrated by liquids,

especially water. Generally, non-porous materials have a permeable factor
of less than 1. Some examples are metal, glass, plastic, ceramic tile, etc.
SECTION 02 85 00.00 20 Page 7

12/26/2018
1.2.17 Occupied Spaces (Areas)
The phrase "occupied space" within this specification refers to spaces that
are occupied by unprotected non-remediation personnel while work is in
progress. It also refers to areas adjacent to work areas that are not
currently undergoing remediation.
1.2.18 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
Any material or device worn to protect a worker from exposure to, or

contact with, any harmful material or force. PPE must be cleaned or
disposed of prior to removal from the remediation work area.
1.2.19 Poly
Polyethylene sheet with a minimum thickness of 6 mils.
1.2.20 Porous Material
Permeable materials having the physical properties that allow liquids or

gasses to pass through. These materials include but are not limited to the
following: gypsum wall board, insulation, wallpaper, ceiling material,
carpet, padding, paper goods (i.e., cardboard boxes, loose paper, books,
etc.), stuffed furniture, wicker, fabrics, etc.
1.2.21 Pressure Differential Measuring Instrument
Device used to measure the relative pressure difference between the work
area and areas outside the work area. For mold remediation, the device
must measure accurately in the 0 to 0.04 inch range.
1.2.22 Semi-porous Material
A material that can absorb liquids if exposed over long periods of time.
These materials include but are not limited to wood, concrete, linoleum,
vinyl wall covering, wooden or hardboard furniture, plaster, etc.
1.2.23 Ventilation System Mold Remediator Qualifications (VSMR)
An individual certified by the North American Duct Cleaning Association

(NADCA) to clean HVAC systems.
1.2.24 Work Area
The area where remediation operations are actively performed and controlled
to prevent the spread of dust / spores and entry by unauthorized
personnel. A work area is the space, group of spaces, or the building, as
defined by the Microbial Assessment Survey.
1.3 REQUIREMENTS
The Contractor shall conduct an initial Microbial Assessment Survey with

containment categories and remediation methods specified for each work area
suspected to contain mold.
The initial Microbial Assessment Survey specified below shall be furnished

and certified by a Licensed Mold Assessor licensed in the State of Florida
SECTION 02 85 00.00 20 Page 8

12/26/2018
to do such work. The initial survey is included in the solicitation

documents at the end of this specification section.
Provide mold remediation work including the handling and control of mold
contaminated materials and the resultant procedures and equipment required
to protect workers, the environment and occupants of the building or area,
or both, from contact with mold products and spores. The work also includes
the disposal of any mold contaminated materials generated by the work. The
mold removal work includes the demolition and removal of approximately no
more than 50 square feet of duct insulation and duct covering connected to
AHU #8 located in room 1535 in facility 1704. Provide containment and
engineering control techniques as outlined in this specification. All mold
contaminated material removal work shall be supervised by a microbial
remediation supervisor as specified herein.
No work in this specification section shall be provided by any person,

contractor, or contracting entity involved in the preparation of the
contract documents of which this specification section is a part.
The following microbial remediation specifications apply to the cleaning /

removal and disposal of fungally-contaminated porous, semi-porous and
non-porous surfaces within various types of structures. The level of
containment and requirements for cleaning and remediation of materials will
depend on the condition of the space and materials being remediated.
Immediately after award of the contract, prepare a preliminary visual

assessment report using the standard microbial assessment form (Appendix A)
to document the pre-remediation condition of the work area. Only address
the differences between the pre-remediation condition of the work areas and
the government provided Microbial Assessment Survey. If required to
indicate the differences, include the HVAC systems inspection required
elsewhere in this specification section. Submit this written
pre-remediation condition report to the Contracting Officer for approval
and instructions to proceed.
After approval of the preliminary visual assessment report and having

instructions from the Contracting Officer to proceed, prepare a microbial
remediation plan for approval by the Contractor's Certified Industrial
Hygienist. Microbial remediation plan shall include an assessment of the
risk for people to occupy areas adjoining the remediation area while
remediation work is occurring. Upon the Contractor's CIH approval of the
plan, submit the plan to the Contracting Officer for approval.
The Contractor's CIH or IH shall monitor the site on a daily basis while
remediation work is in progress, identifying work and/or work practices
that are not in compliance with the approved microbial remediation plan,
and performing all inspections required by this specification. The
Contracting Officer may require the removal of any individual for
non-compliance with quality requirements specified in the contract.
This specification section includes the protocol regarding proper disposal

of the removed building material components from within the work site.
Use proper cleaning procedures, engineering controls, and apply best

management practices to remove microbial growth and spore fallout from all
surfaces and building materials to minimize the further release of
microbial spores. Address semi-porous and nonporous surfaces within the
facility in each cleaning phase of the project. Damp wipe and HEPA vacuum
all surfaces, at a minimum. Remove and dispose of porous building
SECTION 02 85 00.00 20 Page 9

12/26/2018
materials that are supporting microbial growth.
1.4 SUBMITTALS

Preliminary Visual Assessment Report
Microbial Remediation Plan
Worker Records
Respiratory Protection Program
Licensed Mold Assessor Qualifications
Certified Industrial Hygienist (CIH)/Industrial Hygienist (IH)

Qualifications
Microbial Remediation Supervisor Qualifications
Ventilation System Mold Remediator Qualifications (VSMR)
SD-03 Product Data
Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
Air Filtration Units
Dehumidifiers
Pressure Differential Measuring Instrument
Fungicidal Agents, (EPA
Disinfectants or Biocide Sanitizing Solutions
SD-06 Test Reports
Daily Reports
Submittals at Completion of Remediation Work
1.4.1 Preconstruction Submittals
Within ten (10) days from the award of the contract and prior to the start
of the work, submit to the Contracting Officer six copies of the following
items for review and permanent file.
1.4.1.1 Preliminary Visual Assessment Report
A written report to document the pre-remediation condition of the work
SECTION 02 85 00.00 20 Page 10

12/26/2018
areas.
1.4.1.2 Microbial Remediation Plan
Submit a job-specific, abbreviated plan Approved by the Contractor's CIH to

the Contracting Officer for final approval prior to start of work. The
plan shall address the following items at a minimum:
a. Description of materials to be remediated, providing location and

quantities (map if available), and methods to be used for remediation.
b. Types of biocides and fungicidal agents, (EPA).
c. Containment procedures to include description and locations of

engineering controls and decontamination unit to include entry and exit
procedures (provide sketch of floor plan showing location of
containment barriers and decontamination units). Plan shall include
locations of AFUs and AFU discharges to the outside.
d. Description of personal protective equipment to be used during the

remediation.
e. Construction barricades and barriers in occupied areas.
f. HVAC Shut down and start-up procedures.
g. HVAC Evaluation and remediation procedures.
h. Moisture and relative humidity control procedures and equipment.
i. Packaging and disposal procedures.
j. Safety Precautions to include lockout / tag-out, fall protection,

confined space entry procedures, and fire protection.
k. Description of the method to be employed to control cross contamination

of areas not in the work area. This shall include a risk assessment
related to the suitability of people to occupy areas adjoin the
remediation area while remediation activities are ongoing.
l. IH Quality Control procedures to include visual inspection.
m. Procedures to control, abate, and dispose of Asbestos Containing

Materials (ACM) and Lead Based Paint (LBP) coincident with microbial
remediation. Before work in areas containing ACM and PACM is begun;
Contractor shall identify the presence, location, and quantity of ACM,
and/or PACM therein pursuant to paragraph (k)(1) of 29 CFR 1926.1101.
Provide written copy of Contractor's Respiratory Protection program.
1.4.1.4 Worker Records
Provide the following documents for all workers, including supervisory

personnel. If new workers are added to the crew, provide the same
documentation for them.
Employee Instruction and Release Form: Provide documentation showing that
SECTION 02 85 00.00 20 Page 11

12/26/2018
each employee has been instructed on the following items:
a. Use and fit of respirators (for employees entering and working in the
containment).
b. Protective clothing.
c. Protective measures.
d. Safety and Emergency Egress Procedures.
e. Site specific fall protection plan and training.
f. Microbial remediation hazards and practices including engineering

controls and isolation. Training should include "hands on" training
for microbial remediation supervisors.
g. Workers' release forms stating the potential hazards involved with the
scope of the work.
h. Worker Training Certification: Submit copies of training certificates

for each employee indicating that the employee has received training at
the appropriate level for the work prescribed in the description of
work.
1.4.1.5 Certified Industrial Hygienist (CIH)/Industrial Hygienist (IH)

Qualifications
Submit the name, address, and telephone number of the Certified Industrial
Hygienist (CIH) and Industrial Hygienist (IH). Provide copies of board
certificates, resume to document field experience, and evidence that the
CIH and IH have successfully completed training in microbial investigation
and remediation.
1.4.1.6 Microbial Remediation Supervisor Qualifications
Onsite supervisor shall be a Licensed Mold Remediator in the State of

Florida per Florida Statutes 468.84-468.8424 and FAC 61-31. Submit copies
of License documentation.
1.4.2 Product Data
Within 10 days of contract award, submit product data for items identified
for use in Microbial Remediation Plan.
1.4.3 Daily Reports
Prepare a written report for each day that microbial remediation work is
being accomplished. Submit this report to the Contracting Officer by 1000
hours of the following day, attached to the Contractor Quality Control
Report. Referred to collectively as the IH Daily Report, the report at a
minimum shall include measurements of differential pressure and temperature
and relative humidity in work areas, and detail any non-compliance issues
observed.
1.4.4 Submittals at Completion of Remediation Work
Within 14 days of completion, provide the following information:
SECTION 02 85 00.00 20 Page 12

12/26/2018
a. Supervisor Logs.
b. IH Daily Reports.
c. Photographic Logs.
d. Contractor's Industrial Hygienist Report certifying the microbial

remediation is complete.
1.5 RECORD KEEPING
A Daily Project Log shall form a permanent record of the project. Secure
and maintain these logs and any other required documentation as part of the
permanent project file.
1.5.1 Daily Log
The Microbial Remediation Supervisor shall maintain a Daily Project Log.

The Daily Project Log shall be used each day of the project to document the
following information.
a. Date.
b. Name of Microbial Remediation Supervisor.
c. Name of Industrial Hygienist monitoring work area.
d. Number of workers on site.
e. Equipment utilized.
f. Brief description of daily work activities.
g. Listing of any non-compliance noted, emergencies, stop work orders

(with detailed explanation), and descriptions of any other significant
events.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 DISINFECTANTS, BIOCIDES, SANITIZING SOLUTIONS AND FUNGICIDAL AGENTS,

(EPA)
Shall be approved by EPA for the use detailed in the Microbial Remediation
Plan and used in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EQUIPMENT
Provide protective clothing and respirators as required by the Microbial

Remediation Plan for use by any authorized visitors. Provide
manufacturer's certificate of compliance for all equipment used to contain
the microbial contamination. Contractor shall not be required to certify
that visitors entering work areas be capable of wearing respirators.
3.1.1 Respirators
Select respirators from those approved by the National Institute for

SECTION 02 85 00.00 20 Page 13

12/26/2018
Services. Provide personnel engaged in set-up, pre-cleaning, cleanup,

handling, and removal of contaminated materials with the appropriate
respiratory protection as specified in 29 CFR 1910.134. Microbial
remediation plan shall consider Table 17.1 in AIHA IMOM08-679 "Recognition,
Evaluation, and Control of Indoor Mold", which lists the minimum levels of
respiratory protection based on the activity and size of the remediated
area.
3.1.2 Protective Clothing
Provide all workers with protective clothing as appropriate for the work
being accomplished, as required by the Microbial Remediation Plan.
Do not permit any person to enter the work area without the appropriate
protective clothing and equipment.
3.1.3 Warning Signs and Labels
Provide bilingual warning signs printed in English and Spanish at all

approaches to the work areas. Locate signs at such a distance that
personnel may read the sign and take the necessary protective steps
required before entering the area. Warning signs may be in the form of
continuous plastic tape. The warning signs shall have black characters on
a yellow background.
WARNING
DO NOT ENTER
MICROBIAL REMEDIATION WORK IN PROGRESS
Alternate wording for the warning signs will be approved by the Contracting
Officer.
3.1.4 Dehumidifiers
Install and use dehumidifiers as needed during the remediation to maintain

relative humidity below 60 percent in the work area. Coordinate with
Installation Environmental Office to identify appropriate means of draining
of disposing of condensate water. Empty as needed to prevent water
overflowing from the dehumidifiers.
3.1.5 Air Filtration Units (AFU)
Install and use AFUs with HEPA filters, and manufacturer specified
pre-filters, as part of the exhaust ventilation system to develop and
maintain the specified desired air pressure differential inside the
enclosed work area relative to the outside areas. The Contractor shall be
responsible for acquiring and paying for any licenses needed for use of any
equipment, including but not limited to, air pressure differential systems
and air filtration systems.
Replace HEPA filters and pre-filters for AFUs as required to maintain

pressurization performance requirements during demolition and cleaning. Do
not reuse filters. Bag used filters at a minimum in clear 6 mil
polyethylene bags within the containment and disposed as contaminated waste.
Discharge air from any AFUs located in the work area containment to the
outside environment when creating a negative pressure containment to create
SECTION 02 85 00.00 20 Page 14

12/26/2018
a negative pressure relative to occupied areas of 0.02 inch H2O to 0.04

inch H20. Discharge air in excess of that required for creating the proper
negative pressure to the work area. The AFUs shall provide four to six air
changes per hour in the work area. Under no circumstances may air from
AFUs discharge to an occupied area. Coordinate location of window sashes
or doors required for discharge openings with the Contracting Officer.
Seal around openings used for discharge of exhaust air airtight. Exhaust
discharge openings may be constructed of plywood.
Seal all exhaust and intake openings in AFUs with one layer of 6 mil
polyethylene sheeting when not in use.
3.1.6 Vacuum Cleaners Equipped with HEPA Filters
Provide vacuum cleaners equipped with HEPA filters designed for continuous
operation to perform the work in a timely and efficient manner.
Provide nozzle attachments as required to adequately remove all dust. As a

minimum, nozzle attachments shall include crevice and extended bristle
brush nozzles. Any vacuum that is not equipped with a HEPA filter shall
not be used at anytime.
Provide sufficient vacuum cleaners equipped with HEPA filters designed for
continuous operation in the work area during microbial remediation inside
the containment area.
Provide additional vacuum cleaners equipped with HEPA filters in the

enclosed work area during remediation or cleaning work as required by the
size (area) of the containment and to maintain timely progress of the work.
3.2.1 Pre-Microbial Remediation Work Conference
Meet with the Contracting Officer prior to beginning work to discuss in

detail the Microbial Remediation Plan, including work procedures and safety
precautions. Once approved by the Contracting Officer, the plan shall be
enforced as if a part of this specification. Any variances to the
specification as a result of the plan shall be specifically identified to
allow for free discussion and approved by the Contracting Officer in
writing prior to starting work. Before work in areas containing Asbestos
Containing Material (ACM) and Presumed Asbestos Containing Materials (PACM)
and Lead is begun, Contractor shall identify the presence, location, and
quantity of ACM, PACM and Lead. Ensure proper notification of regulatory
authorities. Contractor shall consult with Contracting Officer to obtain
facility ACM / LBP surveys.
3.2.2 Containment Entry / Exit Procedure
Ensure that each worker and authorized visitor follows entry and exit
procedures detailed in the Microbial Remediation Plan.
3.3 REMOVAL PROCEDURES
3.3.1 Protection of Existing Work Areas
Perform work in a manner to minimize the damage or contamination to areas

outside or directly adjacent to the work area. Contractor is required to
inspect areas inside and outside proposed work areas to identify existing
SECTION 02 85 00.00 20 Page 15

12/26/2018
damage and notify Contracting Officer prior to start of work.
Where materials outside work area are damaged or contaminated as a result

of the Contractors work efforts as verified by the Contracting Officer
using visual inspection or sample analysis, it shall be restored to its
original condition or decontaminated by the Contractor at no expense to the
Government as deemed appropriate by the Contracting officer. Should
adjacent or outside areas become contaminated as a result of the
Contractors work efforts the work shall stop immediately. The newly
contaminated areas shall be cleaned and verified by visual inspection by
the IH. The work may proceed at the discretion of the Contracting Officer
once the area has been verified as restored.
3.3.2 Remediation of Fungally Contaminated Building Materials
The removal of contaminated materials shall follow in general the listed

sequence of work. The Contractor may make changes to improve work flow
with the approval of the Contracting Officer.
a. Provide level of containment and PPE required by the Microbial

Remediation Plan.
b. Disable all HVAC units and exhaust fans in the area to be remediated.
c. Protect materials to remain in work area. Where possible, all

materials to be salvaged should be cleaned in place to prevent possible
cross-contamination created by moving materials through non-remediation
areas.
d. Remove undamaged items and materials to be cleaned and salvaged from

the work area. Materials shall be stored in an area with relative
humidity maintained below 60 percent and where temperatures will not
damage the material. Notify Contracting Officer of existing damage to
items prior to removal.
e. Set up containments, including protection of materials remaining within

the containment and AFUs. Notify Contracting Officer that the area is
prepared for remediation activities.
f. Pre-demolition inspection by the Contracting Officer.
g. Demolition and removal / cleaning of contaminated materials.
h. Post-remediation inspection by the Contracting Officer.
i. Perform final cleaning in the containment.
j. Clean floor surface in the containment.
k. Clearance inspection by the Contracting Officer.
l. Duct and HVAC cleaning, if necessary.
m. Deconstruction of containment, removal of AFUs.
n. Clean previously removed items prior to returning to occupied area.
SECTION 02 85 00.00 20 Page 16

12/26/2018
3.3.3 Remediation Procedures
Procedures for remediation depend on the amount of mold growth and the type
of material with fungal growth.
3.3.3.1 Remediation of Non-Porous Materials
The method of remediating non-porous items shall be:
a. HEPA vacuum all surfaces.
b. Damp wipe all surfaces using clean water or a detergent solution.
3.3.3.2 Semi-Porous Materials
The method of surface cleaning semi-porous materials such as concrete,

vinyl wall covering, linoleum, leather furniture, and finished wood
products shall be:
a. HEPA vacuum all surfaces.
b. Damp wipe surfaces with using clean water or a detergent solution.

Avoid over-wetting the material.
3.4 DETAILED SEQUENCE OF WORK FOR MOLD REMOVAL UNDER CONTAINMENT
3.4.1 Preparation for Remediation Work
a. Provide level of containment and PPE required for the remediation based
on the Microbial Remediation Plan.
b. Disable all HVAC units and exhaust fans in the area to be remediated.
c. Remove undamaged materials from the work area if they are to be

salvaged but cannot be cleaned in place. Store materials in an area
with relative humidity maintained below 60 percent and where
temperatures will not damage the material. Notify Contracting Officer
of existing damage to items prior to removal. Clean materials using
procedures detailed in Remediation Procedures.
d. Construct containment barriers. Existing walls can be used as a

portion of the containment barriers if existing openings in walls (such
as doors, wall openings, vents, etc.) are sealed using polyethylene.
e. Install the AFUs and dehumidifiers.
f. Seal supply, return, and exhaust openings with polyethylene sheeting

and protect intakes to air handling units. Air handling units shall
remain off.
g. Install all equipment needed for removal work in the containment area
to minimize egress during demolition.
h. The Contracting Officer will inspect the containment to verify that the
containment is properly constructed and the containment area has an
overall negative pressure of 0.02 to 0.04 inch water column relative to
the outside and adjacent work areas not undergoing active remediation,
prior to beginning demolition work.
SECTION 02 85 00.00 20 Page 17

12/26/2018
3.4.2 Demolition
a. Remove mold contaminated materials to be discarded, such as paper, and

furniture. Double bag material in 6 mil poly bags. Seal poly bags
using duct tape inside the containment. HEPA vacuum bags before
removing them from the containment or airlock. When possible, pass the
bags directly from the containment or airlock to the outside.
Transport bags to a dumpster. Do not leave the bags at the building /
house.
b. Use dust collection attachments on all power tools, such as sanders,

saws, etc., to capture dust created when using the tools. Outlet of
dust collector should discharge into inlet of AFU.
c. Place removed gypsum board, insulation, carpet and remaining debris in

two layers of 6 mil poly bags. Seal poly bags using duct tape inside
the containment. HEPA vacuum bags before removing them from the
containment or airlock. When possible pass the bags directly from the
containment or airlock to the outside. Transport bags to a dumpster
off Government property in accordance with federal, state and local
regulations. Do not leave the bags at the building / house.
Remediation workers shall HEPA vacuum their PPE, then remove them
within the airlock chamber. Discard disposable coverall suits into a
6 mil poly bag.
3.4.3 Post-Demolition Inspection
a. The Contracting Officer will inspect the containment area to verify

that all contaminated materials have been removed.
b. Allow a minimum of 12 hours after completion of removal work, with AFUs

operating, for airborne dust in the containment to settle and / or be
removed by the AFUs.
3.4.4 Cleaning after Demolition, and Cleaning of Settled Spores from Porous
/ Non-Porous Materials
a. Continue to operate AFUs during cleaning.
b. Clean exposed surfaces.
(1) HEPA vacuum all surfaces.
(2) Damp wipe all non-porous exposed surfaces including polyethylene

sheets used to protect materials, external surfaces of ductwork,
studs, and floors with clean rag and clean potable water or
detergent solution.
(3) Remove poly sheeting inside the containment.
(4) HEPA vacuum all surfaces protected by poly sheeting.
(5) Damp wipe non-porous surfaces protected by poly sheeting with

clean water or a detergent solution.
c. Final clearance inspection will be conducted by Contracting Officer.

Clearance inspections will be performed using the procedures detailed
in Post-Remediation Inspection. Maintain containments in place until
spaces are inspected and accepted by the Government as being fully
SECTION 02 85 00.00 20 Page 18

12/26/2018
remediated. The Government will determine whether the Contractor shall

conduct additional cleaning and repeat the clearance process.
3.5 FIRE PROTECTION
The Contractor shall provide portable fire extinguishers within the

containment area and outside the decontamination unit. Fire extinguishers
shall be rated for the class of fire hazards in the work area and shall be
sized for coverage of the areas within the containment. At a minimum, one
10 pound ABC fire extinguisher for every 1,000 square feet shall be
strategically placed around the containment. Personnel shall be trained
for emergency egress and the use of fire extinguishers. Notify fire
officials of work activities as required.
3.6 CONSTRUCTION BARRIERS
a. Do not disturb microbial-contaminated building materials while

isolating work areas. This precaution prevents the release of
microbial spores.
b. Workers shall wear respirators and other PPE as outlined in the

microbial remediation plan when installing critical barriers where
microbial contaminated surfaces (walls or surfaces with visible settled
dusts) are likely to be disturbed. Operate an AFU if disturbance is
likely during setup.
c. Monitor the air pressure differential across work area containments.

The monitoring system shall be in place before the start of remedial
activities. Verification by the Industrial Hygienist is required prior
to the start of the microbial remediation.
3.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE / QUALITY CONTROL REQUIREMENTS
3.7.1 Contractor Qualifications
Work shall be performed by a certified remediation contractor in the State

of Florida per Florida Statutes 468.84-468.8424 and FAC 61-31. Contractor
shall carry insurance that specifically covers mold remediation.
Remediation contractor's on-site supervisor shall be a Licensed Mold

Remediator in the State of Florida per Florida Statutes 468.84 to 468.8424
and FAC 61-31. Qualified supervisor shall be onsite whenever active
remediation is being performed. Set-up activities may be performed without
supervisor present; qualified supervisor shall review set-up prior to start
of work.
Mold remediation workers shall be given training in PPE and mold

remediation activities as required for their particular job. Microbial
remediation plan shall provide details of worker training.
3.7.2 Waste Management and Removal
Keep the site and work area free from accumulations of dust, waste
materials, or rubbish caused by Contractor operations and free from any
flammable materials or other sources of fire hazard. Remove all waste
materials and rubbish from and about the work site in strict accordance
with the specifications and applicable codes and regulations.
SECTION 02 85 00.00 20 Page 19

12/26/2018
3.7.3 Post-Remediation Inspection
Clean up all debris and dust in interior spaces outside the work area
resulting from the Contractor's remediation work.
After all visible accumulations of material and debris are removed from the
containment, provide the Contracting Officer a 24-hour notice for a final
clearance visual inspection. The Contracting Officer and Contractor's
Licensed Mold Remediator in the State of Florida per Florida Statutes 468.84
-468.8424 and FAC 61-31, shall conduct a thorough visual inspection of the
work area. If during this inspection any visible debris and/or microbial
contamination are observed, the Contractor shall re-clean the work area
without additional cost to the Government.
3.7.3.1 Clearance
a. Clearance Criteria
Clearance will be based on visual assessment (all visible mold

removed, all visible dust removed) by Contracting Officer.
b. Failed remediation areas will be recleaned and the AFUs kept in

operation another 12 hours, followed by another visual assessment.
Subsequent failures will follow the same routine until a pass condition
is secured.
3.8 CLEAN-UP AND DISPOSAL
3.8.1 Disposal of Material
Dispose of contaminated bagged waste materials removed during this

remediation as general construction debris. Follow all applicable local,
State, and Federal requirements for the disposal of this material.
3.8.2 Material Packaging
Place waste, as waste is removed, into a disposal container promptly.

Disposal containers shall consist of at a minimum, two layers of clear 6 mil
polyethylene bags. Tape bags in a gooseneck fashion to form an airtight
seal and label appropriately. Bag waste from vacuums equipped with HEPA
filters in 6 mil polyethylene bags.
3.8.3 Building Exit (Waste Disposal)
HEPA vacuum and damp wipe bags of contaminated waste material prior to
removal from the building.
Should the Contractor encounter any hazardous materials, notify the

Contracting Officer immediately for direction.
3.9 Appendices
Appendix A - Microbial Assessment Visual Field Report Form
Appendix A
SECTION 02 85 00.00 20 Page 20

12/26/2018
Microbial Assessment Visual Field Report Form
TO DOWNLOAD THIS FORM, SEE UFGS GRAPHICS

Go to http://www.wbdg.org/ccb/NAVGRAPH/graphtoc.pdf.
SECTION 02 85 00.00 20 Page 21

12/26/2018
SECTION 05 50 00
METAL FABRICATIONS
05/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 REFERENCES
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS FOR WELDING WORK
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL SURFACES GENERAL

2.2 STRUCTURAL STEEL PLATES, SHAPES, AND BARS
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
2.4 ANCHORS AND FASTENERS
2.5 PAINT MATERIALS
2.6 GENERAL FABRICATION
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
2.8 WARRANTY SIGN
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
3.3 TOUCHUP PAINTING
12/26/2018
SECTION 05 50 00
METAL FABRICATIONS
05/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
This Section includes, but is not limited to, the following:
Miscellaneous steel framing, supports and fabricated items for applications

that are not specified in other Sections.
Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete or masonry not
specified in other Sections. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, and
wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit
masonry.
1.2 REFERENCES
AWS D1.1/D1.1M (2015; Errata 1 2015; Errata 2 2016)

Structural Welding Code - Steel
AWS D1.3 (2008; Errata 2008) Structural Welding

Code - Sheet Steel
AWS D1.6 (1999) Structural Welding Code - Stainless

Steel
ASME B18.2.1 (2012; Errata 2013) Square and Hex Bolts

and Screws (Inch Series)
ASME B18.21.1 (2009; R 2016) Washers: Helical

Spring-Lock, Tooth Lock, and Plain Washers
(Inch Series)
ASME B18.22.1 (1998)Plain Washers
ASME B18.6.1 (2016) Wood Screws (Inch Series)
ASME B18.6.3 (2013; R 2017) Machine Screws, Tapping

Screws, and Machine Drive Screws (Inch
Series)
ASTM A283/A283M (2013) Standard Specification for Low and

Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel
12/26/2018
Plates
ASTM A307 (2014; E 2017) Standard Specification for

Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded
Rod 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength
ASTM A36/A36M (2014) Standard Specification for Carbon

Structural Steel

Carbon Steel Eyebolts
ASTM A563 (2015) Standard Specification for Carbon

and Alloy Steel Nuts
ASTM B633 (2015) Standard Specification for

Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron
and Steel
ASTM C1107/C1107M (2017) Standard Specification for Packaged

Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink)
ASTM D1187/D1187M (1997; E 2011; R 2011) Asphalt-Base

Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings
for Metal
ASTM E488/E488M (2015) Standard Test Methods for Strength

of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements
ASTM F593 (2017) Standard Specification for

Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and
Studs
ASTM F594 (2009; E 2015) Standard Specification for

Stainless Steel Nuts
ASTM F1554 (2017; E 2018) Standard Specification for

Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi
Yield Strength
SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)
SSPC Paint 20 (2002; E 2004) Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I,

Inorganic, and Type II, Organic)
SSPC Paint 25 (1997; E 2004) Zinc Oxide, Alkyd, Linseed

Oil Primer for Use Over Hand Cleaned
Steel, Type I and Type II
1.3 SUBMITTALS

PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Include plans, elevations, sections and details of metal

fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory
items.
12/26/2018
SD-03 Product Data
Submit Manufacturer's catalog data for the following items:
Structural Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars

Miscellaneous Framing and Supports
Anchors and Fasteners
SD-07 Certificates
Submit certificates for Welder Qualifications in accordance with

the paragraph entitled, "Qualifications for Welding Work," of this
section.
Submit certificates for Miscellaneous Metal Items showing

conformance with the referenced standards contained in this
section.
Submit manufacturer's instructions covering installation of

Miscellaneous Metal Items.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS FOR WELDING WORK
Submit certification of welder qualifications by tests in accordance with

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, AWS D1.3 and AWS D1.6.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL SURFACES GENERAL
Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide
materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or
blemishes.
2.2 STRUCTURAL STEEL PLATES, SHAPES, AND BARS
Plates, shapes, and bars conforming to ASTM A36/A36M.
Plates to be bent or cold formed conforming to ASTM A283/A283M, Grade C.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as

needed to complete the Work. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates,
and bars of welded construction. Cut, drill and tap units to receive
hardware, hangers, and similar items.
2.4 ANCHORS AND FASTENERS
General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel

fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying
with ASTM B633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Provide stainless-steel
fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and
class required.
12/26/2018
Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A307, Grade A (ASTM
F 586M, Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A563; and, where
indicated, flat washers.
Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed

stainless-steel bolts, nuts and where indicated, flat washers; ASTM F593
(ASTM F 738M) for bolts and ASTM F594 (ASTM F 836M) for nuts.
Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 36.
1. Provide hot-dip or mechanically deposited, zinc-coated anchor bolts

where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.
Eyebolts: ASTM A489.
Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3.
Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.
Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1.
Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1.
Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1.
Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to

sustain, without failure a load equal to six times the load imposed when
installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in
concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E488/E488M, conducted
by a qualified independent testing agency.
1. Material for Anchors in Exterior Locations: Stainless-steel bolts

complying with ASTM F593 and nuts complying with ASTM F594.
2.5 PAINT MATERIALS
Carbon steel paint conforming to SSPC Paint 20.
Carbon steel primer conforming to SSPC Paint 25.
Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible.

Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations.
Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly
mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease
edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain

separation or otherwise impairing work.
Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces
and straight edges.
Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
12/26/2018
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength
and corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and
blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded
surface matches that of adjacent surface.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using
concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required,
use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts, unless otherwise
indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a

manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive

finish hardware, screws, and similar items.
Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting

structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in
place and to support indicated loads.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications

for metal alloy welded.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with

ASTM D1187/D1187M.
Non-shrink, Metallic Grout: Factory-packaged, ferrous-aggregate grout

complying with ASTM C1107/C1107M, specifically recommended by manufacturer
for heavy-duty loading applications.
Non-shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, non-staining,

non-corrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C1107/C1107M. Provide
grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior
applications.
Concrete Materials and Properties: Provide normal-weight, air-entrained,

ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi,
unless otherwise indicated.
2.8 WARRANTY SIGN
For each roof, furnish and install a .032 inch aluminum, 8 1/2x11 inch
minimum photoengraved sign for exterior display. Refer to Appendix 2 for
Warranty sign graphic sample; fill out the required information applicable
to each roof prior to start of photoengraving.
PART 3 EXECUTION
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and

fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal
fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with
edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free or rack; and measured
12/26/2018
from established lines and levels.
B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.

Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot
be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut,
or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized
after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
C. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and

fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to
in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with
concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts,
wood screws, and other connectors.
D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to

be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
E. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will

come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar
metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of

items being supported, including manufacturer's written instructions
and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.
3.3 TOUCHUP PAINTING
After installation of fabricated metal work; touch up field welds, field

bolt heads and nuts, screw heads, damaged galvanized steel, and scarred
surfaces on fabricated metal work and on adjacent ferrous metal surfaces.
Accomplish touchup and repair as soon as possible after the damage or
installation has occurred. Degrease surfaces, as required, prior to
subsequent surface preparation by washing with a solution of trisodium
phosphate in water followed by a fresh water rinse. Sandblasting is
prohibited. Use mechanical cleaning by needle gun or abrasive disks or
wheels. Minor abrasions and scars where extensive rusting has not occurred
is to be rendered clean and dry and touched up without further surface
preparation. Apply repair coating within 6 hours after surface preparation
or before rusting or re-contamination occurs. Touchup and repair material
is to be the same inorganic zinc coating as applied in the shop.
12/26/2018
SECTION 05 52 13
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
02/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 REFERENCES
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors
2.1.2 Aluminum
2.1.3 Stainless Steel
2.1.4 Miscellaneous Materials
2.3 FINISHES
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

3.2 WORKMANSHIP
3.3 ANCHORAGE, FASTENINGS, AND CONNECTIONS
3.4 FINISHES
3.4.1 Dissimilar Materials
3.4.2 Field Preparation
3.4.3 Environmental Conditions
3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
12/26/2018
SECTION 05 52 13
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

02/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
This Section includes, but is not limited to, new aluminum, steel,
stainless-steel pipe and tube railings/guards and refurbishment of existing
aluminum, steel, stainless-steel pipe and tube railings/guards.
1.2 REFERENCES

AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION (AISC)
AISC 303 (2010) Code of Standard Practice for Steel

Buildings and Bridges
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARD INSTITUTE (ANSI)
ANSI A10.3 (2013) Operations -- Safety Requirements

for Powder Actuated Fastening Systems
-American National Standard for
Construction and Demolition Operations
ANSI B18.2.1 (2012; Errata 2013) Square, Hex, Heavy

Hex, and Askew Head Bolts and Hex, Heavy
Hex, Hex Flange, Lobed Head, and Lag
Screws (Inch Series)
ANSI B18.6.2 (1972; R 2013) Slotted Head Cap Screws,

Square Head Set Screws, and Slotted
Headless Set Screws
ANSI B18.6.3 (2013) Machine Screws, Tapping Screws, and

Metallic Drive Screws (Inch Series)
AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (AAMA)
AAMA 611 (2014) Voluntary Specification for

Anodized Architectural Aluminum

AWS D1.2/D1.2M (2014) Structural Welding Code - Aluminum
12/26/2018
ASME B18.2.2 (2015) Nuts for General Applications:

Machine Screw Nuts, Hex, Square, Hex
Flange, and Coupling Nuts (Inch Series)
ASME B18.21.1 (2009; R 2016) Washers: Helical

Spring-Lock, Tooth Lock, and Plain Washers
(Inch Series)
ASME B18.21.2M (1999; R 2014) Lock Washers (Metric Series)
ASME B18.22M (1981; R 2017) Metric Plain Washers

Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded
Rod 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength
ASTM A312/A312M (2017) Standard Specification for

Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked
Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes
ASTM A554 (2016) Standard Specification for Welded

Stainless Steel Mechanical Tubing
ASTM A666 (2015) Standard Specification for Annealed

or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel
Sheet, Strip, Plate and Flat Bar
ASTM A743/A743M (2017) Standard Specification for

Castings, Iron-Chromium,
Iron-Chromium-Nickel, Corrosion Resistant,
for General Application
ASTM B209/B209M (2010) Standard Specification for Aluminum

and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
ASTM B221 (2014) Standard Specification for Aluminum

and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes

and Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes
ASTM B221M (2013) Standard Specification for Aluminum

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes (Metric)

and Aluminum-Alloy Die Forgings, Hand
Forgings, and Rolled Ring Forgings (Metric)
ASTM B26/B26M (2014; E 2015) Standard Specification for

Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings

Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe
12/26/2018
and Tube
ASTM C1107/C1107M (2017) Standard Specification for Packaged

Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink)

for Metal
ASTM E488/E488M (2015) Standard Test Methods for Strength

of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements
MPI 79 (2012) Primer, Alkyd, Anti-Corrosive for

Metal
A. Structural Performance: Provide railings capable of withstanding the

effects of gravity loads in accordance with ASCE/SEI 7-05 and the Florida
Building Code (FBC Chapter 16) and the following loads and stresses within
limits and under conditions indicated:
1. Handrails:
a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. applied in any direction.
b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction.
c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act

concurrently.
2. Top Rails of Guards:
a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. applied in any direction.
b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction.
c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act

concurrently.
3. Infill of Guards:
a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of

1 sq.ft.
b. Uniform load of 25 lbf/sq.ft. applied horizontally.
c. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act

concurrently.
B. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of

corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with
incompatible materials.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
12/26/2018
submittals not having a "G" designation are for information only. Submit
the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Provide Shop Drawings of the following items:

Aluminum Pipe and Tube Railings/Guards;G
Stainless Steel Pipe and Tube Railings/Guards; G
Anchors; G
Tubing; G
Pipe; G
Shop Drawings shall include plans, elevations, sections, details,

and attachments to
other work.
1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads,

include structural analysis data; G signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
2. Submit fabrication drawings; G showing layout(s), connections

to structural system, and anchoring details as specified in
AISC 303.
3. Submit templates, erection and installation drawings; G

indicating thickness, type, grade, class of metal, and dimensions.
Show construction details, reinforcement, anchorage, and
installation with relation to the building construction.
SD-03 Product Data
Manufacturer's catalog data to include two copies of

manufacturer's specifications, load tables, dimension diagrams,
and anchor details for the following items:
Aluminum Pipe and Tube Railings/Guards; G
Stainless Steel Pipe and Tube Railings/Guards; G
Anchors; G
Tubing; G
Pipe; G
SD-07 Certificates
Welder Qualifications in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and

AWS D1.2/D1.2M.
Protect from corrosion, deformation, and other types of damage. Store items
in an enclosed area free from contact with soil and weather. Remove and
replace damaged items with new items.
12/26/2018
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors
Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported

rails, unless otherwise indicated.
2.1.2 Aluminum
Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for
type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and
durability properties of alloy and temper designated below for each
aluminum form required. Aluminum Pipe and Tube Railings/Guards shall be
provided as indicated.
1. Extruded Bars and Tubing: ASTM B221 and ASTM B221M, Alloy
6063-T5/T52.
2. Extruded Structural Pipe and Round Tubing: ASTM B429/B429M, Alloy

6063-T6.
3. Drawn Seamless Tubing: ASTM B210/B210M, Alloy 6063-T832.
4. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B209/B209M, Alloy 6061-T6.
5. Die and Hand Forgings: ASTM B247/B247M, Alloy 6061-T6.
6. Castings: ASTM B26/B26M, Alloy A356.0-T6.
2.1.3 Stainless Steel
Stainless Steel Pipe and Tube Railings/Guards shall be provided as

indicated.
1. Tubing: ASTM A554, Grade MT 304.
2. Pipe: ASTM A312/A312M, Grade TP 304.
3. Castings: ASTM A743/A743M, Grade CF 20.
4. Plate and Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304.
2.1.4 Miscellaneous Materials
A. Fasteners: Provide concealed fasteners, unless unavoidable or standard

for railings indicated.
1. Aluminum Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners.
2. Stainless-Steel Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners.
B. Anchors: Provide cast-in-place, chemical, or torque-controlled

expansion anchors, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the
load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the
load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per
ASTM E488/E488M.
12/26/2018
C. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS

specifications for metal alloy welded.
D. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead and chromate-free, universal

modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI 79.
E. Grout and Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonmetallic

grout complying with ASTM C1107/C1107M; or water-resistant, nonshrink
anchoring cement; recommended by manufacturer for exterior use.
F. Bolts, Nuts, Studs and Rivets: ASME B18.2.2 and ASTM A307.
G. Powder Driven Fasteners: Follow safety provisions of ANSI A10.3.
H. Screws: ANSI B18.2.1, ANSI B18.6.2, and ANSI B18.6.3.
I. Washers: Provide plain washers conforming to ASME B18.22M and ASME

B18.21.1. Provide beveled washers for American Standard beams and
channels, square or rectangular, tapered in thickness, and smooth.
Provide lock washers conforming to ASME B18.21.2M and ASME B18.21.1.
A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with design, dimensions, and

details indicated.
B. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close

fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at
connections, including at fittings.
C. Welded Connections for Aluminum Pipe: Fabricate railings to

interconnect members with concealed internal welds, using
manufacturer's standard system of sleeve and socket fittings.
D. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical

fasteners and fittings.
E. Form changes in direction by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.
F. Form curves by bending in jigs to produce uniform curvature; maintain

cross section of member throughout bend without cracking or otherwise
deforming exposed surfaces.
G. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
H. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless

otherwise indicated.
I. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets,

flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing
members to other work, unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 FINISHES
A. Aluminum:
1. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 complying with AAMA

611.
12/26/2018
B. Stainless Steel: Dull Satin Finish: No. 6.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Install items at locations indicated, according to manufacturer's

instructions. Verify all measurements and take all field measurements
necessary before fabrication. Exposed fastenings to be compatible
materials, generally match in color and finish, and harmonize with the
material to which fastenings are applied. Materials and parts necessary to
complete each item, even though such work is not definitely shown or
specified, to be included. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required
for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment,
and elevation.
1. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet.
2. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and

variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping
members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.
3.2 WORKMANSHIP
Metalwork to be well formed to shape and size, with sharp lines and angles
and true curves. Drilling and punching to produce clean true lines and
surfaces. Welding to be continuous along the entire area of contact except
where tack welding is permitted. Exposed welds to be ground smooth.
Exposed surfaces of work in place to have a smooth finish. Where tight
fits are required, joints shall be milled. Corner joints to be coped or
mitered, well formed, and in true alignment. Accurately set work to
established lines and elevations and securely fastened in place.
Installation to be in accordance with manufacturer's installation
instructions and approved structural analysis data, fabrication drawings,
cuts, details, and templates, erection and installation drawings.
Provide anchorage where necessary for fastening miscellaneous metal items

securely in place. Include for anchorage not otherwise specified or
indicated slotted inserts, expansion shields, and powder-driven fasteners,
when approved for concrete; and through bolts for masonry; machine and
carriage bolts for steel; through bolts and screws. Provide non-ferrous
attachments for non-ferrous metal. Make exposed fastenings of compatible
materials, generally matching in color and finish, to which fastenings are
applied. Conceal fastenings where practicable.
3.4 FINISHES
Where dissimilar metals are in contact, protect surfaces with a coat

conforming to MPI 79 to prevent galvanic or corrosive action. Where
aluminum is in contact with concrete, plaster, mortar, masonry, wood, or
absorptive materials subject to wetting, protect with ASTM D1187/D1187M,
asphalt-base emulsion.
12/26/2018
3.4.2 Field Preparation
Remove rust preventive coating just prior to field erection, using a

remover approved by the rust preventive manufacturer. Surfaces, when
assembled, shall be free of rust, grease, dirt and other foreign matter.
3.4.3 Environmental Conditions
Do not clean or paint surface when damp or exposed to foggy or rainy

weather, when metallic surface temperature is less than 5 degrees F above
the dew point of the surrounding air, or when surface temperature is below
45 degrees F or over 95 degrees F, unless approved by the Contracting
Officer.
3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
1. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections,

and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same
material as used for shop painting.
12/26/2018
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
SECTION 06 10 00
ROUGH CARPENTRY
08/16
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1.3 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
1.4 GRADING AND MARKING
1.4.1 Lumber
1.4.2 Preservative-Treated Lumber
1.5 MOISTURE CONTENT
1.6 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT
1.6.1 Existing Structures
1.6.2 New Construction
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
1.8 CERTIFICATIONS
1.8.1 Certified Wood Grades
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Virgin Lumber
2.1.2 Salvaged Lumber
2.1.3 Recovered Lumber
2.2 LUMBER
2.2.1 Framing Lumber
2.3 OTHER MATERIALS
2.3.1 Fascia Lumber
2.3.2 Blocking
2.4 ROUGH HARDWARE
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Anchors in Concrete
3.2 MISCELLANEOUS
3.2.1 Wood Roof Nailers, Edge Strips, Crickets, Curbs, and Cants
3.2.1.1 Roof Nailing Strips
3.2.1.2 Roof Edge Strips and Nailers
3.2.1.3 Crickets, Cants, and Curbs
3.2.2 Wood Blocking
3.3 WASTE MANAGEMENT OF WOOD PRODUCTS
3.4 SCHEDULE
12/26/2018
SECTION 06 10 00
ROUGH CARPENTRY
08/16
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

AMERICAN WOOD COUNCIL (AWC)
AWC WFCM (2012) Wood Frame Construction Manual for

One- and Two-Family Dwellings
AMERICAN WOOD PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (AWPA)
AWPA M2 (2016) Standard for the Inspection of

Preservative Treated Wood Products for
Industrial Use
AWPA M6 (2013) Brands Used on Preservative Treated

Materials
AWPA P5 (2015) Standard for Waterborne

Preservatives
ASTM A153/A153M (2016) Standard Specification for Zinc

Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware
ASTM D4442 (2015) Standard Test Methods for Direct

Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and
Wood-Based Materials
FM GLOBAL (FM)
FM 4435 (2013) Roof Perimeter Flashing
FBC Chapter 16 (2012)Structural Design
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-06 Test Reports
12/26/2018
Preservative-treated Lumber
SD-07 Certificates
Certificates of Grade
Preservative Treatment
Deliver materials to the site in an undamaged condition. Store, protect,

handle, and install prefabricated structural elements in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions and as specified. Store materials off the
ground to provide proper ventilation, with drainage to avoid standing
water, and protection against ground moisture and dampness. Store
materials with a moisture barrier at both the ground level and as a cover
forming a well ventilated enclosure. Do not use materials that have
visible moisture or biological growth. Remove defective and damaged
materials and provide new materials.
1.4 GRADING AND MARKING
1.4.1 Lumber
Mark each piece of framing and board lumber or each bundle of small pieces
of lumber with the grade mark of a recognized association or independent
inspection agency. Such association or agency must be certified by the
Board of Review, American Lumber Standards Committee, to grade the species
used. Surfaces that are to be exposed to view must not bear grademarks,
stamps, or any type of identifying mark. Hammer marking will be permitted
on timbers when all surfaces will be exposed to view.
1.4.2 Preservative-Treated Lumber
The Contractor is responsible for the quality of treated wood products.

Each treated piece must be inspected in accordance with AWPA M2 and
permanently marked or branded, by the producer, in accordance with AWPA M6.
The Contractor must provide Contracting Officer's Representative (COR) with
the inspection report of an approved independent inspection agency that
offered products comply with applicable AWPA Standards. The appropriate
Quality Mark on each piece will be accepted, in lieu of inspection reports,
as evidence of compliance with applicable AWPA treatment standards.
Tests for Moisture Content of wood must be in accordance with ASTM D4442,
Method A, Oven Drying Method. Material tested must be the same material
proposed for use in the project. Moisture test is to be dated no earlier
than 3 months prior to the delivery of lumber materials. An additional
test report will be required if the materials species or stress grade
changes.
Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with

Florida Building Code Latest Edition (FBC Chapter 16):
1.5 MOISTURE CONTENT
Air-dry or kiln-dry lumber. Kiln-dry treated lumber after treatment.

Maximum moisture content of wood products must be as follows at the time of
delivery to the job site:
12/26/2018
Materials other than lumber; moisture content must be in accordance with

a.
standard under which the product is produced
1.6 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT
Treatwood products with waterborne wood preservatives conforming to AWPA P5.

Pressure treatment of wood products must conform to the requirements of
AWPA BOOK Use Category System Standards U1 and T1. Pressure-treated wood
products must not contain arsenic, chromium, or other agents classified as
carcinogenic, probably carcinogenic, or possibly carcinogenic to humans
(compounds in Groups 1, 2A, or 2B) by the International Agency for Research
on Cancer (IARC), Lyon, France. Pressure-treated wood products must not
exceed the limits of the U.S. EPA's Toxic Characteristic Leaching Procedure
(TCLP), and must not be classified as hazardous waste. Submit
certification from treating plant stating chemicals and process used and
net amount of preservatives retained are in conformance with specified
standards.
a. 0.25 pcf intended for above ground use.
b. All wood must be air or kiln dried after treatment. Specific treatments
must be verified by the report of an approved independent inspection
agency, or the AWPA Quality Mark on each piece. All lumber and
woodwork must be preservative treated. Plastic lumber must not be
preservative treated.
1.6.1 Existing Structures
Use borate, permathrin, or a sodium silicate wood mineralization process to

treat wood. Use borate for interior applications only.
1.6.2 New Construction
Use a boron-based preservative conforming to AWPA P18, sodium silicate wood

mineralization process, or Ammoniacal Copper Quaternary Compound to treat
wood. Use boron-based preservatives for above-ground applications only.
During and immediately after installation of treated wood, engineered wood

products, and laminated wood products at interior spaces, provide temporary
ventilation.
1.8 CERTIFICATIONS
1.8.1 Certified Wood Grades
Provide certificates of grade from the grading agency on graded but

unmarked lumber or plywood attesting that materials meet the grade
requirements specified herein.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Virgin Lumber
Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. Avoid companies
who buy, sell, or use old growth timber in their operations, when possible.
12/26/2018
2.1.2 Salvaged Lumber
Salvaged lumber is not permitted.
2.1.3 Recovered Lumber
Recovered lumber is not permitted.
2.2 LUMBER
2.2.1 Framing Lumber
Framing lumber such as studs, plates, caps, collar beams, cant strips,
bucks, sleepers, nailing strips, and nailers must be one of the species
listed in the table below.
Table of Grades for Framing and Board Lumber
Grading Rules Species Framing Board Lumber
SPIB 1003 Southern Pine All Species:

standard Standard Light
grading rules Framing or No. 3
Structural Light
Framing (Stud
Grade for 2x4
nominal size,10 feet
and shorter)
2.3 OTHER MATERIALS
2.3.1 Fascia Lumber
1X or 2X nominal thickness, as detailed, grade and species as noted

previously.
2.3.2 Blocking
Blocking to be standard or number 2 grade.
2.4 ROUGH HARDWARE
Unless otherwise indicated or specified, rough hardware must be of the type

and size necessary for the project requirements. Sizes, types, and spacing
of fastenings of manufactured building materials UST be as recommended by
the product manufacturer unless otherwise indicated or specified. Rough
hardware exposed to the weather or embedded in or in contact with
preservative treated wood, exterior masonry, or concrete walls or slabs
must be hot-dip zinc-coated in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M. Nails and
fastenings woodwork exposed to the weather must be copper alloy or
hot-dipped galvanized fasteners as recommended by the treated wood
manufacturer.
12/26/2018
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Do not install building construction materials that show visual evidence of

biological growth.
Conform to AWC WFCM unless otherwise indicated or specified. Select lumber

sizes to minimize waste. Fit framing lumber and other rough carpentry, set
accurately to the required lines and levels, and secure in place in a rigid
manner.
3.1.1 Anchors in Concrete
Except where indicated otherwise, Embed anchor bolts not less than 8 inches
in poured concrete walls and provide each with a nut and a 2 inch diameter
washer at bottom end. A bent end may be substituted for the nut and
washer; bend must be not less than 90 degrees. Powder-actuated fasteners
spaced 3 feet o.c. may be provided in lieu of bolts for single thickness
plates on concrete.
3.2 MISCELLANEOUS
3.2.1 Wood Roof Nailers, Edge Strips, Crickets, Curbs, and Cants
Provide sizes and configurations indicated or specified and anchored

securely to continuous construction.
3.2.1.1 Roof Nailing Strips
Provide roof nailing strips for roof decks as indicated on drawings.
a. Surface-Applied Nailers: Must be 3 inches wide and of thickness to

finish flush with the top of the insulation. Anchor strips securely
to the roof deck with powder actuated fastening devices or expansion
shields and bolts, spaced not more than 24 inches o.c.
3.2.1.2 Roof Edge Strips and Nailers
Provide at perimeter of roof, around openings through roof, and where roofs
abut walls, curbs, and other vertical surfaces. Except where indicated
otherwise, nailers must be 6 inches wide and the same thickness as the
insulation. Anchor nailers securely to underlying construction. Anchor
perimeter nailers in accordance with FM 4435.
3.2.1.3 Crickets, Cants, and Curbs
Provide wood saddles or crickets, cant strips, curbs as indicated,

specified, or necessary.
3.2.2 Wood Blocking
Provide proper sizes and shapes at proper locations for the installation
and attachment of wood and other finish materials, fixtures, equipment, and
items indicated or specified.
3.3 WASTE MANAGEMENT OF WOOD PRODUCTS
In accordance with the Waste Management Plan, clearly separate damaged wood
12/26/2018
and other scrap lumber for acceptable alternative uses on site, including
bracing, blocking, cripples, ties, and shims.
3.4 SCHEDULE
PRODUCTS INCH-POUND Nominal
Sawn lumber 2 by 4
1 by
12/26/2018
SECTION 07 01 50
PREPARATION FOR RE-ROOFING
02/13
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 REFERENCES
1.3 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
1.4 DEFINITIONS
1.5 SUBMITTALS
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
PART 2 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 PREPARATION
3.3 ROOF TEAR-OFF
3.3.1 General
3.3.2 Total Roofing Tear-Off
3.4 DECK PREPARATION
3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
3.5.1 General
3.5.2 Cleaning
3.6 MATERIALS INSTALLATION
3.6.1 General
12/26/2018
SECTION 07 01 50
PREPARATION FOR RE-ROOFING

02/13
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
This Section includes, but is not limited to, the removal and subsequent
offsite disposal of the following existing roofing system as indicated on
the construction contract documents, specifications and as required to
accommodate the installation of new roofing systems:
Asphalt, and Modified Bitumen
1.2 REFERENCES
ASTM D1079 (2013e1) Standard Terminology Relating to

Roofing and Waterproofing
ASTM D4263 (1983; R 2012) Indicating Moisture in

Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method
A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, reinstalled, or

otherwise indicated to remain 45th Space Wing's property, demolished
materials are Contractor's property and to be removed from Project site.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The

NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" (NRCA RWM) for definition of
terms related to roofing work in this Section.
B. Existing Roofing System: Built-up asphalt, surfacing, and components

and accessories between deck and roofing system.
C. Substrate Board: Rigid board or panel products placed over the roof
deck that serve as thermal barriers, provide a smooth substrate, or
serve as a component of a fire-resistance-rated roofing system.
D. Roof Re-Cover Preparation: Existing roofing membrane that is to remain

and be prepared for reuse.
E. Roof Tear-Off: Removal of existing membrane roofing system from deck.
F. Partial Roof Tear-Off: Removal of a portion of existing membrane

roofing system from deck or removal of selected components and
accessories from existing membrane roofing system.
12/26/2018
G. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of

them off-site unless indicated to be removed and reinstalled.
H. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not

indicated to be removed.
1.5 SUBMITTALS

PROCEDURES:
Submit the following items to the Contracting Officer (throughout

this document, the term "Contracting Officer" means "Contracting
Officer or his Representative:"
Temporary Roofing: Include Product Data and description of

temporary roofing system. If temporary roof will remain in place,
submit surface preparation requirements needed to receive
permanent roof, a letter from roofing membrane manufacturer
stating acceptance of the temporary membrane, and that its
inclusion will not adversely affect the roofing system's
resistance to fire and wind or its FMG rating.
Fastener pull-out test report.
A schedule indicating proposed sequence of operations for

selective demolition work to the Contracting Officer for review
before starting work.
Include coordination for shut-off, capping, and continuation of

utility services as required, and with details for dust and noise
control protection.
The Owner will occupy portions of building immediately below roofing area.
Conduct reroofing so operations will not be disrupted. Provide the
Contracting Officer with not less than seventy-two (72) hours notice of
activities that may affect operations.
Before working over structurally impaired areas of deck, notify the

Contracting Officer to evacuate occupants from below the affected area.
Verify that occupants below the work area have been evacuated prior to
proceeding with work over the impaired deck area.
Protect building to be reroofed, adjacent buildings, walkways, site

improvements, exterior plantings, and landscaping from damage or soiling
from reroofing operations.
Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent

occupied or used facilities.
Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be reroofed.

Conditions existing at time of inspection will be maintained by 45th Space
Wing as far as practical.
12/26/2018
Limit construction loads on roof to the indicated FBC Chapter 16 rooftop

equipment wheel loads and live load limits for uniformly distributed loads
for roof construction.
When materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are present in

the building to be re-roofed. A report on the presence of hazardous
materials will be included in the contract documents and/or on file for
review and use. Examine report to become aware of locations where
hazardous materials are present.
1. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the

Contract Documents.
2. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of

containing hazardous materials except according to procedures
specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
3. Coordinate with hazardous material remediation Contractor to

prevent water from entering building or existing roofing system.
PART 2 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
General: Use materials matching the existing membrane roofing system

materials, unless otherwise indicated. Materials are specified in the
Project Construction Drawings and various specifications in this Project
Manual.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.
B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to

determine extent of selective demolition required.
C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and

reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged.
D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that

conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate
and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a
written report to the Contracting Officer.
E. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from

selective demolition activities.
3.2 PREPARATION
Protect existing roofing system that is indicated not to be re-roofed.
Coordinate with Owner to shut down air intake equipment in the vicinity of
the Work. Cover air intake louvers before proceeding with re-roofing work
that could affect indoor air quality or activate smoke detectors in the
ductwork.
During removal operations, have sufficient and suitable materials on-site
12/26/2018
to facilitate rapid installation of temporary protection in the event of

unexpected rain.
Maintain roof drains and/or gutter/downspout system in functioning

condition to ensure roof drainage at end of each workday. Prevent debris
from entering or blocking roof drainage system. Use roof drainage blocks,
dams and/or plugs at end of each workday, when no work is taking place, or
when rain is forecast.
1. If roof drainage will be temporarily blocked or unserviceable due

to roofing system removal or partial installation of new membrane
roofing system, provide alternative drainage method to remove
water and eliminate ponding. Do not permit water to enter into or
under existing membrane roofing system components that are to
remain.
Verify that rooftop utilities and service piping have been shut off before
commencing Work.
3.3 ROOF TEAR-OFF
3.3.1 General
Complete application of roofing in a continuous operation. Remove and

apply only as much roofing in one day as can be completed that same day.
Notify the Contracting Officer each day of extent of roof tear-off proposed.
3.3.2 Total Roofing Tear-Off
Remove existing roofing system components as indicated.
1. Remove membrane, bitumen and/or felts.
2. Remove mechanical fastening components.
3. Remove excess asphalt and/or adhesive from the roof deck. A

maximum of 15 lb/100 sq. ft. of asphalt and/or adhesive is
permitted to remain on the existing roof deck.
3.4 DECK PREPARATION
Inspect deck after total or partial tear-off of membrane roofing system.
1. Verify that structural roof deck or substrate is visibly dry and

free of moisture. If applicable, test for capillary moisture by
plastic sheet method according to ASTM D4263 or by pouring one (1)
pint of hot roofing asphalt on deck or substrate at start of each
day's work and at start of each roof area or plane. Do not
proceed with roofing work if moisture condenses under the plastic
sheet or if asphalt test sample foams or can be easily and cleanly
stripped after cooling.
2. Verify that the roof deck is structurally sound. If broken or

loose fasteners that secure roof deck panels to one another or to
structural framing members are observed, or if roof deck appears
or feels inadequately attached, immediately notify the Contracting
Officer, Architect/Engineer and/or Base O&M Engineer. Do not
proceed with installation until directed by the Contracting
Officer.
12/26/2018
3. Provide additional roof deck anchorage and fasteners as indicated

on the Construction Contract Documents/Drawings. Provide fastener
pull-out test report.
4. If the roof deck is observed to have holes, cracks, seams or gaps

at any electrical, mechanical/plumbing or structural penetrations
and/or intersections with vertical surfaces such as parapets,
curbs or between the thermal protection board sheathing provide
fire-stopping as per UL Fire Resistance Directory (UL Fire Resist
Dir).
Repair and/or replace roof deck as indicated on Drawings. Repairs and

replacement of the existing deck is specified in the following Project
Manual Divisions:
Division 05 - 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications

Division 06 - 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry
Install recover boards in accordance with roofing membrane manufacturer's

instructions and recommendations.
3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
3.5.1 General
Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged,

reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Government's property, remove
demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an
EPA-approved landfill.
A. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
B. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage

on adjacent surfaces and areas.
C. Do not burn demolished materials.
D. Transport demolished materials off Government's property and

legally dispose of them.
3.5.2 Cleaning
Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused
by building demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition
existing before building demolition operations began.
Transport waste materials removed from existing structure from Government

property and legally dispose of them.
3.6 MATERIALS INSTALLATION
3.6.1 General
Immediately after total tear-off/removal of existing roofing system,

inspection and repair, if needed, of roof deck, install new roofing system
as indicated on Contract Construction Documents and specified in the
12/26/2018
Project Manual Division 07 Thermal and Moisture Protection.
12/26/2018
SECTION 07 22 16.22
ROOF BOARD INSULATION (POLYISOCYANURATE)
08/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 REFERENCES
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.4 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATE
1.5.1 Source Limitations
1.5.2 Installer Qualifications
1.5.3 Fire-Test Characteristics
1.6 PROPERTY PROTECTION
1.6.1 Protective Coverings
1.7 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 AFFIRMATIVE PROCUREMENT

2.2 THERMAL INSULATION MATERIALS (OR UNDERLAYMENT)
2.2.1 Rigid Board Insulation
2.2.2 Tapered Rigid Board Insulation
2.3 VAPOR RETARDERS
2.3.1 Roofing Felts
2.3.2 Base Sheet
2.4 INSULATION FASTENERS
2.4.1 Fasteners for Structural Steel Decks
2.5 CANTS AND TAPERED EDGE STRIPS
PART 3 EXECUTION

3.2 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
3.2.1 Surface Inspection
3.2.2 Steel Deck Surface Preparation
3.3 INSULATION INSTALLATION
3.3.2 Installation Using Only Mechanical Fasteners
3.3.3 Installation Using Asphalt
3.3.4 Installation Using Asphalt on Steel Decks
3.3.5 Cant Strips
3.3.6 Tapered Edge Strips
3.4 PROTECTION
3.4.1 Protection of Applied Insulation
3.4.2 Damage Materials and Work
3.5 INSPECTION
3.6 ACCEPTANCE
3.7 DISPOSAL
SECTION 07 22 16.22 Page 1

12/26/2018

12/26/2018
SECTION 07 22 16.22
ROOF BOARD INSULATION (POLYISOCYANURATE)

08/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
This Section includes, but is not limited to, the following:
Insulation materials below built-up roofing membrane systems.

Insulation materials below modified bituminous membrane roofing systems.
Insulation material below single-ply membrane roofing systems.
1.2 REFERENCES
ASTM C1289 (2017) Standard Specification for Faced

Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal
Insulation Board
ASTM D2178/D2178M (2015a) Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing

and Waterproofing
ASTM E84 (2018) Standard Test Method for Surface

Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials
ASTM E119 (2018) Standard Test Methods for Fire

Tests of Building Construction and
Materials
ASTM E136 (2016) Behavior of Materials in a Vertical

Tube Furnace at 750 Degrees C
FM GLOBAL (FM)
FM AS 4470 (1986; R 1992) Class I Roof Covers
FM P9513 (2002) Specialist Data Book Set for

Roofing Contractors; contains 1-22 (2001),
1-28 (2002), 1-29 (2002), 1-28R/1-29R
(1998), 1-30 (2000), 1-31 (2000), 1-32
(2000), 1-33 (2000), 1-34 (2001), 1-49
(2000), 1-52 (2000), 1-54 (2001)
UL 790 (2004; Reprint Jul 2014) Standard Test

Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings

12/26/2018
UL RMSD (2012) Roofing Materials and Systems

Directory
1.3 SUBMITTALS

PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Show a complete description of the procedures for the installation

of each phase of the system indicating the type of materials,
thicknesses, identity codes, sequence of laying insulation,
location of special methods for cutting and fitting of insulation,
and special precautions. Base the drawings on field measurements.
Thermal Insulation Materials; G
SD-03 Product Data
Submit Manufacturer's data indicating percentage of recycle

material in roof board insulation to verify affirmative
procurement compliance.
Submit total weight and volume quantities of roof board insulation

with recycle material.
Submit Manufacturer's catalog data for the following items:
Thermal Insulation Materials;

-Rigid Board insulation
-Tapered Rigid Board insulation
Sheathing Paper
Vapor Barrier
Fastening Materials
Polyisocyanurate roof insulation installation pattern including
tapered insulation, cants, crickets, etc.
SD-06 Test Reports
Submit test reports for water resistance and permeability for

Vapor Barrier.
SD-07 Certificates
Exactly identify Certificates for the each of the following items

by the designation that will appear on the packaging for that item
with referenced specification:
Gypsum Board
Polyisocyanurate Roof Insulation
Rigid Board insulation
Tapered Rigid Board insulation
Expansion Joint Filler Strips
Vapor Barriers
Installer Qualifications
Sample Warranty
Thermal Insulation Materials; G

12/26/2018
Manufacturer's instructions for the following items shall indicate

fastener and adhesive instructions for each type of installation:
Vapor Barrier
Warranties for:
Gypsum Board
1.4 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATE
Submit certificate from the insulation manufacturer attesting that the

Roofing Contractor has the proper qualifications for installing roof
insulation systems.
Certificate attesting that the polyisocyanurate insulation contains

recovered material and showing estimated percent of recovered material.
Provide sample warranty for new and/or for existing installation:
New Warranties: Provide installation warranty in conjunction with roofing

system installation.
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and cut
damaged surfaces affected by re-roofing, by methods and with materials
acceptable to warrantor.
Notify the Contracting officer, Base Operations and Maintenance Roofing

Engineer and the warrantor of existing roofing system before proceeding.
Obtain documentation verifying that the existing roofing system has been
inspected by warrantor and warranty remains in effect. Submit documentation
at Project closeout. Consider a preliminary re-roofing conference if
project is large or complex. This conference would precede the re-roofing
conference.
1.5.1 Source Limitations
Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a single
manufacturer.
1.5.2 Installer Qualifications
Applicators of membrane roofing system shall be approved, authorized, or

licensed in writing by the roofing system manufacturer and have a minimum
of four (4) years experience as an approved, authorized, or licensed
applicator with that manufacturer and be approved at a level capable of
providing the specified Warranty.

12/26/2018
1.5.3 Fire-Test Characteristics
Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response

characteristics as indicated by UL Fire Resistance Directory - Vol I
(UL Fire Resist Dir), as determined by testing identical products per test
method indicated below by UL 790, UL RMSD and FM AS 4470 or another testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and
inspecting agency.
1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E84

2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E119
3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E136
1.6 PROPERTY PROTECTION
Provide protection as specified in Division 07 - Thermal and Moisture

Protection, Section 07 52 16.15 "SBS MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE
ROOFING-TORCH APPLIED".
1.6.1 Protective Coverings
Install protective coverings at paving and building walls adjacent to hoist

prior to starting the work. Lap protective coverings at least 6 inch,
secure them against wind, and vent them to prevent collection of moisture
on the covered surfaces. Keep protective coverings in place for the
duration of the work with asphalt products.
Provide special protection approved by the insulation manufacturer, or

avoid heavy traffic on completed work when ambient temperature is above 80
degrees F.
1.7 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS
Deliver materials to the project site in their original, unopened packages

or containers bearing labels identifying the manufacturer's name, brand
name, material, and other information. Store materials in their original,
unbroken packages or containers in a weather-tight and dry area and
protected from damage until needed for use.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 AFFIRMATIVE PROCUREMENT
Polyisocyanurate materials are listed in the EPA's Comprehensive

Procurement Guidelines (CPG) (http://www.epa.gov/cpg/).
The recommended recovered materials content levels are based on the weight
(not volume) of materials in the insulating core only.
For informational purposes, a list of known sources for roof board

insulation using recycled material is provided in the EPA/CPG Supplier
database at http://www.ergweb2.com/cpg4review/user/cpg_search.cfm.
Note that the Contractor is not limited to these sources. A product

meeting CPG recycle requirements from other sources may be submitted for
the Government's approval.

12/26/2018
2.2 THERMAL INSULATION MATERIALS (OR UNDERLAYMENT)
2.2.1 Rigid Board Insulation
Polyisocyanurate roof insulation board shall conform to ASTM C1289, with a

maximum thermal resistance value of R-19 or more for an average thickness
of the system to be based on the "R" value for aged insulation. Boards are
to be a minimum of 4 feet x 4 feet x 3 inches thick except 2 feet x 4 feet
x 3 inches thick sheets may be used where odd size sheets are required at
penetrations and roof edges.
2.2.2 Tapered Rigid Board Insulation
Provide positive drainage with one (1) layer of factory tapered roof
insulation to a slope of not less than 1/4 inch per foot, unless otherwise
indicated. Provide starter and filler blocks as required to provide the
total thickness of insulation necessary to meet the specified slope and
thermal conductance. Factory fabricated mitered joints which consist of
two diagonally cut boards or one board shaped to provide the required
slopes. Identify each piece of tapered insulation board by color or other
identity coding system, allowing the identification of different sizes of
tapered insulation board required to complete the roof insulation system.
2.3 VAPOR RETARDERS
2.3.1 Roofing Felts
Roofing felt to be asphalt-impregnated glass fiber conforming to

ASTM D2178/D2178M, Type IV.
2.3.2 Base Sheet
Base-ply sheet to be asphalt-impregnated glass-fiber felt conforming to

ASTM D2178/D2178M, Type IV or,
Asphalt-impregnated polyester mat conforming to ASTM D2178/D2178M, Type VI.
2.4 INSULATION FASTENERS
2.4.1 Fasteners for Structural Steel Decks
Flush-driven fasteners through flat round or hexagonal steel or plastic

plates; Steel plates shall be zinc-coated, flat round not less than 1-3/8
inch diameter or hexagonal not less than twenty-eight (28) gauge. Plastic
plates shall be high-density, molded thermoplastic with smooth top surface,
reinforcing ribs and not less than 3 inches in diameter. Recess fastener
head fully into the plastic plate after it is driven. Form plates to
prevent dishing. Do not use bell or cup-shaped plates. Fasteners shall
conform to insulation manufacturer's recommendations except that holding
power, when driven, are not to be less than 12 pounds each in steel deck.
Fasteners for steel decks shall be Class I roof deck construction, and
shall be spaced to withstand an uplift pressure as indicated in the
construction contract documents.
2.5 CANTS AND TAPERED EDGE STRIPS
Provide preformed cants and tapered edge strips of the same material as the
roof insulation; or, when roof insulation material is unavailable, provide
non-combustible cants and edge strips as recommended by the roofing

12/26/2018
manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. Face of cant strips shall have

incline of 45 degrees and vertical height of 4 inches. Taper edge strips
at a rate of one to 1 1/2 inch per foot down to approximately 1/8 inch
thick.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Install roof insulation in accordance with approved descriptive data and as

specified in Division 07 - Thermal and Moisture Protection, Section
07 52 16.15 "SBS MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING-TORCH APPLIED".
Verify that all work that penetrates roof decks or that requires men and
equipment to traverse a roof deck has been completed prior to underlayment
or roof insulation installation.
Examine deck surfaces for inadequate anchorage, foreign material, moisture,

and unevenness, any condition which would prevent the execution and quality
of application of underlayment or roof insulation system as specified is to
be corrected before beginning work. Work shall not proceed with
underlayment or insulation application until defects are corrected.
Install insulation only after building construction has progressed to the

point that inclement weather will not damage or wet the insulation material.
Starting work designates acceptance of the surface by the Installer.
Cut and fit underlayment or insulation material as necessary to fully

insulate small areas and to accommodate piping, scuttles, skylights, vents
and other construction penetrating the insulation material.
3.2 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
3.2.1 Surface Inspection
Provide clean, smooth, and dry surfaces. Check roof deck surfaces,
including surfaces sloped to roof drains and outlets, for defects before
starting work. Inspect and approve the surfaces immediately before
starting installation. Prior to installing, perform the following:
a. Examine steel deck to ensure that joints are properly grouted or

sealed and leveled to provide suitable surfaces for installation
of insulation.
3.2.2 Steel Deck Surface Preparation
Correct defects and inaccuracies in roof deck surface to eliminate poor

drainage and hollow or low spots and perform the following:
a. Examine steel decks to ensure that panels are properly secured to

structural members and to each other and those surfaces of top
flanges are flat or slightly convex.
b. Install wood nailers the same thickness as insulation at eaves,

edges, curbs, walls, roof openings for securing cant strips,
gravel stops, gutters, and flashing flanges. Space nailers in
accordance with approved shop drawings accepted by the insulation
and roof membrane manufacturer.

12/26/2018
3.3 INSULATION INSTALLATION
Install insulation in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements and

as specified below. Approve method of hold-down used by the manufacturer
in areas subject to hurricane velocity winds prior to installation.
Apply insulation in two layers with staggered joints when total required
thickness of insulation exceeds 1/2 inch. Lay insulation so that
continuous longitudinal joints are perpendicular to direction of roofing,
and end joints of each course are staggered with those of adjoining
courses. When using multiple layers of insulation, provide parallel joints
of each succeeding layer and offset in both directions with respect to
layer below. Keep insulation 1/2 inch clear of vertical surfaces
penetrating and projecting from roof surface.
3.3.2 Installation Using Only Mechanical Fasteners
Secure total thickness of insulation with penetrating type fasteners.
3.3.3 Installation Using Asphalt
Firmly embed each layer in solid asphalt mopping; mop only sufficient area
to provide complete embedment of one board at a time. Provide 25 to 30 lbs
of asphalt per 100 square feet of roof deck for each layer of insulation.
Apply asphalt when temperature is within plus or minus 25 degrees F of EVT.
Do not heat asphalt above asphalt's FBT or 525 degrees F, whichever is
less, for longer than four (4) consecutive hours. Use thermometers to
check temperatures during heating and application.
3.3.4 Installation Using Asphalt on Steel Decks
Secure first layer of insulation and thermal barrier to deck with piercing,
self-drilling or self-tapping fasteners. Engage fasteners by driving them
through insulation into top flange of steel deck. Use driving method
prescribed by fastener manufacturer. Insulation joints parallel to ribs of
deck are to occur on solid bearing surfaces only, not over open ribs.
Secure succeeding layers with solid asphalt mopping. Insulation which can
be readily lifted after installation is not considered to be adequately
secured. Apply insulation so that all roof insulation applied each day is
waterproofed the same day. Phased construction will not be permitted.
Application of impermeable faced insulation to be performed without damage
to the facing.
3.3.5 Cant Strips
Where indicated, provide cant strips at intersections of roof with walls,

parapets, and curbs extending above roof. Wood cant strips are to bear on
and be anchored to wood blocking. Fit cant strips flush against vertical
surfaces. Where possible, nail cant strips to adjoining surfaces. Where
cant strips are installed against non-nailable materials, install in a
heavy coating of asphalt roof cement or an approved adhesive.
3.3.6 Tapered Edge Strips
Where indicated, provide edge strips in the right angle formed by junction
of roof and wood nailing strips that extend above level of roof. Install

12/26/2018
edge strips flush against vertical surfaces of wood nailing strips. Where
possible, nail edge strips to adjoining surfaces. Where installed against
non-nailable materials, install in heavy coating of asphalt roof cement or
an approved adhesive.
3.4 PROTECTION
3.4.1 Protection of Applied Insulation
Completely cover each day's installation of insulation with the finished

roofing specified in Division 07 - Thermal and Moisture Protection, Section
07 52 16.15 SBS MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING-TORCH APPLIED" on same
day. Do not permit phased construction. Protect open spaces between
insulation and parapets or other walls and spaces at curbs, scuttles, and
expansion joints, until permanent roofing and flashing are applied. Do not
permit storing, walking, wheeling, or trucking directly on insulation or on
roofed surfaces. Provide smooth, clean board or plank walkways, runways,
and platforms near supports, as necessary, to distribute weight conforming
to FBC Chapter 16 for live load limits of roof construction. Protect
exposed edges of the insulation by cutoffs at the end of each work day or
whenever precipitation is imminent. Provide cutoffs with 2 layers of
bituminous-saturated felt set in roof cement. Fill all profile voids in
cut-offs to prevent entrapping of moisture into the area below the
membrane. Remove cutoffs when work is resumed.
3.4.2 Damage Materials and Work
Restore work and materials that become damaged during construction to

original condition or replace with new materials.
3.5 INSPECTION
Establish and maintain an inspection procedure to assure compliance of the

installed roof insulation with the contract requirements. Promptly remove,
replace, or correct any work found not to be in compliance with the
contract in an approved manner. Quality control is to include, but not be
limited to, the following:
a. Observation of environmental conditions; number and skill level of

insulation workers; start and end time of work.
b. Verification of certification, listing or label compliance with

FM P9513.
c. Verification of proper storage and handling of insulation and

vapor retarder materials before, during, and after installation.
d. Inspection of vapor retarder application, including edge envelopes

and mechanical fastening.
e. Inspection of mechanical fasteners; type, number, length, and

spacing.
f. Coordination with other materials, cants, sleepers, and nailing

strips.
g. Inspection of insulation joint orientation and laps between

layers, joint width and bearing of edges of insulation on deck.

12/26/2018
h. Installation of cutoffs and proper joining of work on subsequent

days.
i. Continuation of complete roofing system installation to cover

insulation installed same day.
j. Compliance with fastening requirements per FBC Chapter 15 for High

Velocity Hurricane Zones.
3.6 ACCEPTANCE
Prior to final acceptance, provide construction details and Warranty

information to the Contracting Officer. Include, by building area, the
material type, amount, and installation method. An illustration or map of
the building may serve this purpose. Include a cover letter/sheet clearly
marked with the system name, date, and the words "Record Drawings for
insulation/material" for the data. Forward record drawings and warranty
information to the Base Operations Systems Engineer/Condition Monitoring
Office/Predictive Testing Group for inclusion in the Maintenance Database.
3.7 DISPOSAL
Collect and place scrap/waste materials in containers. Promptly dispose of

scrap/waste materials. Do not allow scrap/waste materials to accumulate
on-site.

12/26/2018
SECTION 07 41 13
METAL ROOF PANELS
05/11
PART 1 GENERAL

1.2 REFERENCES
1.4 DESCRIPTION OF METAL ROOF SYSTEM
1.4.1 Performance Requirements
1.4.1.1 Hydrostatic Head Resistance
1.4.1.2 Wind Uplift Resistance
1.5 SUBMITTALS
1.6.1 Qualification of Manufacturer
1.6.1.1 Manufacturer's Technical Representative
1.6.1.2 Single Source
1.6.2 Qualification of Applicator
1.6.3 Field Verification
1.6.4 Qualifications for Welding Work
1.6.5 Pre-roofing Conference
1.7 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE
1.7.1 Delivery
1.7.2 Handling
1.7.3 Storage
1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
1.10 FABRICATION
1.10.1 Finishes
1.10.2 Accessories
1.11 WARRANTIES
1.11.1 Wind Uplift Rider
1.11.2 Continuance of Warranty
1.12 CONFORMANCE AND COMPATIBILITY
PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.2 ROOF PANELS
2.2.1 Steel Sheet Panels
2.3 FACTORY FINISH AND COLOR PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING
2.4.1 General
2.4.2 Fasteners and Miscellaneous Metal Framing
2.4.2.1 Screws
2.4.2.2 Rivets
2.4.2.3 Attachment Clips
2.5 UNDERLAYMENT
2.5.1 Separation Felt
12/26/2018
2.6 ACCESSORIES
2.6.1 Pre-manufactured Accessories
2.7 JOINT SEALANTS
2.7.1 Sealants
2.7.2 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
2.7.2.1 Fabrication, General
2.7.2.2 Roof Drainage Sheet Metal Fabrications
2.8 GASKETS AND SEALING/INSULATING COMPOUNDS
2.9 FINISH REPAIR MATERIAL
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.2.1 Preparation
3.3 PROTECTION OF APPLIED MATERIALS
3.4 FASTENER INSTALLATION
3.5 FLASHING, TRIM, AND CLOSURE INSTALLATION
3.5.2 Metal Flashing
3.6 ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION
3.6.1 Handling and Erection
3.6.2 Closure Strips
3.6.3 Workmanship
3.7 ACCEPTANCE PROVISIONS
3.7.1 Erection Tolerances
3.7.2 Leakage Tests
3.7.3 Repairs to Finish
3.7.4 Paint Finished Metal Roofing
3.8 CLEAN UP AND DISPOSAL
3.10 WARRANTY SIGN
12/26/2018
SECTION 07 41 13
METAL ROOF PANELS

05/11
PART 1 GENERAL
1.2 REFERENCES

ASCE 7 (2017) Minimum Design Loads for Buildings

and Other Structures
AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL INSTITUTE (AISI)
AISI S100 (2012) North American Specification for

the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural
Members
AISI SG03-3 (2002; Suppl 2001-2004; R 2008)

Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual Set

AWS D1.2/D1.2M (2014) Structural Welding Code - Aluminum
ASTM A1008/A1008M (2016) Standard Specification for Steel,

Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,
High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength
Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,
Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable

(Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products
ASTM A36/A36M (2014) Standard Specification for Carbon

Structural Steel
ASTM A463/A463M (2010; R 2015) Standard Specification for

Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Coated, by the
Hot-Dip Process
ASTM A653/A653M (2017) Standard Specification for Steel

Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
12/26/2018
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by

the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM A792/A792M (2010) Standard Specification for Steel

Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by
the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM D522/D522M (2014) Mandrel Bend Test of Attached

Organic Coatings
ASTM E1592 (2005; R 2012) Structural Performance of

Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by
Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference
ASTM E2140 (2001; R 2017) Standard Test Method for

Water Penetration of Metal Roof Panel
Systems by Static Water Pressure Head
FM GLOBAL (FM)
FM 4471 (2010) Class I Panel Roofs
FBC Chapter 15 (2010) Florida Building Code Chapter 15

High Velocity Hurricane Zones
METAL BUILDING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (MBMA)
MBMA RSDM (2012) Metal Roofing Systems Design Manual
NRCA 0420 (2010) Architectural Metal Flashing,

Condensation Control and Reroofing
NRCA RoofMan (2017) The NRCA Roofing Manual

(SMACNA)
SMACNA 1793 (2012) Architectural Sheet Metal Manual,

7th Edition
UL 580 (2006; Reprint Oct 2013) Tests for Uplift

Resistance of Roof Assemblies
UL Bld Mat Dir (updated continuously online) Building

Materials Directory
Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, reinstalled, or

otherwise indicated to remain 45th space Wing's property, demolished
materials are the Contractor's property and to be removed from Project site.
12/26/2018
1.4 DESCRIPTION OF METAL ROOF SYSTEM
1.4.1 Performance Requirements
Steel panels and accessory components must conform to the following

standards:
ASTM A1008/A1008M
ASTM A123/A123M
ASTM A36/A36M
ASTM A463/A463M for aluminum coated steel sheet
ASTM D522/D522M for applied coatings
UL Bld Mat Dir
1.4.1.1 Hydrostatic Head Resistance
No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E2140. Submit leakage

test report upon completion of installation.
1.4.1.2 Wind Uplift Resistance
Provide metal roof panel system that conform to the requirements of

ASTM E1592 and UL 580. Uplift force due to wind action governs the design
for panels. Submit Wind Uplift Test Report prior to commencing
installation.
Roof system and attachments must resist the wind loads as determined by
ASCE 7, in pounds per square foot. Metal roof panels and component
materials must also comply with the requirements in FM 4471 as part of a
panel roofing system as listed in Factory Mutual Guide (FMG) "Approval
Guide" for class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify
all materials with FMG markings.
A. FMG Listing: Provide metal roof panels and component materials that
comply with requirements in FM 4471 as part of a panel roofing system
and that are listed in FMG "Approval Guide" for Class 1 or
noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with
FMG markings.
B. Structural Performance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies capable

of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits
and under conditions indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E1592.
1.5 SUBMITTALS

PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Installation drawings for the following items are to indicate

completely dimensioned structural frame and erection layouts,
special framing details, construction details at corners, ridges,
eaves, building intersections, curbs and flashing,location and
type of mastic and metal filler strips, location and erection of
flashing and gutter/downspout assembly.
Roof Panels; G
12/26/2018
Flashing and Accessories; G
Gutters
Downspouts
ACCESSORIES
SD-03 Product Data
Submit manufacturer's catalog data for the following items:
Roof panels; G
Underlayment; G
Factory-Applied Color Finish
Accessories; G
Fasteners
Pressure Sensitive Tape
Gaskets and Sealing/Insulating Compounds
Aluminized Steel Repair Paint
Galvanizing Repair Paint
Coil Stock
Sheet Metal Flashing And Trim; G
SD-04 Samples
Roof Panels
SD-05 Design Data
Wind Uplift Resistance; G
As applicable submit the following:
Roofing manufacturer to submit a wind design analysis to include,

but not limited to, wind speed, exposure category, co-efficient,
importance factor, designate type of facility, negative pressures
for each zone, methods and requirements of attachment. Wind
design analysis to include roof plan delineating dimensions and
attachment patterns for each zone. Wind design analysis to be
prepared and sealed by a state of Florida Licensed Project
Engineer.
SD-06 Test Reports
Wind Uplift Test Report; G
Provide test reports for concrete and clay tiles, fasteners, and
fastener systems.
12/26/2018
Submit test reports for the following in accordance with the

referenced articles in this section.
Coatings and base metals of metal roofing type of test as

specified in paragraphs entitled, "Steel Sheet Materials," and in
various referenced standards in this section.
Leakage Test Report
Factory Finish and Color Performance Requirements
SD-07 Certificates
Submit certificates for the following items showing conformance

with referenced standards contained in this section:
Roof Panels
Coil stock compatibility
Submit certification from coil stock manufacturer or supplier that

the machinery used will form the provided coil stock without
warping, waviness, or rippling that is not a part of the panel
profile, and without damage, abrasion or marring of the finish
coating.
Fasteners
Galvanizing Repair Paint
Enamel Repair Paint
Provide evidence that products used within this specification are

manufactured in the United States.
Qualification of Manufacturer
Certify that the manufacturer of the metal roofing system meets

requirements specified under paragraph entitled "Qualification of
Manufacturer."
Qualification of Applicator
Certify that the applicator meets requirements specified under

paragraph entitled Qualification of Installation Contractor."
Submit the roof system assembly wind uplift and fire rating
classification listings.
Installation Manual
Installation of Roof panels
Include detailed application instructions and standard

manufacturer drawings altered as required by these specifications.
Explicitly identify in writing, differences between manufacturer's
instructions and the specified requirements.
12/26/2018
SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Reports
Manufacturer's Field Inspection Reports
Warranties; G
Submit 20 year "No-Dollar-Limit" and 20 year watertightness

warranty to cover labor and materials.
Warranty Sign; refer to Appendix 2.
Instructions To:
Government and/or Contractor Personnel
Include copies of Material Safety Data Sheets for
maintenance/repair materials.
Submit documentation verifying metal roof panel manufacturer has been in

the business of manufacturing metal roof panels for a period of not less
than 5 years.
Manufacturer must also provide engineering services by an authorized

engineer, currently licensed in the geographic area of the project, with a
minimum of five (5) years experience as an engineer knowledgeable in roof
wind design analysis, protocols and procedures for MBMA RSDM, ASCE 7, UL 580,
and FM 4471. Engineer must provide certified engineering calculations
using the products submitted for:
Wind uplift requirements in accordance with Florida Building Code and

Standards (FBCBV) FBC Chapter 15 and ASCE 7.
1.6.1.1 Manufacturer's Technical Representative
The manufacturer's technical representative must be thoroughly familiar

with the products to be installed, installation requirements and practices,
and with any special considerations in the geographical area of the
project. The representative shall have authorization from manufacturer to
approve field changes and must perform field inspections, attend meetings
as specified and provide Manufacturer's Field Inspection Reports.
1.6.1.2 Single Source
Roofing panels, clips, closures, and other accessories must be standard

products of the same manufacturer, and the most recent design of the
manufacturer to operate as a complete system for the intended use.
Metal roof system applicator must be approved, authorized, or licensed in

writing by the roof panel manufacturer and have a minimum of three years
experience as an approved, authorized, or licensed applicator with that
manufacturer, approved at a level capable of providing the specified
warranty. Supply the names, locations and client contact information of 5
12/26/2018
projects of similar size and scope constructed by applicator using the

manufacturer's roofing products submitted for this project within the
previous three years.
1.6.3 Field Verification
Prior to the preparation of drawings and fabrication, verify location of

roof framing, roof openings and penetrations, and any other special
conditions. Indicate all special conditions and measurements on final shop
drawings.
1.6.4 Qualifications for Welding Work
Welding procedures must conform to AWS D1.1/D1.1M for steel or

AWS D1.2/D1.2M for aluminum.
Operators are permitted to make only those types of weldments for which
each is specifically qualified.
1.6.5 Pre-roofing Conference
After approval of submittals and before performing roofing system

installation work, hold a pre-roofing conference to review the following:
a. Drawings, specifications, and submittals related to the roof work.

Submit, as a minimum; sample profiles of roofing panels, with
factory-applied color finish samples, flashing and accessories. Also
include technical data on coil stock and coil stock compatibility, and
manufacturer's installation manual.
b. Roof system components installation;
c. Procedure for the roof manufacturer's technical representative's onsite

inspection and acceptance of the roofing substrate, the name of the
manufacturer's technical representatives, the frequency of the onsite
visits, distribution of copies of the inspection reports from the
manufacturer's technical representative;
d. Contractor's plan for coordination of the work of the various trades

involved in providing the roofing system and other components secured
to the roofing; and
e. Quality control plan for the roof system installation;
f. Safety requirements.
Coordinate pre-roofing conference scheduling with the Contracting Officer.

Attendance is mandatory for the Contractor, the Contracting Officer's
designated personnel, personnel directly responsible for the installation
of metal roof system, flashing and sheet metal work, mechanical and
electrical work, other trades interfacing with the roof work, and
representative of the metal roofing manufacturer. Before beginning roofing
work, provide a copy of meeting notes and action items to all attending
parties. Note action items requiring resolution prior to start of roof
work.
1.7 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE
Deliver, store, and handle panel materials, bulk roofing products,
12/26/2018
accessories, and other manufactured items in a manner to prevent damage and

deformation, as recommended by the manufacturer, and as specified.
1.7.1 Delivery
Package and deliver materials to the site in undamaged condition. Provide

adequate packaging to protect materials during shipment. Do not uncrate
materials until ready for use, except for inspection. Immediately upon
arrival of materials at jobsite, inspect materials for damage, deformation,
dampness, and staining. Remove affected materials from the site and
immediately replace. Remove moisture from wet materials not otherwise
affected, restack and protect from further moisture exposure.
1.7.2 Handling
Handle materials in a manner to avoid damage. Select and operate material

handling equipment so as not to damage materials or applied roofing.
1.7.3 Storage
Stack materials stored on site on platforms or pallets, and cover with

tarpaulins or other weathertight covering which prevents trapping of water
or condensation under the covering. Store roof panels so that water which
may have accumulated during transit or storage will drain off. Do not
store panels in contact with materials that might cause staining. Secure
coverings and stored items to protect from wind displacement.
The 45th Space Wing will occupy portions of building immediately below the
repair and/or re-roofing area. Conduct re-roofing so operations will not
be disrupted. Provide the Contracting Officer with not less than
seventy-two (72) hours notice of activities that may affect operations.
Protect building to be repaired and/or re-roofed, adjacent buildings,

walkways, site improvements, exterior plantings, and landscaping from
damage or soiling from re-roofing operations.

Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and

forecast weather conditions permit metal roof panel work to be performed
according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements,
and specified safety requirements.
Hazardous Materials:
It is not expected that hazardous materials such as asbestos-containing

materials or lead base paints will be encountered in the Work. Should
materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do
not disturb; immediately notify the Contracting Officer. Hazardous
materials will be removed under a separate negotiated contract.
When materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are present in
the building to be repair and/or re-roofed. A report on the presence of
12/26/2018
hazardous materials will be included in the contract documents and/or on

file for review and use. Examine the report to become aware of the
locations where hazardous materials are present.
1. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the

Contract Documents.
2. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of

containing hazardous materials except according to procedures
specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
3. Coordinate with hazardous material remediation Contractor to

prevent water from entering building or existing roofing system.
1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
Take field measurements prior to preparation of drawings and fabrication.

Verify locations of roof framing and roof opening dimensions by field
measurements before metal roof panel fabrication and indicate measurements
on Shop Drawings.
1.10 FABRICATION
Fabricate and finish metal roof panels and accessories on a rolling mill to
the greatest extent possible, per manufacturer's standard procedures and
processes, and as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements.
Comply with indicated profiles, dimensional and structural requirements.
Provide panel profile, as indicated on drawings for full length of panel.

Fabricate panel side laps with factory installed providing a weather tight
seal and preventing metal-to metal contact, and minimizing noise from
movements within the panel assembly.
1.10.1 Finishes
Finish quality and application processes must conform to the related

standards specified within this section. Noticeable variations within the
same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining
components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved samples
and are assembled or installed to minimize any contrasting variations.
1.10.2 Accessories
Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA 1793

as applicable to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics
of the item indicated.
a. Form exposed sheet metal accessories which are free from excessive oil
canning, buckling, and tool marks, and are true to line and levels
indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
b. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning,
buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with
exposed edges folded back to form hems.
c. Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion, but movable joints in metal to

accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA 1793.
d. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible.
12/26/2018
e. Fabricate cleats and attachments devices of size and metal thickness

recommended by SMACNA or by metal roof panel manufacturer for
application, but not less than the thickness of the metal being secured.
1.11 WARRANTIES
Furnish manufacturer's no-dollar-limit and watertightness warranty for the

roofing system. The warranty period is to be no less than twenty (20)
years from the date of Government acceptance of the work. The warranty is
to be issued directly to the Government. The warranty is to provide that
if within the warranty period the metal roofing system shows evidence of
corrosion, perforation, rupture or excess weathering due to deterioration
of the roofing system resulting from defective materials and correction of
the defective workmanship is to be the responsibility of the roofing system
manufacturer. Repairs that become necessary because of defective materials
and workmanship while roofing is under warranty are to be performed within
thirty-two (32) hours after notification, unless additional time is
approved by the Contracting Officer. Failure to perform repairs within
thirty-two (32) hours of notification will constitute grounds for having
emergency repairs performed by others and not void the warranty.
1.11.1 Wind Uplift Rider
Provide Wind Uplift Rider that states manufacture warrants roofing system
to not be damaged by a windstorm with wind speeds equal to or in excess of
120 miles per hour before the expiration of the warranty as measured by the
office of the National Weather Service nearest the location of the roofing
system using the 3-second gust wind speed measurement technique. Wind
Uplift Rider shall also state, if a wind related warranted leak occurs
during the term of the warranty, the manufacturer will promptly repair the
affected area of the roof so as to return it to a watertight condition.
Repair or replacement work that becomes necessary within the warranty

period must be approved, as required, and accomplished in a manner so as to
restore the integrity of the roof system assembly and validity of the metal
roof system manufacturer warranty for the remainder of the manufacturer
warranty period.
The entire metal roofing and flashing system must be in accordance with
specified and indicated requirements, including wind resistance
requirements. Work not specifically addressed and any deviation from
specified requirements must be in general accordance with recommendations
of the MBMA RSDM, NRCA RoofMan, the metal panel manufacturer's published
recommendations and details, and compatible with surrounding components and
construction. Submit any deviation from specified or indicated
requirements to the Contracting Officer for approval prior to installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Basis-of-Design Product shall be equal to Berridge Double Lock Zee-Lock

Panel, 2 inch mechanical lock standing seam roof panel system.
12/26/2018
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable product to the

metal roofing system listed below.
NOTE: The Contractor is not limited to this source. Other sources for the
product may be submitted for approval.
BERRIDGE
CORPORATE HEADQUARTERS
2610 Harry Wurzbach Road
San Antonio, TX 78209
(800) 669-0009
www.Berridge.com
2.2 ROOF PANELS
2.2.1 Steel Sheet Panels
Roll-form steel sheet roof panels to the specified profile, with fy =50
ksi, 24 gauge and depth as indicated.
Material must be plumb and true, and within the tolerances listed:
a. Galvanized steel sheet conforming to ASTM A653/A653M and AISI SG03-3.
b. Aluminum-Zinc alloy coated steel sheet conforming to ASTM A792/A792M

and AISI SG03-3.
Profile and coverage to be as shown on Project Construction Documents

with a minimum height from the manufacturer's standard for the
indicated roof slope.
c. Individual panels to have continuous length sufficient to cover the

entire length of any unbroken roof slope with no joints or seams and
formed without warping, waviness, or ripples that are not a part of the
panel profile and free from damage to the finish coating system.
d. Provide panels with thermal expansion and contraction consistent with

the type of system specified. Panel attachment shall comply with
approved Show Drawings.
2.3 FACTORY FINISH AND COLOR PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
All panels are to receive a factory applied Kynar 500/Hylar 5000 finish
consisting of a baked topcoat with a manufacturer's recommended prime coat
conforming to the following:
a. Metal Preparation: All metal is to have the surfaces carefully

prepared for painting on a continuous process coil coating line by
alkali cleaning, hot water rinsing, application of chemical conversion
coating, cold water rinsing, sealing with an acid rinse, and thorough
drying.
b. Prime Coating: A base coat of epoxy paint, specifically formulated to

interact with the top-coat, is to be applied to the prepared surfaces
by roll coating to a dry film thickness of 0.20 plus 0.05 mils. The
prime coat must be oven cured prior to application of the finish coat.
c. Exterior Finish Coating: Apply the exterior finish coating over the
primer by roll coating to a dry film thickness of 0.80 plus 0.05 mils
(3.80 plus 0.05 mils for Vinyl Plastisol) for a total dry film
12/26/2018
thickness of 1.00 plus 0.10 mils (4.00 plus 0.10 mils for Vinyl
Plastisol). This exterior finish coat must be oven-cured.
d. Color: The exterior finish chosen from the manufacturer's standard

color chart.
e. Physical Properties: Coating shall conform to the manufacturer's

standard performance criteria as listed by certified test reports for
fade, chalk, abrasion, humidity, adhesion, pollution resistance, and
others as required and standard within the industry.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING
2.4.1 General
Provide cold formed metallic-coated steel sheet conforming to

ASTM A653/A653M, AISI S100, and as indicated in drawings.
2.4.2 Fasteners and Miscellaneous Metal Framing
Provide compatible type, corrosion resistant, of sufficient size and length

to penetrate the supporting element a minimum of one inch with other
required properties to fasten miscellaneous metal framing members to
substrates in accordance with the roof panel manufacturer's and ASCE 7
requirements.
2.4.2.1 Screws
Provide corrosion resistant screws, coated steel stainless steel of the

type and size recommended by the manufacturer to meet the performance
requirements.
2.4.2.2 Rivets
Provide closed-end type rivets, corrosion resistant coated steel stainless

steel where watertight connections are required.
2.4.2.3 Attachment Clips
Provide stainless steel, series 300 clips. Size, shape, thickness and
capacity must meet the thickness and design load criteria specified.
2.5 UNDERLAYMENT
Provide an SBS-modified bitumen underlayment with a high strength

tri-laminate polyethylene film at the top side and with protective
polyolefin release film that is removed during application at the underside
equal to SOPREMA, LASTOBOND SHIELD HT, minimum 40 mils thick.
2.5.1 Separation Felt
Provide 30 pound separation felt as specified by roof and wall panel

manufacturer.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
Accessories must be compatible with the metal roof panels. Sheet metal
flashing, trim, metal closure strips, pressure sensitive tape, caps, and
similar metal accessories must be not less than the minimum thicknesses
12/26/2018
specified for roof panels. Provide exposed metal accessories to match the
panels furnished, except as otherwise indicated. Molded foam rib, ridge
and other closure strips must be closed-cell or solid-cell synthetic rubber
or neoprene premolded to match configuration of the panels and not absorb
or retain water.
2.6.1 Pre-manufactured Accessories
Pre-manufactured accessories must be manufacturer's standard for intended

purpose, compatible with the metal roof system and approved for use by the
metal roof panel manufacturer.
2.7 JOINT SEALANTS
2.7.1 Sealants
Sealants to be an elastomeric type containing no oil or asphalt, as

recommended by the roof panel manufacturer. Silicone based sealants are
prohibited, unless approved otherwise by the roof panel manufacturer and
the Contracting Officer. Exposed sealant color to match adjacent
components or clear and cure to a rubber consistency. Concealed sealant to
be a non- hardening type recommended by the manufacturer to meet the
performance requirements.
2.7.2 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
2.7.2.1 Fabrication, General
Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with

recommendations within the SMACNA 1793 that apply to design, dimensions,
metal type, and other characteristics of design indicated. Shop fabricate
items to the greatest extent possible. Obtain and verify field
measurements for accurate fit prior to shop fabrication. Fabricate
flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks,
true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form
hems.
2.7.2.2 Roof Drainage Sheet Metal Fabrications
Gutters and downspouts as specified on SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL

FALSHING AND TRIM.
2.8 GASKETS AND SEALING/INSULATING COMPOUNDS
Gaskets and sealing/insulating compounds must be nonabsorptive and suitable

for insulating contact points of incompatible materials.
Sealing/insulating compounds must be non-running after drying.
2.9 FINISH REPAIR MATERIAL
Repair paint for color finish enameled roofing must be compatible paint of
the same formula and color as the specified finish furnished by the
manufacturer.
Provide Enamel Repair Paint, Aluminized Steel Repair Paint and Galvanizing
Repair Paint from the same roofing panel manufacturer.
12/26/2018
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with installer present, for

compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal roof panel
supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the work. Ensure
surfaces are suitable, dry and free of defects and projections which might
affect the installation.
Examine primary and secondary roof framing to verify that rafters, purlins,
angels, channels, and other structural support members for panels and
anchorages have been installed within alignment tolerances required by
metal roof panel manufacturer, UL, ASTM, and ASCE 7 requirements.
Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported
by framing or blocking; and that installation is within flatness tolerances
required by metal roof panel manufacturer.
Examine rough-in for components and systems penetrating metal roof panels
to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of
panels prior to installation.
Submit a written report to the Contracting Officer, endorsed by the

installer, listing conditions detrimental to the performance of the work.
Proceed with installation only after defects have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
Installation must meet specified requirements and be in accordance with the

manufacturer's installation instructions and approved shop drawings. Do
not install damaged materials. Dissimilar materials which are not
compatible when contacting each other must be insulated by means of gaskets
or sealing/insulating compounds. Keep all exposed surfaces and edges clean
and free from sealant, metal cuttings, hazardous burrs, and other foreign
material. Remove stained, discolored, or damaged materials from the site.
3.2.1 Preparation
Clean all substrate substances which may be harmful to insulation,and roof

panels including removing projections capable of interfering with with
insulation, and roof panel attachment.
Install miscellaneous roof panel support members and anchorage according to

metal roof panel manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 PROTECTION OF APPLIED MATERIALS
Do not permit storing, walking, wheeling, and trucking directly on applied

roofing/insulation materials. Provide temporary walkways, runways, and
platforms of smooth clean boards or planks as necessary to avoid damage to
applied roofing/insulation materials, and to distribute weight to conform
to indicated live load limits of roof construction.
3.4 FASTENER INSTALLATION
Anchor metal roof panels and other components of the Work securely in
place, using approved fasteners according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
12/26/2018
3.5 FLASHING, TRIM, AND CLOSURE INSTALLATION
Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation

instructions, and SMACNA 1793. Provide concealed fasteners where
possible. Set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work
with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently water tight and
weather resistant. Work is to be accomplished to form weather tight
construction without waves, warps, buckles, fastening stresses or
distortion, and to allow for expansion and contraction. Cutting, fitting,
drilling, and other operations in connection with sheet metal required to
accomplish the work must conform to the manufacturers written instructions.
3.5.2 Metal Flashing
Install exposed metal flashing at building corners, rakes, eaves, junctions

between metal siding and roofing, valleys and changes off slope or
direction in metal roofing, building expansion joints and gutters.
Exposed metal flashing must be the same material, color, and finish as the
specified metal roofing panels. Furnish flashing in minimum 8 foot
lengths. Exposed flashing must have 1 inch locked and blind soldered end
joints, with expansion joints at intervals of no greater than 16 feet.
Fasten flashing at not more than 8 inches on center for roofs, except where
flashing is held in place by the same screws used to secure panels.
Exposed flashing and flashing subject to rain penetration must be bedded in
specified joint sealant. Flashing which is contact with dissimilar metals
must be isolated by means of the specified asphalt mastic material to
prevent electrolytic deterioration.
Form drips to the profile indicated, with the edge folded back 1/2 inch to
form a reinforced drip edge.
3.6 ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION
Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge or eave to wall
as indicated, unless otherwise indicated or restricted by shipping
limitations. Anchor metal roof panels or other components of the Work
securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement in
accordance with NRCA 0420.
Steel Roof Panels: Use stainless steel fasteners for exterior surfaces
and galvanized fasteners for unexposed surfaces.
Anchor Clips: Anchor metal roof panels and other components of the Work
securely in place, using approved fasteners according to manufacturer's
written instructions. Provide all blocking and nailers as required.
Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or possibly

corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by applying
rubberized asphalt underlayment to each contact surface or by other
permanent separation as recommended by the metal roof panel
manufacturer.
Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where

indicated and required for weatherproof performance of metal roof panel
12/26/2018
system. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated or,

if not indicated, types recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.
3.6.1 Handling and Erection
Erect roofing system in accordance with the approved erection drawings,

printed instructions and safety precautions of the manufacturer.
Do not subject panels to overloading, abuse, or undue impact. Do not apply

bent, chipped, or defective panels. Damaged panels must be replaced and
removed from the site at the contractors expense. Erect panels true,
plumb, and in exact alignment with the horizontal and vertical edges of the
building, securely anchored, and with indicated rake, eave, and curb
overhang. Allow for thermal movement of the roofing, movement of the
building structure, and provide permanent freedom from noise due to wind
pressure.
Do not permit storage, walking, wheeling or trucking directly on applied

roofing materials. Provide temporary walkways, runways, and platforms of
smooth clean boards or planks as necessary to avoid damage to the installed
roofing materials, and to distribute weight to conform to the indicated
live load limits of the roof construction.
Roof panels must be laid with corrugations in the direction of the roof
slope. End laps of exterior roofing must not be less than 8 inches; side
laps of standard exterior corrugated panels must not be less than 2-1/2
corrugations.
Field cutting of metal roof panels by torch is not permitted. Field cut
only as recommended by manufacturer's written instructions.
3.6.2 Closure Strips
Install metal closure strips at open ends of metal ridge rolls; open ends
of corrugated or ribbed pattern roofs, and at intersection of wall and
roof, unless open ends are concealed with formed eave flashing; rake of
metal roof unless open end has a formed flashing member; and in other
required areas.
Install closure strips at intersection of the wall with metal roofing; top
and bottom of metal siding; heads of wall openings; and in other required
locations.
3.6.3 Workmanship
Make lines, arises, and angles sharp and true. Free exposed surfaces from
any visible wave, warp, buckle and tool marks. Fold back exposed edges
neatly to form a 1/2 inch hem on the concealed side. Make sheet metal
exposed to the weather watertight with provisions for expansion and
contraction.
Make surfaces to receive sheet metal plumb and true, clean, even, smooth,
dry, and free of defects and projections which might affect the
application. For installation of items not shown in detail or not covered
by specifications conform to the applicable requirements of SMACNA 1793.
Provide sheet metal flashing in the angles formed where roof decks abut
walls, curbs, ventilators, pipes, or other vertical surfaces and wherever
indicated and as necessary to make the work watertight.
12/26/2018
3.7 ACCEPTANCE PROVISIONS
3.7.1 Erection Tolerances
Erect metal roofing straight and true with plumb vertical lines correctly
lapped and secured in accordance with the manufacturer's written
instructions. Horizontal lines must not vary more than 1/8 inch in 40 feet.
3.7.2 Leakage Tests
Finished application of metal roofing is to be subject to inspection and

test for leakage by the Contracting Officer or his designated
representative, and Architect/Engineer. Inspection and tests will be
conducted without cost to the Government.
Inspection and testing is to be made promptly after erection to permit

correction of defects and removal/replacement of defective materials.
3.7.3 Repairs to Finish
Scratches, abrasions, and minor surface defects of finish may be repaired

with the specified repair materials and as recommended by the metal roof
panel manufacturer. Finished repaired surfaces must be uniform and free
from variations of color and surface texture. Repaired metal surfaces
that are not acceptable to the project requirements are to be immediately
removed and replaced with new material.
3.7.4 Paint Finished Metal Roofing
Paint finished metal roofing will be tested for color stability by the
Contracting Officer during the manufacturer's specified guarantee period.
Panels that indicate color changes, fading, or surface degradation,
determined by visual examination, must be removed and replaced with new
panels at no expense to the Government. New panels will be subject to the
specified tests for an additional year from the date of their installation.
3.8 CLEAN UP AND DISPOSAL
Clean exposed sheet metal work at completion of installation. Remove metal

shavings, filings, nails, bolts, and wires from roofs. Remove grease and
oil films, excess sealants, handling marks, contamination from steel wool,
fittings and drilling debris and scrub the work clean. Exposed metal
surfaces must be free of dents, creases, waves, scratch marks, solder or
weld marks, and damage to the finish coating. Touch up scratches in panel
finish with manufacturer supplied touch-up paint system to match panel
finish. Treat exposed cut edges with manufacturer supplied clear coat.
Collect all scrap/waste materials and place in containers. Promptly

dispose of demolished and scrap materials. Do not allow scrap/waste
materials to accumulate on-site; transport immediately from the government
property and legally dispose of them.
Field quality control as per roofing manufacturer's instructions.

Contractor shall coordinate installation and inspection with roofing
manufacturer's representative.
12/26/2018
3.10 WARRANTY SIGN
For each roof, furnish and install a .032 inch aluminum, 8 1/2 x 11 inch
minimum, photoengraved sign, for exterior display. Refer to Appendix 2 for
Warranty Sign, graphic sample. Install at top of access location, as
directed by Contracting Officer.
12/26/2018
SECTION 07 52 16.15
SBS MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING-TORCH APPLIED
05/12
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 REFERENCES
1.4 DEFINITIONS
1.5 DESCRIPTION OF ROOF MEMBRANE SYSTEMS
1.6 SUBMITTALS
1.7.3 Fire Resistance
1.7.4 Wind Uplift Resistance
1.7.5 Preroofing Conference
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.8.1 Delivery
1.8.2 Storage
1.8.3 Handling
1.10 TORCH APPLIED MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE SAFETY
1.10.1 Property Protection
1.10.2 Fire Watch
1.10.3 Open Flame Application (Torch) Equipment and Personnel Safety
1.10.4 Wind Conditions
1.11 SEQUENCING
1.12 WARRANTY
1.12.1 Roof Membrane Manufacturer Warranty
1.12.2 Roofing System Installer Warranty
PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.2 MODIFIED BITUMEN SHEETS AND POLYESTER FELT MATERIALS
2.3 BASE FLASHING MEMBRANE
2.4 COLD-APPLIED MEMBRANE ADHESIVE
2.5 MEMBRANE SURFACING
2.6 PRIMER
2.7 MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOF CEMENT
2.8 FASTENERS AND PLATES
2.8.1 Masonry or Concrete Walls and Vertical Surfaces
2.8.2 Metal Plates
2.9 PRE-MANUFACTURED ACCESSORIES
2.10 ROOF INSULATION BELOW MEMBRANE SYSTEM

12/26/2018
2.11 WALKWAYS AND WALKPADS

2.11.1 Walkways
2.11.2 Walkpads
2.12 EXPANSION JOINT MEMBRANES
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
3.2 PREPARATION
3.2.1 General
3.2.2 Protection of Property
3.2.2.1 Protective Coverings
3.2.3 Equipment
3.2.3.1 Mechanical Application Devices
3.2.3.2 Flame-Heated Equipment
3.2.3.3 Open Flame Application Equipment
3.2.4 Priming of Surfaces
3.2.4.1 Priming of Concrete and Masonry Surfaces
3.2.4.2 Priming of Metal Surfaces
3.2.5 Membrane Preparation
3.3 APPLICATION OF MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE
3.3.1 Phased Membrane Construction
3.3.2 Torch Applied Modified Bitumen Membrane
3.3.3 Base Sheet Installation
3.3.4 Inter-Ply Membrane Installation
3.3.5 Cap Sheet Installation
3.3.6 Membrane Flashing
3.3.6.1 Membrane Strip Flashing
3.3.7 Set-On Accessories
3.3.8 Lightning Protection
3.3.9 Correction Of Deficiencies
3.3.10 Field Quality Control
3.3.10.1 Test for Surface Dryness
3.3.10.2 Construction Monitoring
3.3.11 Protection and Cleaning
3.3.12 Instructions to Government Contractor Personnel
3.3.13 Warranty Sign

12/26/2018
SECTION 07 52 16.15
SBS MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING-TORCH APPLIED

05/12
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
This Section includes, but is not limited to, a minimum two-ply SBS
modified bitumen roof membrane consisting of modified bitumen base sheet,
one (1) polyester inter-ply sheet, and cap sheet. Modified bitumen roof
membrane is to be torch applied.
All work must follow the ARMA and NRCA Manual guidelines and standards
stated within this Section.
1.2 REFERENCES

ANSI/SPRI ES-1 (2003) Wind Design Standard for Edge

Systems Used with Low Slope Roofing Systems

ASPHALT ROOFING MANUFACTURER'S ASSOCIATION (ARMA)
ARMA 410BUR88 (2001) Manual of Roof Maintenance and

Repair
ARMA PMBRG98 (1998) Quality Control Guideline for the

Application of Polymer Modified Bitumen
Roofing
ARMA 460LSR97 (2002) NRCA/ARMA Repair Manual for Low

Slope Membrane Roof Systems

Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware
ASTM C1289 (2017) Standard Specification for Faced

Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal
Insulation Board
ASTM C1278/C1278M (2017) Standard Specification for

Fiber-Reinforced Gypsum Panel

12/26/2018
ASTM C473 (2016) Standard Test Methods for Physical

Testing of Gypsum Panel Products

ASTM D3273 (2016) Standard Test Method for Resistance

to Growth of Mold on the Surface of
Interior Coatings in an Environmental
Chamber
ASTM D3617 (2007; R 2015; E 2015) Sampling and

Analysis of New Built-Up Roof Membranes
ASTM D4073 (2006; R 2013) Standard Test Method for

Tensile-Tear Strength of Bituminous
Roofing Membranes
ASTM D41/D41M (2011; R 2016) Standard Specification for

Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing,
Dampproofing, and Waterproofing
ASTM D4263 (1983; R 2012) Indicating Moisture in

Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method
ASTM D4586/D4586M (2007; E 2012; R 2012) Asphalt Roof

Cement, Asbestos-Free
ASTM D5147/D5147M (2014) Standard Test Methods for Sampling

and Testing Modified Bituminous Sheet
Material
ASTM D6164 / D6164M (2016) Standard Specification for Styrene

Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified
Bituminous Sheet Materials Using Polyester
Reinforcements
ASTM D6164/D6164M (2016) Standard Specification for Styrene

Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified
Bituminous Sheet Materials Using Polyester
Reinforcements
ASTM D6506 (2009) Standard Specification for Asphalt

Based Protection for Below-Grade
Waterproofing
ASTM E108 (2011) Fire Tests of Roof Coverings
FBC Chapter 15 (2010) Florida Building Code Chapter 15

High Velocity Hurricane Zones
FM GLOBAL (FM)
FM 4470 (2010) Single-Ply, Polymer-Modified

12/26/2018
Bitumen Sheet, Built-up Roof (BUR), and

Liquid Applied Roof Assemblies for Use in
Class 1 and Noncombustible Roof Deck
Construction
FM APP GUIDE (updated on-line) Approval Guide

http://www.approvalguide.com/
INTERNATIONAL SAFETY EQUIPMENT ASSOCIATION (ISEA)
ANSI/ISEA Z87.1 (2015) Occupational and Educational

Personal Eye and Face Protection Devices
MIDWEST ROOFING CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (MRCA)
CERTA (2007) NRCA/MRCA Certified Roofing Torch

Applicator Program
NFPA 241 (2013; Errata 2015) Standard for

Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and
NFPA 58 (2017; ERTA 17-1) Liquefied Petroleum Gas

Code
NRCA 0405 (2001; R2003, 5th Ed) Roofing and

Waterproofing Manual
NRCA C3701 (1997) Repair Manual for Low Slope

Membrane Roof Systems
NRCA Details (2003) NRCA Roof Perimeter Flashing

Systems Construction Details for Class 1
Roof Construction
NRCA RoofMan (2017) The NRCA Roofing Manual
NRCA/MRCA CERTA (2012) Safe Practices for Roofing Torch Use

(SMACNA)
SMACNA 1793 (2012) Architectural Sheet Metal Manual,

7th Edition
SINGLE PLY ROOFING INDUSTRY (SPRI)
ANSI/ASSE A10.24-200X (2007) Construction Package
29 CFR 1910 Occupational Safety and Health Standards
29 CFR 1910.12 Construction Work

12/26/2018
29 CFR 1926 (2014) Safety and Health Regulations for

Construction
29 CFR 1926.16 Rules of Construction
UL 790 (2004; Reprint Jul 2014) Standard Test

Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings
UL RMSD (2012) Roofing Materials and Systems

Directory

otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, demolished materials are
the Contractor's property and to be removed from Project site.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D1079 and glossary in NRCA "The NRCA
Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" (NRCA 0405) for definition of terms
related to roofing work in this Section.
B. Existing Membrane Roofing System: Built-up asphalt and/or Built-up

coal-tar roofing membrane, surfacing, and components and accessories
between deck and roofing membrane.
C. Substrate Board: Rigid board or panel products placed over the roof
deck that serve as thermal barriers, provide a smooth substrate, or
serve as a component of a fire-resistance-rated roofing system.
D. Design Uplift Pressure: The uplift pressure to be calculated in

accordance with the requirements of ASCE 7 for all types of roofing
systems.
1.5 DESCRIPTION OF ROOF MEMBRANE SYSTEMS
Minimum two-ply SBS modified bitumen roof membrane as shown on drawings.

Modified bitumen roof membrane must be torch applied
All work must follow the NRCA RoofMan guidelines and standards stated
within this Section.
1.6 SUBMITTALS

PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Roof plan drawing depicting wind loads and boundaries of enhanced

perimeter and corner attachments of roof system components, as
applicable
Prepare a Roof plan with a complete description of the procedures

for the installation of each phase of the system indicating the

12/26/2018
type of materials, thicknesses, identity codes.
SD-03 Product Data
Modified Bitumen Sheets; G
Polyester Felt
Asphalt Primer
Modified Bitumen Roof Cement
Pre-Manufactured Accessories
Fasteners And Plates; G
Sample Warranty certificate
Cold-Applied Membrane Adhesive
Submit all data required by Roof Insulation Sections, together

with requirements of this section. Include in data written
acceptance by the roof membrane manufacturer of the products and
accessories provided. Products must be as listed in the
applicable wind uplift and fire rating classification listings,
unless approved otherwise by the Contracting Officer.
SD-05 Design Data
Wind Uplift Calculations; G
Roofing manufacturer to submit a wind design analysis to include,

but not be limited to, wind speed, exposure category,
co-efficient, importance factor, designate type of facility,
negative pressures for each zone, methods and requirements of
attachment. Wind design analysis to include roof plan delineating
dimensions and attachment patterns for each zone. Wind design
analysis to be prepared and sealed by a State of Florida Licensed
Project Engineer per ASCE 7, ASTM D4073, and ANSI/SPRI ES-1 of
non-rated roof system.
Wind Uplift; G
SD-07 Certificates
Provide evidence that products used within this specification are

manufactured in the United States.
Qualification of Manufacturer; G
Certify that the manufacturer of the modified bitumen membrane

meets requirements specified under paragraph entitled
"Qualification of Manufacturer."
Qualification of Applicator
Certify that the applicator meets requirements specified under

12/26/2018
paragraph entitled "Qualification of Applicator."
Wind Uplift Resistance
Submit the roof system assembly negative uplift pressure complying

with FM and/or Miami-Dade County Building Code and Class 'A' fire
rating classification for roofing assembly.
Fire Resistance
Application of Modified Bitumen Membrane
Flashing
Torches
Base Sheet attachment, including pattern and frequency of

mechanical attachments required in field of roof, corners, and
perimeters to provide for the specified wind resistance.
Primer
Modified Bitumen Roof Cement
Fasteners
Include detailed application instructions and standard

manufacturer drawings altered as required by these specifications.
Explicitly identify in writing, differences between manufacturer's
instructions and the specified requirements.
Warranty; G
Warranty Sign; refer to Appendix 2.
Instructions To Government Contractor Personnel
Include copies of Material Safety Data Sheets for

maintenance/repair materials.
Submit 20 year "No-Dollar-Limit" warranty for labor and materials.
Wind Uplift; G
Modified bitumen sheet roofing system manufacturer must have a minimum of

10 years experience in manufacturing modified bitumen roofing products.
Provide engineering services by an authorized, and currently licensed by

the state of Florida, and have a minimum of four (4) years experience as an
Engineer knowledgeable in roofing wind design analysis, protocols, and
procedures for the the Florida Building Code FBC Chapter 15, ASCE 7, Miami

12/26/2018
Dade Bldg Code, FM and SPRI wind designs guide for fully adhered and
mechanically fastened roofing systems.
Provide certified engineering calculations using the products submitted for:
Wind uplift requirements in accordance with Florida Building Code and

Standards (FBC BV) FBC Chapter 15 and ASCE 7.
Roofing system applicator must be approved, authorized, or licensed in

writing by the modified bitumen sheet roofing system manufacturer and have
a minimum of five years experience as an approved, authorized, or licensed
applicator with that manufacturer and be approved at a level capable of
providing the specified warranty. The applicator must supply the names,
locations and client contact information of five projects of similar size
and scope that the applicator has constructed using the manufacturer's
roofing products submitted for this project within the previous three years.
1.7.3 Fire Resistance
Complete roof covering assembly must:
a. Be Class A or B rated in accordance with ASTM E108, FM 4470, or UL 790;

and
b. Be listed as part of Fire-Classified roof deck construction in UL RMSD,

or Class I roof deck construction in FM APP GUIDE.
FM or UL approved components of the roof covering assembly must bear the

appropriate FM or UL label.
1.7.4 Wind Uplift Resistance
Complete roof covering assembly, including insulation, must be rated in

accordance with ASTM D4073. Calculate Wind Uplift Calculations in
accordance with ASCE 7 or applicable Florida Building Code requirements.
Non-rated systems must not be installed.
1.7.5 Preroofing Conference
After approval of submittals and before performing roofing and insulation

system installation work, hold a preroofing conference to review the
following:
a. Drawings, including Roof Plan, specifications and submittals related to

the roof work
Conduct field inspection and verification of all existing

conditions, including all fire safety issues, existing structure,
and existing materials, including concealed combustibles, which
may require additional protection during installation.
b. Review roof system components installation
c. Procedure for the roof manufacturer's technical representative's onsite

inspection and acceptance of the roof structure, and roofing substrate,
the name of the manufacturer's technical representatives, the frequency
of the onsite visits, distribution of copies of the inspection reports

12/26/2018
from the manufacturer's technical representatives to roof manufacturer
d. Review Contractor's plan for coordination of the work of the various

trades involved in providing the roofing system and other components
secured to the roofing
e. Review Quality control, (ARMA PMBRG98) plan for the roof system
installation
f. Safety requirements
Preroofing conference scheduling with the Contracting Officer must be

attended by the Contractor, the Contracting Officer's designated personnel,
and personnel directly responsible for the installation of roofing
insulation, flashing and sheet metal work, mechanical and electrical work,
other trades interfacing with the roof work, designated safety personnel
trained to enforce and comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.24-200X,and Fire Marshall.
1.8.1 Delivery
Deliver materials in manufacturers' original unopened containers and rolls

with labels intact and legible. Mark and remove wet or damaged materials
from the site. Where materials are covered by a referenced specification,
the container must bear the specification number, type, and class, as
applicable. Deliver materials in sufficient quantity to allow work to
proceed without interruption.
1.8.2 Storage
Protect materials against moisture absorption and contamination or other

damage. Avoid crushing or crinkling of roll materials. Store roll
materials on end on clean raised platforms or pallets one level high in dry
locations with adequate ventilation, such as an enclosed building or closed
trailer. Do not store roll materials in buildings under construction until
concrete, mortar, and plaster work is finished and dry. Maintain roll
materials at temperatures above 50 degrees F for 24 hours immediately
before application. Do not store materials outdoors unless approved by the
Contracting Officer. Completely cover felts stored outdoors, on and off
roof, with waterproof canvas protective covering. Do not use polyethylene
sheet as a covering. Tie covering securely to pallets to make completely
weatherproof. Provide sufficient ventilation to prevent condensation. Do
not store more materials on roof than can be installed the same day and
remove unused materials at end of each days work. Distribute materials
temporarily stored on roof to conform with FBC Chapter 16 for live load
limits of the roof construction.
Maintain a minimum distance of 35 foot for all stored flammable materials,

including materials covered with shrink wraps, craft paper and/or tarps
from all torch/welding applications.
Immediately remove wet, contaminated or otherwise damaged or unsuitable

materials from the site. Damaged materials may be marked by the
1.8.3 Handling
Prevent damage to edges and ends of roll materials. Do not install damaged

12/26/2018
materials in the work. Select and operate material handling equipment to

prevent damage to materials or applied roofing.
Proceed with repair and/or re-roofing preparation only when existing and
forecasted weather conditions permit work to proceed without water entering
into existing roofing system or building.
Do not install roofing system when air temperature is below 40 degrees F,

during any form of precipitation, including fog, or when there is ice,
frost, moisture, or any other visible dampness on the roof deck. Follow
manufacturer's printed instructions for Cold Weather Installation.
The 45th Space Wing will occupy portions of building immediately below the
repair and/or re-roofing area. Conduct re-roofing so operations will not
be disrupted. Provide the Contracting Officer with not less than 72 hours
notice of activities that may affect operations.

Protect building to be repair and/or re-roofed, adjacent buildings,

walkways, site improvements, exterior plantings, and landscaping from
damage or soiling from re-roofing operations.

Proceed with repair and/or re-roofing preparation only when existing and
forecasted weather conditions permit Work to proceed without water entering
into existing roofing system or building.
1.10 TORCH APPLIED MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE SAFETY
1.10.1 Property Protection
Take all precautions necessary to prevent ignition of combustible materials

during torch application of roofing. Immediately call the fire department
if a fire commences. Review all fire safety procedures as outlined at the
pre-roofing conference.
Install materials using the techniques recommended by CERTA NRCA/MRCA

Certified Roofing Torch Applicator Program available from the National
Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) and the Midwest Roofing Contractors
Association (MRCA) as endorsed by the Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers
Association (ARMA) and the United Union of Roofers, Waterproofers and
Allied Workers. Application procedures must comply with NFPA 241, OSHA
29 CFR 1910 and 29 CFR 1910.12, 29 CFR 1926.16, 29 CFR 1926 Subpart F., UL
Fire Resistance Directory Volume No. 1, NRCA R&W Manual, and Florida
Building Code Volume 2004 (FBC Chapter 16).
Do not store flammable liquids on the roof.

12/26/2018
Provide a minimum of two 2.65 gallon containers of water and two fully
charged minimum 20 pound ABC (dry chemical) fire extinguishers in separate,
easily accessible locations on the roof and within 10 foot of each torch
work area at all times.
Check all fire extinguishers prior to commencement of work, and upon

completion of the day's work, to ensure fullness and operability.
Comply with the following safety procedures:
a. Fuel containers, burners, and related appurtenances of roofing

equipment in which liquefied petroleum gas is used for heating must
comply with the requirements of NFPA 58.
b. Fuel containers having capacities greater than one pound must be

located a minimum of 10 foot clear distance from the burner flame.
c. All LP-Gas Cylinders must be clearly labeled "Flammable Gas", and

secured to prevent accidental tip-over.
d. Check all pressure regulators and hoses prior to use for proper
functioning and integrity.
e. Turn off fuel supply at LP Gas Cylinder when the torch is not in use.
f. Clean all roofing rags free of excess asphalt and store safely away
from all combustible materials. Store discarded roofing rags in a
non-combustible container and remove from site each day.
g. Position workers and other employees to avoid being struck by roofing

materials, which may accidentally fall while being hoisted, lowered, or
used in the roofing operation. Provide safety barriers and caution
signs at all skylights or other roof holes.
h. Do not use flammable liquids with a flash point below 100 degrees F
(gasoline and similar products) for cleaning purposes.
Project supervisor must make weekly inspections with the Government

Construction Inspector of all conditions and operations which could present
hazards during torching applications and issue directives to address all
such concerns and items of the work and existing conditions.
Identify and protect all combustible roof components, possible fire traps,
and hidden hazards. Seal off voids or openings in the substrate with
non-combustible materials prior to installing torch-applied materials in
the area. Install protective fire retardant blankets and shields at
building walls, eaves, parapets and equipments curbs constructed of
combustible materials within 3 foot radius of the area of torch work prior
to commencement of the work.
When working around intakes and openings, temporarily disconnect and block
to prevent flame of torch from being drawn into the opening. Provide
non-combustible shielding or flame guard protection where gaps or voids
occur in the construction in area of torch work.
1.10.2 Fire Watch
All personnel on the roof during torch application must be properly trained
to use a fire extinguisher. Provide a fire watch for a minimum of two

12/26/2018
hours after completion of all torch work at the end of each work shift.
Maintain the fire watch for additional time required to ensure no potential
ignition conditions exist. Utilize heat sensing meters to scan for hot
spots in the work. For torch applications, provide and utilize a minimum
of one certified heat detection gun per torch for use during the fire watch
to verify cool, safe and non-combustible conditions exist. Provide a
minimum duration fire watch of two hours conducted by personnel properly
trained to survey the underside of the roof deck (where possible) and the
topside of possible smoldering elements.
Do not torch in areas of poor and/or no visibility (curbs, corners, eaves,

expansions joints, flashing, other voids and small penetrations) which
could allow a torch flame to ignite combustible material(s) hidden from
view or within the underside of the roof deck or building interior. Use
cold finish applications in these areas whenever possible and per
manufacturer's printed instructions, NRCA 4002, MRCA R&NW manual for "cold
adhered" materials.
Do not leave the rooftop unattended during breaks in work during a work
shift. Walk and scan all areas of application checking for hot spots,
fumes, or smoldering, especially at wall and curb areas, prior to departure
at the end of each work shift. Ensure any and all suspect conditions are
eliminated prior to leaving the site each work shift.
AF Application Policy for Torch Down Welding of Modified Bitumen Roll

Roofing. See Appendix 3.
1.10.3 Open Flame Application (Torch) Equipment and Personnel Safety
Only NRCA/MRCA CERTA certified roofing applicators are allowed to operate

any torching equipment. Verify that all such applicators maintain and are
currently carrying a valid Certified Roofing Torch Applicator (CERTA) card.
All crew members must be trained in preventive measures for indirect and
direct dangers and hazards associated with roofing work, which include, but
are not limited to the following:
a. Heat Stress: Wear light colored clothing, a hat for ultra-violet

protection, and other eye protective devices. Drink sufficient
quantities of non-alcoholic, non-caffeine liquids. Stage shifts for
crew members to allow for breaks from heat and sun exposure without
interfering with work progress.
b. First Aid for Burns: Immediately call for an ambulance. Contact local
Occupational Health Services (OHS).
All crew members must wear correct personal protective equipment (PPE),
including. but not limited to the following items:
a. Long-sleeved shirts buttoned at the collar and cuffs,and must be made

of non-flammable materials. Polyester materials are not allowed.
b. Work boots covering ankles with rubber or composite soles.
c. Long pants without cuffs to extend over the top of the work boots, and
must be made of non-flammable materials. No polyester allowed.
d. Heavy leather gloves and/or flame retardant gauntlets which must be

worn during all handling of a torch, whether operating or not.

12/26/2018
e. OSHA and ANSI/ISEA Z87.1 approved face shields, goggles and/or safety
glasses to be worn during torching and any other applicable roofing
functions.
f. OSHA and ANSI approved hard hats.
1.10.4 Wind Conditions
Use side shields with all torching operations when winds are occurring to
prevent flame distortion of end burners. Use torch machine equipment with
bottom shield plate to prevent flame spread on to roof deck and substrate.
When high wind gusts are present, notify the safety officer and cease all
use of torching equipment until wind conditions lower and authorization
from the safety officer to proceed is received.
1.11 SEQUENCING
Coordinate the work with other trades to ensure that components which are
to be secured to or stripped into the roofing system are available and that
permanent flashing and counter flashing, per NRCA Details, and are
installed as the work progresses. Ensure temporary protection measures are
in place to preclude moisture intrusion or damage to installed materials.
Application of roofing must immediately follow application of insulation as
a continuous operation. Coordinate roofing operations with insulation work
so that all roof insulation applied each day is covered with roof membrane
installation the same day.
1.12 WARRANTY
Provide roof system material, water tightness and workmanship warranties

meeting specified requirements. Provide revision or amendment to standard
membrane manufacturer warranty as required to comply with the specified
requirements; minimum manufacturer warranty shall have no dollar limit,
cover full system water-tightness, and shall have a minimum duration of 20
years.
1.12.1 Roof Membrane Manufacturer Warranty
Furnish the roof membrane manufacturer's 20-year no dollar limit roof

system materials and water tightness and installation workmanship warranty,
including flashing, insulation in compliance with ASTM C1289, and
accessories necessary for a watertight roof system construction. Provide
warranty directly to the Government and commence warranty effective date at
time of Government's acceptance of the roof work. The warranty must state
that:
a. If within the warranty period the roof system, as installed for its
intended use in the normal climatic and environmental conditions of the
facility, becomes non-watertight, shows evidence of moisture intrusion
within the assembly, blisters, splits, tears, delaminates, separates at
the seams, or shows evidence of excessive weathering due to defective
materials or installation workmanship, the repair or replacement of the
defective and damaged materials of the roof system assembly and
correction of defective workmanship are the responsibility of the roof
membrane manufacturer. All costs associated with the repair or
replacement work are the responsibility of the roof membrane
manufacturer.

12/26/2018
b. When the manufacturer or his approved applicator fail to perform the

repairs within 32 hours of notification, emergency temporary repairs
performed by others does not void the warranty.
c. Upon completion of installation, and acceptance by the Contracting

Officer and Roofing System Engineer of Record, the manufacturer must
supply the appropriate warranty to the Owner.
d. Provide Wind Uplift Rider that states manufacture warrants roofing

system to not be damaged by a windstorm with wind speeds equal to or in
excess of 120 miles per hour before the expiration of the warranty as
measured by the office of the National Weather Service nearest the
location of the roofing system using the 3-second gust wind speed
measurement technique. Wind Uplift Rider shall also state, if a wind
related warranted leak occurs during the term of the warranty, the
manufacturer will promptly repair the affected area of the roof so as
to return it to a watertight condition.
e. Installer must submit a minimum two year warranty to the membrane

manufacturer from the date of acceptance, with a copy to the
1.12.2 Roofing System Installer Warranty
The roof system installer must warrant for a period of two years that the
roof system, as installed, is free from defects in installation
workmanship, to include the roof membrane, flashing, insulation,
accessories, attachments, and sheet metal installation integral to a
complete watertight roof system assembly. Write the warranty directly to
the Government. The roof system installer is responsible for correction of
defective workmanship and replacement of damaged or affected materials.
The roof system installer is responsible for all costs associated with the
repair or replacement work.
Repair or replacement work, ARMA 410BUR88, ARMA 460LSR97, NRCA C3701 that
becomes necessary within the warranty period and accomplished in a manner
so as to restore the integrity of the roof system assembly and validity of
the roof membrane manufacturer warranty for the remainder of the
manufacturer warranty period.
The entire roofing and flashing system must be in accordance with specified
and indicated requirements, including fire and wind resistance (
ANSI/SPRI ES-1), Florida Building Code (FBC Chapter 16), and ASCE 7
requirements. Work not specifically addressed and any deviation from
specified requirements must be in general accordance with recommendations
of the NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual, membrane manufacturer
published recommendations and details, and compatible with surrounding
components and construction. Submit any deviation from specified or
indicated requirements to the Contracting Officer for approval prior to
installation.

12/26/2018
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

comparable product to the SBS modified bitumen roofing system listed below.
NOTE: The Contractor is not limited to this source. Other sources for
the product may be submitted for approval.
SOPREMA, Inc.
310 Quail Dr. Wadsworth, OH
Tel: 800-356-3521
www.soprema.us
2.2 MODIFIED BITUMEN SHEETS AND POLYESTER FELT MATERIALS
Furnish a combination of specified materials that comprise the modified

bitumen manufacturer's standard system of the number and type of plies
specified. Materials provided must be suitable for the service and
climatic conditions of the installation. Modified bitumen sheets must be
watertight and visually free of pinholes, particles of foreign matter,
non-dispersed raw material, factory splices, or other conditions that might
affect serviceability. Polymer modifier must comply with ARMA PMBRG98 and
be uniformly dispersed throughout the sheet. Edges of sheet must be
straight and flat.
For specific combination of products, forming the acceptable roofing

system, refer to profile details on drawings.
A. Cap Sheet:
1. At Roofs A - H and J; Highly Reflective with granules SBS modified

bitumen cap sheet applied to a non-woven polyester reinforcing mat
equal to SOPRALENE FLAM 250 FR GR: ASTM D6164/D6164M, Type II,
Grade G, minimum 157 mils thick.
B. Interply:
1. At Roofs A - H; SBS modified bitumen applied onto a non-woven

polyester reinforcement with a film on both the underside and
topside surfaces equal to SOPRALENE FLAM 180: ASTM D6164 / D6164M,
Type I, Grade S, minimum 120 mils thick.
2. At Roof J; SBS modified bitumen applied onto a non-woven polyester

reinforcement with a film on both the underside and topside
surface equal to SOPRAFIX BASE 614: ASTM D6164 / D6164M, Type II,
Grade S, minimum 157 mils thick.
C. Coverboard Base Ply:
1. At Roofs A - H; multi-ply, semi-grid asphaltic roofing substrate

board equal to SOPRABOARD: ASTM D3273 and ASTM D6506 Class B, Type
2 and Type 3. Thickness of 1/8 inch minimum as shown on drawings.
2. At Roof J; High performance gypsum-fiber roof board equal to USG

Secure: ASTM C1278/C1278M, ASTM C473 and ASTM D3273. Thickness of
1/2 inch as shown on drawings.
D. Base Sheet (to be provided below roof insulation as required):

12/26/2018
1. At Roofs A- H; SBS modified bitumen applied onto a non-woven

polyester reinforcement base ply with a film underside and a high
brush sanded topside surface equal to SOPRALENE 180 SP 3.5: ASTM
ASTM D6164 / D6164M, Type I, Grade S, minimum 140 mils thick.
2.3 BASE FLASHING MEMBRANE
Membrane manufacturer's standard, polyurethane bituminous resin flashing

system compatible with the roof membrane specified and as recommended in
membrane manufacturer's published literature as indicated on drawings.
Flashing membranes must meet or exceed the properties of the material
standards specified for the modified bitumen base, interply and cap sheet,
except that flashing membrane thickness must be as recommended by the
membrane manufacturer. Metal clad flashing membrane must comply with
ASTM D6164 / D6164M.
2.4 COLD-APPLIED MEMBRANE ADHESIVE
Membrane manufacturer's recommended low volatile organic compound (VOC)

cold process adhesive for application of the membrane plies as indicated on
drawings.
2.5 MEMBRANE SURFACING
Provide modified bitumen roof membrane cap sheet as follows:
1. Factory-applied granule surfacing of light color as selected from

membrane manufacturer's standard.
2.6 PRIMER
Asphalt primer, ASTM D41/D41M, or other primer compatible with the

application and as approved in writing by the modified bitumen membrane
manufacturer.
2.7 MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOF CEMENT
ASTM D4586/D4586M, Type II for vertical surfaces, Type I for horizontal

surfaces, compatible with the modified bitumen roof membrane and as
recommended by the modified bitumen membrane manufacturer.
2.8 FASTENERS AND PLATES
Provide coated, corrosion-resistant fasteners as recommended by the

modified bitumen sheet manufacturer's printed instructions and meeting the
requirements of ASTM A153/A153M, FM 4470 and FM APP GUIDE for Class I roof
deck construction and the wind uplift resistance specified. For fastening
of membrane or felts to wood materials, provide fasteners driven through 3
inch diameter metal discs, or one piece composite fasteners with heads not
less than 1 inch in diameter or 1 inch square with rounded or 45 degree
tapered corners.
2.8.1 Masonry or Concrete Walls and Vertical Surfaces
Use hardened steel nails or screws with flat heads, diamond shaped points,
and mechanically deformed shanks not less than 3-1/2 inch long for securing
felts, modified bitumen sheets, metal items, and accessories to masonry or
concrete walls and vertical surfaces. Use power-driven fasteners only when

12/26/2018
approved in writing by the Contracting Officer.
2.8.2 Metal Plates
Provide flat corrosion-resistant round stress plates as recommended by the

modified bitumen sheet manufacturer's printed instructions and meeting the
requirements of ASTM A153/A153M, FM 4470; not less than 2 inch in
diameter. Form discs to prevent dishing or cupping.
2.9 PRE-MANUFACTURED ACCESSORIES
Pre-manufactured accessories must be manufacturer's standard for intended

purpose, comply with applicable specification section, compatible with the
membrane roof system and approved for use by the modified bitumen membrane
manufacturer.
2.10 ROOF INSULATION BELOW MEMBRANE SYSTEM
Insulation must be compatible with the roof membrane, approved by the

membrane manufacturer and meeting all the requirements of as specified in
Roof Insulation Sections.
2.11 WALKWAYS AND WALKPADS
2.11.1 Walkways
Provide new walkway consisting of Highly Reflective with granules SBS

modified bitumen cap sheet applied to a non-woven polyester reinforcing mat
equal to SOPRALENE FLAM 250 FR GR: ASTM D6164/D6164M, Type II, Grade G,
minimum 157 mils thick. Granules shall be contrasting colors, selected
from the manufacturer's standard available colors and shall be approved by
the Contracting Officer.
2.11.2 Walkpads
In lieu of walkways indicated on paragraph 2.11.1, provide walkway membrane

made up of a non-woven polyester reinforcement with extra static and
dynamic puncture resistance and elastomeric bitumen equal to SOPRAWALK.
2.12 EXPANSION JOINT MEMBRANES
Provide SBS modified bitumen expansion joint membranes equal to SOPRAJOINT

as indicated on drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for

compliance with the following requirements and other conditions affecting
performance of roofing system:
a. Drains, curbs, cants, control joints, expansion joints, perimeter

walls, roof penetrating components, and equipment supports are in place.
b. Surfaces are rigid, clean, dry, smooth, and free from cracks, holes,
and sharp changes in elevation. Joints in the substrate are sealed to
prevent dripping of bitumen into building or down exterior walls.

12/26/2018
c. The plane of the substrate does not vary more than 1/4 inch within an
area 10 by 10 foot when checked with a10 foot straight edge placed
anywhere on the substrate.
d. Substrate is sloped as indicated to provide positive drainage.
e. Walls and vertical surfaces are constructed to receive counter

flashing, and will permit mechanical fastening of the base flashing
materials.
f. Treated wood nailers are in place on non-nailable surfaces, to permit

nailing of base flashing at minimum height of 8 inch above finished
roofing surface.
g. Protect all combustible materials and surfaces which may contain

concealed combustible or flammable materials. All fire extinguishing
equipment has been placed as specified.
h. Verify all Fire Watch personnel assignments.
i. Treated wood nailers are fastened in place at eaves, gable ends,

openings, and intersections with vertical surfaces for securing of
membrane, edging strips, attachment flanges of sheet metal, and roof
fixtures. Surface-applied nailers are the same thickness as the roof
insulation.
j. Cants are securely fastened in place in the angles formed by walls and
other vertical surfaces. The angle of the cant is 45 degrees and the
height of the vertical leg is not less than 3 inch.
k. Cast-in-place substrates have been allowed to cure and the surface

dryness per ASTM D4263 and the requirements specified in ARMA and NRCA
Manual guidelines.
l. Joints between precast concrete deck units are grouted, leveled, and
stripped in with felt or bituminous stripping membrane set in
bituminous cement prior to applying other roofing materials over the
area.
m. Roof deck and framing are sloped as indicated to provide positive

drainage.
n. Coordinate with the Contracting Officer to shut down air intake

equipment in the vicinity of the Work. Cover air intake louvers
before proceeding with repair or re-roofing work that could affect
indoor air quality or activate smoke detectors in the ductwork.
o. Maintain roof drains and/or gutter/downspout system in functioning

condition to ensure roof drainage at end of each workday. Prevent
debris from entering or blocking roof drainage system. Use roof
drainage blocks, dams and/or plugs specifically designed for this
purpose. Remove roof drainage blocks, dams and/or plugs at end of each
workday, when no work is taking place, or when rain is forecast.
1. If roof drainage will be temporarily blocked or unserviceable due

to roofing system installation of new membrane roofing system,
provide alternative drainage method to remove water and eliminate
ponding. Do not permit water to enter into or under existing
membrane roofing system components that are to remain.

12/26/2018
3.2 PREPARATION
3.2.1 General
Complete application of roofing in a continuous operation. Remove and

apply only as much roofing in one day as can be completed that same day.
Notify the Contracting Officer each day of the extent of roof repair and/or
re- roofing.
Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental

to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written
instructions. Remove sharp projections.
Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and
from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove
roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast.
Prime surface of concrete deck with asphalt primer at a rate of 3/4 gal/100
sq. ft. and allow primer to dry.
3.2.2 Protection of Property
3.2.2.1 Protective Coverings
Install protective coverings at paving and building walls adjacent to

hoists prior to starting the work. Lap protective coverings not less than
6 inch, secure against wind, and vent to prevent collection of moisture on
covered surfaces. Keep protective coverings in place for the duration of
the roofing work.
3.2.3 Equipment
3.2.3.1 Mechanical Application Devices
Mount mechanical application devices on pneumatic-tired wheels. Use

devices designed and maintained to operate without damaging the insulation,
roofing membrane, or structural components.
3.2.3.2 Flame-Heated Equipment
Do not place flame-heated equipment on roof. Provide and maintain a fire

extinguisher adjacent to flame-heated equipment and on the roof.
3.2.3.3 Open Flame Application Equipment
Torches and other open flame equipment must be specifically designated for
use in application of modified bitumen materials and approved by the
modified bitumen sheet manufacturer. Open flame equipment must not be
ignited (burning) when left unattended. Provide and maintain a fire
extinguisher adjacent to open flame equipment on the roof. Specific
requirements for fire watches and burn permits exist. These requirements
will be reviewed at the preroofing conference.
3.2.4 Priming of Surfaces
Prime all surfaces to be in contact with adhered membrane materials. Apply

primer at the rate of 0.75 gallon per 100 sq. ft. or as recommended by
modified bitumen sheet manufacturer's printed instructions to promote
adhesion of membrane materials. Allow primer to dry prior to application

12/26/2018
of membrane materials to primed surface. Avoid flammable primer material

conditions in torch applied membrane applications.
3.2.4.1 Priming of Concrete and Masonry Surfaces
After surface dryness requirements have been met, coat concrete and masonry
surfaces which are to receive membrane materials uniformly with primer.
3.2.4.2 Priming of Metal Surfaces
Prime flanges of metal components to be embedded into the roof system prior
to setting in bituminous materials or stripping into roofing system.
3.2.5 Membrane Preparation
Unroll modified bitumen membrane materials and allow to relax a minimum of

30 minutes prior to installation. In cold weather, adhere to membrane
manufacturer's additional recommendations for pre-installation membrane
handling and preparation. Inspect for damage, pinholes, particles of
foreign matter, non-dispersed raw material, factory splices, or other
conditions that might affect serviceability. Edges of seams must be
straight and flat so that they may be seamed to one another without forming
fish mouths or wrinkles. Discard damaged or defective materials.
3.3 APPLICATION OF MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRANE
Apply roofing materials as specified herein unless approved otherwise by

the Contracting Officer. Keep roofing materials dry before and during
application. Install roofing membrane system according to roofing system
manufacturer's written instructions and applicable recommendations of
ARMA/NRCA "Quality Control Guidelines for the Application of Polymer
Modified Bitumen Roofing", "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" and
requirements in this Section.
Start installation of roofing membrane in presence of roofing system

manufacturer's technical personnel.
Coordinate installing roofing system so insulation and other components of

the roofing membrane system not permanently exposed are not subjected to
precipitation or left uncovered at the end of the workday or when rain is
forecast.
Provide tie-offs at end of each day's work to cover exposed roofing

membrane sheets and insulation with a course of coated felt set in roofing
cement with joints and edges sealed.
1. Complete terminations and base flashing and provide temporary seals to

prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system.
Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining
roofing.
3.3.1 Phased Membrane Construction
Phased application of membrane plies is prohibited unless otherwise

approved by the Contracting Officer and supported by the membrane
manufacturer's written application instructions. If cap sheet
installation is delayed, thoroughly clean the applied membrane material
surface and dry immediately prior to cap sheet installation. Priming of
the applied membrane surface may be required at the discretion of the

12/26/2018
Contracting Officer prior to cap sheet installation.
3.3.2 Torch Applied Modified Bitumen Membrane
Ensure substrate membrane surfaces are warmed either naturally or by torch

during the installation. Apply heat evenly to underside of roll membrane
being installed and exposed side lap area of previously installed sheet.
Provide for slight, uniform flow of bitumen in front of roll and full width
of roll as the material is being rolled or set into place. Apply uniform
positive pressure to ensure membrane is fully adhered and all laps are
sealed. Prior to forming lap over granulated surfaces, embed granules of
the receiving sheet by heating and troweling-in the granules to form a
uniform black compound surface. Roll all lap areas with a weighted roller
immediately after forming lap. Provide for visual bleed out of compound in
lap areas. Avoid overheating the membrane or burning through to membrane
reinforcement. Inspect and ensure all lap areas are fully sealed.
3.3.3 Base Sheet Installation
Base sheets are to be adhered in accordance with membrane manufacturer's

printed instructions.
On non-nailable substrates apply cold adhesive with airless sprayer or a

1/4 inch saw-toothed rubber squeegee and at application rate recommended by
the membrane manufacturer. Fully cover substrate with cold adhesive.
Ensure laps areas of base sheet are fully sealed. Roll and broom in the
base sheet to ensure full contract with the adhesive application.
On nailable substrates, mechanically fasten base sheet in conformance with

specified wind resistance requirements and membrane manufacturer's printed
instructions, and to include increased fastening frequency in corner and
perimeter areas. Drive fasteners flush with no dishing or cupping of
fastener plate. Where applicable, mechanically fasten base sheet in
conjunction with insulation to the substrate, in accordance with membrane
manufacturers printed instructions.
Apply sheets in a continuous operation with side laps at a minimum of 2

inches unless greater side lap is recommended by the manufacturer's
standard written application instructions. Provide end laps of not less
than 6 inches and staggered a minimum of 36 inches. Apply sheets at right
angles to the roof slope so that the direction of water flow is over and
not against the laps.
Extend base sheets approximately 2 inches above the top of cant strips at
vertical surfaces and to the top of cant strips elsewhere. Trim base sheet
to a neat fit around vent pipes, roof drains, and other projections through
the roof. Application must be free of ridges, wrinkles, and buckles.
To preclude buckling and fish mouths, contractor is to unroll/relax all

roofing membrane prior to installation in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendation.
3.3.4 Inter-Ply Membrane Installation
Install inter-ply sheets according to roofing system manufacturer's written

instructions starting at low point of roofing system. Ensure proper sheet
alignment prior to installation. Apply membrane layers perpendicular to
slope of roof in shingle fashion to shed water, including application on
areas of tapered insulation that change slope direction. Bucking or

12/26/2018
backwater laps are prohibited.
Membrane sheets to be adhered underlying substrate materials. Provide

minimum 3 inch side lap and minimum 6 inch end lap and as otherwise
required by membrane manufacturer.
Stagger end laps minimum 36 inches. Offset side laps between membrane
layers a minimum of 12 inches. Offset end laps between membrane layers a
minimum of 36 inches.
Install all membrane layers the same workday, unless supported otherwise by
roof membrane manufacturer application instructions and approved by the
Contracting Officer. Provide tight smooth laminations of each membrane
layer without wrinkles, ridges, buckles, kinks, fish mouths, or voids.
Ensure full membrane adhesion and full lap seals. Rework to seal any open
laps prior to application of subsequent membrane layers. The completed
membrane application must be free of surface abrasions, air pockets,
blisters, ridges, wrinkles, buckles, kinks, fish mouths, voids, or open
seams.

recommendation.
3.3.5 Cap Sheet Installation
Install cap sheet according to roofing system manufacturer's written

instructions starting at low point of roofing system.
Underlying applied membrane must be inspected and repaired free of damage,

holes, puncture, gouges, abrasions, and any other defects, and free of
moisture, loose materials, debris, sediments, dust, and any other
conditions required by the membrane manufacturer prior to cap sheet
installation. Do not apply cap sheet if rain has occurred within the
previous 24 hours. Align cap membrane and apply by the specified method
with the proper side and end lap widths. Set and torch apply cap sheet as
recommended by the modified bitumen membrane manufacturer. Cut at a 45
degree angle across selvage edge of cap membrane to be overlapped in end
lap areas prior to applying overlapping cap membrane. Apply matching
granules in any areas of bitumen adhesive bleed out while the asphalt is
still hot and adhesive is still tacky. Minimize traffic on newly installed
cap sheet membrane.

recommendation.
3.3.6 Membrane Flashing
Apply polyurethane bituminous resin flashing system and sheet flashing in

the angles formed where the roof deck abuts walls, curbs, ventilators,
pipes, and other vertical surfaces, and where necessary to make the work
watertight. Apply membrane flashing in accordance with the roof membrane
manufacturers printed instructions and as specified. Cut at a 45 degree
angle across terminating end lap area of cap membrane prior to applying
adjacent overlapping cap membrane. Press flashing into place to ensure
full adhesion and avoid bridging. Ensure full lap seal in all lap areas.
Mechanically fasten top edge of modified bituminous base flashing 150 mm (6
inches) on center through minimum 1 inch diameter tin caps with fasteners

12/26/2018
of sufficient length to embed minimum one inch into attachment substrate.

Apply matching granules in any areas of asphalt adhesive bleed out while
the asphalt is still hot and adhesive is still tacky. Apply membrane liner
over top of exposed nailers and blocking and to overlap top edge of base
flashing installation at curbs, parapet walls, expansion joints and as
otherwise indicated to serve as waterproof lining under sheet metal
flashing components. Metal flashing per SMACNA 1793 guidelines and
standards as specified under Section 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND
TRIM.
3.3.6.1 Membrane Strip Flashing
Set primed flanges of metal flashing in full bed of modified bituminous

cement material and securely fasten through to attachment substrate.
Strip-in with membrane flashing with modified bituminous cement and 1 ply
of roof membrane so that strip extends not less than 4 inch beyond outer
edge of flange. Where multiple membrane stripping plies are installed,
extend each additional stripping ply minimum 4 inch beyond edge of previous
ply.
3.3.7 Set-On Accessories
Specific method of installing set-on accessories must permit normal

movement due to expansion, contraction, vibration, and similar occurrences
without damaging roofing membrane. Do not mechanically secure set-on
accessories through roofing membrane into roof deck substrate.
3.3.8 Lightning Protection
Flash and attach lightning protection system components to the roof

membrane in a manner acceptable to the roof membrane manufacturer.
3.3.9 Correction Of Deficiencies
Where any form of deficiency is found, additional measures must be taken as

deemed necessary by the Contracting Officer to determine the extent of the
deficiency and corrective actions must be as directed by the Contracting
Officer.
3.3.10 Field Quality Control
Perform field tests in the presence of the Contracting Officer. Notify the
Contracting Officer one day before performing tests.
3.3.10.1 Test for Surface Dryness
Before application of membrane sheets and starting work on the area to be

roofed, perform test for surface dryness in accordance with the following:
a. Foaming: When poured on the surface to which membrane materials are to

be applied, one pint of asphalt when heated in the range of 350 to 400
degrees F, must not foam upon contact.
b. Strippability: On cementitious substrate surfaces, after asphalt used

in the foaming test application has cooled to ambient temperatures,
test coating for adherence. Should a portion of the sample be readily
stripped clean from the surface, do not consider the surface to be dry
and do not start application. Should rain occur during application,
stop work and do not resume until surface has been tested by the method

12/26/2018
above and found dry.
c. Prior to installing any roof system on a concrete deck, conduct a test

per ASTM D4263. The deck is acceptable for roof system application
when there is no visible moisture on underside of plastic sheet after
24 hours.
A. Test Cuts: Test specimens will be removed to evaluate problems

observed during quality-assurance inspections of roofing membrane as
follows:
1. Approximate quantities of components within roofing membrane will

be determined according to ASTM D3617 and ASTM D5147/D5147M.
2. Test specimens will be to examine the inter-ply for non-adhesion

and/or voids according to ASTM D3617, ASTM D5147/D5147M and to
comply with criteria established in Appendix 3 of ARMA/NRCA
"Quality Control Guidelines for the Application of Polymer
Modified Bitumen Roofing."
3. Cut across width of modified bitumen sheets as directed by the

Contracting Officer. Cut samples will be examined by the
Contracting Officer for specified number of plies, proper lap
width, complete lap seal, full uniform adhesive compound
application and adhesion, full bond between plies, harmful foreign
materials, presence of moisture, and wet insulation. Where cuts
are not retained by the Contracting Officer or disposed, set cut
strip back in cut area in bed of modified bitumen cement. Repair
area of cut with new minimum two-ply modified bitumen membrane
patch.
B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's

technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion and
submit report to the Contracting Officer.
1. Notify Contracting Officer or Design Engineering Architect 48

hours in advance of date and time of inspection.
2. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where

test results or inspections indicate that they do not comply with
specified requirements.
3. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will

be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional
work with specified requirements.
3.3.10.2 Construction Monitoring
During progress of the roof work, Contractor must make visual inspections
as necessary to ensure compliance with specified parameters. Additionally,
verify the following:
a. Materials comply with the specified requirements.
b. Materials are not installed in adverse weather conditions.
All materials are properly stored, handled and protected from moisture
or other damages.

12/26/2018
c. Equipment is in working order. Metering devices are accurate.
d. Substrates are in acceptable condition, in compliance with

specification, prior to application of subsequent materials.
(1) Nailers and blocking are provided where and as needed.
Insulation substrate is smooth, properly secured to its substrate,

and without excessive gaps prior to membrane application.
(2) The proper number, type, and spacing of fasteners are installed.
Membrane heating, hot mopping, or adhesive application is provided

uniformly and as necessary to ensure full adhesion of roll
materials. Asphalt is heated and applied within the specified
temperature range.
The proper number and types of plies are installed, with the specified
overlaps.
Applied membrane surface is inspected, cleaned, dry, and repaired as

necessary prior to cap sheet installation.
(3) Lap areas of all plies are completely sealed.
Membrane is fully adhered without ridges, wrinkles, kinks, fishmouths,

or other voids or delaminations.
Installer adheres to specified and detailed application parameters.
Associated flashing and sheet metal are installed in a timely manner

in accord with the specified requirements.
Temporary protection measures are in place at the end of each work

shift.
3.3.11 Protection and Cleaning
A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of

construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or
endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage,
describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to
the Contracting Officer and Design Engineering Architect.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply

with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing
system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of
Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.
C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning

agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected
construction.
D. Remove debris, scraps, containers and other rubbish and trash resulting
from installation of the roofing system from job site each day.
E. At the end of the day's work and when precipitation is imminent,

protect applied modified bitumen roofing system from water intrusion.

12/26/2018
3.3.12 Instructions to Government Contractor Personnel
Furnish written and verbal instructions on proper maintenance procedures to

designated Government personnel. Furnish instructions by a competent
representative of the modified bitumen membrane manufacturer and include a
minimum of 4 hours on maintenance and emergency repair of the membrane.
Include a demonstration of membrane repair, and give sources of required
special tools. Furnish information on safety requirements during
maintenance and emergency repair operations.
3.3.13 Warranty Sign
For each roof, furnish and install a .032 inch aluminum, 8 1/2 x 11 inch
minimum, photoengraved sign, for exterior display. Refer to Appendix 2 for
Warranty Sign, graphic sample. Install at top of access location, as
directed by Contracting Officer.

12/26/2018
SECTION 07 62 00
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
08/09
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1.2 REFERENCES
1.4 DEFINITIONS
1.6 SUBMITTALS
1.7.1 Qualification of Fabricator
1.7.2 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard
1.7.3 Warranty
1.7.4 Mockups
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.8.1 Delivery
1.8.2 Storage and Protection
1.8.3 Handling
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

2.1.1 General
2.2 STAINLESS STEEL SHEET
2.3.1 General
2.3.2 Fasteners
2.3.3 Solder
2.3.4 Sealant Tape
2.3.5 Cements and Sealing Compounds
2.4 REGLETS
2.5 FABRICATION
2.5.1 General
PART 3 EXECUTION

3.2 WORKMANSHIP
3.3 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
3.4.1 General
3.4.2 Metal Protection
3.4.3 Expansion Provisions
3.4.4 Joint Sealants
3.4.5 Soldered Joints
3.5 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
3.5.1 General
12/26/2018
3.5.2 Hanging Gutters

3.5.3 Downspouts
3.5.4 Splash Blocks/Pans
3.6 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
3.6.1 General
3.6.2 Roof Edge Flashing
3.6.3 Parapet Coping Cap and Metal Cap Flashing
3.6.4 Pipe or Post Counter-Flashing
3.6.5 Counter-Flashing
3.6.6 Roof-Penetration Flashing
3.7 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION
3.8 ERECTION TOLERANCES
3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
3.10 PROCEDURE
12/26/2018
SECTION 07 62 00
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

08/09
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
This Section includes, but is not limited to, replacement of sheet metal
flashing and trim and the installation of new sheet metal flashing and trim
and including attachment system components and accessories as required for
a complete weather-tight roof system.
All work shall comply with the ARMA, NRCA and SMACNA Manual guidelines and
standards stated within this Section.
1.2 REFERENCES
ASTM A666 (2015) Standard Specification for Annealed

or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel
Sheet, Strip, Plate and Flat Bar
ASTM A240/A240M (2017) Standard Specification for Chromium

and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate,
Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and
for General Applications
ASTM B32 (2008; R 2014) Standard Specification for

Solder Metal
ASTM C920 (2018) Standard Specification for

Elastomeric Joint Sealants

ASTM D1187 (2011e1) Standard Specification for

Asphalt-Base Emulsions for Use as
Protective Coatings for Metal
ASTM D4586 (2000) Standard Specification for Asphalt

Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free

12/26/2018
COPPER DEVELOPMENT ASSOCIATION (CDA)
CDA 4115 (2005) Minimum Design Loads for Buildings


(SMACNA)
SMACNA 1013 (2003e6) Architectural Sheet Metal Manual
SMACNA Arch. Manual (2012) Architectural Sheet Metal Manual

7th Edition

otherwise indicated to remain the Owner's property, demolished materials
are the Contractor's property and to be removed from Project site.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D1079 and glossary in NRCA "The

NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" (NRCA 0405) for definition of
terms related to roofing work in this Section.
A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies as indicated must

withstand wind loads, structural movement and exposure to weather
without failure due to defective manufacturing, fabrication,
installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal
flashing and trim must not rattle, leak, or loosen.
B. Finished sheet metalwork must form a weather-tight construction without

waves, warps, buckles, fastening stresses or distortion, which allows
for expansion and contraction.
C. Coordinate installation of sheet metal items used in conjunction with

roofing work to permit continuous roofing operations and other
operations in connection with sheet metalwork to accommodate the work
of other trades.
1.6 SUBMITTALS

PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Show fabrication drawings and installation layouts of sheet metal

flashing and trim, including plans, elevations, expansion-joint
locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop and
field-assembled work. Include the following:
1. Identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each
12/26/2018
item and location in Project.
2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including

profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions.
3. Details for joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing

and trim, including layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other
attachments. Include pattern of seams.
4. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed

points.
5. Details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including

showing direction of expansion and contraction.
6. Details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys,

rakes, crickets, and counter-flashing as applicable.
SD-03 Product Data
For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material

descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and
finishes for each manufactured product and accessory. As applicable submit
the following:
Covering on flat, sloped, or curved surfaces

Gutters
Downspouts
Gravel stops and fascias
Counter-flashing
Flashing at roof penetrations
Reglets
Coping Cap
Cap Flashing
Drip edge
Eave and Rake flashing
Primer
Fasteners
Indicate thicknesses, dimensions, fastenings and anchoring methods,

expansion joints, and other provisions necessary for thermal expansion and
contraction. Scaled manufacturer's catalog data may be submitted for
factory fabricated items.
SD-07 Certificates
Qualification of Fabricator
Certify that the fabricator of the sheet metal flashing and trim
meets requirements specified under paragraph entitled
"Qualification of Fabricator."
Warranty
Submit twenty (20) year "No-Dollar-Limit" warranty for labor and
12/26/2018
materials.
1.7.1 Qualification of Fabricator
Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate and install sheet
metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose
products have a record of successful in-service performance.
1.7.2 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard
Comply with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" (SMACNA 1013) unless
more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings.
Copper Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with CDA "Copper in Architecture

Handbook" (CDA 4115). Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more
stringent requirements are indicated.
1.7.3 Warranty
Provide roof system material and workmanship warranties meeting specified

requirements. Minimum manufacturer warranty shall be (20) year
"No-Dollar-Limit" warranty, covering full system water-tightness.
1.7.4 Mockups
Build mockups for non-standard and/or custom sheet metal fabrications to

verify and demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for
fabrication and installation.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.8.1 Delivery
Deliver materials in fabricator's original packaging and/or unopened

containers.
1.8.2 Storage and Protection
Store and protect materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions

and recommendations.
Protect materials against moisture absorption and contamination or other

damage.
Store all materials on clean raised platforms or pallets one level high in
dry locations with adequate ventilation, such as an enclosed building or
closed trailer.
Do not store materials in buildings under construction until concrete,

mortar, and plaster work is finished and dry.
Do not store materials outdoors unless approved by the Contracting Officer.

Completely cover materials stored outdoors, on and off roof, with
waterproof canvas protective covering. Do not use polyethylene sheet as a
covering. Tie covering securely to pallets to make completely
weatherproof. Provide sufficient ventilation to prevent condensation.
12/26/2018
Do not store more materials on the roof than can be installed the same day
and remove unused materials at end of each days work. Distribute materials
temporarily stored on roof to conform to indicate FBC Chapter 16 for live
load limits of the roof construction.
Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other
materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.
Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete
and masonry.
Immediately remove damaged or unsuitable materials from the site. Damaged

materials are to be marked by the Construction Manager.
1.8.3 Handling
Prevent damage to edges and ends of materials. Do not install damaged

materials in the work. Select and operate material handling equipment to
prevent damage to materials or applied roofing.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
2.1.1 General
Conform to the requirements, thicknesses and configurations specified and

established in SMACNA Arch. Manual for the materials.
Furnish sheet metal items in eight (8) to ten (10) foot lengths. Provide
accessories and other items essential to complete the sheet metal
installation. Make these accessories of the same materials as the items to
which they are applied. Fabricate sheet metal items of the materials
specified below and to the gauge, thickness, or weight shown in Table I at
the end of this section. Provide sheet metal items with mill finish unless
specified otherwise.
2.2 STAINLESS STEEL SHEET
ASTM A240/A240M or ASTM A666, Type 304, No. 2D finish.
2.3.1 General
Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective

coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required
for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation unless otherwise
indicated.
2.3.2 Fasteners
Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking

rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design
loads.
1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with

hex-washer head.
a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using
12/26/2018
plastic caps or factory-applied coating.
b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets

suitable for metal being fastened.
c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with

ferrule matching internal gutter width.
2. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.
2.3.3 Solder
Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B32, Grade Sn60, with an acid flux of
1.
type recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer.
2.3.4 Sealant Tape
Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound

sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic,
non-sag, nontoxic, non-staining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.
2.3.5 Cements and Sealing Compounds
Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant;

low modulus; of Type S, gun Grade NS, Class 50, and use classifications
required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain
watertight.
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187.
Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D4586, asbestos free, of consistency required

for application.
2.4 REGLETS
Manufactured units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to

provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counter-flashing pieces,
and compatible with flashing indicated with interlocking counter-flashing
on exterior face, of same metal as reglet.
1. Material as indicated: Stainless steel, 0.019 inch thick.
2. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide with slotted holes for fastening to

substrate, with neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers and
with channel for sealant at top edge.
3. Stucco Type: Provide with upturned fastening flange and extension leg
of length to match thickness of applied finish materials.
4. Concrete Type: Provide temporary closure tape to keep reglet free of

concrete materials, special fasteners for attaching reglet to concrete
forms, and guides to ensure alignment of reglet section ends.
5. Masonry Type: Provide with offset top flange for embedment in masonry
mortar joint.
6. Accessories:
a. Flexible-Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber
12/26/2018
accessory to secure flexible flashing in reglet where clearance

does not permit use of standard metal counter-flashing or where
Drawings show reglet without metal counter-flashing.
b. Counter-flashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be

installed before counter-flashing to prevent wind uplift of
counter-flashing lower edge.
7. Finish: Mill
2.5 FABRICATION
2.5.1 General
Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with

recommendations in SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to
design, dimensions, metal and other characteristics of item indicated.
Shop-fabricate items where practicable. Obtain field measurements for
accurate fit before shop fabrication.
Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning,
buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with
exposed edges folded back to form hems.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to

verify actual locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
Sheet metal work is to conform to drawing details and to the applicable

plate number and design and installation recommendations of SMACNA ASMM.
Finished sheet metal installation is to be free from water intrusion.
Surfaces to receive sheet metal work must be clean, smooth, dry, and free
from defects and projections, which might affect the work. Surfaces are to
be plumb and true to a tolerance of not more than 1/2 inch in 40 feet, with
no dips, waves, or uneven surfaces exceeding 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any
direction. Lines, arises, and angles shall be sharp and uniform. Exposed
edges of sheet metal are to be folded back to form a 1/2 inch wide hem on
the concealed side.
Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work
securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.
Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators,
sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal
flashing and trim system.
Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
3.2 WORKMANSHIP
Make lines, arises, and angles sharp and true. Free exposed surfaces from
visible wave, warp, and buckle, and tool marks. Fold back exposed edges
neatly to form a 1/2 inch hem on the concealed side. Make sheet metal
exposed to the weather water tight with provisions for expansion and
contraction.
12/26/2018
Make surfaces to receive sheet metal plumb and true, clean, even, smooth,
dry, and free of defects and projections, which might affect the
application. For installation of items not shown in detail or not covered
by specifications conform to the applicable requirements of
SMACNA Arch. Manual, Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. Provide sheet metal
flashing in the angles formed where roof decks abut walls, curbs,
ventilators, pipes, or other vertical surfaces and wherever indicated and
necessary to make the work water tight.
3.3 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. General: Install underlayment as indicated on Drawings and per

Manufacturer's Instructions.
B. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment with adhesive for

temporary anchorage to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet
metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with
lapped joints of not less than 2 inches.
C. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet

underlayment in a wrinkle free condition. Apply primer if required by
underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of
underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than
nails for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in
shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches
staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than
3-1/2 inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within
fourteen (14) days.
3.4.1 General
Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work
securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.
Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators,
sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal
flashing and trim system.
1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels
indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of
solder, welds, and sealant.
2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to

result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of
surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.
3. Space cleats not more than twelve (12) inches apart. Anchor each
cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.
4. Install all sheet metal flashing and trim components without

excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks.
5. Install sealant tape where indicated.
6. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
12/26/2018
3.4.2 Metal Protection
Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,

protect against galvanic action by applying permanent separation as
recommended by SMACNA.
3.4.3 Expansion Provisions
Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement
joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within twenty-four
(24) inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions
cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion
joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than one (1) inch deep,
filled with sealant concealed within joints.
3.4.4 Joint Sealants
1. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in

Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants".
3.4.5 Soldered Joints
Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin

edges of sheet metal to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches, except
reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work.
1. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder

and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely
remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.
2. Stainless-Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets using

solder recommended for stainless steel and acid flux. Promptly
remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning and soldering.
Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning
and neutralization.
3.5 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
3.5.1 General
Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage
system according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate
installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage
system.
3.5.2 Hanging Gutters
Join sections with riveted and soldered joints. Provide for thermal
expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchored gutter
brackets and straps spaced not more than 36 inches apart and slope to
downspouts. Provide end closures and seal watertight with soldered.
1. Fasten gutter spacers to front and back of gutter.
2. Loosely lock straps to front gutter bead and anchor to roof deck.
3. Anchor and loosely lock back edge of gutter to continuous cleat,

eave or apron flashing.
12/26/2018
4. Anchor back of gutter that extends onto roof deck with cleats
spaced not more than 24 inches apart.
5. Anchor gutter with spikes and ferrules spaced not more than 24
inches apart.
6. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but

not exceeding, 50 feet apart. Install expansion-joint caps.
3.5.3 Downspouts
Join sections with 1-1/2 inch telescoping joints.
1. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts

securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and bottom and at
approximately 60 inches o.c. in between.
2. Provide elbows at base of downspout to direct water away from

building.
3. Where applicable connect downspouts to underground drainage system

as indicated in construction documents.
4. Where applicable terminate downspouts at a maximum three (3)

inches (+/- 1") above splash block/pan as indicated in the
construction contract documents.
3.5.4 Splash Blocks/Pans
Install splash pans where downspouts discharge on roof surfaces and at

other locations as indicated. Set in asphalt roofing cement compatible with
roofing membrane.
3.6 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
3.6.1 General
Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance

requirements, and SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide
concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as
indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be
permanently watertight and weather resistant.
3.6.2 Roof Edge Flashing
Anchor edge flashing to resist uplift and outward forces according to

recommendations of roofing manufacturer, ASCE 7, FBC Chapter 15, NRCA, NRCA
Details SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated.
3.6.3 Parapet Coping Cap and Metal Cap Flashing
Anchor cap flashing to resist uplift and outward forces according to

recommendations of roofing manufacturer, ASCE 7, FBC Chapter 15, NRCA, NRCA
Details SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" SMACNA 1013 and as
indicated.
3.6.4 Pipe or Post Counter-Flashing
Install counter-flashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge
12/26/2018
flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches over base

flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.
3.6.5 Counter-Flashing
Coordinate installation of counter-flashing with installation of base

flashing. Insert counter-flashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly
to base flashing. Extend counter-flashing 4 inches over base flashing.
Lap counter-flashing joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with sealant.
Secure in a waterproof manner by means of anchor and washer at 36 inch
centers.
3.6.6 Roof-Penetration Flashing
Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of

roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant
and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof.
3.7 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION
Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude moisture

intrusion according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate
installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components
such as windows, doors, and louvers.
3.8 ERECTION TOLERANCES
Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of
1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8
inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
Clean all exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform
oxidation and weathering.
Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal

flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in
manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of
installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces.
Maintain in a clean condition during construction.
Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have
deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor
repair procedures.
3.10 PROCEDURE
Submit for approval prior to start of roofing work. Include a checklist of

points to be observed. Document the actual quality control observations
and inspections. Furnish a copy of the documentation to the Contracting
Officer at the end of each day.
12/26/2018
TABLE I. SHEET METAL WEIGHT, THICKNESS, AND GAUGE

Sheet Metal Items Copper, Ounces Aluminum, Inch Stainless Steel
Per Sq Ft Gauge
Building 16 .040 26
Expansion Joints
Cover
Waterstop-bellows 16 - 26
or flanged,
U-type.
Downspouts and 16 .025 28
leaders
Downspout 48(a) .032 26
straps,2-inch
Conductor Heads 16 - 26
Scupper 16 .032 26
Strainers, wire No. 9 gauge .114 dia. .148 dia.

diameter or gage
Flashing:
Base 10 .019 30
Cap (Counter 16 .019 26

Flashing)
Eave 12 .025 26
Spandrel Beam 10 .019 30
Stepped 16 .015 26
Valley 16 .015 26
Roof Drain Pipe 16 (b)

Vent Sleeve (c)
Coping 16 .040 24
Gravel Stops and Fascias:
Extrusions - .075 13
12/26/2018
TABLE I. SHEET METAL WEIGHT, THICKNESS, AND GAUGE

Sheet, smooth 20 .040 24
Edge Strip 20 .024 24
Gutters:
Gutter Section 16 .019 26
Continuous Cleat 16 .019 22
Hangers, 1 inch by 1/8 1 inch by 1 inch x

dimensions inch (a) .080 inch (c) .037 inch
Joint Cover 16 .032 28

Plates (See
Table II)
Reglets (c) 10 .019 30
Splash Pans 16 .040 24
Roof Penetrations 16 .040 26
(a) Brass
(b) Maybe lead weighing 4 pounds per square foot.
(c) Maybe polyvinyl chloride.
(d) 2.5 pound minimum lead sleeve with 4 inch flange. Where lead sleeve
is impractical, refer to paragraph entitled "Single Pipe Vents" for
optional material.
TABLE II. SHEET METAL JOINTS

TYPE OF JOINT
Copper &
Item Designation Stainless Aluminum Remarks
Steel
12/26/2018

TYPE OF JOINT
Joint Cap for 1.25 inch single 1.25 inch single

Bldg expansion lock, standing lock, standing - - -
seam, cleated seam, cleated
joint at roof
Flashing
Base One inch, 3 inch One inch flat Aluminum

lap for locked, producer's
expansion joint. soldered: recommended hard
sealed; 3 inch setting sealant
lap for for locked
expansion joint. aluminum joint.
Fill each metal
expansion joint
with a joint
compound.
Cap-in Reglet 3 inch lap 3 inch lap Seal groove with

joint sealing
compound.
Reglets Butt Joints - - - Seal reglates

groove with
joint sealing
compound.
Eave One inch flat One inch flat Same as base
locked, cleated. locked, locked, flashing.
One inch loose cleated one inch
expansion joint loose locked,
cleated. sealed expansion
joints cleated.
Stepped 3 inch lap 3 inch lap - - -
Valley 6 inch lap 6 inch lap - - -

cleated cleated
Edge Strip Butt Butt - - -
Gravel Stops:
Extrusions - - - Butt with 1/2 Use sheet

inch space flashing
beneath and a
cover plate.
Sheet smooth Butt with 1/4 Butt with 1/4 Use sheet
inch space inch space flashing
backup plate.
12/26/2018

TYPE OF JOINT
Sheet Corrugated Butt with 1/4 Butt with 1/4 Use sheet
inch space inch space flashing
beneath and a
cover plate or a
combination unit
Gutters 1.5 inch lap, one inch flat Aluminum
riveted and locked, riveted, producers
soldered and sealed recommended hard
setting sealant
for locked
aluminum joints
(a) Elastomeric flashing shall have 3 inch lap with manufacturer's
recommended sealant.
(b) Polyvinyl chloride reglet shall be sealed with manufacturer's

recommended sealant.
12/26/2018
SECTION 07 92 00
JOINT SEALANTS
08/16
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.4 PRODUCT DATA
1.5 CERTIFICATIONS
1.5.1 Sealant Certifications
1.5.1.1 Adhesives and Sealants
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
1.8.1 Compatibility with Substrate
1.8.2 Joint Tolerance
1.8.3 Adhesion
1.9 SPECIAL WARRANTY
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT SUSTAINABILITY CRITERIA

2.1.1 Reduce Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) (Low-Emitting
Materials) for Products
2.2 MANUFACTURER
2.3 SEALANTS
2.3.1 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
2.4 PRIMERS
2.5 BOND BREAKERS
PART 3 EXECUTION

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
3.2.1 Steel Surfaces
3.2.2 Concrete and Masonry Surfaces
3.2.3 Wood Surfaces
3.2.4 Backing Material
3.2.5 Bond-Breaker Material
3.3 SEALANT PREPARATION
3.4 APPLICATION
3.4.1 Joint Width-To-Depth Ratios
3.4.2 Unacceptable Sealant Use
3.4.3 Primer
3.4.4 Backstops
3.4.5 Bond Breaker
3.4.6 Sealants
3.4.7 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE PROVISIONS
12/26/2018
3.5 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

3.5.1 Protection
3.5.2 Final Cleaning
12/26/2018
SECTION 07 92 00
JOINT SEALANTS
08/16
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASTM C1193 (2013) Standard Guide for Use of Joint

Sealants
ASTM C1521 (2013) Standard Practice for Evaluating

Adhesion of Installed Weatherproofing
Sealant Joints
ASTM C920 (2018) Standard Specification for

Elastomeric Joint Sealants
ASTM C1248 (2012) Standard Test Method for Staining

of Porous Substrate by Joint Sealants

CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC HEALTH (CDPH)
CDPH SECTION 01350 (2010; Version 1.1) Standard Method for

the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile
Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor
Sources using Environmental Chambers
SCIENTIFIC CERTIFICATION SYSTEMS (SCS)
SCS SCS Global Services (SCS)Indoor Advantage
SOUTH COAST AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT DISTRICT (SCAQMD)
SCAQMD Rule 1168 (2017) Adhesive and Sealant Applications
UL 2818 (2013) GREENGUARD Certification Program

For Chemical Emissions For Building
Materials, Finishes And Furnishings
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D1079 and glossary in NRCA

"The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" (NRCA 0405) for definition
of terms related to roofing work in this Section.
12/26/2018
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-03 Product Data
For each type of joint sealant product indicated. Include material

descriptions and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory.
Elastomeric Sealants
Primers
Bond Breakers
Joint Backer
Backstops
SD-06 Test Reports
Field Adhesion
SD-07 Certificates
Certificates of compliance stating that the materials conform to the

specified requirements.
Sealant
Submit Manufacturer's Installation instructions for the following in

accordance with paragraph entitled, "Sealants," of this section.
Single-Component Elastomeric Sealant
1.4 PRODUCT DATA
Include storage requirements, shelf life, curing time, instructions for

mixing and application, and accessories. Provide manufacturer's Safety
Data Sheet (SDS) for each solvent, primer and sealant material proposed.
1.5 CERTIFICATIONS
1.5.1 Sealant Certifications
Submit required Sealant certifications in one submittal package.
1.5.1.1 Adhesives and Sealants
Provide products certified to meet indoor air quality requirements by

UL 2818 (Greenguard) Gold, SCS Global Services Indoor Advantage Gold or
provide validation by other third-party program that products meet the
requirements of this paragraph. Sealants and non-aerosol adhesive products
12/26/2018
used on the interior of the building (defined as inside of the

weatherproofing system) must meet either emissions requirements of
CDPH SECTION 01350 (limit requirements for either office or classroom
spaces regardless of space type) or VOC content requirements of
SCAQMD Rule 1168. Provide current product certification documentation from
certification body.
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
Apply sealant when the ambient temperature is between 40 and 90 degrees F.
Deliver materials to the jobsite in unopened manufacturers' sealed shipping

containers, with brand name, date of manufacture, color, and material
designation clearly marked thereon. Label elastomeric sealant containers
to identify type, class, grade, and use. Handle and store materials in
accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Prevent exposure to
foreign materials or subjection to sustained temperatures exceeding 90
degrees F or lower than 0 degrees F. Keep materials and containers closed
and separated from absorptive materials such as wood and insulation.
1.8.1 Compatibility with Substrate
Verify that each sealant is compatible for use with each joint substrate in
accordance with sealant manufacturer's printed recommendations for each
application.
1.8.2 Joint Tolerance
Provide joint tolerances in accordance with manufacturer's printed

instructions.
1.8.3 Adhesion
Provide in accordance with ASTM C1193 or ASTM C1521.
1.9 SPECIAL WARRANTY
Guarantee sealant joint against failure of sealant and against water

penetration through each sealed joint for five years.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCT SUSTAINABILITY CRITERIA
For products in this section, where applicable and to extent allowed by

performance criteria, provide and document the following:
2.1.1 Reduce Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) (Low-Emitting Materials) for

Products
Reduced VOC content is identified for some products in this section. Other
products listed in this section may be available with reduced VOC content;
identify those products that meet project requirements for reduced VOC
content, and provide documentation.
12/26/2018
2.2 MANUFACTURER
Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products

that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Sika Corporation, Inc.

2. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.
3. Tremco
2.3 SEALANTS
Provide sealant that has been tested and found suitable for the substrates
to which it will be applied.
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related

materials that are compatible with one another and with joint
substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated
by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B. Install joint sealants, joint fillers and related joint materials that
are non-staining to visible joint surfaces and surrounding substrate
surfaces.
C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: To be selected by Architect from

manufacturer's full range.
2.3.1 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
A. For exterior joints in horizontal, vertical and slopped traffic surfaces

such as, but not limited to:
1. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete.

2. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
3. Joints between sheet metal assemblies.
4. Joints in exterior insulation and finish systems.
5. Joints between metal panels.
6. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of
doors, windows and louvers.
7. Other joints as indicated.
B. Provide polyurethane single-component elastomeric sealant having a Shore

A hardness of not less than 15 or more than 50 and plus-or-minus 25 percent
joint movement capability; comply with ASTM C920, Type S or M, Grade P or
NS, Class 25.
C. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are

specified to be non-staining to porous substrates, provide products that
have undergone testing according to ASTM C1248 and have not stained porous
joint substrates indicated for Project.
2.4 PRIMERS
Provide a nonstaining, quick-drying type and consistency recommended by the

sealant manufacturer for the particular application.
2.5 BOND BREAKERS
Polyethylene tape or other adhesive faced tape as recommended by sealant
12/26/2018
manufacturer to prevent sealant contact where it would be detrimental to

sealant performance.
Joint backer: Closed cell or soft rod Polyethylene foam rod or other
compatible non-waxing, non-extruding, non-staining resilient material in
dimension 25 percent to 50 percent wider than joint width as recommended by
sealant manufacturer for conditions and exposures indicated.
Masking tape: Non-staining, non-absorbent tape product compatible with

joint sealants and adjacent joint surfaces that is suitable for masking.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Perform a field adhesion test in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions and ASTM C1193, Method A or ASTM C1521, Method A, Tail
Procedure. Remove sealants that fail adhesion testing; clean substrates,
reapply sealants, and re-test. Test sealants adjacent to failed sealants.
Submit field adhesion test report indicating tests, locations, dates,
results, and remedial actions taken.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
Prepare surfaces according to manufacturer's printed installation

instructions. Clean surfaces from dirt, frost, moisture, grease, oil, wax,
lacquer, paint, or other foreign matter that would destroy or impair
adhesion. Remove oil and grease with solvent; thoroughly remove solvents
prior to sealant installation. Wipe surfaces dry with clean cloths. When
resealing an existing joint, remove existing caulk or sealant prior to
applying new sealant. For surface types not listed below, provide in
accordance with sealant manufacturer's printed instructions for each
specific surface.
3.2.1 Steel Surfaces
Remove loose mill scale by sandblasting or, if sandblasting is impractical

or would damage finished work, scraping and wire brushing. Remove
protective coatings by sandblasting or using a residue free solvent.
Remove resulting debris and solvent residue prior to sealant installation.
1. Remove all traces of previous sealant and joint backer by

mechanical methods, such as by cutting, grinding and wire rushing,
in a manner not damaging to surrounding surfaces.
2. Remove paints from joint surfaces except for permanent, protective

coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and
Compatibility by sealant manufacturer.
3. Remove wax, oil, grease, dirt film residues, temporary protective

coatings and other residues by wiping with cleaner recommended for
that purpose. Use clean, white, lint-free cloths and change
cloths frequently.
4. Remove dust by blowing clean with oil-free, compressed air.
3.2.2 Concrete and Masonry Surfaces
Where surfaces have been treated with curing compounds, oil, or other such
12/26/2018
materials, remove materials by sandblasting or wire brushing. Remove

laitance, efflorescence and loose mortar from the joint cavity. Remove
resulting debris prior to sealant installation.
3.2.3 Wood Surfaces
Ensure wood surfaces that will be in contact with sealants are free of
splinters, sawdust and other loose particles.
3.2.4 Backing Material
Provide joint backer material uniformly to depth required by sealant

manufacturer for proper joint design using a blunt instrument.
1. Fit securely by compressing backer material 25 percent to 50 percent so

no displacement occurs during tooling.
2. Avoid stretching or twisting joint backer.
3.2.5 Bond-Breaker Material
Provide bond-breaker where indicated or recommended by sealant

manufacturer, adhering strictly to the manufacturer's installation
requirements. Prime joint substrates where required.
1. Use and apply primer according to sealant manufacturer's

recommendations.
2. Confine primers to sealant bond surfaces; do not allow spillage or

migration onto adjoining surfaces.
Taping:
1. Use masking tape where required to prevent sealant or primer

contact with adjoining surfaces that would be permanently stained
or otherwise damaged by such contact or the cleaning methods
required for removal.
2. Apply tape so as not to shift readily and remove tape immediately

after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.3 SEALANT PREPARATION
Do not add liquids, solvents, or powders to sealants. Mix multicomponent

elastomeric sealants in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
3.4 APPLICATION
3.4.1 Joint Width-To-Depth Ratios
Acceptable Ratios:
12/26/2018
JOINT WIDTH JOINT DEPTH
Minimum Maximum
For metal, glass, or other nonporous surfaces:
1/4 inch (minimum) 1/4 inch 1/4 inch
over 1/4 inch 1/2 of width Equal to width
For wood, concrete, OR masonry:
1/4 inch (minimum) 1/4 inch 1/4 inch
over 1/4 inch to 1/2 1/4 inch Equal to width

inch
over 1/2 inch to 1 inch 1/2 inch 5/8 inch
Over 1 inch prohibited
Unacceptable Ratios: Where joints of acceptable width-to-depth ratios have

not been provided, clean out joints to acceptable depths and grind or cut
to acceptable widths without damage to the adjoining work. Grinding is
prohibited at metal surfaces.
3.4.2 Unacceptable Sealant Use
Do not install sealants in lieu of other required building enclosure

weatherproofing components such as flashing, drainage components, and joint
closure accessories, or to close gaps between walls, floors, roofs,
windows, and doors, that exceed acceptable installation tolerances. Remove
sealants that have been used in an unacceptable manner and correct building
enclosure deficiencies to comply with contract documents requirements.
3.4.3 Primer
Clean out loose particles from joints immediately prior to application of.
Apply primer to joints in concrete masonry units, wood, and other porous
surfaces in accordance with sealant manufacturer's printed instructions.
Do not apply primer to exposed finished surfaces.
3.4.4 Backstops
Install backstops dry and free of tears or holes. Tightly pack the back or
bottom of joint cavities with backstop material to provide a joint of the
depth specified.
3.4.5 Bond Breaker
Provide bond breakers to the back or bottom of joint cavities, as

recommended by the sealant manufacturer for each type of joint and sealant
used, to prevent sealant from adhering to these surfaces. Carefully apply
the bond breaker to avoid contamination of adjoining surfaces or breaking
bond with surfaces other than those covered by the bond breaker.
12/26/2018
3.4.6 Sealants
Provide a sealant compatible with the material(s) to which it is applied.

Do not use a sealant that has exceeded shelf life or has jelled and can not
be discharged in a continuous flow from the gun. Apply the sealant in
accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions with a gun having a
nozzle that fits the joint width. Make sealant uniformly smooth and free
of wrinkles. Upon completion of sealant application, roughen partially
filled or unfilled joints, apply sealant, and tool smooth as specified.
Apply sealer over the sealant when and as specified by the sealant
manufacturer.
A. Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193-05a for use of joint sealants

as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
B. Provide the approved sealant system where shown on the Drawings, and in
strict accord with the manufacturer's recommendations as approved by
the Contracting Officer.
C. Install sealants immediately after joint preparation.
D. Install sealants to fill joints completely from the back, without voids
or entrapped air, using proven industry standard techniques, proper
nozzles and sufficient force that results in sealants directly
contacting and fully wetting joint surfaces.
E. Install sealants to uniform cross-sectional shapes with depths relative

to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability as
recommended by sealant manufacturer.
F. Tool sealants in a manner that forces sealant against back of joint,

ensures firm, full contact at joint interfaces and leaves a finish that
is smooth, uniform and free of ridges, wrinkles, sags, air pockets and
embedded impurities.
1. Dry tooling is preferred; tooling liquids that are non-staining,

non-damaging to adjacent surfaces and approved by sealant
manufacturer may be used if necessary when care is taken to ensure
that the liquid does not contact joint surfaces before the sealant.
2. Provide concave tooled joints unless otherwise indicated to provide

flush tooling or recessed tooling.
3. Provide recessed tooled joints where the outer face of substrate is

irregular.
4. Remove sealant from adjacent surfaces in accord with sealant and

substrate manufacturer recommendations as work progresses.
G. Protect joint sealants from contact with contaminating substances and

from damages. Cut out, remove and replace contaminated or damaged
sealants, immediately, so that they are without contamination or damage
at time of substantial completion.
3.4.7 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE PROVISIONS
Inspect all work for proper installation. Reject all sealing for the
following deficiencies:
12/26/2018
1. Sealants having a finished surface not conforming to specifications.

2. Sealants with color not matching the sample or surface not complying
with specifications.
3. Sealants failing to adhere to side surfaces of joints.
3.5 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
3.5.1 Protection
Protect areas adjacent to joints from sealant smears. Masking tape may be
used for this purpose if removed 5 to 10 minutes after the joint is filled
and no residual tape marks remain.
3.5.2 Final Cleaning
Upon completion of sealant application, remove remaining smears and stains

and leave the work in a clean and neat condition.
a. Masonry and Other Porous Surfaces: Immediately remove fresh sealant

that has been smeared on adjacent masonry, rub clean with a solvent,
and remove solvent residue, in accordance with sealant manufacturer's
printed instructions. Allow excess sealant to cure for 24 hour then
remove by wire brushing or sanding. Remove resulting debris.
b. Metal and Other Non-Porous Surfaces: Remove excess sealant with a

solvent moistened cloth. Remove solvent residue in accordance with
solvent manufacturer's printed instructions.
12/26/2018
SECTION 26 00 00.00 20
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
07/06
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
1.3 DEFINITIONS
1.4 ADDITIONAL SUBMITTALS INFORMATION
1.4.1 Shop Drawings (SD-02)
1.4.2 Product Data (SD-03)
1.5.1 Regulatory Requirements
1.5.2 Standard Products
1.5.2.1 Alternative Qualifications
1.5.2.2 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date
1.6 WARRANTY
1.7 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
1.8 MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE
1.9 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES
1.10 WARNING SIGNS
1.11 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
1.12 INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FACTORY APPLIED FINISH
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING

3.2 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING
3.3 WARNING SIGN MOUNTING
SECTION 26 00 00.00 20 Page 1

12/26/2018
SECTION 26 00 00.00 20
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

07/06
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the
ASTM D709 (2017) Standard Specification for

Laminated Thermosetting Materials
IEEE C2 (2017; Errata 1-2 2017; INT 1 2017)

National Electrical Safety Code
IEEE C57.12.28 (2014) Standard for Pad-Mounted Equipment

- Enclosure Integrity

- Enclosure Integrity for Coastal
Environments
IEEE Std 100 (2000) The Authoritave Dictionary of IEEE

Standards Terms
NEMA 250 (2014) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

(1000 Volts Maximum)
NFPA 70 (2017; ERTA 1-2 2017; TIA 17-1; TIA 17-2;

TIA 17-3; TIA 17-4; TIA 17-5; TIA 17-6;
TIA 17-7; TIA 17-8; TIA 17-9; TIA 17-10;
TIA 17-11; TIA 17-12; TIA 17-13; TIA
This section applies to certain sections of Divisions 23, HEATING

VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING. This section applies to all sections of
Division 26, ELECTRICAL, of this project specification unless specified
otherwise in the individual sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
a. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and

electronics terms used in these specifications, and on the
SECTION 26 00 00.00 20 Page 2

12/26/2018
drawings, shall be as defined in IEEE Std 100.
b. The technical sections referred to herein are those specification

sections that describe products, installation procedures, and
equipment operations and that refer to this section for detailed
description of submittal types.
c. The technical paragraphs referred to herein are those paragraphs

in PART 2 - PRODUCTS and PART 3 - EXECUTION of the technical
sections that describe products, systems, installation procedures,
equipment, and test methods.
1.4 ADDITIONAL SUBMITTALS INFORMATION
Submittals required in other sections that refer to this section must

conform to the following additional requirements as applicable.
1.4.1 Shop Drawings (SD-02)
Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating

proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories,
piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure a
coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals
and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the
interconnection between each item of equipment. Drawings shall indicate
adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating
equipment devices.
1.4.2 Product Data (SD-03)
Submittal shall include performance and characteristic curves.
1.5.1 Regulatory Requirements
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory

provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been
substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in
these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of
similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials,
installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and
advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are
specified or indicated.
1.5.2 Standard Products
Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers

regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal
material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory
commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year
period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar
circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on
the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or
brochures during the 2-year period. Where two or more items of the same
class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single
manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the
products of the same manufacturer unless stated in the technical section.
SECTION 26 00 00.00 20 Page 3

12/26/2018
1.5.2.1 Alternative Qualifications
Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable
if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than
6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is
furnished.
1.5.2.2 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date
Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site

shall not be used, unless specified otherwise.
1.6 WARRANTY
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are

reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render
satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis
during the warranty period of the contract.
1.7 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Provide for each system and principal item of equipment as specified in the
technical sections for use by operation and maintenance personnel. The
operating instructions shall include the following:
a. Wiring diagrams, control diagrams, and control sequence for each

principal system and item of equipment.
b. Start up, proper adjustment, operating, lubrication, and shutdown

procedures.
c. Safety precautions.
d. The procedure in the event of equipment failure.
e. Other items of instruction as recommended by the manufacturer of

each system or item of equipment.
Print or engrave operating instructions and frame under glass or in

approved laminated plastic. Post instructions where directed. For
operating instructions exposed to the weather, provide weather-resistant
materials or weatherproof enclosures. Operating instructions shall not
fade when exposed to sunlight and shall be secured to prevent easy removal
or peeling.
1.8 MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's

name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a
conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be
acceptable.
1.9 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES
ASTM D709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment

enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified in the technical
sections or as indicated on the drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall
identify the function and, when applicable, the position. Nameplates shall
be melamine plastic, 0.125 inch thick, white with black center core.
SECTION 26 00 00.00 20 Page 4

12/26/2018
Surface shall be matte finish. Corners shall be square. Accurately align

lettering and engrave into the core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be
one by 2.5 inches. Lettering shall be a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal
block style.
1.10 WARNING SIGNS
Provide warning signs for the enclosures of electrical equipment including

substations, pad-mounted transformers, pad-mounted switches, generators,
and switchgear having a nominal rating exceeding 600 volts.
a. When the enclosure integrity of such equipment is specified to be

in accordance with IEEE C57.12.28 or IEEE C57.12.29, such as for
pad-mounted transformers, provide self-adhesive warning signs on
the outside of the high voltage compartment door(s). Sign shall
be a decal and shall have nominal dimensions of 7 by 10 inches
with the legend "DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE" printed in two lines of
nominal 2 inch high letters. The word "DANGER" shall be in white
letters on a red background and the words "HIGH VOLTAGE" shall be
in black letters on a white background. Decal shall be Panduit
No. PPSO710D72 or approved equal.
b. When such equipment is guarded by a fence, mount signs on the

fence. Provide metal signs having nominal dimensions of 14 by 10
inches with the legend "DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE KEEP OUT" printed in
three lines of nominal 3 inch high white letters on a red and
black field.
1.11 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and

requirements specified herein.
1.12 INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL
Where specified in the technical sections, furnish the services of

competent instructors to give full instruction to designated Government
personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance of the specified
systems and equipment, including pertinent safety requirements as required.
Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation
and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and
maintenance work. Instruction shall be given during the first regular work
week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the
Government for regular operation. The number of man-days (8 hours per day)
of instruction furnished shall be as specified in the individual section.
When more than 4 man-days of instruction are specified, use approximately
half of the time for classroom instruction. Use other time for instruction
with equipment or system. When significant changes or modifications in the
equipment or system are made under the terms of the contract, provide
additional instructions to acquaint the operating personnel with the
changes or modifications.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FACTORY APPLIED FINISH
Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which

shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance
test and the additional requirements specified in the technical sections.
SECTION 26 00 00.00 20 Page 5

12/26/2018
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING
Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces

or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Painting shall be
as specified in the section specifying the associated electrical equipment.
3.2 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING
Provide number, location, and letter designation of nameplates as

indicated. Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two
sheet-metal screws or two rivets.
3.3 WARNING SIGN MOUNTING
Provide the number of signs required to be readable from each accessible

side, but space the signs a maximum of 30 feet apart.
SECTION 26 00 00.00 20 Page 6

12/26/2018
SECTION 26 05 00.00 40
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
08/16
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.3 SUBMITTALS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT
2.1.1 Conduits and Raceways
2.1.1.1 Rigid Steel Conduit
2.1.1.2 Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)
2.1.1.3 Flexible Metallic Conduit
2.1.1.4 Intermediate Metal Conduit
2.1.1.5 Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit
2.1.1.6 Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters
2.1.2 Wire and Cable
2.1.3 Switches
2.1.3.1 Safety Switches
2.1.4 Circuit Breakers
2.1.5 Warning Signs
2.1.6 Dry-Type Distribution Transformers
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.2.1 Conduits, Raceways and Fittings
3.2.1.4 Intermediate Conduit
3.2.1.6 Surface Raceways and Assemblies
3.2.1.7 Splices and Connectors
3.2.2 Wiring
3.2.3 Safety Switches
3.2.5 Field Fabricated Nameplates
3.2.6 Identification Plates and Warnings
3.2.7 Posted Operating Instructions
SECTION 26 05 00.00 40 Page 1

12/26/2018
SECTION 26 05 00.00 40
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

08/16
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASTM D709 (2017) Standard Specification for

Laminated Thermosetting Materials

- Enclosure Integrity for Coastal
Environments
IEEE Stds Dictionary (2009) IEEE Standards Dictionary: Glossary

of Terms & Definitions
ANSI Z535.1 (2017) Safety Colors
NEMA KS 1 (2013) Enclosed and Miscellaneous

Distribution Equipment Switches (600 V
Maximum)
NEMA RN 1 (2005; R 2013) Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC)

Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel
Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit
NEMA TC 2 (2013) Standard for Electrical Polyvinyl

Chloride (PVC) Conduit
NEMA TC 3 (2016) Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings

for Use With Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing
NFPA 70 (2017; ERTA 1-2 2017; TIA 17-1; TIA 17-2;

TIA 17-3; TIA 17-4; TIA 17-5; TIA 17-6;
TIA 17-7; TIA 17-8; TIA 17-9; TIA 17-10;
TIA 17-11; TIA 17-12; TIA 17-13; TIA
UL 1 (2005; Reprint Aug 2017) UL Standard for

Safety Flexible Metal Conduit
SECTION 26 05 00.00 40 Page 2

12/26/2018
UL 1242 (2006; Reprint Mar 2014) Standard for

Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit --
Steel
UL 489 (2016) UL Standard for Safety Molded-Case

Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and
Circuit-Breaker Enclosures
UL 506 (2017) UL Standard for Safety Specialty

Transformers
UL 6 (2007; Reprint Nov 2014) Electrical Rigid

Metal Conduit-Steel
UL 797 (2007; Reprint Mar 2017) UL Standard for

Safety Electrical Metallic Tubing -- Steel
UL 870 (2016) UL Standard for Safety Wireways,

Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings
1.2 DEFINITIONS
a. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics

terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, are as defined
in IEEE Stds Dictionary.
b. The technical sections referred to herein are those specification

sections that describe products, installation procedures, and equipment
operations and that refer to this section for detailed description of
submittal types.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

Material, Equipment, and Fixture Lists
SD-03 Product Data
Conduits and Raceways; G
Wire and Cable; G
Splices and Connectors; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Continuity Test; G
Phase-Rotation Tests
Insulation Resistance Test
SECTION 26 05 00.00 40 Page 3

12/26/2018
Manufacturer's Instructions
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT
Provide the standard cataloged materials and equipment of manufacturers

regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products. For material,
equipment, and fixture lists submittals, show manufacturer's style or
catalog numbers, specification and drawing reference numbers, warranty
information, and fabrication site.
2.1.1 Conduits and Raceways
Provide hot dipped galvanized rigid steel conduit complying with UL 6.

Except where installed underground, or in corrosive areas, provide
polyvinylchloride (PVC), or painted with bitumastic coated rigid steel
conduit in accordance with NEMA RN 1.
Use threaded fittings for rigid steel conduit.
Use solid gaskets. Ensure conduit fittings with blank covers have gaskets,
except in clean, dry areas or at the lowest point of a conduit run where
drainage is required.
Provide covers with captive screws and are accessible after the work has
been completed.
Ensure EMT is in accordance with UL 797 and is zinc coated steel. Provide
zinc-coated couplings and connectors that are raintight, gland compression
type with insulation throat. Crimp, spring, or setscrew type fittings are
not acceptable.
Ensure flexible metallic conduit is galvanized steel and complies with UL 1.
Ensure fittings for flexible metallic conduit are specifically designed for
such conduit.
Provide liquidtight flexible metallic conduit with a protective jacket of

PVC extruded over a flexible interlocked galvanized steel core to protect
wiring against moisture, oil, chemicals, and corrosive fumes.
Ensure fittings for liquidtight flexible metallic conduit are specifically

designed for such conduit.
2.1.1.4 Intermediate Metal Conduit
Ensure intermediate metal conduit is galvanized steel and complies with

UL 1242.
SECTION 26 05 00.00 40 Page 4

12/26/2018
Ensure rigid nonmetallic conduit complies with NEMA TC 2 and NEMA TC 3 with
a wall thickness not less than Schedule 40.
2.1.1.6 Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters
Ensure wireways and auxiliary gutters are a minimum 4 by 4-inch trade size
conforming to UL 870.
2.1.2 Wire and Cable
Use copper 600-volt type THWN for conductors installed in conduit. Ensure
all conductors AWG No. 8 and larger, are stranded. All conductors smaller
than AWG No. 8 are solid.
Ensure flexible cable is Type SO and contains a grounding conductor with

green insulation.
2.1.3 Switches
2.1.3.1 Safety Switches
Ensure safety switches comply with NEMA KS 1, and are the heavy-duty type
with enclosure, voltage, current rating, number of poles, and fusing as
indicated on the drawings. Ensure switch construction is such that, when
the switch handle in the "ON" position, the cover or door cannot be
opened. Cover release device is coinproof and so constructed that an
external tool is used to open the cover. Make provisions to lock the
handle in the "OFF" position. Ensure the switch is not capable of being
locked in the "ON" position.
Provide switches of the quick-make, quick-break type and terminal lugs for
use with copper conductors.
Ensure safety color coding for identification of safety switches conforms

to ANSI Z535.1.
2.1.4 Circuit Breakers
Ensure circuit breaker interrupting rating is not less than those indicated
and in no event less than 10,000 amperes root-mean-square (rms) symmetrical
at 208 volts, respectively. Provide multipole circuit breakers of the
common-trip type with a single handle. Molded case circuit breakers are
bolt-on type conforming to UL 489.
2.1.5 Warning Signs
Provide warning signs for the enclosures of electrical equipment including

substations, pad-mounted transformers, pad-mounted switches, generators,
and switchgear having a nominal rating exceeding 600 volts.
a. Enclosure integrity to conform with IEEE C57.12.29, such as for

pad-mounted transformers and pad-mounted switches. Provide
self-adhesive warning signs on the outside of the high voltage
compartment door(s). Provide decal signs with nominal dimensions of 7
by 10 inches. Print the legend "DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE" in two lines of
nominal 2 inch high letters. Show the word "DANGER" in white letters
on a red background and the words "HIGH VOLTAGE" in black letters on a
SECTION 26 05 00.00 40 Page 5

12/26/2018
white background. Use Panduit decal No. PPSO710D72 or approved equal.
Ensure that general purpose dry-type transformers with windings 600 volts
or less are two-winding, 60 hertz, and self-cooled in accordance with UL 506.
Ensure windings have a minimum of two 2-1/2-percent taps above and below
nominal voltage.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
Submit manufacturer's instructions including special provisions required to

install equipment components and system packages. Special provisions
include impedances, hazards and safety precautions.
Protect metallic materials against corrosion. Provide equipment enclosures

with the standard finish by the manufacturer when used for most indoor
installations. For harsh indoor environments (any area subjected to
chemical and abrasive action), and all outdoor installations, provide NEMA
4X stainless steel enclosure. Do not use aluminum when in contact with
earth or concrete and, where connected to dissimilar metal, protect by
using approved fittings and treatment. Except where other equivalent
protective treatment is specifically approved in writing, provide hot-dip
galvanized ferrous metals for items such as, anchors, bolts, braces, boxes,
bodies, clamps, fittings, guards, nuts, pins, rods, shims, thimbles,
washers, and miscellaneous items not made of corrosion-resistant steel.
3.2 INSTALLATION
3.2.1 Conduits, Raceways and Fittings
Ensure that conduit runs between outlet and outlet, between fitting and
fitting, or between outlet and fitting does not contain more than the
equivalent of three 90-degree bends, including those bends located
immediately at the outlet or fitting.
Do not install crushed or deformed conduit. Avoid trapped conduit runs

where possible. Take care to prevent the lodgment of foreign material in
the conduit, boxes, fittings, and equipment during the course of
construction. Clear any clogged conduit of obstructions or replace conduit.
Conduit and raceway runs concealed in or behind walls, above ceilings, or

exposed on walls and ceilings 5 feet or more above finished floors and not
subject to mechanical damage may be electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
Make field-made bends and offsets with approved Hickey bending tool or
conduit bending machine. Use long radius conduit for elbows larger than
2-1/2 inches.
Provide a flush coupling for all conduit stubbed-up through concrete floors
for connections to free-standing equipment with the exception of
motor-control centers, cubicles, and other such items of equipment, when
the floor slab is of sufficient thickness. Otherwise, provide a floor box
set flush with the finished floor. For conduits installed for future use,
terminate with a coupling and plug; set flush with the floor.
SECTION 26 05 00.00 40 Page 6

12/26/2018
Ground EMT in accordance with NFPA 70, using pressure grounding connectors
especially designed for EMT.
Use flexible metallic conduit to connect recessed fixtures from outlet

boxes in ceilings, transformers, and other approved assemblies.
Use bonding wires in flexible conduit as specified in NFPA 70, for all
circuits. Flexible conduit is not considered a ground conductor.
Make electrical connections to vibration-isolated equipment with flexible

metallic conduit.
Use liquidtight flexible metallic conduit in wet and oily locations and to
complete the connection to motor-driven equipment.
3.2.1.4 Intermediate Conduit
Make all field-made bends and offsets with approved Hickey bending tool or
conduit bending machine. Use intermediate metal conduit only for indoor
installations.
Ensure rigid PVC conduit is direct buried.
Install a green insulated copper grounding conductor in conduit with

conductors and solidly connect to ground at each end. Size grounding wires
in accordance with NFPA 70.
3.2.1.6 Surface Raceways and Assemblies
Mount surface raceways plumb and level, with the base and cover secured.
Minimum circuit run is three-wire, with one wire designated as ground.
3.2.1.7 Splices and Connectors
Make all splices in AWG No. 8 and smaller with approved insulated
electrical type.
Make all splices in AWG No. 6 and larger with indentor crimp-type
connectors and compression tools. Wrap joints with an insulating tape that
has an insulation and temperature rating equivalent to that of the
conductor.
3.2.2 Wiring
Color code feeder and branch circuit conductors as follows:
CONDUCTOR COLOR AC
Phase A Black (208/120 V) Brown (480/277V)
SECTION 26 05 00.00 40 Page 7

12/26/2018
CONDUCTOR COLOR AC
Phase B Red (208/120 V) Orange (480/277V)
Phase C Blue (208/120 V) Yellow 480/277V)
Neutral White
Equipment Grounds Green
Use conductors up to and including AWG No. 2 that are manufactured with
colored insulating materials. For conductors larger than AWG No. 2, have
ends identified with color plastic tape in outlet, pull, or junction boxes.
Splice in accordance with the NFPA 70. Provide conductor identification

within each enclosure where a tap, splice, or termination is made and at
the equipment terminal of each conductor. Match terminal and conductor
identification as indicated.
Where several feeders pass through a common pullbox, tag the feeders to
clearly indicate the electrical characteristics, circuit number, and panel
designation.
3.2.3 Safety Switches
Securely fasten switches to the supporting structure or wall, utilizing a

minimum of four 1/4 inch bolts. Do not use sheet metal screws and small
machine screws for mounting. Do not mount switches in an inaccessible
location or where the passageway to the switch may become obstructed.
Mounting height 5 feet above floor level, when possible.
Connect dry-type transformers with flexible metallic conduit.
3.2.5 Field Fabricated Nameplates
Ensure nameplates conform to ASTM D709. Provide laminated plastic

nameplates for each equipment enclosure, relay, switch, and device, as
specified or as indicated on the drawings. Each nameplate inscription
identifies the function and, when applicable, the position. Provide
nameplates that are melamine plastic, 0.125-inch thick, white with black
center core and a matte finish surface. Accurately align lettering and
engrave into the core. Minimum size of nameplates is 1 by 2.5 inches.
Lettering is a minimum of 0.25-inch high normal block style.
3.2.6 Identification Plates and Warnings
Provide identification plates for lighting and power panelboards, motor

control centers, all line voltage heating and ventilating control panels,
fire detector and sprinkler alarms, door bells, pilot lights, disconnect
switches, manual starting switches, and magnetic starters. Attach
identification plates to process control devices and pilot lights.
Install identification plates for all line voltage enclosed circuit

breakers, identifying the equipment served, voltage, phase(s) and power
source. For circuits 480 volts and above, install conspicuously located
warning signs in accordance with OSHA requirements.
SECTION 26 05 00.00 40 Page 8

12/26/2018
3.2.7 Posted Operating Instructions
Print or engrave operating instructions and frame under glass or in

approved laminated plastic. Post instructions where directed. For
operating instructions exposed to the weather, provide weather-resistant
materials or weatherproof enclosures. Ensure operating instructions do not
fade when exposed to sunlight. Secure instructions to prevent easy removal
or peeling.
Ensure each system and principal item of equipment is as specified in the

technical sections for use by operation and maintenance personnel. Include
the following information with the operating instructions:
a. Wiring diagrams, control diagrams, and control sequence for each

principal system and item of equipment.
b. Start up, proper adjustment, operating, lubrication, and shutdown

procedures.
c. Safety precautions.
d. The procedure in the event of equipment failure.
e. Other items of instruction as recommended by the manufacturer.
After completion of the installation and splicing, and prior to energizing

the conductors, perform wire and cable continuity and insulation tests as
herein specified before the conductors are energized.
Provide all necessary test equipment, labor, and personnel to perform the
tests, as herein specified.
Isolate completely all wire and cable from all extraneous electrical
connections at cable terminations and joints. Use substation and
switchboard feeder breakers, disconnects in combination motor starters,
circuit breakers in panel boards, and other disconnecting devices to
isolate the circuits under test.
Perform insulation-resistance test on each field-installed conductor with

respect to ground and adjacent conductors. Applied potential is 500 volts
dc for 300 volt rated cable and 1000 volts dc for 600 volt rated cable.
Take readings after 1 minute and until the reading is constant for 15
seconds. Minimum insulation-resistance values is not less than 25 Megohms
for 300 volt rated cable and 100 Megohms for 600 volt rated cable. For
circuits with conductor sizes AWG No. 8 and smaller insulation resistance
testing is not required.
Perform continuity test to insure correct cable connection end-to-end (i.e

correct phase conductor, grounded conductor, and grounding conductor
wiring). Repair and verify any damages to existing or new electrical
equipment resulting from mis-wiring. Receive approval for all repairs from
the Contracting Officer prior to commencement of the repair.
Conduct phase-rotation tests on all three-phase circuits using a

phase-rotation indicating instrument. Perform phase rotation of electrical
connections to connected equipment in a clockwise direction, facing the
SECTION 26 05 00.00 40 Page 9

12/26/2018
source.
Submit test reports in accordance with referenced standards in this section.
Final acceptance requires the successful performance of wire and cable

under test. Do not energize any conductor until the final test reports are
reviewed and approved by the Contracting Officer.
SECTION 26 05 00.00 40 Page 10

12/26/2018
SECTION 26 41 00
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
11/13
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
1.2.1 Verification of Dimensions
1.2.2 System Requirements
1.2.3 Lightning Protection System Installers Documentation
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1.4.1 Installation Drawings
1.4.1.1 Overall System Drawing
1.4.1.2 Major Components
1.4.2 Component UL Listed and Labeled
1.4.3 Lightning Protection and Grounding System Test Plan
1.4.4 Lightning Protection System Inspection Certificate
1.5 SITE CONDITIONS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Main and Bonding Conductors
2.1.2 Copper Only
2.2 COMPONENTS
2.2.1 Air Terminals
2.2.2 Ground Rods
2.2.3 Connections and Terminations
2.2.4 Connector Fittings
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INTEGRAL SYSTEM

3.1.1 Roof-Mounted Components
3.1.1.1 Air Terminals
3.1.1.2 Roof Conductors
3.1.2 Down Conductors
3.1.3 Ground Connections
3.1.4 Grounding Electrodes
3.2 APPLICATIONS
3.2.1 Personnel Ramps and Covered Passageways
3.3 RESTORATION
3.4.1 Lightning Protection and Grounding System Test
12/26/2018
SECTION 26 41 00
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

11/13
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

IEEE 81 (2012) Guide for Measuring Earth

Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth
Surface Potentials of a Ground System
NFPA 70 (2017; ERTA 1-2 2017; TIA 17-1; TIA 17-2;

TIA 17-3; TIA 17-4; TIA 17-5; TIA 17-6;
TIA 17-7; TIA 17-8; TIA 17-9; TIA 17-10;
TIA 17-11; TIA 17-12; TIA 17-13; TIA
NFPA 780 (2017) Standard for the Installation of

Lightning Protection Systems
AFI 32-1065 (2017) Grounding Systems
UL 467 (2013; Reprint Jun 2017) UL Standard for

Safety Grounding and Bonding Equipment
UL 96 (2016a) UL Standard for Safety Lightning

Protection Components
UL Electrical Constructn (2012) Electrical Construction Equipment

Directory
1.2.1 Verification of Dimensions
Confirm all details of work, verify all dimensions in field, and advise
Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing work. Obtain
prior approval of Contracting Officer before making any departures from the
design.
1.2.2 System Requirements
Provide a system furnished under this specification consisting of the
12/26/2018
latest UL Listed products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in production

of lightning protection system components. Comply with NFPA 70, NFPA 780,
and UL 96.
1.2.3 Lightning Protection System Installers Documentation
Provide documentation showing that the installer is certified with a

commercial third-party inspection company whose sole work is lightning
protection, or is a UL Listed Lightning Protection Installer. In either
case, the documentation must show that they have completed and passed the
requirements for certification or listing, and have a minimum of 2 years
documented experience installing lightning protection systems for DoD
projects of similar scope and complexity.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Overall lightning protection system; G
Each major component
SD-06 Test Reports
Lightning Protection and Grounding System Test Plan
Lightning Protection and Grounding System Test; G
SD-07 Certificates
Lightning Protection System Installers Documentation; G
Component UL Listed and Labeled; G
Lightning protection system inspection certificate; G
In each standard referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be

mandatory, as though the word "shall" or "must" has been substituted for
"should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these standards to
"authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean
1.4.1 Installation Drawings
1.4.1.1 Overall System Drawing
Submit installation shop drawing for the overall lightning protection system.
Include on the drawings the physical layout of the equipment (plan view and
elevations), mounting details, relationship to other parts of the work, and
wiring diagrams.
12/26/2018
1.4.1.2 Major Components
Submit detail drawings for each major component including manufacturer's

descriptive and technical literature, catalog cuts, and installation
instructions.
1.4.2 Component UL Listed and Labeled
Submit proof of compliance that components are UL Listed and Labeled.

Listing alone in UL Electrical Constructn, which is the UL Electrical
Construction Directory, is not acceptable evidence. In lieu of Listed and
Labeled, submit written certificate from an approved, nationally recognized
testing organization equipped to perform such services, stating that items
have been tested and conform to requirements and testing methods of
Underwriters Laboratories.
1.4.3 Lightning Protection and Grounding System Test Plan
Provide a lightning protection and grounding system test plan. Detail both
the visual inspection and electrical testing of the system and components
in the test plan. Identify (number) the system test points/locations
along with a listing or description of the item to be tested and the type
of test to be conducted. As a minimum, include a sketch of the facility
and surrounding lightning protection system as part of the specific test
plan for each structure. Include the requirements specified in paragraph,
"Testing of Integral Lightning Protection System" in the test plan.
1.4.4 Lightning Protection System Inspection Certificate
Provide certification from a commercial third-party inspection company

whose sole work is lightning protection, stating that the lightning
protection system complies with NFPA 780 and AFI 32-1065. Third party
inspection company cannot be the system installer or the system designer.
Alternatively, provide a UL Lightning Protection Inspection Master Label
Certificate for each facility indicating compliance to NFPA 780 and
AFI 32-1065. In either case, AFI 32-1065 takes precedence over NFPA 780,
whether or not it is more stringent.
Inspection must cover every connection, air terminal, conductor, fastener,

accessible grounding point and other components of the lightning protection
system to ensure 100% system compliance. This includes witnessing the
tests for the resistance measurements for ground rods with test wells, and
for continuity measurements for bonds. It also includes verification of
proper surge protective devices for power, data and telecommunication
systems. Random sampling or partial inspection of a facility is not
acceptable.
1.5 SITE CONDITIONS
Confirm all details of work, verify all dimensions in field, and advise
Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing work. Obtain
prior approval of Contracting Officer before changing the design.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Do not use a combination of materials that forms an electrolytic couple of

such nature that corrosion is accelerated in the presence of moisture
12/26/2018
unless moisture is permanently excluded from the junction of such metals.

Where unusual conditions exist which would cause corrosion of conductors,
provide conductors with protective coatings, such as tin or lead, or
oversize conductors. Where a mechanical hazard is involved, increase
conductor size to compensate for the hazard or protect conductors. When
metallic conduit or tubing is provided, electrically bond conductor to
conduit or tubing at the upper and lower ends by clamp type connectors or
welds (including exothermic). All lightning protection components, such as
bonding plates, air terminals, air terminal supports and braces, chimney
bands, clips, connector fittings, and fasteners are to comply with the
requirements of UL 96 classes as applicable.
2.1.1 Main and Bonding Conductors
NFPA 780 and UL 96 Class I, Class II, or Class II modified materials as

applicable.
2.1.2 Copper Only
Provide copper conductors, except where aluminum conductors are required

for connection to aluminum equipment.
2.2 COMPONENTS
2.2.1 Air Terminals
Provide solid air terminals with a blunt tip. Tubular air terminals are not
permitted. Support air terminals more than 24 inches in length by suitable
brace, supported at not less than one-half the height of the terminal.
2.2.2 Ground Rods
Provide ground rods made of copper-clad steel conforming to conform to

UL 467. Provide ground rods that are not less than 3/4 inch in diameter and
10 feet in length. Do not mix ground rods of copper-clad steel or solid
copper on the job.
2.2.3 Connections and Terminations
Provide connectors for splicing conductors that conform to UL 96, class as

applicable. Conductor connections can be made by clamps or welds
(including exothermic). Provide style and size connectors required for the
installation.
2.2.4 Connector Fittings
Provide connector fittings for "end-to-end", "Tee", or "Y" splices that

conform to NFPA 780 and UL 96.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INTEGRAL SYSTEM
Provide a lightning protection system that meets the requirements of

NFPA 780, including tie-ins to existing lightning protection systems.
Lightning protection system consists of air terminals, roof conductors,
down conductors, ground connections, and grounding electrodes. Expose
conductors on the structures except where conductors are required to be in
protective sleeves. Bond secondary conductors with grounded metallic parts
12/26/2018
within the building. Make interconnections within side-flash distances at

or below the level of the grounded metallic parts.
3.1.1 Roof-Mounted Components
Coordinate with the roofing manufacturer and provide certification that the
roof manufacturer's warranty is not violated by the installation methods
for air terminals and roof conductors.
3.1.1.1 Air Terminals
Use adhesive shoes with adhesive approved by the roof manufacturer when
installing air terminals on "rubber" (EPDM) type roofs. Use a standing
seam base for installation of air terminals on a standing seam metal roof
that does not produce any roof penetrations.
3.1.1.2 Roof Conductors
Use adhesive shoes with adhesive approved by the roof manufacturer when
installing roof conductors on "rubber" (EPDM) type roofs. Use a standing
seam base for installation of roof conductors on a standing seam metal roof
that does not produce any roof penetrations.
3.1.2 Down Conductors
Protect exposed down conductors from physical damage as required by NFPA 780.
Use Schedule 80 PVC to protect down conductors. Paint the Schedule 80 PVC
to match the surrounding surface with paint that is approved for use on
PVC.
3.1.3 Ground Connections
Attach each down conductor to ground rods by welding (including

exothermic), brazing, or compression. All connections to ground rods below
ground level must be by exothermic weld connection or with a high
compression connection using a hydraulic or electric compression tool to
provide the correct circumferential pressure. Accessible connections above
ground level and in test wells can be accomplished by mechanical clamping.
3.1.4 Grounding Electrodes
Extend driven ground rods vertically into the existing undisturbed earth
for a distance of not less 10 feet. Set ground rods not less than 3 feet
nor more than 8 feet, from the structure foundation, and at least beyond
the drip line for the facility. After the completed installation, measure
the total resistance to ground using the fall-of-potential method described
in IEEE 81. Maximum allowed resistance of a driven ground rod is 25 ohms,
under normally dry conditions. Contact the Contracting Officer for
direction on how to proceed when two of any three ground rods, driven not
less than 10 feet into the ground, a minimum of 10 feet apart, and equally
spaced around the perimeter, give a combined value exceeding 50 ohms
immediately after having driven.
3.2 APPLICATIONS
3.2.1 Personnel Ramps and Covered Passageways
Place a down conductor and a driven ground at one of the corners where the
ramp connects to each building or structure. Connect down conductor and
12/26/2018
driven ground to the ground ring electrode or nearest ground connection of

the building or structure. Where buildings or structures and connecting
ramps are clad with metal, separately bond the metal of the buildings and
ramps to a down conductor as close to grade as possible.
3.3 RESTORATION
Where sod has been removed, place sod as soon as possible after completing
the backfilling. Restore, to original condition, the areas disturbed by
trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work. Overfill to
accommodate for settling. Include necessary topsoil, fertilizing, liming,
seeding, sodding, sprigging or mulching in any restoration. Maintain
disturbed surfaces and replacements until final acceptance.
3.4.1 Lightning Protection and Grounding System Test
Test the lightning protection and grounding system to ensure continuity is

not in excess of 1 ohm and that resistance to ground is not in excess of 25
ohms. Provide documentation for the measured values at each test point.
Test the ground rod for resistance to ground before making connections to
the rod. Tie the grounding system together and test for resistance to
ground. Make resistance measurements in dry weather, not earlier than 48
hours after rainfall. Include in the written report: locations of test
points, measured values for continuity and ground resistances, and soil
conditions at the time that measurements were made. Submit results of each
test to the Contracting Officer.
12/26/2018
CAPE CANAVERAL AIR
FORCE STATION
Attachment I
Hazardous Materials Sampling Results
DBEH 18-1547
DATE: December 2018
RAEIS
Sunrise Systems of Brevard, Inc.
Environmental Contractor: Asbestos, Lead, & Mold
PO Box 3188 / Cocoa, FL 32924-3188 (321) 636-1618/ fax (321) 639-7397
CB-C025111 ZA-0000064 CJ-C046240
Environmental Sampling Report for

Building 1645, the Spacecraft Support Center,
at Cape Canaveral Air Force Station FL
Prepared By
Sunrise systems of Brevard, Inc

PO Box 3188
Cocoa FL
July 11, 2018

CB-C025111 ZA-0000064 CJ-C046240
Sunrise Systems of Brevard, Inc was contracted by Mission Support Services to perform
environmental sampling at Bldg 1645, known as the Spacecraft Support Center, located at Cape
Canaveral Air Force Station in Florida.
The scope of this work included sampling of the roofing material from various roofs of the
facility for asbestos content, and the sampling of the paint on the stair handrail located on the
exterior of the upper roof of the facility. This is not a full building survey, but a targeted
sampling of material identified to us by Mission Support Services.
RCRA-8 Metals
A sample of the coating on the exterior upper stair handrail was taken and sent to Schneider
Labs in Virginia for analysis. The coating was observed to be extremely deteriorated and flaking
off the metal rail. The coating was sampled for total RCRA 8 metals content.
Total Metals analysis of the exterior coating showed the presence of Chromium, Barium, and
Lead above reportable limits (see attached).
Any disturbance of the exterior coating must be done in accordance with OSHA 1926.62, the
Lead Standard, and other appropriate OSHA Standards. Workers must have the appropriate
training and wear ppe, and air monitoring should be conducted during any removal process. Any
removal should be done wet and/or with HEPA-vacuum equipped tools. Any bulk debris
generated during the project should be considered construction debris. Paint chips, dust, etc
generated during any renovation or removal should be sent to a laboratory for TCLP analysis to
determine if the waste is hazardous
The data in this report represents the entire scope of services for this Inspection. Conclusions
drawn or opinions formed by others from this data are their own, and shall in no way obligate
Asbestos
Samples of roofing material from various roofs that will be impacted by the future
refurbishment were collected and sent to Schneider Laboratories in Richmond Virginia for
analysis of asbestos content. The areas and materials sampled included silver and black roof
flashing, built-up material, and foam insulation from the SE Roof; and built-up material and
foam from the SE Inner Roof, S. Outer Lower Roof, the Upper Roof, the Int. W Roof, the Upper
W. Roof, and the NW Roof; and flashing from the Upper W. Roof. No asbestos was detected in
any of the samples analyzed.
All sample results and locations are attached at the end of this narrative.
Respectfully,
Robert Crowe
Analysis Report
Schneider Laboratories Global, Inc
2512 W. Cary Street • Richmond, Virginia • 23220-5117
804-353-6778 • 800-785-LABS (5227) • Fax 804-359-1475
Customer: Sunrise Systems of Brevard, Inc (4020)

Order #: 266342
Address: 280 North Burnett Road
Cocoa, FL 32924-3188
Received 06/21/18
Attn: Analyzed 06/24/18
Reported 06/26/18
Project: PO 1380 Bldg 1645

Location: CCAFS FL
Number: 18000Test PO Number: 18000
Method: EPA 600/R-93/116 & 600/M4-82-020 PLM Analysis

Sample ID Collected Cust. ID Location Asbestos Fibers Other Materials
266342-001 06/18/18 1 SE Roof
Layer 1: Roof Flashing None Detected 100% NON FIBROUS MATERIAL
Silver, Granular
Layer 2: Roof Flashing None Detected 100% NON FIBROUS MATERIAL

Black, Bituminous
266342-002 06/18/18 2 SE Roof

Layer 1: Built-up Roofing None Detected 15% MINERAL/GLASS WOOL
Black, Bituminous 85% NON FIBROUS MATERIAL
Layer 2: Foam None Detected 100% NON FIBROUS MATERIAL

Yellow, Spongy
266342-003 06/18/18 3 SE Inner Roof


Yellow, Spongy
266342-004 06/18/18 4 S Outer Lower Roof

Layer 1: Roofing Material None Detected 15% MINERAL/GLASS WOOL

Yellow, Spongy
Reporting Limit: 1% Gravimetrically Reduced Reporting Limit: 0.01% PLM analysis is based on Visual Estimation and NESHAP recommends that
any asbestos content less than 10 percent be verified by PLM Point Count or TEM Analysis. The EPA recommends that any vermiculite should be
treated as Asbestos Containing Material (ACM). This report must not be reproduced except in full with the approval of the laboratory. The test
results reported relate only to the samples submitted.
Page 1 of 2
Location: CCAFS FL
Method: EPA 600/R-93/116 & 600/M4-82-020 PLM Analysis

Sample ID Collected Cust. ID Location Asbestos Fibers Other Materials
266342-005 06/18/18 5 Upper Roof

Yellow, Spongy
266342-006 06/18/18 6 Int W Roof

Layer 1: Built-up Roofing None Detected 15% METAL FOIL

Yellow, Spongy
266342-007 06/18/18 7 Upper W Roof

Layer 1: Built-up Roofing None Detected 12% CELLULOSE FIBER

Yellow, Spongy
266342-008 06/18/18 8 Upper W

Layer 1: Flashing None Detected 10% CELLULOSE FIBER
266342-009 06/18/18 9 NW Roof


Yellow, Spongy
EPA Regulatory Limit: 1%

Total layers analyzed on order: 17 266342-06/26/18 08:31 AM
Analyst Elsamani Abdelfadiel Reviewed By: Hind Eldanaf

Microscopy Supervisor
Reporting Limit: 1% Gravimetrically Reduced Reporting Limit: 0.01% PLM analysis is based on Visual Estimation and NESHAP recommends that
any asbestos content less than 10 percent be verified by PLM Point Count or TEM Analysis. The EPA recommends that any vermiculite should be
treated as Asbestos Containing Material (ACM). This report must not be reproduced except in full with the approval of the laboratory. The test
results reported relate only to the samples submitted.
Page 2 of 2
Analysis Report Schneider Laboratories Global, Inc
804-353-6778 • 800-785-LABS (5227) • Fax 804-359-1475

Order #: 266343
Cocoa, FL 32924-3188 Matrix Paint
Received 06/21/18
Attn: Reported 06/25/18

Location: CCAFS FL
Sample ID Cust. Sample ID Location

Parameter Method Result RL* Units Analysis Date Analyst
266343-001 1 Upper Stair Handrail
Metals Analysis
Mercury EPA 7471B 10.2 1.02 PPM 06/25/18 RW
The Matrix Spike (MS) failed. The MS is a duplicate sample spiked with Mercury. Mercury concentration
required dilutions which decreased the spike in the MS below acceptance limits. Sample results are not
affected by the failure and are accurate.
Arsenic EPA 6010D / 3050B <6.33 6.33 mg/kg 06/22/18 DF
Barium EPA 6010D / 3050B 295 6.33 mg/kg 06/22/18 DF
Cadmium EPA 6010D / 3050B <6.33 6.33 mg/kg 06/22/18 DF
Chromium EPA 6010D / 3050B 4760 127 mg/kg 06/22/18 DF
Lead EPA 6010D / 3050B 874 127 mg/kg 06/22/18 DF
Selenium EPA 6010D / 3050B <6.33 6.33 mg/kg 06/22/18 DF
Silver EPA 6010D / 3050B <6.33 6.33 mg/kg 06/22/18 DF
Matrix spike failed for Ba and Cr due to matrix interference. Sample results are valid and unaffected.
266343-06/25/18 04:42 PM
Reviewed By: Eric Broaddus

Analyst
All internal QC parameters were met. Unusual sample conditions, if any, are described. Surrogate Spike results designated with "D" indicate that
the analyte was diluted out. "MI" indicates matrix interference. Concentration and *Reporting Limit (RL) based on areas provided by client. Values
are reported to three significant figures. Solid PPM = mg/kg | PPB = µg/kg and Water PPM = mg/L | PPB = µg/L. The test results reported relate
only to the samples submitted.
Page 1 of 2
804-353-6778 • 800-785-LABS (5227) • Fax 804-359-1475

Order #: 266343
Cocoa, FL 32924-3188 Matrix Paint
Received 06/21/18

Location: CCAFS FL

State Certifications
Method Parameter Florida Virginia
EPA 6010D Arsenic ELAP Certified VELAP Certified
EPA 6010D Barium ELAP Certified VELAP Certified
EPA 6010D Cadmium ELAP Certified VELAP Certified
EPA 6010D Chromium ELAP Certified VELAP Certified
EPA 6010D Lead ELAP Certified VELAP Certified
EPA 6010D Selenium ELAP Certified VELAP Certified
EPA 6010D Silver ELAP Certified VELAP Certified
EPA 7471B Mercury ELAP Certified VELAP Certified
State Certificate Number

Florida ELAP E87828
Virginia VELAP 9567
Page 2 of 2
CB-C025111 ZA-0000064 CJ-C046240
TCLP Sampling Report for

Building 1645, the Spacecraft Support Center,
at Cape Canaveral Air Force Station FL
Prepared By

PO Box 3188
Cocoa FL
August 27, 2018

CB-C025111 ZA-0000064 CJ-C046240
Sunrise Systems of Brevard, Inc was contracted by Mission Support Services to perform
environmental sampling at Bldg 1645, known as the Spacecraft Support Center, located at Cape
Canaveral Air Force Station in Florida.
The scope of this work included sampling of the paint on the stair handrail located on the
exterior of the upper roof of the facility. The coating sample was sent to Schneider Laboratories
in Richmond, VA for a Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) test to determine if
the material is to be considered hazardous once debris from renovation is generated.
Based upon the TCLP results (see attached), any paint debris generated during
renovation/removal of the coating will be considered hazardous waste due to the high levels of
Chromium. Generated waste would be turned over to the owner (Air Force) for manifesting and
proper disposal.
All sample results and locations are attached at the end of this narrative.
Respectfully,
Robert Crowe
804-353-6778 • 800-785-LABS (5227) • Fax 804-359-1475

Order #: 275414
Cocoa, FL 32924-3188 Matrix Bulk
Received 08/20/18

Location: Cape Canaveral Air Force

275414-001 1 Paint From Upper Railing
Metals Analysis
Mercury EPA 7471B / 1311 0.000894 0.0005 PPM 08/21/18 JL
Arsenic EPA 6010D / 1311 0.0900 0.0800 mg/L 08/22/18 DF
Barium EPA 6010D / 1311 0.107 0.0800 mg/L 08/22/18 DF
Cadmium EPA 6010D / 1311 0.0800 0.0800 mg/L 08/22/18 DF
Chromium EPA 6010D / 1311 83.6 4.00 mg/L 08/22/18 DF
Lead EPA 6010D / 1311 <0.0800 0.0800 mg/L 08/22/18 DF
Selenium EPA 6010D / 1311 <0.0800 0.0800 mg/L 08/22/18 DF
Silver EPA 6010D / 1311 <0.0800 0.0800 mg/L 08/22/18 DF
275414-08/24/18 09:51 AM
Reviewed By: Eric Broaddus

Analyst
EPA TCLP Regulatory Limits

Parameter Reg. Limit Unit
Arsenic 5.00 mg/L
Barium 100 mg/L
Cadmium 1.00 mg/L
Chromium 5.00 mg/L
Lead 5.00 mg/L
Mercury 0.200 mg/L
Selenium 1.00 mg/L
Silver 5.00 mg/L
Page 1 of 2
804-353-6778 • 800-785-LABS (5227) • Fax 804-359-1475

Order #: 275414
Cocoa, FL 32924-3188 Matrix Bulk
Received 08/20/18

Location: Cape Canaveral Air Force

State Certifications
Method Parameter Florida Virginia
EPA 6010D Arsenic ELAP Certified VELAP Certified
EPA 6010D Barium ELAP Certified VELAP Certified
EPA 6010D Cadmium ELAP Certified VELAP Certified
EPA 6010D Chromium ELAP Certified VELAP Certified
EPA 6010D Lead ELAP Certified VELAP Certified
EPA 6010D Selenium ELAP Certified VELAP Certified
EPA 6010D Silver ELAP Certified VELAP Certified
EPA 7471B Mercury ELAP Certified VELAP Certified
State Certificate Number

Florida ELAP E87828
Virginia VELAP 9908
Page 2 of 2
ACM-09
P-01
ACM-08 P-01A
ACM-05
ACM-06
ACM-07
ACM-03
ACM-01
ACM-02
ACM-04
Hazardous Building Material Samples
DBEH 18-1547, Rpr Envelope FAC 1645
ACM-01
ACM-02
ACM-03
ACM-04
ACM-05
ACM-06
ACM-07
ACM-08
ACM-09
P-01 (Total RCRA Metals)

P-01A (TCLP RCRA Metals)

CAPE CANAVERAL AIR
FORCE STATION
Attachment II
Sample Warranty Sign
DBEH 18-1547
DATE: December 2018
RAEIS
CAPE CANAVERAL AIR
FORCE STATION
Attachment III
Air Force Policy for Torch Down Welding of
Modified Bitumen Roll Roofing
DBEH 18-1547
DATE: December 2018
RAEIS
HQ AFSPC/MSES POLICY P05002: TORCH DOWN WELDING OF MODIFIED
BITUMEN ROLL ROOFING
Torch-applied roofing operations can be hazardous to life and property. A torch-

applied roofing system is defined in the National Fire Protection Association
(NFPA) standards as a bituminous roofing system using membranes that are
adhered by heating with a torch and melting an asphalt backcoating instead of
mopping hot asphalt for adhesion. Propane torch down installation of modified
bitumen roofing products creates a risk of fire to combustible materials, including
smoldering fires. The extremely high temperatures generated by torching
applications have been known to start fires that may smolder out of sight, only to
burst into flame later, well after torching is over. There have been a relatively
high number of incidences of roof fires allegedly caused by torching operations.
In view of this, stricter rules are required, and the following policy statements are
issued to improve fire safety in this regard.
1. Torch down application of modified bitumen roll roofing on combustible roof

structural/support materials and surfaces is prohibited. Combustible materials
comprise roof wood decks/trusses/joists and include wood
fiberboard/plastic/polystyrene type insulation boards and combustible wood and
wood fiber cants/curbs/parapets/blocking/edge strips/plastic solvent caulking, etc.
Combustible material is defined in NFPA 101, Chapter 3, as a material that, in
the form in which it is used and under the conditions anticipated, will ignite and
burn. A combustible material fails to meet the acceptable criteria of ASTM E
136, Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace
at 750 degrees C, and does not meet the definition of noncombustible as given in
NFPA 101, Chapter 3, and NFPA 220, Chapter 2.
2. Torch down application of modified bitumen roll roofing on noncombustible

roof structural/support materials and surfaces is permitted with caution and
stipulations herein. Noncombustible materials comprise roof steel/concrete
decks, steel trusses/joists and include noncombustible inorganic perlite or cellular
glass type insulation boards and noncombustible perlite cants/curbs/parapets/
blocking/edge strips/caulking, etc. Noncombustible material is defined in NFPA
101, Chapter 3, and NFPA 220, Chapter 2, as a material that, in the form in
which it is used and under the conditions anticipated, will not ignite, burn, support
combustion, or release flammable vapors when subjected to fire or heat.
Materials that are reported as passing ASTM E 136, Standard Test Method for
Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750 degrees C., shall be
considered noncombustible materials.
3. Torch down application of modified bitumen roll roofing on noncombustible

roof structural/support materials and surfaces shall be subject to strict adherence
with the following additional precautionary items as a minimum:
a. All roofing applicator personnel involved with open flame propane torch
application must maintain and carry a valid Certified Roofing Torch Applicator
(CERTA) card. This rating shall be obtained through successful completion of
the National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA)/Midwest Roofing
Contractors Association (MRCA) CERTA training program and examination. The
certification date of the CERTA card carried by all roofing applicator personnel
shall be less than three years old.
b. All supervisors of roofing applicator personnel must be knowledgeable and

experienced regarding the proper and necessary safety precautions applicable to
torch down application.
c. A preroofing construction meeting must be conducted with responsible

personnel from the BCE engineering and/or operations flights as appropriate, ,
Fire Department, base safety office, base contracting office and roofing
applicator in attendance as a minimum before starting any torch down application
of modified bitumen roofing work.
d. An approved AF Form 592, USAF Welding, Cutting, or Brazing Permit, must

be issued by the Base Fire Department to the roofing applicator prior to
personnel starting any torch application work with propane tanks on
noncombustible roofs. The base Fire Department shall not under any
circumstances issue a permit for propane torch work on combustible roofs
(reference paragraphs 1 & 2 of this policy).
e. All roofing applicator personnel shall follow the pertinent (reference

Paragraphs 1 & 2 of this policy) fire protection/prevention portions of regulations
issued by the U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety & Health
Administration (OSHA), 29 CFR Part 1926, Safety and Health Regulations for
Construction.
f. All roofing applicator personnel shall follow the pertinent (reference

paragraphs 1 & 2 of this policy) fire protection/prevention portions of NFPA Code
241, Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition
Operations, Chapter 9, Safeguarding Roofing Operations.
g. All roofing applicator personnel must review, understand, and follow the safety
information and guidelines on propane torching of modified bitumen roofing
published by the Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (ARMA) and the
National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) (reference paragraphs 1 & 2 of
this policy).
h. An AF Form 1477, Construction Inspection Report, must be maintained for

each day of work by the responsible BCE office. In the event the BCE inspector
notices the roofing applicator personnel using any unsafe practices on the job,
they will advise the roofing applicator to stop work immediately and concurrently
contact the base contracting office to promptly correct the safety problem.
i. A fire watch must be completed at the job site by roofing applicator personnel
at the end of each day’s application work. Duration time of the fire watch shall be
at the discretion of the base Fire Department and annotated on the AF Form 592.
However, as a minimum, the fire watch shall be conducted for at least 1 hour
after all torches have been extinguished. The BCE representative or the
Building Manager shall be on site at the end of the fire watch to verify the facility
is fire safe and there are no hot spots. If the roofing applicator feels that a more
thorough fire safety check is needed of roof surfaces and adjacent areas, they
may as an option conduct an infrared survey using heat sensing meters, thermal
temperature gun, infrared thermometer, etc.
j. The supervisors of roofing application personnel shall ensure a serviceable fire

extinguisher, suitable for Class A, B, and C fires, is in the immediate area of the
propane torching operation(s) being performed. Superviosrs shall also insure all
personnel on the roof are trained on the use of the fire extinguisher.
k. The roofing applicator personnel shall strictly adhere to the following further
precautions regarding torch down application of modified bitumen roofing on
noncombustible roof structural/support materials and surfaces:
(1) Inspect all propane torching equipment before each day’s use and frequently
thereafter. Equipment must be in good working order, with fittings, hoses and
head secure, cylinder valves clean, cylinder sound and operated safely at the
manufacturer’s recommended pressure and instructions.
(2) Don’t use leaking propane equipment. If a leak occurs during operation, stop
immediately and correct the situation promptly.
(3) Propane-fired torches shall never be used near combustible material or

under the roof where combustible material is present.
(4) Inspect penetrations, like exhaust vents, inside and outside and clean if
accumulations of lint, grease or other combustible substances are present.
(5) Seal off all roof intakes and vent projections in the immediate work area as
needed, to prevent torch flame from spreading into adjacent areas with
combustible material. Applicator personnel shall carefully coordinate this action
with the BCE representative and the Building Manager.
(6) Torches shall never be directed through open roof penetrations.
(7) Torches shall never be pointed under rooftop units, around flammable vents
or plastic projections.
(8) Use caution when torching near pipes, fresh air vents and HVAC units. A
flame could be sucked into the building in the event there is suction present.
(9) Do not torch near gas lines or electrical wires.
(10) Do not point the torch at low flashing where there is an overhang and where
flames could get up under the counter flashing and at curbs and parapet walls.
(11) Never torch in an area where you cannot see – flashings, corners, curbs,
voids, expansion joints, and small penetrations in the roof deck may hide
combustible materials or allow the torch flame to ignite the roof deck or building
interior.
(12) Ensure that new noncombustible insulation boards are used, and use new
noncombustible cants whenever there is a parapet wall or curb. Ensure that the
intersection of the curb or parapet wall with the roof is completely sealed with a
noncombustible caulk or putty.
(13) Have torch stands available and use them. If leaving a torch unattended, it
must be turned off.
(14) All torches and liquid propane gas tanks, etc, when not in use shall be
removed from the roof and stored on the ground safely away from the building.
AA 0002809
SUPPLEMENTARY SPECIFICATIONS
DBEH 18-1547, Repair Envelope, Facility 1645

Cape Canaveral Air Force Station
5/21/2019
ES 19-0065
Contract Number FA2521-18-D-0002
Prime Consultant:
Rhodes+Brito Architects
605 E. Robinson Street, Suite 750
Orlando, FL 32801
Sub-Consultants:
Alpha MRC
2395 North Courtenay Parkway, Suite 102
Merritt Island, FL 32953
Repair Envelope, Facility 1645 DBEH 18-1547ES
PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS
05 51 33 METAL LADDERS
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
08 11 13 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE
-- End of Project Table of Contents --
PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1

5/21/2019
JOB NAME: DBEH 18-1547ES
LOCATION: CCAFS
CONTRACT NO:
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
CONTRACTOR:

APPROVING AUTHORITY
DATES ACTION
Mailed To
Date FWD CONTR/
1 05 51 33 2 Shop Drawings Ladders 2.3
2 05 51 33 3 Product Data Ladders 2.3
3 05 51 33 7 Certificates Fabricator Certification for Ladder Assembly 1.3
4 05 51 33 7 Certificates Certificate of Warranty 3.5
5 08 11 13 2 Shop Drawings Doors 2.1 G
6 08 11 13 2 Shop Drawings Frames 2.5 G
7 08 11 13 2 Shop Drawings Weatherstripping 2.6
8 08 11 13 3 Product Data Doors 2.1 G
9 08 11 13 3 Product Data Frames 2.5 G
10 08 11 13 3 Product Data Weatherstripping 2.6
11 08 71 00 2 Shop Drawings Manufacturer's Detail Drawings 1.3 G
12 08 71 00 2 Shop Drawings Verification of Existing Conditions 1.3 G
13 08 71 00 2 Shop Drawings Hardware Schedule 1.5 G
14 08 71 00 2 Shop Drawings Keying System 2.2.6 G
15 08 71 00 3 Product Data Hardware Items 2.2 G
16 08 71 00 8 Manufacturerâ€™s Instructions Installation 3.1
17 08 71 00 10 Operation and Maintenance Data Hardware Schedule 1.5 G
18 08 71 00 11 Closeout Submittals Key Bitting 1.6.1
5/21/2019 9:54
SECTION 05 51 33
METAL LADDERS
02/16
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1.3 CERTIFICATES
1.4 QUALIFICATION OF WELDERS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Aluminum Alloy Products
2.2 FABRICATION FINISHES
2.2.1 Aluminum Surfaces
2.2.1.1 Surface Condition
2.2.1.2 Aluminum Finishes
2.3 LADDERS
PART 3 EXECUTION

3.2 WORKMANSHIP
3.4 FINISHES
3.5 LADDERS
5/21/2019
SECTION 05 51 33
METAL LADDERS
02/16
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION (AA)
AA DAF45 (2003; Reaffirmed 2009) Designation System

for Aluminum Finishes
AMERICAN LADDER INSTITUTE (ALI)
ALI A14.3 (2008; R 2018) Ladders - Fixed - Safety

Requirements

ASTM B108/B108M (2015) Standard Specification for

Aluminum-Alloy Permanent Mold Castings

and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes

Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings

for Metal
MPI 79 (2012) Primer, Alkyd, Anti-Corrosive for

Metal
29 CFR 1910.23 (Nov 2016) Ladders
5/21/2019
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Ladders, Installation Drawings
SD-03 Product Data
Ladders
SD-07 Certificates
Fabricator Certification for Ladder Assembly
Certificate of Warranty
1.3 CERTIFICATES
Provide fabricator certification for ladder assembly stating that the

ladder and associated components have been fabricated according to the
requirements of 29 CFR 1910.23.
1.4 QUALIFICATION OF WELDERS
Qualify welders in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. Use procedures,

materials, and equipment of the type required for the work.
Protect from corrosion, deformation, and other types of damage. Store

items in an enclosed area free from contact with soil and weather. Remove
and replace damaged items with new items.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.1.1 Aluminum Alloy Products
Conform to ASTM B209 for sheet plate, ASTM B221 for extrusions and
ASTM B26/B26M or ASTM B108/B108M for castings, as applicable. Provide
aluminum extrusions at least 1/8 inch thick and aluminum plate or sheet at
least 0.050 inch thick.
2.2 FABRICATION FINISHES
2.2.1 Aluminum Surfaces
2.2.1.1 Surface Condition
Before finishes are applied, remove roll marks, scratches, rolled-in

scratches, kinks, stains, pits, orange peel, die marks, structural streaks,
and other defects which will affect uniform appearance of finished surfaces.
5/21/2019
2.2.1.2 Aluminum Finishes
Unexposed plate and extrusions may have mill finish as fabricated.

Sandblast castings' finish, medium, AA DAF45. Unless otherwise specified,
provide all other aluminum items with standard mill finish.
2.3 LADDERS
Fabricate vertical ladders conforming to 29 CFR 1910.23 and Section 5 of

ALI A14.3. Ladders shall be capable of supporting their maximum intended
load. Use Ladder Stringer: minimum 2 1/2 inch by 1 1/16 inch by 1/8 inch
extruded 60605-T5 aluminum channel. Pitch: 90 degrees. Ladder Rungs
(Tread): minimum 2 1/4 inch by 3/4 inch by 1/4 inch extruded 60605-T5
aluminum with deeply serrated top surface. Ladder Mounting Bracket:
minimum 8 1/2 inch by 2 inch by 3 inch by 1/4 inch thick aluminum angle.
Walk-Thru: 1 1/4 inch square tubing safety bars. Ladder rungs must be
spaced not less than 10 inches and not more than 16 inches apart. Install
ladders so that the maximum perpendicular distance from the centerline of
the steps or rungs, or grab bars, or both, to the nearest permanent object
in the back of the ladder or to the finished wall surface will not be less
than 7 inches. Provide heavy brackets as indicated. Provide intermediate
brackets not over 48 inches on centers. The top rung of the ladder must be
level with the top of the access level, served by the ladder. Extend the
side rails of through or side step ladders 42 inches above the access
level. Provide ladder walk-thru guard at the top of access/egress level.
The drawings must indicate ladder locations and details of critical
dimensions and materials.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Install items at locations indicated, according to manufacturer's

instructions. Verify all measurements and take all field measurements
necessary before fabrication. Provide Exposed fastenings of compatible
materials, generally matching in color and finish, and harmonize with the
material to which fastenings are applied. Include materials and parts
necessary to complete each item, even though such work is not definitely
shown or specified. Poor matching of holes for fasteners will be cause for
rejection. Conceal fastenings where practicable. Thickness of metal and
details of assembly and supports must provide strength and stiffness.
Formed joints exposed to the weather to exclude water. Items listed below
require additional procedures.
3.2 WORKMANSHIP
Metalwork must be well formed to shape and size, with sharp lines and
angles and true curves. Drilling and punching must produce clean true
lines and surfaces. Continuously weld along the entire area of contact.
Grid smooth exposed welds. Provide smooth finish on exposed surfaces of
work in place, unless otherwise approved. Install in accordance with
manufacturer's installation instructions and approved drawings, cuts, and
details.
Provide anchorage where necessary for fastening metal items securely in

place. Include for anchorage not otherwise specified or indicated slotted
inserts, expansion anchors; toggle bolts and through bolts for masonry.
5/21/2019
Provide stainless steel fasteners. Make exposed fastenings of compatible

materials, generally matching in color and finish, to which fastenings are
applied. Conceal fastenings where practicable.
3.4 FINISHES
Where dissimilar metals are in contact, protect surfaces with a coat

conforming to MPI 79 to prevent galvanic or corrosive action. Where
aluminum is in contact with concrete, plaster, mortar, masonry, wood, or
absorptive materials subject to wetting, protect with ASTM D1187/D1187M,
asphalt-base emulsion.
3.5 LADDERS
Secure to the adjacent construction with the clip angles attached to the
stringer. Secure to masonry or concrete with not less than two 1/2 inch
diameter expansion bolts. Install intermediate clip angles not over 48
inches on center. Install brackets as required for securing of ladders
welded or bolted to structural steel or built into the masonry or
concrete. Ends of ladders must not rest upon finished roof
Provide Certificate of Warranty for a minimum of 5 years, materials and

workmanship.
5/21/2019
SECTION 08 11 13
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
02/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
1.2 SUBMITTALS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD STEEL DOORS

2.1.1 Classification - Level, Performance, Model
2.1.1.1 Heavy Duty Doors
2.2 CUSTOM HOLLOW METAL DOORS
2.3 INSULATED STEEL DOOR SYSTEMS
2.4 INSULATION CORES
2.5 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES
2.5.1 Welded Frames
2.5.2 Anchors
2.5.2.1 Wall Anchors
2.5.2.2 Floor Anchors
2.6 WEATHERSTRIPPING
2.7 HARDWARE PREPARATION
2.8 FINISHES
2.8.1 Factory-Primed Finish
2.9 FABRICATION AND WORKMANSHIP
2.9.1 Grouted Frames
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Frames
3.1.2 Doors
3.2 PROTECTION
3.3 CLEANING
3.4 SCHEDULE
5/21/2019
SECTION 08 11 13
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

02/10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES


ASTM C591 (2017) Standard Specification for Unfaced

Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate
Thermal Insulation
ASTM C612 (2014) Mineral Fiber Block and Board

Thermal Insulation
ASTM D2863 (2017a) Standard Test Method for Measuring

the Minimum Oxygen Concentration to
Support Candle-Like Combustion of Plastics
(Oxygen Index)
BUILDERS HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (BHMA)
ANSI/BHMA A156.115 (2016) Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors

and Steel Frames
STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE (SDI/DOOR)
SDI/DOOR 111 (2009) Recommended Selection and Usage

Guide for Standard Steel Doors, Frames and
Accessories
SDI/DOOR 113 (2001; R2006) Standard Practice for

Determining the Steady State Thermal
Transmittance of Steel Door and Frame
Assemblies
SDI/DOOR A250.11 (2001) Recommended Erection Instructions

for Steel Frames
SDI/DOOR A250.4 (2011) Test Procedure and Acceptance

Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel
Doors and Hardware Reinforcing
SDI/DOOR A250.6 (2003; R2009) Recommended Practice for

Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel
5/21/2019
Doors and Frames
SDI/DOOR A250.8 (2003; R2008) Recommended Specifications

for Standard Steel Doors and Frames
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
Doors; G
Frames; G
Weatherstripping
Show elevations, construction details, metal gages, hardware

provisions, and installation details.
Submit door and frame locations.
SD-03 Product Data
Doors; G
Frames; G
Weatherstripping
Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature for doors, frames,

and accessories. Include data and details on door construction,
panel (internal) reinforcement, insulation, and door edge
construction. When "custom hollow metal doors" are provided in
lieu of "standard steel doors," provide additional details and
data sufficient for comparison to SDI/DOOR A250.8 requirements.
Deliver doors, frames, and accessories undamaged and with protective

wrappings or packaging. Provide temporary steel spreaders securely
fastened to the bottom of each welded frame. Store doors and frames on
platforms under cover in clean, dry, ventilated, and accessible locations,
with 1/4 inch airspace between doors. Remove damp or wet packaging
immediately and wipe affected surfaces dry. Replace damaged materials with
new.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STANDARD STEEL DOORS
SDI/DOOR A250.8, except as specified otherwise. Prepare doors to receive

door hardware as specified in Section 08 71 00. Undercut where indicated.
Provide exterior doors with top edge closed flush and sealed to prevent
water intrusion. Provide doors at 1-3/4 inch thick, unless otherwise
indicated. Provide door material that uses a minimum of 25 percent
5/21/2019
recycled content. Provide data indicating percentage of recycled content

for steel door product.
2.1.1 Classification - Level, Performance, Model
2.1.1.1 Heavy Duty Doors
SDI/DOOR A250.8, Level 2, physical performance Level B, Model 1, with core

construction as required by the manufacturer for exterior doors, of size(s)
and design(s) indicated. Where vertical stiffener cores are required, the
space between the stiffeners must be filled with mineral board or
polyisocyanurate rigit insulation.
2.2 CUSTOM HOLLOW METAL DOORS
Provide custom hollow metal doors where nonstandard steel doors are
indicated. Fill all spaces in doors with insulation. Close top and bottom
edges with steel channels not lighter than 16 gage. Close tops of exterior
doors flush with an additional channel and seal to prevent water
intrusion. Prepare doors to receive hardware specified in Section 08 71 00
DOOR HARDWARE. Provide doors at 1-3/4 inch thick, unless otherwise
indicated.
2.3 INSULATED STEEL DOOR SYSTEMS
Provide insulated steel doors with a core of polyurethane foam; face

sheets, edges, and frames of galvanized steel not lighter than16 gage, and
16 gage respectively; magnetic weatherstripping; nonremovable-pin hinges;
thermal-break aluminum threshold. Provide to doors and frames a phosphate
treatment, rust-inhibitive primer. Test doors in accordance with
SDI/DOOR A250.4 and meet the requirements for Level B. Prepare doors to
receive specified hardware. Provide doors 1-3/4 inch thick.
2.4 INSULATION CORES
Provide insulating cores of the type specified, and provide an apparent

U-factor of .48 in accordance with SDI/DOOR 113 and conforming to:
a. Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Foam: ASTM C591, Type I or II,

foamed-in-place or in board form, with oxygen index of not less
than 22 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D2863; or
b. Mineral board: ASTM C612, Type I.
2.5 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES
SDI/DOOR A250.8, Level 2, except as otherwise specified. Form frames to

sizes and shapes indicated, with welded corners. Provide frame product
that uses a minimum of 25 percent recycled content. Provide data
indicating percentage of recycled content for steel frame product.
2.5.1 Welded Frames
Continuously weld frame faces at corner joints. Mechanically interlock or

continuously weld stops and rabbets. Grind welds smooth.
Weld frames in accordance with the recommended practice of the Structural

Welding Code Sections 1 through 6, AWS D1.1/D1.1M and in accordance with
the practice specified by the producer of the metal being welded.
5/21/2019
2.5.2 Anchors
Provide anchors to secure the frame to adjoining construction. Provide

stainless steel anchors not lighter than 3/8 diameter.
2.5.2.1 Wall Anchors
Provide at least three anchors for each jamb.
a. Masonry: Provide anchors of corrugated or perforated steel straps

or 3/16 inch diameter steel wire, adjustable or T-shaped;
b. Completed openings: Secure frames to previously placed concrete

or masonry with expansion bolts in accordance with SDI/DOOR 111.
2.5.2.2 Floor Anchors
Provide floor anchors drilled for 3/8 inch anchor bolts at bottom of each
jamb member.
2.6 WEATHERSTRIPPING
As specified in Section 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE.
2.7 HARDWARE PREPARATION
Provide minimum hardware reinforcing gages as specified in SDI/DOOR A250.6.

Drill and tap doors and frames to receive finish hardware. Prepare doors
and frames for hardware in accordance with the applicable requirements of
SDI/DOOR A250.8 and SDI/DOOR A250.6. For additional requirements refer to
ANSI/BHMA A156.115. Drill and tap for surface-applied hardware at the
project site. Build additional reinforcing for surface-applied hardware
into the door at the factory. Locate hardware in accordance with the
requirements of SDI/DOOR A250.8, as applicable.
2.8 FINISHES
2.8.1 Factory-Primed Finish
Thoroughly clean all surfaces of doors and frames then chemically treat and
factory prime with a rust inhibiting coating as specified in SDI/DOOR A250.8.
2.9 FABRICATION AND WORKMANSHIP
Provide finished doors and frames that are strong and rigid, neat in
appearance, and free from defects, waves, scratches, cuts, dents, ridges,
holes, warp, and buckle. Provide molded members that are clean cut,
straight, and true, with joints coped or mitered, well formed, and in true
alignment. Dress exposed welded and soldered joints smooth. Design door
frame sections for use with the wall construction indicated. Corner joints
must be well formed and in true alignment. Conceal fastenings where
practicable.
2.9.1 Grouted Frames
For frames to be installed in exterior walls and to be filled with mortar

or grout, fill the stops with strips of rigid insulation to keep the grout
out of the stops and to facilitate installation of stop-applied head and
5/21/2019
jamb seals.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Frames
Set frames in accordance with SDI/DOOR A250.11. Plumb, align, and brace
securely until permanent anchors are set. Anchor bottoms of frames with
expansion bolts or powder-actuated fasteners. Build in or secure wall
anchors to adjoining construction.
3.1.2 Doors
Hang doors in accordance with clearances specified in SDI/DOOR A250.8.

After erection and glazing, clean and adjust hardware.
3.2 PROTECTION
Protect doors and frames from damage. Repair damaged doors and frames
prior to completion and acceptance of the project or replace with new, as
directed. Wire brush rusted frames until rust is removed. Clean
thoroughly. Apply an all-over coat of rust-inhibitive paint of the same
type used for shop coat.
3.3 CLEANING
Upon completion, clean exposed surfaces of doors and frames thoroughly.

Remove mastic smears and other unsightly marks.
3.4 SCHEDULE
Some metric measurements in this section are based on mathematical

conversion of inch-pound measurements, and not on metric measurement
commonly agreed to by the manufacturers or other parties. The inch-pound
and metric measurements are as follows:
PRODUCTS INCH-POUND METRIC
Door thickness 1-3/4 inch 44.5 mm
Steel channels 16 gage 1.5 mm
Steel Sheet 16 gage 1.5 mm
Anchor bolts 3/8 inch 10 mm
5/21/2019
SECTION 08 71 00
DOOR HARDWARE
02/16
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
1.2 SUBMITTALS
1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS
1.4 PRODUCT DATA
1.5 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
1.6 KEY BITTING CHART REQUIREMENTS
1.6.1 Requirements
1.7.1 Hardware Manufacturers and Modifications
1.7.2 Key Shop Drawings Coordination Meeting
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TEMPLATE HARDWARE

2.2 HARDWARE ITEMS
2.2.1 Hinges
2.2.2 Locks and Latches
2.2.2.1 Mortise Locks and Latches
2.2.2.2 Bored Locks and Latches
2.2.3 Exit Devices
2.2.4 Cylinders and Cores
2.2.5 Tamper Resistance
2.2.6 Keying System
2.2.7 Lock Trim
2.2.7.1 Lever Handles
2.2.8 Keys
2.2.9 Closers
2.2.10 Door Stops and Silencers
2.2.11 Thresholds
2.2.12 Weatherstripping Gasketing
2.2.12.1 Spring Tension Type
2.2.13 Rain Drips
2.2.13.1 Overhead Rain Drips
2.2.14 Auxiliary Hardware (Other than locks)
2.2.15 Special Tools
2.3 FASTENERS
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Weatherstripping Installation
3.1.1.1 Spring Tension Type Weatherstripping
3.1.2 Threshold Installation
5/21/2019

3.3 HARDWARE SETS
5/21/2019
SECTION 08 71 00
DOOR HARDWARE
02/16
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES

ASTM E283 (2004; R 2012) Determining the Rate of Air

Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain
Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure
Differences Across the Specimen
BUILDERS HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (BHMA)
ANSI/BHMA A156.1 (2016) Butts and Hinges
ANSI/BHMA A156.13 (2017) Mortise Locks & Latches Series 1000
ANSI/BHMA A156.16 (2018) Auxiliary Hardware
ANSI/BHMA A156.2 (2017) Bored and Preassembled Locks and

Latches
ANSI/BHMA A156.21 (2014) Thresholds
ANSI/BHMA A156.22 (2017) Door Gasketing and Edge Seal Systems
ANSI/BHMA A156.3 (2014) Exit Devices
ANSI/BHMA A156.4 (2013) Door Controls - Closers
ANSI/BHMA A156.7 (2016) Template Hinge Dimensions
36 CFR 1191 Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)

Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act
(ABA) Accessibility Guidelines
1.2 SUBMITTALS

SD-02 Shop Drawings
5/21/2019
Manufacturer's Detail Drawings; G
Verification of Existing Conditions; G
Hardware Schedule; G
Keying System; G
SD-03 Product Data
Hardware Items; G
Installation
Hardware Schedule Items, Data Package 1; G
Key Bitting
1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS
Submit manufacturer's detail drawings indicating all hardware assembly

components and interface with adjacent construction. Base shop drawings on
verified field measurements and include verification of existing conditions.
1.4 PRODUCT DATA
Indicate fire-ratings at applicable components. Provide documentation of

ABA/ADA accessibility compliance of applicable components, as required by
36 CFR 1191 Appendix D - Technical.
1.5 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
Prepare and submit hardware schedule in the following form:
Hardware Quantity Size Reference Finish Mfr Key UL BHMA

Item Publi- Name Control Mark Finish
cation and Symbols (If Desig-
Type No. Catalog fire- nation
No. rated
and
listed)
In addition, submit hardware schedule data package 1 in accordance with

SD-1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA requirements.
1.6 KEY BITTING CHART REQUIREMENTS
1.6.1 Requirements
Submit key bitting charts to the Contracting Officer prior to completion of
5/21/2019
the work. Include:
a. Complete listing of all keys (e.g. AA1 and AA2).
b. Complete listing of all key cuts (AA1-123456, AA2-123458).
c. Tabulation showing which key fits which door.
d. Copy of floor plan showing doors and door numbers.
e. Listing of 20 percent more key cuts than are presently required in each
master system.
1.7.1 Hardware Manufacturers and Modifications
Provide, as far as feasible, locks, hinges, and closers. Modify hardware

as necessary to provide features indicated or specified.
1.7.2 Key Shop Drawings Coordination Meeting
Prior to the submission of the key shop drawing, the Contracting Officer,
Contractor, Door Hardware Subcontractor, using Activity and Base Locksmith
must meet to discuss and coordinate key requirements for the facility.
Deliver hardware in original individual containers, complete with necessary

appurtenances including fasteners and instructions. Mark each individual
container with item number as shown on hardware schedule. Deliver
permanent keys and removable cores to the Contracting Officer, directly.
Deliver construction master keys with the locks.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TEMPLATE HARDWARE
Hardware applied to metal doors must be manufactured using a template.

Provide templates to door and frame manufacturers in accordance with
ANSI/BHMA A156.7 for template hinges. Coordinate hardware items to prevent
interference with other hardware.
2.2 HARDWARE ITEMS
Clearly and permanently mark with the manufacturer's name or trademark,

hinges, pivots, locks, latches, exit devices, bolts and closers where the
identifying mark is visible after the item is installed. For closers with
covers, the name or trademark may be beneath the cover.
2.2.1 Hinges
Provide in accordance with ANSI/BHMA A156.1. Provide hinges that are 4-1/2
by 4-1/2 inch unless otherwise indicated. Construct loose pin hinges for
interior doors and reverse-bevel exterior doors so that pins are
non-removable when door is closed.
5/21/2019
2.2.2 Locks and Latches
2.2.2.1 Mortise Locks and Latches
Provide in accordance with ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational

Grade 1, Security Grade 2. Provide mortise locks with escutcheons not less
than 7 by 2-1/4 inch with a bushing at least 1/4 inch long. Cut
escutcheons to fit cylinders and provide trim items with straight, beveled,
or smoothly rounded sides, corners, and edges. Provide knobs and roses of
mortise locks with screwless shanks and no exposed screws.
2.2.2.2 Bored Locks and Latches
Provide in accordance with ANSI/BHMA A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 1.
2.2.3 Exit Devices
Provide in accordance with ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1. Provide adjustable

strikes for rim type. Provide touch bars in lieu of conventional crossbars
and arms.
Use stainless steel. Also include stainless steel fasteners and screws.
2.2.4 Cylinders and Cores
Provide cylinders and cores for new locks. Provide cylinders and cores
with seven pin tumblers. Provide cylinders from the products of one
manufacturer, and provide cores from the products of one manufacturer. Rim
cylinders have interchangeable cores which are removable by special control
keys. Stamp each interchangeable core with a key control symbol in a
concealed place on the core.
2.2.5 Tamper Resistance
Provide strike guards that prevent tampering with the latch bolt of the
locking hardware. Strike guards to bolt through the door using tamper
resistant screws. Provide strike guards made of 1/8 inch thick stainless
steel and that are 11-1/14 inch high by 1-5/8 inch wide, with a minimum
5/32 inch wide offset.
2.2.6 Keying System
Provide an extension of the existing keying system.
2.2.7 Lock Trim
Provide cast, forged, or heavy wrought construction and commercial plain

design for lock trim.
2.2.7.1 Lever Handles
Provide lever handles where indicated in the Hardware Schedule. Provide in

accordance with ANSI/BHMA A156.3 for mortise locks of lever handles for
exit devices. Provide lever handle locks with a breakaway feature (such as
a weakened spindle or a shear key) to prevent irreparable damage to the
lock when force in excess of that specified in ANSI/BHMA A156.13 is applied
to the lever handle. Provide lever handles return to within 1/2 inch of
the door face.
5/21/2019
2.2.8 Keys
Provide one file key, one duplicate key, and one working key for each key
change. Provide one additional working key for each lock of each
keyed-alike group.
2.2.9 Closers
Provide in accordance with ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Series C02000, Grade 1, with

PT 4C. Provide with brackets, arms, mounting devices, fasteners, and other
features necessary for the particular application. Size closers in
accordance with manufacturer's printed recommendations, or provide
multi-size closers, Sizes 1 through 6, and list sizes in the Hardware
Schedule. Provide manufacturer's 10 year warranty.
Use stainless steel inside bracketed or door mounted closers on exterior

doors. On surface-mounted closers use or apply rust inhibiting finish on
all ferrous parts. Also apply this finish on concealed closers.
2.2.10 Door Stops and Silencers
Provide in accordance with ANSI/BHMA A156.16. Silencers Type L03011.

Provide three silencers for each single door, two for each pair.
2.2.11 Thresholds
Provide in accordance with ANSI/BHMA A156.21. Use J35100, with vinyl or

silicone rubber insert in face of stop, for exterior doors opening out,
unless specified otherwise.
2.2.12 Weatherstripping Gasketing
Provide in accordance with ANSI/BHMA A156.22. Provide a set to include

head and jamb seals, sweep strips. Air leakage of weatherstripped doors
not to exceed 0.5 cubic feet per minute of air per square foot of door area
when tested in accordance with ASTM E283. Provide weatherstripping with
one of the following:
2.2.12.1 Spring Tension Type
Spring bronze or stainless steel not less than 0.008 inch thick.
2.2.13 Rain Drips
Provide in accordance with ANSI/BHMA A156.22. Provide extruded aluminum

rain drips, not less than 0.08 inch thick, clear anodized finish. Provide
rain drips with a 4 inch overlap on each side of each exterior door that is
not protected by an awning, roof, eave or other horizontal projection. Set
drips in sealant and fasten with stainless steel screws.
2.2.13.1 Overhead Rain Drips
Approximately 1-1/2 inch high by 2-1/2 inch projection. Align bottom with
door frame rabbet.
2.2.14 Auxiliary Hardware (Other than locks)
Provide in accordance with ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.
5/21/2019
2.2.15 Special Tools
Provide special tools, such as spanner and socket wrenches and dogging
keys, as required to service and adjust hardware items.
2.3 FASTENERS
Provide fasteners of type, quality, size, and quantity appropriate to the

specific application. Fastener finish to match hardware. Provide
stainless steel fasteners in locations exposed to weather. Verify metals
in contact with one another are compatible and will avoid galvanic
corrosion when exposed to weather.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Provide hardware in accordance with manufacturers' printed installation

instructions. Fasten hardware to wood surfaces with full-threaded wood
screws or sheet metal screws. Provide machine screws set in expansion
shields for fastening hardware to solid concrete and masonry surfaces.
Provide toggle bolts where required for fastening to hollow core
construction. Provide through bolts where necessary for satisfactory
installation.
3.1.1 Weatherstripping Installation
Provide full contact, weathertight seals that allow operation of doors

without binding the weatherstripping.
3.1.1.1 Spring Tension Type Weatherstripping
Provide spring tension type on heads and jambs. Provide bronze nails with
bronze. Provide stainless steel nails with stainless steel. Space nails
not more than 1-1/2 inch on center.
3.1.2 Threshold Installation
Extend thresholds the full width of the opening and notch end for jamb
stops. Set thresholds in neoprene or vinyl liner and a full bed of sealant
and anchor to floor with cadmium-plated, countersunk, steel screws in
expansion sleeves. For aluminum thresholds placed on top of concrete
surfaces, coat the underside surfaces that are in contact with the concrete
with fluid applied waterproofing as a separation measure prior to placement.
After installation, protect hardware from paint, stains, blemishes, and

other damage until acceptance of work. Submit notice of testing 15 days
before scheduled, so that testing can be witnessed by the Contracting
Officer. Adjust hinges, locks, latches, bolts, holders, closers, and other
items to operate properly. Demonstrate that permanent keys operate
respective locks, and give keys to the Contracting Officer. Correct,
repair, and finish, errors in cutting and fitting and damage to adjoining
work.
3.3 HARDWARE SETS
5/21/2019
See Hardware Schedule on drawings.
5/21/2019

Dbeh181547 - (Project - Toc)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Dbeh181547 - (Project - Toc)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Dbeh181547 - (Project - Toc)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CAPE CANAVERAL AIR FORCE STATION

Repair Envelope, Facility 1645

DATE: December 2018

PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 11 00.00 30 SUMMARY OF WORK

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 01 50 PREPARATION FOR RE-ROOFING

26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS SAMPLING RESULTS

SAMPLE WARRANTY SIGN

-- End of Project Table of Contents --

12/26/2018 SECTION TOC Page 1

SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 11 00.00 30 Page 1

3.1 ACCESS REQUIREMENTS

-- End of Section Table of Contents --

SECTION 01 11 00.00 30 Page 2

The work to be performed under this project is located at Cape Canaveral

The work to be performed under this project consists of providing the

1.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

Provide roof replacement to include the following:

At roof: demolition and replacement of existing 5-Ply Built-Up roofing

Contractor shall coordinate removal and installation of roof with User

1.2.3 Special Construction

Prior to any building and/or equipment demolition, provide abatement of

SECTION 01 11 00.00 30 Page 3

demolished and removed during roof repair construction.

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the

NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

U.S. AIR FORCE (USAF)

AFI 33-580 (2013) Spectrum Management

U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)

EM 385-1-1 (2014) Safety and Health Requirements

Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation;

SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals

Submit the following items to the Contracting Officer:

Utility Outage Requests

Air Force Form 3952 (AF 3952), Chemical/Hazardous Material Request

SOLID WASTE DISPOSAL DIVERSION TRACKING;G

Storage Area Request

Superintendent Contact and Qualifications

1.5 CONTRACT DRAWINGS

See Drawing Index for list of project drawings.

Contract drawings, maps, and specifications will be furnished to the

SECTION 01 11 00.00 30 Page 4

Contractor either hard copy or electronic at the Government's discretion.

Contractor shall immediately check furnished drawings and notify the

The drawings indicate the general location and arrangement of existing

1.5.1 Layout of Work and Elevations

Dimensions and elevations indicated in the layout of work shall be verified

1.6 WORK SCHEDULING

Contractor shall allow for non-access days where construction activity is

SECTION 01 11 00.00 30 Page 5

1.7 OCCUPANCY OF PREMISES/ACCESS REQUIREMENTS

Building will be occupied during performance of work under this Contract.